Matrix On Point

Shifting Alignments in the 2024 Election

Recorded on October 25, 2024, this panel examined the shifting demographic and political forces that are redefining the traditional bases of the Democratic and Republican parties and their efforts to build new electoral coalitions. Panelists analyzed voter trends and realignment along key dimensions, including gender, age, race and ethnicity, and explored how issues like the economy, abortion, immigration, and threats to democracy are motivating different segments of the electorate.

The panel featured Ian Haney López, Chief Justice Earl Warren Professor of Public Law at UC Berkeley; David Hollinger, the Preston Hotchkis Professor Emeritus of History at UC Berkeley; and Omar Wasow, Assistant Professor in Department of Political Science. The panel was moderated by G. Cristina Mora, Associate Professor of Sociology and Chicano/Latino Studies (by courtesy), and Co-Director of the Institute of Governmental Studies at UC Berkeley. The event was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Travers Department of Political Science, the Institute of Governmental Studies, and the Center for Right-Wing Studies.

Matrix on Point is a discussion series promoting focused, cross-disciplinary conversations on today’s most pressing issues. Offering opportunities for scholarly exchange and interaction, each Matrix On Point features the perspectives of leading scholars and specialists from different disciplines, followed by an open conversation. These thought-provoking events are free and open to the public.

Watch the video above or on YouTube.

Listen to the podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

Podcast Transcript

[AUDIO LOGO]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everyone. Welcome to this new panel on the 2024 election. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the director of Social Science Matrix. So we’re just a few days away from the election, and the date looms not as just another quadrennial ritual, but as a potential turning point in the nation’s story.

We have assembled, I think, an amazing panel to help us map the fault lines of this historic moment and what it may mean for America’s future. In an age where assumptions are upended almost on a daily basis, we will explore how both Democrats and Republicans are scrambling to mobilize their base while also working to forge fresh electoral alliances.

We will dissect how kitchen table concerns about inflation and job insecurity collide with existential fears about Democratic erosion and status loss, and whether emerging demographic divisions should be read as potentially durable realignments, which is the title of the panel.

So, this event is co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Traverse Department of Political Science, the Institute of Governmental Studies and the Berkeley Center for Right-Wing studies.

Before I turn it over to the panelists, let me just give you, as I always do, a preview of a few upcoming events, we will have two– actually three with mine– book panels in November– Yan Long’s, Stephanie Canizales, and myself. And then on December 3rd– sorry, on November 21st, we have another election event, but this time will be more of a postmortem trying to figure out what it all means if things are settled, which of course is not clear at all.

Let me now introduce our moderator, Cristina Mora. Cristina Mora is an associate professor of sociology and Chicano and Latino studies by courtesy and the co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies here at Berkeley. Her research focuses mainly on questions of census, racial classification, immigration, and racial politics in the US and Europe.

Her book, Making Hispanics, was published by the University of Chicago Press, and provides the first historical account of the rise of the Hispanic-Latino panethnic category in the US. And she is currently working on two new book projects, both funded by the Russell Sage Foundation. The first one, entitled California Colorlines, with Tianna Paschel, examines the contradictions of racial politics in the nation’s most diverse and seemingly progressive state.

The second book, Race in the Politics of Trust in an Age of Government Cynicism, with J. Dowling and Michael Rodriguez-Muniz, provides a first mixed method examination of race and political trust in the US. So without further ado, I will turn it over to Cristina and our panelists. Thank you all for being here.

[APPLAUSE]

[CRISTINA MORA] Great. Thank you very much. Is this on? Yeah. Certainly, a pleasure to be here with you all today. And it’s certainly a great pleasure to be on this table with this esteemed panel. I guess we’ll start from my left to my right. We first have Ian Haney Lopez, who is the Chief Justice and Earl Warren Professor of public law here at UC Berkeley.

We then have David Hollinger, the Preston Hotchkis Professor Emeritus of History. And then we also have Omar Wasow, the assistant professor of political science here at UC Berkeley. And from what I understand, we’ll have three different presentations, about 15 minutes long each, and then we’ll open it up to some conversation and Q&A. So I guess we’ll start with Ian first.

[IAN HANEY LÓPEZ] Thank you. Thank you, Cristina, and thank you all. Really delighted to speak with you all. Just by way of background. So I’m a law professor at UC Berkeley. My main focus is on race and racism. For years, I wrote about race and law, and then race and constitutional law, until it became clear somewhere around 2008 after sort of intensive study of what the Supreme Court was doing, that the Supreme Court’s race jurisprudence made no sense as law, but made perfect sense as politics.

And in particular as electoral politics, a sort of electoral politics in which presidents campaigned for support by mobilizing stories of a Supreme Court out of control in the area of race, and the area of gender, and the area of abortion, that this was an activist court that needed to be reined in. That shifted my focus.

So from that point forward, I started looking at presidential politics and the exploitation of coded racial narratives. Dog Whistle Politics, so that’s my 2014 book, which then told a story of race as a class strategy. That is to say, it was the Republican Party, formally the party of big business that was using culture war politics, family, friendly policies, and opposition to affirmative action and integration, in order to win support for voters who thought they were getting populism but instead were getting support for oligarchy.

This approach ended up was attractive to unions, and with the encouragement of unions and support from AFL-CIO and SEIU, I then launched another big project to think about how to respond to dog whistle politics, including working with pollsters, working with communication specialists, working with nonprofits and unions. And that was merge left fusing race and class. So that’s 2019.

In 2020, I did a project that specifically focused on Latino voters. So I want to talk a little bit about Latino voters. Latino voters are part of the hot counterintuitive story, like the press, the media needs counterintuitive stories. Why else would anybody read the newspaper? They seem to think, so they’re constantly latching on to these counterintuitive stories. And one of the recent ones is Kamala Harris is losing support from Latinos and African-Americans.

And shockingly, majority of Latinos support mass deportation. What the F. So that. So I want to talk a little bit about that story. Here’s how I want to begin. This is a message I tested in 2020. This is around 15 focus groups with Latinos across the country. And then based on that, created a poll and then polled 145 Latinos, 400 African-Americans, and 400 whites.

All right. So here’s part of the message we tested. And the question is, then imagine you’re taking the poll. You would have a little dial. You can turn it up if you feel warmly towards the message. You can turn it down if you feel negatively about the message.

Our leaders must prioritize keeping us safe and ensuring that hard working Americans have the freedom to prosper. Leaders who build a strong economy once can do it again. Taking a second look at China or illegal immigration from places overrun with drugs and criminal gangs is just common sense. And so is fully funding the police. So our communities are not threatened by people who refuse to follow our laws.

We need to make sure we take care of our own people first, especially the people who politicians have cast aside for too long to cater to whatever special interest groups yell the loudest or riot in the streets. Obviously, I ripped that message off from the Republican talking points.

The question I have is, if you’re thinking of yourself, how persuasive is that message? Think about whites as a category. Dial up, dial down, where would they be. Essentially, whites on average dialed to 60 on a 0 to 100 range, anything above 50 is positive.

Where did African-Americans dial to? 60. Where did Latino style to? 61. We think– and this is, Trump learned this lesson. We think that a message that’s rooted in scare stories based on racist stereotypes about China, about dark-skinned illegals, that these racist manipulations are evident to the majority of voters. They’re not. They’re evident to those of us who are paying attention, who are critical and who are highly engaged.

What most voters here in the context of dog whistle politics is a basic story about good people, who are hard working and deserving and bad people, who are pathologically violent and undeserving and flooding into our country. And when people hear a story about good people versus bad people, most want to be with the good people, most.

So that’s what we’re up against in terms of dog whistle politics. Now, the question is, obviously the voting patterns are very different between whites, African-Americans and Latinos. So what explains the difference? Well, there’s more than just one story out there. There are these countervailing stories and the stories among African-Americans about hostility from the Republican Party and also about the salience of race are much more powerful and act to compensate for the basic attractiveness of this dog whistle narrative.

What about among Latinos? In terms of Latino receptivity to this dog whistle message. The single most important factor that I found was how Latinos conceptualized Latino group identity. I’m actually saying something surprising there. We’re often told it’s a matter of how they– it’s a matter of gender. It’s a matter of age. It’s a matter of national origin– Mexican-American or Cuban, like particular to their identity. Or maybe we’re told it’s a matter of their race. What race they think they are.

I’m not saying any of those. I’m saying it’s a matter of how they conceptualize the group position of Latinos. So that’s slightly different. I can say more about these other gaps, the gender gap, the age gap, national origin gap, maybe in Q&A if we want to go into it a little bit more, we can. I have my suspicions about the gender gap. I think that’s one of those stories that’s fun for the press to tell because it correlates with Latino machismo and da-da-da.

So I’m skeptical of it. But I’m going to set that aside for a moment. There is one gap that I didn’t study that does seem to be really important. So I want to flag it. Don’t have much more to say on it. Recent polling suggests that there’s an enormous gap among Latinos in terms of whether they’re a Protestant versus Catholic versus religiously non-affiliated.

Religiously non-affiliated Latinos are about half of all Latinos. And they are– let me see my gap. So religiously non-affiliated Latinos compared to Protestants are 69% more likely to support Harris. That’s an enormous gap. Catholic Latinos compared to Protestant Latinos are 39% more likely to support Harris versus Trump. These are really big gaps. I didn’t study.

I studied religiosity, but I didn’t study the Catholic Protestant. So my bad. This seems to be a really important factor. With that caveat in mind, I want to come back to this idea of racial group conception.

Here’s the way I did it. I gave respondents three choices. I asked them, are Hispanics like African-Americans destined to remain distinct over generations? Option one. Option two, are Hispanics a group that, like European Americans over generations, become part of the mainstream? That was option two. Option three, are Hispanics a group that over generations can get ahead simply through hard work, with no racial identity there.

OK, so three options. Basically, are we people of color, are we white, are we outside of race? Almost all Latino activists, almost all of our students, almost all of our faculty, say we’re people of color. Great and we have the support of one out of four Latinos. 25% of Latinos say we’re people of color, 32% say Latinos are essentially like other European immigrant groups going to join the mainstream, 28% essentially saying we stand outside of race.

What’s going on here? First, it’s not skin color. The Latinos who say we are people of color are also the Latinos who say others are most likely to think they’re white. And again, if you think about your students, you think about me, I’m biracial, half white, half Latino. I identify as Latino. I identify as a person of color. I’m sure a lot of people think I’m white, especially passing me on the street. What’s going on?

I have adopted through education and through analysis of political conception of Latinidad as a person of color. And I think that’s the story of a lot of our students. So it’s not necessarily that we’re dark. In fact, the group with the darkest skinned Latinos is that third group who say race doesn’t matter, I’m just going to get ahead through hard work, with the exception of Afro-Latinos.

Afro-Latinos are going to say that there are people of color, but otherwise, this is not a skin color dynamic, nor is it a dynamic of self-hatred. Interestingly, the group that expressed the highest level of pride in being Latino, we’re the group that said that Latinos were joining the mainstream similarly to Euro Americans. So this isn’t, like there’s a story among Latinos that either you think you’re a person of color or you’re engaged in self-hatred.

Or there’s another story that says you’re engaged in passing. You’re trying to leave Latinos behind. Levels of a sense of linked fate were the same across all three groups. So something else is going on. What is this other thing that’s going on? Racial status anxiety. Where are we as a people? Where do we fit in a society in which there’s a very strong white, Black hierarchy?

Are we able to join the mainstream? Will we be regarded as full citizens instead? Are we and our children doomed to be part of a denigrated caste? Does none of this apply to us? And to really think about this, think about this in terms of immigrant parents asking this about, why they immigrated to this country, and what the racial caste system in the United States means for their children.

Or shorthand version of this, my mother thinks of herself as a Spanish lady, even though she’s a dark-skinned immigrant from El Salvador. And she’s super bummed that I study race and think of myself as a racial minority. Because that’s not what she wanted. That’s not why she came here. So where do people fit?

Next up. If it turns out, as it does, that 60% of Latinos reject the idea that were people of color. How do you think a sort of a left Democratic message that responds to dog whistle politics by saying they’re racists is going to perform. And that’s about how it performs. Because the left denounce white supremacy message is a message that asks Latinos to suppose that are people of color, and most don’t want to do that.

At the same time, the standard left alternative to that, more centrist alternative to that is to say, let’s not talk about race at all. Let’s just focus on economic issues because these people don’t think there are people of color. That message doesn’t perform very well, either and why not. Because the community is shot through with anxiety about whether we’re good people or not, and an economic message doesn’t address that. What does address that? A dog whistle story.

And so when I was running these focus groups, one of my throwaway questions is was– I thought of as an icebreaker. I was like, what does Trump say about Latinos? I figured icebreaker. They’re going to say, he says, we’re rapists. And people were saying things like, well, he says that they’re gangbangers and illegals and I know them, they’re my neighbors. Like, they were willing to punch down themselves in order to say there are bad ones.

I know them, but I’m not one of the bad ones. I’m one of the good ones. So that message doesn’t work either. What does work well, a race class fusion message. I’m going to transition here and wrap up here really quickly. I want to do that in terms of the mass deportation message.

There is a lot of support among Latinos for mass deportation. But I think a lot of what’s happening here is that people don’t understand what the question is that’s being asked. When you look at recent data, for example, in The New York Times. Latinos are split 45 through 48 in support of mass deportation. But in the same poll, Latinos support a path to citizenship by 67% to 29%.

That is. If you just say mass deportation in the context of Trump’s rhetoric, people think they’re going to deport the illegals. They’re going to deport the gangbangers. They’re going to deport the racists, without them listening to Stephen Miller and taking a look at Steve Bannon and what their plans are, in which they claim they’re going to deport 12 to 20 million people.

That they’re going to end birthright citizenship, that they’re going to build concentration camps, that they’re going to use the military. Like none of that is being communicated to the Latino population, it’s a huge mistake, I think, on the part of the Democratic Party. We can talk more about the immigration messaging.

But in addition, here’s a message on immigration that I tested. This message was the most single most popular message with Latinos and also performed really well with whites and more importantly, performed really well with African-Americans who are susceptible to a message that immigrants are coming in and taking as Trump puts it now, “Black jobs.”

So I’ll just read you this message. Whether it’s from another town or another country, most of us move for the same reason, to build a better life for our families. But certain politicians are insulting immigrants while billions are going to a handful of corporations. The richest 1% benefit when politicians blame immigrants for the hard times regular people face.

We need to recognize the contributions of immigrants in our communities and states, and embrace people with the courage to move. When we come together, we can elect new leaders who will put fairness back into our immigration laws and make this a country that provides a better life for everyone, whether we’re brown, Black, or white.

I’m going to close with an emphasis on that phrase. We need a message of cross-racial solidarity as an antidote to intentional class-driven, oligarchy-driven divide and conquer. And the message of racial solidarity should not presuppose that this is a message of cross racial solidarity that only applies to people of color. Instead, it’s a message of cross-racial solidarity that says that white people too have an equal interest in building bridges along racial lines in order to stand up to class warfare.

And notice, that sort of message doesn’t ask anybody, and it certainly doesn’t ask Latinos to specify whether they think they are brown, or white, or Black, or standing outside of race. That is we, whatever you think you are, we all have an interest in seeing clearly the way in which race is being used as an intentional strategy of divide and conquer and responding with an ethos of uniting across racial differences to build the country we want. And I’ll stop.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CRISTINA MORA] Thank you very much. Professor Hollinger.

[DAVID HOLLINGER] The shifting alignment I’m going to talk about is the capture of the Republican Party by its evangelical client, with among other results, the loss on the part of the Republican Party of a capacity to treat the opposition Democrats as co-stewards in running a pluralist democracy.

When the Christian supremacist Senator Josh Hawley asserted in 2017, that the ultimate authority of Jesus Christ has to be established in every aspect of life, including the government of the United States. There was nothing the least bit novel about this. Generations of preachers have encouraged the faithful to see themselves as a morally superior community required by God to either stand apart from a sinful society or to take control of it.

Harold Ockenga opened the first meeting of the National Association of Evangelicals in 1942, with a call for tribal solidarity to confront a threatening panorama of liberal iniquity. I see on the horizon ominous clouds of battle which spell annihilation unless we are willing to run as a pack. All of us Christians must go on the offensive, Ockenga said, against political liberalism, theological modernism, secularism, and the new deal’s pernicious legacy of a nation being run by the government rather than by private interest.

The notorious Manichaean and dominionist claims of the new apostolic Reformation, which we read about all the time, are not new, and they were developed in their current form by the ostensibly, a respectable institution Fuller Theological Seminary in Pasadena.

Here’s a recent utterance of Donald Trump delivered to a convention of evangelicals. [CLEARS THROAT] This is the final battle. Well, we know where that comes from. This is the final battle, so he begins his speech. With you at my side, we will demolish the deep state. We will expel the warmongers from our government. We will drive out the globalist. We will cast out the communists. We will throw off the sick political class that hates us. We will root the fake news media and we will liberate America from these villains once and for all.

In speeches parallel to this, Trump has promised Christians that if they vote him in, they will never have to vote again because he will establish Christian hegemony in the government of the United States.

Now, theologically, liberal versions of the faith have never paid much attention to the Manichaean and dominionist themes of the Bible. But the Republicans, by developing evangelicals as clients, catapulted evangelical ideas from the margins of American public life to its center. And in a historic juxtaposition, a historic juxtaposition often missed.

The Republicans did this during the same late 20th century decades when the mainline Protestants declined, depriving the society of a countervailing power against evangelicalism. Just at the time that the Republicans were bringing evangelicals into greater prominence, the rival ecumenical, mainline Protestants, were losing what had long been their major role in American society.

Secular critics could talk about racism, sexism, homophobia, and the bad readings of the constitution common among evangelicals. But these secular critics almost never contested the religious foundations of Christian nationalism, thus entirely missing the actually operating justifications for evangelical political behavior.

As Linda Greenhouse charged in The New York Review of Books, secularists don’t know how to talk back to evangelicals. They don’t even know how to frame the questions. The Manichean existential conflict between a good and evil is an enduring element in the inventory of the Christian project, even if downplayed by the ecumenical theologians.

Extreme sectarianism finds ample scriptural warrant, not only in the resoundingly apocalyptic book of Revelation, but scattered here and there among the 30,000 verses of the Bible from which preachers can choose. So we take captive every thought and make it obedient to Christ 2 Corinthians 10:5 or Matthew 12:30, this is Jesus himself. Whoever is not with me is against me. Galatians 1:28, where he grants dominion over all things on the Earth.

Now the mainline leader like Reinhold Niebuhr and Paul Tillich could debate this stuff, including Isaiah 4:5, where Cyrus is anointed, which is a scriptural warrant. We see invoked almost every day by evangelicals to justify the demonstrably immoral Trump as their champion. Thus, an ironic consequence of the secularization process, more and more people leaving religion, more and more nones, as we say, the mainline churches in decline.

A ironic consequence of all of that was the loss of what had been the nation’s most formidable obstacle to evangelical influence in American life. The Manichaean and dominionist strains of evangelical Protestantism, whatever their claims under subspecies analysis. Our constitute, a deeper, more structural problem for democracy than the Christian nationalism that these doctrines facilitate.

To be sure, sectarianism is not– Republican sectarianism is not exclusively a consequence of evangelical influence. In the 1990s, Newt Gingrich and Pat Buchanan, urged Republicans to demonize Democrats and to stop working with them on collegial terms. Gingrich famously asked Republican office seekers to get nasty, and demanded that Republicans in both houses of Congress blow up bipartisan projects and run the tables their own way.

Buchanan made his reputation by insisting that Reagan had betrayed his revolutionary potential and become a conventional, compromising politician. Gingrich and Buchanan did not need evangelical inspiration to turn their party in more polarizing directions, but they understood that Ronald Reagan had delivered to them a voting constituency ready to go with their florid flow.

Reagan, you’ll remember, began his 1980 campaign for the presidency by telling the National Association of evangelicals that he endorsed them. Immediately after praising states’ rights, while standing virtually on the graves of the Neshoba County martyrs from 1964, Reagan linked his government is the problem mantra to his appeal to white southerners unhappy with federal support of civil rights for African-Americans.

And he offered both of these as being fully in harmony with his celebration of evangelical Protestantism.

The Republican political dependence on evangelical voters is more intimately connected to the southern strategy than is usually recognized. That strategy developed as early as the Nixon years, was unashamedly aimed at the white population, uncomfortable with school integration and federally guaranteed civil rights for African-Americans.

But the culture of Southern whites in the former slave states was already the most thoroughly evangelical regional culture in the nation. The Southern strategy was, from the start, an evangelical strategy. There were implications for education. It helps to remember that as late as 1970, nearly one fifth of the ministers of congregations affiliated with the Southern Baptist Convention had no schooling beyond high school.

Historically, Republicans had long enjoyed the support of the bulk of the upper middle-class and in many states had given more support to public higher education than the Democrats. But by prioritizing white Southern evangelicals and their counterparts in the Midwest, the Republican Party gradually abandoned most of the states with highly educated electorates that had once produced Republican presidents and senators of real stature.

In neither 2016 or 2020, did Trump make a serious effort to win any state in the entire eastern corridor, from Maine to Virginia, with the sole exception of Pennsylvania, nor did he try to get the Pacific states of California, Oregon, Washington, and Hawaii. Already, by 2014, before Trump, the GOPs abandonment of those 16 coastal states was so pronounced that of the 32 senators then representing those states, only Susan Collins of Maine and Patrick Toomey of Pennsylvania were Republicans.

The party located its power base in the States and the Congressional districts with the fewest college graduates. For the first time in American history then, one of our two major political parties has a vested interest, a vested interest in maintaining a relatively uneducated electorate. The study of history, sociology, political science, philosophy and literature might call into question, what was learned in church or in kinship networks?

Technical and vocational education are not problematic. When JD Vance the other day declared that professors are the enemy, echoing Nixon, he was not talking about professors of electrical engineering or nursing.

A liberal arts education makes individuals more likely to appreciate the value of vaccines, to recognize how much of human life opens up for women when they have reproductive choice, to respect scientific indicators of global warming, to understand the past disabling legacy for descendants of enslaved Americans, to grasp the evidence that Joe Biden won the 2020 election, to distinguish large scale economic indicators from the price of eggs, to understand what project 2025 means for the country if Trump becomes president, and to accept a host of other realities that low information voters, as the press calls them, often deny, especially when encouraged to do so by confident voices claiming to speak from or on behalf of their identity group.

When Republican governors try to take over the higher education system of their states, they know exactly what they are doing. They know who their enemy is, it is us. Evangelicalism changed little during this Republican sponsored rise other than being corrupted by a new proximity to power, bringing dominionism to greater prominence as evangelicals began to take seriously for the very first time that they might actually run the country.

But evangelicalism’s patron, the Republican Party, was changed profoundly. Republicans of yore were not so fanatically eager to police the bodies of women, to prevent public school children from learning unappealing truths about history and society, to shut down rather than to carefully manage the regulatory state, and to collapse the separation of church and state.

Today’s Republicans know how dependent they are on evangelical voters, who function as a kind of tar baby sticking to the hands of even those Republicans whose interest in evangelicalism was always more opportunistic than principled. Once you grab onto it, it’s very hard to get rid of. It’s hard to get rid of because it is so deeply embedded.

A recent flood of disillusioned autobiographies bear eloquent witness to the sticking power of this historic theological burden. Sarah McCammon, The Exevangicals, and Tim Alberta’s, The Kingdom, The Power, and The Glory, mixed autobiography with reportage, recounting the experience of trying to live a non-sectarian life under evangelical authority. A complementary shelf of books by historians document the depth and extent not only of manicheanism, but also misogyny and racism.

Kristin Kobes Du Mez, Jesus and John Wayne, is the most compelling one volume testimony to the challenges faced by those who wish to remain evangelicals while participating in a pluralist democracy. Yet a revealing sign of how challenging it can be to reform evangelicalism rather than simply to abandon it, is the frequency with which anti-Trump evangelicals depart from the standard evangelical talking points to draw from the theological inventory of the long, scorned mainline liberal Protestants.

I’m here thinking especially of the op ed columnist, David French, Peter Wehner, Russell Moore, and David Brooks. Their writings, the writings of these pundits in The Times, The Post, and The Atlantic, show a striking pattern of appropriation and effacement. Priorities of the religious liberals that were long castigated as substituting politics for religion. That was basically the line you heard all the time from evangelicals about ecumenical substituting politics for religion.

All of those priorities are now appropriated, while the congregationalist, Episcopalians, and Methodists, who liberalized Protestantism are effaced from public memory. Staples of ecumenical sermons and Sunday schools are now used by the anti-Trump evangelicals as representative of Christianity. Matthew 25:40 I was naked and you clothed me and so forth. And if you do this to the least of these, my brother, you have done it to me. Or Luke 10:25, the good Samaritan story.

Galatians 3:28 and Christ, there is no Gentile or Jew, no male or female, so forth. All these things are straight out of the liberal Sunday schools, and then suddenly you find David French, writing them. I wonder how many more columns I could read by David French, where he goes into an evangelical church and he sees people that are mean spirited and he’s shocked, shocked to find these people.

So readers of the discussions of religion in The Times, The Post, and The Atlantic might suppose that the essence of evangelicalism had always been a species wide movement for love, service, and brotherhood, tragically twisted in the era of Trump. This is an egregious misrepresentation of American religious history.

The notorious Manichaean, and dominionist, New Apostolic Reformation would not attract so many of today’s individuals had not generations of preachers made its doctrines plausible and its style appealing. The Republican Party will not regain its historic role as a responsible participant in the nation’s two party system until it faces up to the damage done by its uncritical embrace of bad religion.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CRISTINA MORA] Professor Wasow.

[OMAR WASOW] I want to begin by thanking the Matrix and the panel for inviting me. So I was interested in thinking about realignment, particularly around what has been observed both in recent polling and in the 2020 election around what sometimes called racial polarization. So one of the more striking findings in the 2020 election is that Trump outperformed sort of Republican presidential candidates among African-Americans, Latinos, Asian-Americans.

And that was shocking for a variety of reasons to people who study politics partly, Trump’s rhetoric has often been quite alienating to members of those groups. And so it was sort of thought if anybody would have the reverse, it would be Trump and yet that’s not what happened. Some of this was picked up on already by Professor Haney-Lopez.

And I think there are at least a couple of things that might be specific to 2020 that I’m not going to go into in that much detail, but where some of it may be COVID effects, might if you were somebody who had a job that was hit heavily by COVID restrictions, that might make you more hostile to the party associated with COVID restrictions. And so there’s a class and education divide there that overlaps with race.

I think there’s some evidence, my primary research is on protest movements. I think there’s some evidence that among Asian-Americans and Latinos, there was some disaffection from the Democratic Party in response to Black Lives Matter protests in that period.

But again, those are the 2020 election. And I’m interested in thinking a little bit about some of the present moment. And in particular, I want to take the most provocative version of the question, which is to think about people like Enrique Tarrio, who is a Cuban– Afro-Cuban, was a former head of the Proud Boys, now convicted, who is very explicit about his enthusiasm for this, what was called like, I forget the term now, it was like European chauvinist group.

But it was also very clear that he was raised in a Black Cuban community and was like not anti-Black, and at least his conception of it. Nick Fuentes is an avowed neo-Nazi of Mexican-American ancestry. Mark Robinson, candidate for governor in North Carolina. I mean, a bit of a crackpot, but it’s not as easy to just say, oh, nobody of color would take these extreme positions because in fact, we have lots and lots of examples.

So I think it raises a puzzle that– to be clear, this is not research I’ve done. It’s something I’m kind of thinking about and speculating about and so I’m processing with you now in public. So these are speculations, some may be more grounded in evidence than others.

So what could be going on– and I think to be clear, I also want to say that the Enrique Tarrio’s of the world are extreme cases, but I think are leading indicators of this broader pattern we saw in 2020. And so we should think of them as worth at least considering even as their extreme of a broader set of trends in maybe a new kind of alignment around racial depolarization.

So one of the very common polling results that we’ve gotten in the last few months is that there is this particularly among Black and Latino young men, some shift away from the Democratic Party. And I want to begin with two kind of significant caveats. And I actually welcome your feedback on this as well.

First is it’s entirely plausible that a significant chunk of that story is polling error. And I don’t mean polling error in the sense of people are doing polls badly or there’s some kind of malfeasance or something. But it’s just when you are getting subgroups of subgroups, you have noisier estimates. And it’s entirely possible that we’re getting fairly noisy estimates that are somewhat over representing the disaffected than the affected, or maybe not the right way to put it.

And I think in that also, it’s important to say that among African-Americans, typical presidential election, 90% of African-Americans will vote for the Democratic Party. So if 80% of African-American men vote for the Democratic Party, that’s both a significant shift in the sense that you’ve gone from one in 10 voting Republican to two in 10.

But the overwhelming majority of African-American men are still voting for the Democratic Party. And some of the more recent polls suggest it might be 85%. So how big a transition are we talking about? I think that’s an open question we’ll hopefully know more shortly.

A second caveat is that this should be entirely unsurprising. That in a society where we are bathed in narratives of racial hierarchy that some of the people who are lower status strive to be a part of the higher status group and adopt the ideologies of the higher status group and behave in ways that are essentially about a kind of acculturating to the norms of a dominant group.

So at some level, we should think of this as– of course, this is happening. It’s been happening throughout American history. It’s been happening throughout the history of the world, that people in one form or another in the Black community would call passing are doing that in part as a way to gain status or income or other kinds of opportunities.

So with those two kind of caveats aside, let me add one other subtle one, which is that it’s also unclear to what degree this is a phenomenon that reflects broad trends that we’re going to see for years to come, or something idiosyncratic about Donald Trump.

So to go a little off script, I was staying at a hotel in Long Island. There was a visiting a hospital and the check in counter at this motel was a young African-American man wearing– this is, I think, around 2018– he’s wearing a MAGA cap. And I’m a political scientist. It’s like it’s just me and him. And so I’m like trying in a very nonjudgmental way to say, so don’t see a lot of brothers wearing MAGA caps. What’s going on?

He’s like, yeah, the sisters hate it, and he kind of pauses and he says, I just love Home Alone 2.

[LAUGHTER]

Which I did not see coming, right? But it’s like Trump is a celebrity. Trump has a level of celebrity that is exceptional. And not just a level of celebrity, but he has for– I don’t know how many years The Apprentice was on air, but a decade and a half, there was a level of marketing that he is a great businessman. And if you read the profiles of the production of The Apprentice, it turns out, in fact, he’s making all kinds of capricious decisions that the editors have to reverse engineer the show to make it look like a good decision was made.

And that, in fact, when– I’m forgetting the name of the producer, Mark– the person who oversaw the apprentice said when they first went to pitch Trump, he was very down on his luck. His office had lots of furniture with chipped wood and it’s an act of– it is theater that he is to the world, not a guy with six banks or six bankruptcies, but a great businessman.

So there’s something potentially idiosyncratic about Trump that will not translate to other candidates or the party. And I just don’t know. I mean, I think some of the stuff you brought up clearly is at play, but Trump is idiosyncratic. So now to get a little bit more into things that I think might be structural deeper.

I think one mistake that people make a lot when they hear this rhetoric, and again, this was touched on earlier, Mexico is not sending their best, they’re sending criminals and so on and so on. We assume that the reaction is going to be one of rejection by people targeted by that hateful language. And what we see again and again across many different groups is that when people are stigmatized, there are two different reactions.

In simple terms, one is a kind of rejection, but another is a distancing from the group. So to draw on some research by a scholar at Stanford who looked at German Americans following World War I, there was a rise of anti-German sentiment. And there are a bunch of things that German Americans do essentially to distance themselves from being identified as German.

So she looks at data, for example, at how they name their kids. And the prototypically German names for boys become– they go for more German names to more kind of quintessentially American names. So that act of distancing should not surprise us. This is like a human adaptation under conditions of discrimination, stigmatization to try and contort yourself to be less a target of that discrimination.

And so echoing exactly what was said earlier. If you’re associated with a group that’s being demonized, like an obvious strategy is to try and not be part of the group or to distance yourself from the group. And so I think on a range of dimensions, we’re watching distancing patterns play out that are, again, fundamentally very typical processes of accommodation to discrimination, to processes of being demonized.

Second, another idea. This is now– let’s see, so polling error, we raised in a bath of racial hierarchy, celebrity, response to stigmatization. So that’s four. So a fifth one is very speculative, which is that we’re in the middle of a kind of second realignment.

Well, so a classic term, there’s lots of debate about what is realignment, but in the 1960s, there’s this passage of landmark civil rights legislation. The two parties become more explicitly, the Democratic Party becomes expli– in the– let me, just because this may seem, it may not be obvious.

In 1962, there’s a Civil Rights Act that’s passed, and it gets more Republican support than Democratic support. Why is that? The Democratic Party is a group of northern, more liberal racial liberals, and southern segregationists. And so it’s not obvious that Democrats are going to be the party of racial liberalism more broadly. By ’64, the Civil Rights Act passes, Democrats are the party of African-American interests, and the Republican Party becomes more explicitly, the party aligned against civil rights.

And that split, sort of unfolds over decades to some of what we think of as now the racial realignment. So what would a second realignment look like? Marc Hetherington, who’s a scholar, a leading scholar of authoritarianism, although he’s now refining that, gave a presentation of a new book he was working on here yesterday as part of the Citron Center and the Matrix.

And I think he spelled out a more fine grained idea of conservatism that included things, like a taste for traditionalism, sometimes people being hypercompetitive. So that’s some of the Trump energy of just like this. And he got surveys that are teasing apart, disaggregating some of what we might call conservatism, a strong taste for personal responsibility over more systemic models of accountability.

And what I mean in this idea of a second realignment is that there’s this moment of possibility for now more fine grained sorting. So we’ve had one big sort around, how do you feel at some core level about equality for African-Americans. And now there’s this opportunity to yourself on more subtle things.

Well, I’m more of a traditionalist. And what people want to do with, say, transwomen in sports upsets my sense of traditionalism, and that that’s going to show up, not cleanly aligned with party. Let’s give another example that maybe is easier to grasp. He talked about these measures of hypercompetitiveness. What do we mean by hypercompetitiveness?

The questions on these surveys were like walking. You should never walk away from a fight. Walking away from a fight is a sign of weakness. Basically, questions that get at, do you think the world is defined by winners and losers? And it turned out that hypercompetitiveness shows up pretty evenly distributed across both parties.

But now you’ve got a candidate who is a hypercompetitive candidate. So if you’re somebody who has a taste for that, that’s potentially going to pull you out of what had been your historical home by party. So that’s what I mean by this more. We’ve gone from a big sort to maybe a more fine grained sort.

And that over time, we’re going to see these other kinds of traits leading to people who are cross-pressured. By which I mean, they may have a profile in The Times yesterday about Latino kid whose parents are for Harris and he’s for Trump and he’s got competing motives and instincts. But maybe he’s somebody who is a traditionalist in some way that makes it hard to align with these new ideas that the Democratic Party is associated with.

And I think it’s important to say that in order to have maybe this more fine grained sort, you need another thing. And so this is now the last potential thing that maybe is changing that I think is more structural, which is that we should think of identity as importantly downstream of institutions. And what I mean by that, I just taught a class this morning, where we were reading Anderson’s Imagined Communities, and it’s like you can think of the emergence of the nation state as non-trivially, a function of the emergence of print media, which gives people a sense of common identity across distance and even time that wasn’t there possible.

So media, as this very powerful institution shaping people’s sense of self, is one of those institutions. We read another piece about schools, which is, you can think of as almost another kind of media. But schools as a powerful institution shaping people’s sense of national identity.

And in the present era, we’ve got– I mean, the list of institutions goes on, churches, so on. There’s an unmooring for a lot of young people from a lot of those institutions. I grew up reading newspapers, that is clearly like now, like using a fountain pen. It is increasingly archaic.

And so what does it mean to be a young African-American kid coming of age, getting a sense of self from TikTok. Religious institutions in the Black community have been a very powerful part of the kind of baton pass of institutions of racial political identity. We’re seeing increasingly on this trend about secularization, like young African-Americans much less engaged in the church. So that we should assume there is some unmooring associated with that, too.

And linked to that, we might also imagine that there are these new identities. Maybe I am really into anime, and my sense of self is defined by the global community of anime enthusiasts, not by my local Black community. So this is speculative, but almost certainly there is some media and other ways in which these formerly central institutions that are now in some ways being decentered is having effects on giving people more latitude to move by party.

So where does that leave us? Just to wrap very quickly, I think we don’t have as social scientists, and maybe more generally in the public discourse, a good model for what I think of as an increasingly multiethnic, still overwhelmingly white Republican Party, but a multiethnic far-right. And that’s something new and interesting that we need to get our heads around.

[CRISTINA MORA] Great.

[APPLAUSE]

Great. Well, Eva has the mic. We’ll take questions from the audience. We’ll start right here and then right here. Thank you so much.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thanks for the points made. I guess, one question. I have a couple of questions. One is, what is a Democratic Party to do in terms of– we’re trying to reach out to all these subgroups also evangelical, but also white, male, uneducated is a group diversity of the Hispanic group. And it’s just like the Republican Party has been very effective in capturing the far-right. What’s the message? What kind of leadership is required? Because I think it’s a combination of message as well as leader.

And then, it seems to me like a centrist policy with the right communication, the inclusive message you talked about is really critical. Because imagine, if the immigration– like, the border was not an issue. If the executive order was done the first year versus the third year. And you take that off. I always say don’t give the other side ammunition.

So what is the Democratic Party to do, run a more centrist model because the Republicans have captured the far-right, is a centrist in the left, a bigger group, but is that effective? And how do we avoid letting the Republicans have these ammunition points?

[LÓPEZ] So I would respond by saying the counterfactual in which strong border controls are enacted, that’s the wrong way to think about it. Like, Obama, the Obama administration deported more people than any other prior administration in the history of the country and nevertheless was dinged as weak on the border and open borders. What the Republicans are engaged in doing is bamboozling the public by lying to them consistently, egregiously, repeatedly, echoed through two large megaphones– three, I guess Fox and other media, social media, and the evangelical church.

And if that’s the case, then Democrats can’t win by enacting effective policy that responds to the complaints. And even– listen, to some of the language that David provided. We’re going to route out the communists and the friends like. The stories are telling aren’t connected to reality. And so don’t respond to reality. That means that Democrats need a powerful countervailing story.

Democrats have struggled to articulate a powerful countervailing story because they’ve been caught by two different forces. One, they’re being pushed in a sort of splintered identitarian direction, and that actually makes things worse. So if we tell a story to the American public in which we are indeed locked into conflict between different communities of color and white people, or we are indeed locked into conflict between the feminists and the rest, or between a gay identity movement and straight.

Like, if that’s the sort of political language we use, that’s going to backfire, and so Democrats stay away from it. What do they replace it with? Policy, which is about the worst thing you can replace it with. It’s like one channel is showing Scream 2. And then the Democrats are like, we know. Well, let’s get them to watch Washington Week in review. It’s like nobody’s turning from Scream 2 to Washington Week in review.

So Democrats really need a story. I actually think Harris and Walz are doing pretty good with that story. It’s a story of inclusion. It’s a story of working together. It’s a story of a shared vision. It’s a big tent. I think that they could do better in naming– well, I actually think one of the things that they’re weakest on is immigration. Because their record on immigration is kind of what you’re saying. We had a strong policy. It’s like, that’s not going to do it.

I think that they do better if they said, all those terrible lies about people in Springfield eating pets, those are lies of the worst sort designed to tear us apart. We know better. Let’s come together. This is just billionaires tech money, crypto money funding lies about poor people. We’re on to this. They could be much better on that. But I think that that’s the core insight here. And it goes to Omar’s conversation. All politics is identity politics.

Republicans have done incredibly well because they’ve mastered identity politics and really leaned into it and will say whatever they need to say to mobilize people around identity. Democrats as a party have run away from identity politics, and they’ve run away from it under pressure from different identity groups. And they’ve also run away from the sort of natural identity politics that they should lean into, which is identity as class or class as identity.

Democrats are unwilling to tell a story of working people beset by corporations and by billionaires, with notable exceptions like Bernie and AOC. And then you look at how popular they are and say Democrats really need to lean into this. Why are Democrats doing so poorly among working people? Because they no longer articulate a story of a class war, in which working people broadly defined or under threat from malefactors of great wealth to recover a New Deal type language.

So Democrats for 50 years have been trying to contest elections with very little recourse to identity. The two big exceptions, Bill Clinton, who mobilized white identity as the new Democrat, and Obama, who mobilized an identity of the post-racial America even as he evaded discussion of race. But that’s I think, the crux. Democrats need an identity story because they’re up against an identity story, and politics is fundamentally about identity.

[MORA] Don’t you think in some ways, though, if you see the polls and folks are asking, what’s the most important issue to you? Without question, the economy, the economy, the economy, across all groups. And so don’t you think some of this is also talking so much about identity and not enough about trying to understand how different groups are understanding what the economy is in the first place and what it is at all.

[LÓPEZ] I mean, the polling super interesting. People’s view of the economy tracks their partisan affiliation. The economy is too complex. And the policies are too complex, most people don’t understand it. So what do we see? How do you feel? How optimistic are you about the economy? Well, the Democrats are in power, so I’m down. Wait, a Republican just got elected. Now I’m super optimistic.

And then it flips with the Democrats. It’s following more than generating partisan affiliation. If people cannot answer the question, what sorts of policies are good for me. They can answer the question, who respects me, who esteems me, who’s like me, who will fight for me. Identity, identity, identity, identity.

And I think that, yes, the economy has to be part of the conversation, but nobody should make the mistake of thinking we’re going to talk economy in ways that cuts through identity. It doesn’t because there’s so much noise out there. Like the Republicans are saying, we’re the party of working people, which for any of us who are paying attention is the biggest hoot ever.

And the Democrats are saying sometimes we are the party of working people and we’ve got these policies, but most people can’t make sense of that. What can they make sense of, who esteems me, who will fight for me, who respects me. And they’re going to use identity markers to answer what is going to be good for me economically, which is deeply frustrating that people are saying– I mean, Trump has more credibility than Harris on whether he’ll be good for working Americans.

Because of his policies? Hell, no, because of identity. And so it would be a big mistake to say, no, we need to talk about the economy more, or at least– or maybe let me modify that answer. Talk about the economy in identity terms. There are rich bastards out there who are rigging the system for themselves, and all the rest of us are in trouble.

We, the American people, believe in hard work and believe in, let’s say, an opportunity economy, in which through hard work we can get ahead. And that requires that we stand up to these scheming strategic crypto billionaires who want to buy the presidency. That’s sort of economy, but it’s mainly identity.

[HOLLINGER] A while ago you were mentioning that you thought that Harris and Walz were sort of stepping in the right direction, even if they haven’t got altogether where they should be. And I was wondering how you would characterize their line as identity.

[LÓPEZ] It’s identity in the sense that they’re saying they’re trying to divide us, we’re in this together, we want to take care of each other. They’re weirdos. We’re not weirdos, we’re regular people. This is common sense. Like, these are really strong stories about what it means to be American.

[HOLLINGER] One way to put that. And I’m just wondering whether you would go along with this, is that they’re affirming national identity.

[LÓPEZ] I think so, but not in a nationalistic sense. Not in that America first and not with a heavy emphasis on America, America, America, like this that sort of patriotism. But in a national identity, in the sort of decency, and pluralistic, and diverse.

[HOLLINGER] And we’re all in it together democracy. Yeah. That’s good.

[WASOW] So let me make one friendly amendment to the comment earlier, which is I think that I agree. I talked about Trump as a performer, as a businessman rather than an actual businessman. In part because, yes, like the stories matter and can often Trump reality. The soundbite version of it is not that seeing is believing, but believing is seeing.

But I do think, at least in my experience and my own research, but also I think some degree with immigration and the present, some degree with the economy, it’s not entirely fiction also. People did have an experience of inflation. There have been cities like New York that we’re dealing with this influx of immigrants.

And so there’s kind of two things going on. One is it’s wildly overhyped. Like, why are people in Vermont concerned about the border? And we see a lot of this some of the most concerned Republicans are on the Canadian border. And it’s not quite clear what’s going on there. That’s downstream of a kind of fiction, I think, more than it is reality. But it’s not that there’s nothing.

The economy is doing extremely well by most measures, but there was this peak in inflation and people are very sensitive to that.

[MORA] Especially the working class is a real sense in which the Democratic Party continues to say the economy is doing so well. And then you’ve got a good group of people who are seeing– I mean, this is why JD Vance is in front of prices of eggs and things like that and so–

[WASOW] But I actually think, I think the Democrats, a year I think, for a long time, if you look at the history of deficits, for example, deficits go up under Republican administrations and down under Democratic administrations, and yet Democrats have done a terrible job of saying we’re the party of fiscal discipline, in part because I think it conflicts with their own sense of, no, we’re the party that fights for the poor, but we’re also the– it’s like you can be too empathetic sometimes and not have good message discipline.

So I think there’s actually a story to be told about the economy under Biden that has some amount of empathy and also says we’ve outperformed all of our peer countries and inflation is down–

[MORA] I think it’s divorced from reality, I think it’s what people are feeling and thinking, which is not necessarily what’s objectively true. And I think–

[INTERPOSING VOICES]

Yes, I’ll take that as a–

But I think what you’re saying about the message, which I find really fascinating, is the message about economic inequality, which is what you’re saying. It’s like economic inequality as a bridger. Understanding economic inequality as a bridger of all of these different identities. We’re all in the same boat–

[LÓPEZ] Let me sharpen that.

–In this stratified system.

Let me sharpen that. I think you’re absolutely right that people are feeling economic pain. They’re feeling it post-COVID. But in the larger context, over the last 50 years since the inception of dog whistle politics and the sort of hegemony of a Republican Party that’s got itself elected over and over again through culture, war, politics, there has been a massive transfer of wealth from the American middle up to the economic stratosphere. Of course, people are feeling pain. The pain is real. I’m not downplaying that.

But I’m saying what people really want to know is who’s to blame and who will help. Those are identity questions. If instead you just say the pain is real. They know the pain is real. That’s not what’s important. And here are the policies that will solve it, too hard to understand. I don’t know who to trust. You need a concise story, who did this to me? Who’s going to fight for me? And those are identity stories.

[WASOW] The one other thing just on patriotism was, I think part of what we saw that was remarkable in the Democratic National Convention was a kind of liberal nationalism, a liberal patriotism that was a vision of an America that’s exceptional in its being pioneering on marriage equality was Buddha story. It’s an America that had an Americana where prince is like at the heart of like American Americana.

And so it was multiethnic and it was inclusive and it was at the same time, I think, speaking to some of the ways– or Senator Warnock talking about, my mother went from picking cotton to voting for her son for the Senate. Those are stories that are in some ways speak to a certain kind of American exceptionalism but from a liberal perspective.

[LÓPEZ] What I would highlight is the way Democrats have used patriotism to connect patriotism to defense of democracy. One of the most striking lines that they’ve developed is, if you vote for Harris, that doesn’t necessarily make you a Democrat, it makes you a patriot. That was a really powerful line to try and talk to co-opt patriotism from Republicans.

[MORA] We got questions in the audience that will take. Go ahead.

[MARION FOURCADE] Thank you so much. That was truly wonderful. I wanted to go to a topic that none of you really mentioned very much, which is the gender divide. I mean, you sort of said, well, I don’t really believe in it. But if you actually look at the data, it actually cuts across ethnoracial groups. It’s absolutely not unique to Latinos. And in fact, it is worldwide. We are seeing this divide increase worldwide.

So, how does it matter for David, the women are leaving church in droves and in actually just saw data that in Gen Z women are less likely to go to church than men. I mean, that’s historically, that’s a major transformation. And then to Omar, the far-right also, it’s also been very much about gender, but through a different line, mostly through the question of demographic anxiety, which, of course, ties it to control of women’s bodies, but also to immigration. So I don’t know. I just wanted to put that out there and see.

[LÓPEZ] I think that’s a fabulous question. I’ll just be very quick. A really important corrective. I think gender is enormously important in 2024 and may be more important than race. Like, it’s a huge, huge issue, both on terms of equality for women, and abortion issues, and also in competing conceptions of masculinity. Divisions in terms of conception of masculinity on the right, I think is enormously important.

What I was skeptical of was the idea that there’s a particular gender divide among Latinos and African-Americans that’s connected to a mythology of machismo or aggressive masculinity, particular to Latino and African-American men. That is the storyline that has purchased because it dovetails with this pernicious stereotype.

I don’t think is borne out by the data. But I don’t want to be understood to say gender is irrelevant. I actually think it’s enormously, enormously important, more important globally. I think, than in the United States what’s happening, I think there’s a dynamic of demagoguery that seizes on status anxiety in the United States, race is available, but now too, anxiety about gender. I think globally, gender is more readily available as a static anxiety that can be used to whip up Democratic masses. So I think it’s hugely, hugely important.

[HOLLINGER] Yeah, with regard to Protestantism. The exit of women from evangelical churches is very recent, and it’s especially because of what the court did with abortion and the stance that evangelical churches are making. Protestantism is still overwhelmingly female, and that’s been the case for quite a long time. Males are much more likely to have left the churches and not come back.

Most of the Protestant churches are actually increasingly run by women, and that’s also the case with a lot of Catholic parishes. So I’m not saying that gender is not important, but it’s functions differently in a religious context. And I think with these evangelical pro-Trump types, it’s important to know that there are a lot of very prominent women that lead this.

Paula White was the spiritual advisor to the White House throughout Trump’s term. And she led him from five or six years before he asked her basically to help him win the evangelicals. And she did. And so there are millions of people that follow her, and three or four other charismatic Pentecostal women that continue to have enormous support.

Now, whether or not the trend that you’ve referred to, which is genuinely true. Whether that will continue, I don’t know. But it’s definitely a new thing. And I don’t see anything in the overall picture about Protestantism and Catholicism in the United States to change the overwhelmingly gendered character of it. If you go into seminaries now, like you go up here to the Pacific School of Religion, GTU, go to Union or Chicago Div, it’s women that are there, not men.

[WASOW] I would add and I realize this is a weird referral is a total tangent. But I mentioned Home Alone 2 earlier, without clarifying that Donald Trump has a cameo in this film and that might not have been obvious, so I apologize.

[LAUGHS]

On gender, I think this is– actually, a really central point in getting at something that, again, I’m still sort of trying to process, but a lot of how we’ve thought of race politics in America is that they’re defined by white supremacy. And increasingly, a model that organizes a certain far-right politics around that misses all of the other contributing factors. So first, I think it’s important to note that the KKK was also anti-Catholic and anti-Jewish.

So it’s always been more multiethnic than just say anti-Black, and that’s an important factor. It’s also been steeped in all kinds of notions of men’s roles and women’s roles. So it’s not that that’s these other factors are entirely new. But I think– how does Enrique Tarrio fit into the Proud Boys? Well, it’s partly that he’s a chauvinist.

And so the crude way I think about this, is it’s almost like we could imagine a point system, where there are a set of things, where, are you Christian? Well, that’s a point. Are you a chauvinist? That’s a point. Are you anti-trans? That’s a point. Are you white? That might be a point. But it’s only one in a kind of consortium of attitudes and commitments that allow you to have status on the far-right.

And so being a male chauvinist, as the Proud Boys explicitly are, is part of what gives him access, maybe even as somebody who’s Afro-Cuban. And I think it works in other dimensions too, again, to pull away from the far-right, it’s someone like Bobby Jindal or Nikki Haley sits in an interesting place in the Republican Party, where they on the one hand, have converted religion. They’ve sort of anglicized names. There are these ways in which you, again, kind of acculturate into the party, but it’s not as organized around race as it might have been in an earlier era.

I mean, you said gender might be more important than race. And so I think, it’s like we want to think about an issues like transgender issues, don’t easily just shoehorn into our conceptions of race politics. And so I guess the way I am thinking about how some of the right-wing politics are organized is that, as a scholar of race and ethnic politics, that race is in some ways has less purchase. It’s not still central, but that gender, sexuality issues.

And to come back to the status threat idea, that there’s a simple model, which is, do you believe in a world where men should have status above women? Where straight people should have status above LGBTQ folk? Where white should have status over Black? And all of those– to the extent that any of those are part of your framework, like you are more going to find a home, but you don’t have to commit to all of them.

And so you might be four out of five on some, and that allows you to then have membership. And Nikki Haley might never be the nominee, but she can be the number two in a primary.

[HOLLINGER] There’s a column in The Post this morning arguing that gender is important, race is important. But the big thing in realignment, and this is a column that follows very much the language of our session is education. And that’s come up a couple of times here, and I appreciated the comments that Ian and Omar both made about that. I would say, with religion, education is just massively important and a better identifier if you want to choose people out on why they’re going this way or that way.

Education more than gender, more than race, more than class is the chief differentiator. So there’s something to it, anyway.

[MORA] Well, with that provocative comment, at the end, we’re at time now.

[WASOW] Join me in thanking the panel.

[LAUGHTER]

[APPLAUSE]

Thank you.

[AUDIO LOGO]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Matrix On Point

Matrix on Point: Voices from the Heartland

Patriotic display of American flags waving on white picket fence. Typical small town Americana Fourth of July Independence Day decorations.

Over the past few years, Arlie Hochschild has been in conversation with citizens of Pikeville, Kentucky, in the heart of Appalachia; Jenny Reardon has been biking through her home state of Kansas, talking to farmers, ranchers and other denizens of the prairie; and Lisa Pruitt has straddled the rural-urban divide over the course of her life in Arkansas and California and as a scholar of rural legal access.

As the nation braced for a decisive election, this conversation — recorded on October 21 — sought to illuminate the frequently overlooked yet politically potent voices emanating from America’s rural heartlands and small towns. The panel was moderated by Cihan Tuğal, Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley, and co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Department of Sociology, the Institute of Governmental Studies (IGS), and the Berkeley Center for Right Wing Studies.

About the Speakers

Arlie R. Hochschild is Professor Emerita in the Department of Sociology at UC Berkeley. Her 2016 book, Strangers in Their Own Land: Anger and Mourning on the American Right, details rise of the right. Her latest book, ‘Stolen Pride: loss, shame and the rise of the right’ is based on six years of field work in eastern Kentucky and focuses on the politics of pride and shame. In particular, it focuses on the distress caused by “structural shaming” in an era of post-70s economic decline, a shame which enhances the appeal of Trump’s politics of displacement.

Lisa Pruitt is Distinguished Professor of Law at UC Davis. Pruitt’s work reveals how the economic, spatial, and social features of rural locales, (e.g., material spatiality, lack of anonymity) profoundly shape the lives of residents, including the junctures at which they encounter the law. This work also considers how rurality inflects dimensions of gender, race, and ethnicity, including through a lens of whiteness studies and critical race theory.

Jenny Reardon is a Professor of Sociology and the Founding Director of the Science and Justice Research Center at UC Santa Cruz. Her research draws into focus questions about identity, justice and democracy that are often silently embedded in scientific ideas and practices, particularly in modern genomic research. She is the author of Race to the Finish: Identity and Governance in an Age of Genomics (Princeton University Press, 2005) and The Postgenomic Condition: Ethics, Justice, Knowledge After the Genome (Chicago University Press, Fall 2017). Recently, she started a project to bike over one thousand miles through her home state of Kansas to learn from farmers, ranchers and other denizens of the high plains about how best to know and care for the prairie.

Cihan Tuğal (moderator) studies social movements, populism, capitalism, democracy, and religion. In his recent publications, he discusses the far right, neoliberalization, state capitalism, and populist performativity in Turkey, the United States, Hungary, Poland, India, and the Philippines. Tuğal is currently working on a book that will incorporate these case studies, along with an analysis of populism in Brazil. He has also initiated a team project to study the ecological crisis of capitalism, with special emphasis on the role of labor and community struggles in developing sustainable energy.

Watch the panel above or on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everybody. My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix. I am absolutely delighted to welcome you to this event today. So this week actually is very special because we have not one but two Matrix On Point events. So that’s a bit unusual. But of course, we live in pretty unusual times.

So the reason for this convergence of activity right before the end of October is, of course, that we are bracing for yet another momentous presidential election, perhaps the most momentous election in our lifetime. So in today’s panel, we wanted to gain insight into the frequently overlooked, yet politically potent voices emanating from America’s rural heartlands and small towns.

And we found the absolutely perfect trio of voices to talk about it. And I am so proud that we are bringing them together. Not only because they are all brilliant scholars, but because they showcase a vibrancy of the research that is being done across the UC system. So we have Davis, Berkeley, and Santa Cruz right there. And then Berkeley again.

So for the past few years, Arlie Hochschild has been in conversation with the citizens of Pikeville, Kentucky in the heart of Appalachia. Jenny Reardon has been biking through her home state of Kansas talking to farmers and ranchers and other denizens of the prairie. And Lisa Pruitt has straddled the urban rural divide over the course of her life in Arkansas and California and as a scholar of Rural Legal Access.

So this is a very exciting panel. It is co-sponsored by the Department of Sociology here at Berkeley, the Institute of Governmental Studies, and the Berkeley Center for Right Wing Studies. Note that the panel that we will have on Friday is called– is titled Shifting Alignments, and that panel will present research on political scientists and legal– from political scientists and legal scholars about the changing demographic dynamics within the Democratic and Republican parties. So please come for that too. And then we have a bunch of author meets critics events in late November and December.

But now it is time to hear about the voices from the heartland. And it is time for me to introduce our moderator, Cihan Tuğal, who has also been working on related issues. Cihan needs barely any introduction. He’s a fixture here at matrix. comes here often. He’s professor of sociology at Berkeley. He’s the author of three books and countless articles.

He studies social movements populism, capitalism, democracy, and religion. In his recent publications, he discusses the far right, neoliberalization, state capitalism, and populist performativity in Turkey, the United States, Hungary, Poland, India, and the Philippines. All right? He’s currently working on a book that will incorporate all of these case studies, along with an analysis of populism in Brazil, as if the other ones were not enough.

[LAUGHTER]

He has also initiated a team project to study the ecological crisis of capitalism with special emphasis on the role of labor and community struggles in developing sustainable energy. So without further ado, welcome. And I turn it over to Cihan.

[APPLAUSE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] OK. Thank you, Marion. I’m not thrilled to be facing this election season, but I am very excited to be here to discussing it with these esteemed colleagues. So we’ll go in this order. Arlie, Lisa, and then Jenny. So first, I want to introduce Arlie Hochschild. I mean, she’s a real person who doesn’t need any introduction, but I’ll say a few words on her.

So she’s a Professor Emerita in the Department of Sociology here at this University, and it was really painful to lose her. I was so sad when she left us. It’s not the same without her, and that’s an additional reason I’m so happy to see her here. So her 2016 book, Strangers in their Own Land, Anger and Mourning on the American Right details the rise of the right in the United States.

And her latest book is Stolen Pride, Lost Shame, and the Rise of the Right is based on six years of fieldwork in Eastern Kentucky and focuses on the politics of pride and shame. In particular, it focuses on the distress caused by structural shaming, as she calls it, in an era of post ’70s economic decline, a shame which enhances the appeal of Trump’s politics of displacement.

And even though not immediately related to this topic, we also know her as the primary sociologist of emotions and one of the foremost sociologists of gender and culture in the United States and worldwide. So next, we’ll have Lisa Pruitt, who is distinguished professor of law at UC Davis.

And her work reveals how the economic spatial and social futures of rural locales, for example, material spatiality and lack of anonymity, profoundly shaped the lives of residents, including the junctures at which they encounter the law. This work also considers how rurality inflects dimensions of gender, race, and ethnicity, including through a lens of whiteness studies and critical race theory.

And last but not least, we’ll hear from Jenny Reardon, a professor of sociology and the founding director of the Science and Justice Research Center at UC Santa Cruz. Her research draws into focus questions about identity, justice, and democracy that are often silently embedded in scientific ideas and practices, particularly in modern genomic research.

She is the author of Race to the Finish, Identity and Governance in an Age of Genomics, published by Princeton University Press, The Post Genomics Condition, Ethics, Justice, Knowledge after the Genome published by Chicago University Press. And recently she started a project to bike over 1,000 miles– oh my god, through her home state of Kansas to learn from farmers, ranchers, and other denizens of the high plains about how best to know and care for the prairie.

And it’s really, really important, I think, to hear all of these voices from the heartland, as the title of the panel calls it, because we are in a bubble. And we really need to bring in these voices through critical lenses, of course. So join me in welcoming the panelists–

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] Great. It’s wonderful to be here and I share Cihan’s dread of the moment we’re in, but very much welcome the chance to explore that conceptual space between talk talking to people, fieldwork, hanging out, and what you go home and think about. So what I thought I’d do in my 12 to 15 minutes, hold me to that, is talk about first a kind of a larger story that all of our projects may have in common. And then to take you with me on a journey into Pike County, Kentucky.

And this is– I’m theorizing. I’m not sure of this. But it seems to me that the story begins three decades ago with the turn to neoliberal policies, NAFTA, and offshoring, and automation– that’s not government, but automation– and migration flows. These are all external to the particular places we’re looking at. And in my case, the declining price of coal.

So those are all external factors, but they cause, over time, prosperity divides that were there before but got exacerbated. And that’s between classes, between blue collar and white collar. And blue collar being defined increasingly by whether you have a BA or not, and rural and urban exacerbated prosperity divides.

I think there have been exacerbating effects 2008 hit the middle class in urban areas, but it hit rural areas in blue collars harder. COVID, for many reasons we know about, hit the middle class and urban areas hard, but it hit rural areas and blue collar areas harder. And 2008, Did I mention that? That hit harder. Even climate events, if you don’t have insurance on your home, is a harder hit.

So there’s more– and I’m looking at emotions– more anxiety in the classes that are at the bottom side of the prosperity divide. Now, I think all of this sets the stage, creates a kind of a culture of predisposition to charismatic leadership. We know from Max Weber, there’s bureaucratic rational leadership.

And that’s kind of like Biden. He said, oh, don’t look at my face. Look at what I’ve done. Look at my accomplishments. Look at the policies. That’s bureaucratic, rational leadership. Whereas Donald Trump offers us, look at me, all charismatic leaders do that. And my relationship to you, that’s where it’s at. That’s what my power is, and it’s what– you have to look at my signal.

So it gives us– I think, it calls for us to be more attuned than we ordinarily would be to the play of emotion, both what these strains cause people to feel, and I’m going to argue it’s shame, and the power of a charismatic leader to appeal to shame. So let me now take you on a brief journey to Pike County. Little green light. OK. How’s that.

Good.

Can you hear me OK?

Yeah.

Yeah All right. So here we are. And all right. This is what I saw a lot of. And where we are is in Kentucky. Not just Kentucky, but the light green part of it that’s Eastern Kentucky. This is congressional district Kentucky 5, which is the whitest and second poorest congressional district in the country.

It used to be– how beautiful the place is. Honestly, you wouldn’t think there was any problem. And this occurred to me driving around, what could be the problem? It’s just such a beautiful place. And these are kinds of the scenes you would see driving in from Charleston, West Virginia. And this is Pikeville itself.

This whole area used to be 80% for FDR New Deal Democrats. They were 80% for Bill Clinton. Not Hillary, but bill. And now in this– Kentucky 5 is 80%, the last two elections, for Donald Trump. And I went there and I’m taking you there because I wanted to know why. Why that switch?

So quickly, this is how it is. Pikeville seemed like a gem of a little town. But outside it, these are the hollers. And people in the hollers say Pikeville, that’s where the rich people live. And we live in the hollers. There’s always a dog in the road. It’s–

[LAUGHTER]

Somehow, sort of an ownership thing. And by the way, there’s often a single lane. And what I wondered happens when you have a car going up the mountain and a car going down. It turns out, people there know the terrain so well that they know how far back up the one driver would have to back up in order to make way for the second car, or the other driver would have to do. And they adjudicate that. All this local knowledge makes it, you’re a stayer. And suddenly, you’re going to have to be a leaver. But this is the kind of feeling you have about a place and the knowledge you have.

So OK. This is the look. I’m just sharing with you the look of the place. I know the guy who grew that corn. OK. But it’s not just any old place. And this isn’t coal, but it’s what the coal is inside of. This used to be a place of enormous pride and coal. We kept the lights on. We won World War I. We won World War II. We produced the energy.

And it isn’t just national pride, local pride and having coal. But these are coal miners who are locally seen, as you might imagine, a vet coming home from World War II, a great pride. And they’re proud of their blackened faces. We worked for our wage. And they have a–

[LAUGHTER]

–a little edge about their pride of coal. Like if they’re used to being told, now that’s just dirty energy. We need clean energy. Don’t you care about climate? This is an industry organization, friends of coal, as you can imagine. All right. This is the mayor of Coal Run. And he described his district, well, I’m mayor of two malls on each side of Route 23.

And he said, coal hasn’t really disappeared. And he’s in front of a mile-long coal train that was filled with coal. And this is paradox 1. My favorite word, paradox. Under Donald Trump, the big promise was, I’m going to bring back coal. Me, me, my powerful self will bring back coal. And I’ll also bring other well-paid jobs in. And you’ll be happy.

In the four years of Donald Trump’s presidency, he did not bring back coal, continued to decline, and new jobs– none of them came into the area. He offered them tax cuts, but how’s that going to help the second poorest district in the country? Not at all. So they got nothing economically out of Trump’s four years.

But this train is carrying coal because under Biden, who promised to cut coal, it actually went up because of the Ukraine paradox 1. So when coal jobs went out, people, especially the young and the educated, left for the Midwest industrial towns. And when coal went out, something else came in, and that was a crisis in drugs.

You’ve heard of the term deaths of despair. This is a center of that. Kentucky and West Virginia are the epicenter of Purdue Pharma’s marketing focus. In two states that don’t believe in regulation. Oh, big, bad government, deep state, you don’t want to regulate anything. And so the government didn’t know that Purdue had sent 75 salesmen. This just to Kentucky alone. And Oxycontin.

So I saw a lot of graves of young men. They were rural. They were blue collar. And in the Appalachian Morning News, you would see the death notice. But it would never give the cause. Shame. OK. All of this, I’m making this quick, I think, has led to a desire for charismatic leader, and that would be Donald Trump. These are faces of people that [INAUDIBLE].

And this is a neo-Nazi who brought a white supremacist March to town. And that’s what I did. I said, this is a perfect storm. Jobs are gone. Opiates are in. And now a bad answer to a real problem. But let me just, in the two minutes I have, say what I think it came down to.

This is a very proud region. And they– high on feeling individual responsibility for their fate. They were what I call a pride paradox. They would blame themselves for failure, and they were in an economic district that required them to fail in essence. Meanwhile, in blue states, happier economic circumstances in a more circumstantial culture of pride. So they were blaming themselves for a lot that was going on, that was structural.

And I believe that Donald Trump is a shamed man for his own reasons, which would be neither here nor there for us. Except that I think it gave him an acute understanding of the power of shame. And I believe that he’s put us through what I would call a four-moment antishaming ritual. It goes like this.

Moment one, he says something transgressive– all immigrants are poisoning the blood of America or they’re eating your pet cat and dog. OK. Moment two, the punditry shames Donald Trump. You can’t say that we’re an immigrant society. You can’t say that. That’s a lie. You can’t repeat lies.

Moment three, Donald Trump becomes the victim of the shaming. Oh, that hurt. Have you been shamed like I’ve been shamed. It hurts. I mean, look what they’re doing. They’re beating up on me. And he becomes the victim, and he talks to his followers as fellow victims. And then in moment four comes the great roar back. Out of victimhood, he becomes the rescuer of the shamed.

I believe that America, the Democratic part of America, has been listening to moment one and moment two, where he makes a provocative statement and the punditry shames him. And that the Republican part of America has been listening to moment 3 and moment 4, where he’s the victim and he and he roars back.

So I think we need to become bilingual. We need to understand what is said rationally, but we need to understand what is said emotionally. And then talk in a language they can– others understand whatever we have to say about real solutions to their real problems. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thank you very much. So, Lisa.

[LISA PRUITT] All right. Well, it’s great to be in Berkeley today. What a lovely weather day you arranged for us. And I am probably the odd person out on this panel, because the field work that I’m going to report on isn’t field work in a typical sense. I grew up working class in a community very much like the one where Arlie has spent several years.

I grew up in the Ozark Mountains of Arkansas and a persistent poverty county. One major difference from what Arlie described is that it was not a coal County. But my father was a long haul truck driver, and my mother was a teacher’s aide. So I am a dual national of bright blue California where I have lived for 26 years teaching at UC Davis. And I left Arkansas more than 35 years ago.

But I still have family living in Arkansas, including my mother. And so to some extent, the conclusions that I have come to about this political moment are really informed much more, shall we say, informally by my community of origin. And also, what I see in the community where I live and work now and the excesses of the bright blue bubble.

So the talk I’m going to give today is really critical of this bright blue bubble, and the role that all of us play in this unfortunate political moment in which we have been living for almost a decade. So I start with a tweet by an SNL guy the night that Trump was elected, “Rural = so stupid.” And then a photo of a bumper sticker I took in the northern neck of Virginia in 2011.

So this was Obama’s first term, a very rural area that is literally in the northern neck of Virginia. And so someone had made bumper stickers that said, we’re rural, not stupid. So there has been this long standing awareness by rural people of how they are viewed outside their communities.

So the Trump moment, yes, it is accentuating, it is aggravating, but this is not a new phenomenon in terms of how rural people feel and how they know they are perceived. All right. There we go. Oh, I was in Iowa two days ago, so I don’t have as many nice photos as Arlie does. But rather than bring you photos of my hometown, which would look very much like the ones that Arlie showed you, I thought I’d show you a little bit out of rural Iowa from Saturday, where I was driving through Boone County, Marshall County, Story County.

And so here’s the Republican office. Here’s the Republican headquarters in Boone County, which has a population of about 30,000. And the County seat has, I think, about 15,000. It’s really a very vibrant downtown, a little bit like Pikeville. Looked very vibrant. I’m always surprised when I go into a community like that and it is doing so well. It is actually quite a vibrant main street.

Now, just a few miles away from where the GOP headquarters was in Boone County, I took this photo. And so the Democrats are there too, and look at the issue that they’re leveraging. And if I have time, I’ll circle back to this. What we don’t do enough of is look for the common ground.

Many states, Iowa, Arkansas, Oklahoma, among them are going voucher crazy– well, we don’t really talk about vouchers anymore. We talk about school choice. This is going to have a huge impact on rural communities. And so there are ways that progressives can build bridges and find issues that rural communities also care about. And I would submit that we’re not doing that nearly enough.

And this one– this photo, I’m going to share because it really illustrates what Arlie was just saying. This was just down the road in Madrid, Iowa, also in Boone County. And I had never seen this particular sign before. I suspect that this homeowner had this sign made. And it perfectly reflects what Charlie was saying. They are coming after me because I am fighting for you.

So you and I are one and the same, and I’m going to protect you. Remember this absurd comment that he made a few weeks ago about how he was going to protect women? Yeah. Anyway. So I think the overarching point, again, of my rather admittedly disjointed talk is this. We have seen the enemy, and he is us. In other words, we are part of the problem.

We are in this unfortunate feedback loop with rural America. They hear what we say. And I studied some of the language out of the 2008 election. Let me see if I’ve got that. There’s a few– we had this acute polarization along the rural or urban axis in the 2008 election. Obama was cast, as Uber urban, and Sarah Palin took on the mantle of Main Street.

And The New York Times and lots of media of that ilk took this up, and they engaged in merciless rural bashing. And at the time, I thought, well, it’s a good thing that my rural friends don’t read The New York Times. But what happened shortly after that? We all fell into our media silos, and social media gave people the ability to take nasty things that were said about rural people and serve them right up in those people’s newsfeeds. And that is what has been happening.

So let me go back to where I wanted to go with this. And really, I’m just building off what Arlie was saying. We have failed to see rural America. I’m talking about, again, we bright blue Californians living in our bubble. And when we do see them, we talk about them– we talk about flyover states and yeah, whatever. We talk about them as the idiots who vote against their own interests, as if we think this is going to help convince them to listen to what we have to say that might bring them into our political camp.

When we do see them, we tend not to see their complexity. And that’s one reason I’m a fan of Arlie’s work. Is she’s going into these communities, like the one that she depicted in Louisiana and now in Kentucky, and she’s showing us nuance. We malign them. We call them names. I just want to give one example of how, again, there’s this talking past each other.

So color blindness, this is one that comes up in my community of origin. And it’s what I was raised with. My mother was so proud to raise me to be colorblind, because she knew what the predecessor to color blindness was in the South. And so this was– she wears her color blindness like a badge of virtue. And a lot of people there do, because that was the successor to open racial discrimination.

I didn’t realize until I was in a conversation with her, I think it was 2012 in the run up to Obama’s re-election, and she declared herself colorblind. She was put off by Obama. She voted for him in 2008. But my mother was a lifelong Democrat, very active in Democratic Party politics.

And suddenly, she’s saying she’s not going to– she doesn’t know if she’s going to vote for Obama again, because he said that thing about people who have a small business, they didn’t build it. And I said, no, what he meant was, right. you know the Commonwealth and yada, yada, yada, and so forth. And she said, well, I’m colorblind.

And I was flummoxed, because I’ve been living the life of the mind for a couple of decades. And I know that you don’t say you’re colorblind. We understand racial disadvantage. We’re not playing this colorblind game. And that was the first moment when I realized that we really are talking different languages. And Arlie mentioned a couple times, she’s focused on the working class people, those without a BA. Where do we learn things like colorblindness is not realistic? It’s per se. It’s not the thing. We learn them in institutions of higher education.

So there is all this information that has not been shared, and it’s not that easy. The Southern Poverty Law Center published a study a few years ago that showed that every public school in the country had done a bad job of teaching about the realities of slavery. So at what point is this information going to come through to people who didn’t have the benefit of a BA?

So they say they’re colorblind, for example, we call– am I at five ish? OK. They say they’re colorblind. We say, well, that’s racist. What? It’s like the Louisianans. These are people who see themselves as virtuous. And we don’t take the time to say, oh, well, here’s what I mean. Let’s talk about the history of racial disadvantage. Let’s talk about the legacy of this. It’s just like, you’re an idiot.

I mean, I see it. I see it among my extremely confident students at the University of California at Davis. They are very, very certain that they know everything. We are very certain. We are very certain as liberal elites that we know everything, that we have the right answers. And not only that, we say, oh, white privilege. You idiot, can’t you see your white privilege?

Those coal miners and those people who are living very disadvantaged lives are like, what on Earth are you talking about? So we are undermining our ability to have a meaningful conversation with people who don’t share our educational foundation. What I see is a lot of progressives who would rather be right than build cross-racial coalitions. We are so self-satisfied.

I love that little bit of marital advice, do you want to be right or do you want to stay married? We would rather be right than have tough conversations that bring people along to our understanding. And you know what, we might find out that we’re not absolutely right about everything. So we’d rather be right than build– than do the hard work of building cross-racial coalitions.

Is persuasion dead? What do we talk about? We don’t talk much about persuading the persuadables, although I am hearing it more these last few weeks of the election. Mostly, we talk about turning out the base. So we’re not having those conversations that we need to be having to persuade people that our way of doing things is the right way of doing things.

So back to Arlie. We need to be asking questions. We need to be seeking a basis for empathy. So here’s an example. This is David Brooks column from a few days ago, which I actually thought was very good. He’s talking about Trump, is a nightmare. Why is it that Harris isn’t running away with it? Why isn’t she running away with this election? Why are we told, every morning we get up, oh my God, it’s gotten even closer.

Very painful for we progressives. I know we’re scared. We’ve all admitted up here that we’re scared of what’s coming down the pike. But look at this example. A 2022 USC survey found that 92% of respondents agreed with this statement. Our goal as a society should be to treat all people the same without regard to the color of their skin, which is why only a third of Americans in a recent Pew Research Center survey said they supported using race as a factor in college admissions.

And I bet everybody in this room is in favor of using race in college admissions. So how do we have the conversations with people that would share this foundational understanding of racial disadvantage, and how do we balance that and maybe work with the sense of– this belief in colorblindness, this deeply, deeply held belief that so many people still embrace?

So I’ve written a couple of pieces that have been published in Politico. I’m highlighting them here. This was published in 2022 before JD Vance was elected Senator. I was one of the earliest people to criticize JD Vance’s book when it came out, and all the liberals were going, oh my gosh, this is amazing.

But you know what my observation was. He is throwing poor white people that raised me under the bus. And as Sonia Sotomayor wrote the book and she threw her Latina and Latino colleagues under the bus, we would not be praising her. If Barack Obama In Dreams for My Father had said these lazy people that I worked with in Chicago, we would not have eaten it up.

But when he put down working class white people, the initial reaction was almost universal positive. And I wrote a response to that, which was, I’m happy to say, well-received. The New York Times called it perceptive. And here we are. Look where JD Vance is now, where the left finally woke up. But it goes back to what Arlie was saying, we don’t see white class disadvantage. And that’s what led to this sort of beautiful embrace of Hillbilly Elegy by the left when it was initially published.

All right. I’ll just close with this, another political column. What is the Democrats– what has to be the progressives goal right now in the run up to the election? Lose by less. Fetterman was a great role model in getting out and visiting every state in Pennsylvania twice when he ran for Senate. And that’s what I wrote this piece about.

The Democrats have committed malpractice in the extent to which they have neglected rural communities and the investment that it takes to garner rural votes. Remember Chuck Schumer saying in 2016, for every vote– for every blue collar vote, we lose in Western Pennsylvania, don’t worry, we’re going to pick up two Republican women in the Philadelphia suburbs. And it didn’t work out. You can’t just leave rural voters unattended to. It’s another way of seeing them to have infrastructure, to have organizers in those communities. All right. Thank you so much.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thank you very much, Lisa. And finally, we hear from Jenny Reardon.

[JENNY REARDON] OK. So now for Kansas. You’ll hear a lot resonances with the previous talks, but you’ll also, I think, hear some new things. OK. So usually, it so goes California, so goes the nation. That’s what I heard growing up in Kansas and my friends who are here just don’t know yet because you’re not in California yet. So anyway.

But so I have recently gone back to my home state of Kansas in the wake of– actually, now it’s been a few years. In the wake of the 2017 election, decided to bike across the state– actually, I’m not biking across. I’m biking around like an idiot. If I really wanted to bike across, I would have done that four times by now.

And as I’ve done this– I teach at UC Santa Cruz in the sociology department, and I have put Frank’s book, What’s the Matter With Kansas, on my syllabus for issues and problems in American society that I had to start teaching on January 10, 2017. I was pretty sure none of my students would know anything about Kansas. So I decided when I went home to see my mom, I would go on my own little what’s the matter with Kansas tour and take some photos to put my PowerPoint. And that was going to just be it. But that’s not what happened.

And as I did this, I found things that Frank would have predicted. Like, there’s a lot of very conservative fundamentalist Christian signs that you will encounter, like this one here. But there was also a lot of things that I would not have expected. So as part– and I had learned that by cycling, I had decided right after Brexit to bike from London to Berlin. And I realized that that was like the best thing I’d ever done to learn about politics and my entire life.

And so I decided, what have I biked around Kansas? And I asked my friends, what do you think is more difficult, London to Berlin or Kansas? They were like, definitely Kansas. Anyway. OK. I won’t go into all the things I can say there. But as part of my tour– it’s a digital tour, I stopped at my best friend from college’s family farm, and she now lives in a home that she converted from the school house, the one room school house that her uncle and father went to school in.

And so this home continued its school functions that evening and served as a base for my personal What’s the Matter With Kansas discussion, and which I wanted to ask her family. So why was it that folks in Kansas voted for Trump? Why don’t most Kansans believe in climate change and why do they hate the EPA?

So there was a lot I learned from that conversation. One thing I want to throw in here real quick, I’m going to focus on what Uncle D said to me. But Aunt Amy– the family was totally split on who they voted for. But aunt Amy voted for Trump, and partly because– her argument was, and I’m hearing this about the San Francisco election right now, because he’s rich, so he doesn’t have any interest in it. He’s going to be neutral, because he already has money. So that’s what we’re hearing in San Francisco right now, too. So I thought I’d say that.

But I want to focus on Uncle D. So Uncle D, I’ve known for a long time. I went out to the farm when I was in college. I was one of these science nerds, and Uncle D would say, you know nothing up there on the hill to learn about the land. You need to be here. So we went out and we learned about the land.

And I dug out. I did a bunch of hard stuff and worked on tractors and whatever. So he and I have a long history of talking about a number of things, and so I’ve been looking forward to resuming the conversation. So I had some questions for him. And first I led by saying, so what are– what’s accounting for the deeper forces that have led to the increased challenges that face family farms? And this is a family farm.

And I asked him if the problem is big Ag? And he responds, what is big Ag? He’s like, what are you even talking about? The decline in family farms, he explained, had not been caused by big corporate farms taking over, so-called big Ag. Rather, improvements in agriculture created by mechanization and automation, so-called precision agriculture allow fewer farmers to control more land.

And this is something I’m hearing a lot about, is the role of technology and forcing people off the land. And how much it costs to be in agriculture now. And I’ve been thinking about to talk about whiteness, and which I have been talking about actually explicitly with people and finding ways to talk about it, which is an interesting thing we could talk about here.

That it’s hard– that the farmers and ranchers, by and large, in Kansas are all white. And that is partly the problem of getting into it now. As diversity, DEI, things of efforts have affected all kinds of other areas, it has made very little inroads into farming and ranching. And I think it’s important to think about why.

So anyway, so I then move on. I ask Uncle D about another perceived threat to farming, the EPA. Why do his fellow farmers hate the EPA? Because, he tells me, they want to regulate cow flatulence. So my tactic all along is to press people about details of where they are, where we stand, like, this ground.

And I said, so how is that working here? I pressed for details. And I say, this sounds like an apocryphal story, the government wants to regulate cow farts. It’s not the same problem as the one created by my use of the term big Ag. It is powerful symbolically, but what power does it have to really describe what is going on?

Although its votes rarely have the power, at least recently, to shift national elections, Kansas long has been a place where powerful symbols that shape national political discourse are made. Even the very question, what’s the matter with Kansas, which far preceded Thomas Frank By about 100– I don’t, 75 years.

But I’m interested in what is going on in Kansas, on this farm? So what’s the matter here? So in the same evenhanded, quiet way that I’ve come to expect from Uncle D, he accepts my point. So I ask again, what is the problem with EPA? What had this federal agency done that had directly impacted his farm? So he cites a few examples.

He said, it used to be that the food and drug administration regulations– first h said, new food and drug regulations of antibiotics. He said, it used to be that farmers could mix in their own antibiotics into the feed for their animals. Now, because of renewed concerns about their environmental and health effects, they will need certification from a vet.

Now, this example made sense to me because I had just earlier that day been to this amazing store, Bluestem, where you can– was kind of a Walmart for farmers where you can get anything, including all kinds of things– not anything, but all kinds of things, including plastic cow heads to practice your roping to medications for your livestock. These are vaccines to give to your cattle right here. So this ability to walk in and purchase these drugs is under threat without having to go to some vet.

So his second example is the Farm Service agency, the FSA. During the AG depression of the ’80s, he explains to me, the FSA provided subsidies intended to create a safety net for farmers, yet it did so too late after rural banks began to fail. Now, what struck me in both of these examples is that they do not involve the EPA.

The FDA and the FSA, yes. The EPA, no. So my thought there was, the problem with the ETA is not the problem with the EPA, but the problem with government regulation more generally. And the problem with government regulation is not a problem with government regulation, but the deeper problem of alienation. The feeling that the problems one is dealing with are not seen or understood.

The problem is not that the people in Kansas are ignorant, stupid– I think we should just eliminate that language from our political discourse– or fail to understand the truth, but that the truths produced by the population centers, which is Uncle D’s language, fail to map onto their realities and frequently threaten their ways of life that they have given all but their life for. And I can’t go into the health statistics of farming, but they are stark.

Although unseen by many scientists and federal agencies, which I study science in my other– most of the time, the roots of these ways of life run deep in this nation. They are those of the people of these prairies formed in, and I will stumble over the next words, white settler imaginaries, should we be using that language here, who are formed to understand themselves as rugged, free, hardworking, and God loving and know who know how to grow food and get on with the practical work of living. A lot more to say right there, but I only have a few minutes.

Yet, God and freedom and hard work fail to train our eyes on the action in these prairies that easily eludes but nonetheless creates the conditions of life and death. The ways of life of the family farm are under threat, and all the charisma and power of a billionaire, all the blustery invocations of greatness, of God, of country will not change the deeper forces at work, what my best friend’s uncle describes simply as mechanization.

In the name of progress and efficient, Tyson– all the photographs here are ones that I took on the bike ride, by the way– Tyson took cattle to the semi-arid plains of Western Kansas, and the planet’s largest underground aquifer is now being drained to sustain agricultural industrial meat production. In the name of precision, the machines grow more powerful, while the lives of too many become marginal or locked up. This is Leavenworth, which I just biked by two weeks ago. Leavenworth Federal Prison.

In the name of progress, God, and country, we don’t sully our commitment to hard work with too much talk of race or other forms of discrimination, to get to your point, Lisa. But sully we must for machines, God, truth, and hard work will not keep the water from running out, schools from closing, and towns from folding. How can we see the land anew?

So in my own small effort to forge the vision needed to live at ecological and social breaking points on the still, it has to be admitted, heartbreakingly beautiful plains and prairies of Kansas, in the fall of 2017, I decided to start biking around the state. In a time of media and tech-accelerated clickbait, I decided what I wanted to cultivate was a slow, don’t go fast on the bike, situated, ground up view of what’s happening. And what I have found is a state in transition.

In 2010, the deeply conservative Sam Brownback became governor and became a leader of the Tea Party backlash against Obama. He mobilized social conservatives by acting to severely restrict abortion and rejected federal funding for public health care. He also made such deep cuts that huge– tax cuts that budget deficits resulted.

This is my bike. This is whiskey, by the way. In response, Moody’s downgraded Kansas bonds, making it harder for Kansas to pay for things. This led to spiraling problems. School funding was cut to such a degree that the state Supreme Court ruled it unconstitutional. Job growth fell to a fraction of the national average.

Things got so bad in Kansas that in February of 2017, the Republican Kansas State house acted to repeal, acted against their Republican governor, to repeal Brownback state tax cuts and to implement tax increases. In July of 2017, Trump announced Brownback’s nomination to the newly created US ambassador at large for International Religious Freedom.

And Brownback went off to DC in January of 2018, taking his culture, war politics with him and leaving the state in ruin. My biking in Kansas began at this moment. And what I have discovered is a state eager to leave behind its what is the matter with Kansas reputation, and to get to work solving urgent, complex problems. The popularity of the Democratic Governor Laura Kelly– has anyone heard of her?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah.

[JENNY REARDON] Two people, but most of you have not. That’s interesting. It may seem remarkable in itself that there is a Democratic Governor of this deeply red state where registered Republicans outnumber Democrats almost 2 to 1. But it is even more remarkable that Kelly is deeply popular, 62% approval rating, making her the second most popular Democratic Governor and the eighth most popular governor overall.

Bucking what’s the matter with Kansas thesis, Kelly has been popular partly because she has focused on jobs and the economy, and she has delivered. Walmart, for example, chose to build its first case ready beef facility, I know you’re all not cheering about this, but in the part of Kansas Olathe, where my mom lived, and creating 667 new jobs.

Overall, the Kelly administration has brought 60,000 new jobs to Kansas, and this includes dairies– where are my dairy cows. OK. This includes dairies that are leaving California for Kansas, which has attracted the cheese industry to invest. Remarkably, during this period, the state also has witnessed what I would have thought, what I’ve said would have been impossible seven years ago, passage of major water law designed to conserve water.

Through silty land, these all were taken two weeks ago, once known as the dust bowl, course electric cables to power pumps to pull up water to feed the corn and milo that feeds the cattle that feeds the machines that process is one third of the beef produced in the US.

Wow.

This is partly because this region sits atop the nation’s largest underground aquifer. However, now that water in the aquifer is running out. It’s highly variegated conditions combined with a deep tradition of privatized land management has made it tough to address this issue, what many now recognize is a crisis. And this, I took, in the district water management. This red represents 80% decline. So you can see it really is declining.

But the fact that Kansas collects more data about water than any other state, a fact that goes against this reputation as anti-science, along with the astute leadership of a new generation of women leaders, this is changing. Lindsey Vonn, who is from my district, elected, yeah, who worked as a field organizer for Sharice Davids, also in my district, the first openly LGBT Native American voted to the house, was elected to the Kansas House of Representatives in November 2020.

In 2022, she worked across the aisle with Republican Jim Minix to try to pass an omnibus water bill. They got clobbered. They were opposed by agricultural interest groups. But the next year they succeeded. And when I was out in this region two weeks ago, I heard a lot of praise for Vonn, who was credited for coming to the district. And it is a long way, 400 miles from the Capitol. This is the third most remote place in America. And listening and learning.

Now through a variety of legal mechanisms, the producers, those who own water rights and use it to produce agricultural products, now are agreeing to work together to reduce water use. Now, granted, important questions remain like, who should be voting on who decides what to do with the water?

But the difference between now and five years ago when I was first out in Western Kansas is that those questions are on the table and being discussed. And one thing that unites these dynamic new women leaders in Kansas is that they have not been baited by the culture wars. There are many who have tried to make denying transgender rights a big issue in Kansas. This is heartbreaking, and it is maddening.

But Governor Kelly’s response has been effective. She has not made it a campaign issue. But when the time comes, she vetoes everything that comes across her table that would infringe upon those rights. And even though Kansans came out in full force, yes, to vote against a change to the state Constitution that would have changed its language about bodily autonomy and opened up a route for the state legislature to all but ban abortion, Kelly did not make this a campaign issue either. She stuck to the issues she knew would win rural votes in Republican Kansas– jobs, keeping towns from rolling away at the Ogallala Aquifer depletes, keeping schools from closing.

This is not to say that Frank’s what’s the matter with Kansas thesis is entirely wrong. One of the most significant votes to take place in Kansas in two weeks will be for the school board– state school board. Most of the positions are open, and it could become deeply conservative and return Kansas to its fate 20 years ago when members of that body declared evolution is a false doctrine and mandated the teaching of intelligent design. But that aside, I think we might learn more in this moment if we stopped asking, what’s the matter with Kansas and start looking at what’s going right?

[APPLAUSE]

 

[[CIHAN TUĞAL] OK. Thank you so much. Thank you so much, Jenny. That was really mind opening. So we have ample time for questions from the audience, and somebody will be passing around the mic. So if you could raise your hand, I’ll stack the questions. OK. Yes.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hello. Sorry, I’ve never used a mic. So keeping with this insight that rural and Republican does not equal stupid, can you guys theorize the anti-vaccination sentiments?

[JENNY REARDON] OK. So the anti-vaccination sentiments. So one of the– I think vaccinations come along with public health, come along with government. It’s a part of that more general critique of government, of people who are far away from us who don’t understand my children, their health needs.

Right now, interestingly, this is also affecting the transgender rights issue. There’s a big– the government doesn’t understand biology. That’s part of the critique happening right now. The thing that I was most struck by was a– I didn’t put up any signs I saw. By the way, there are not many signs in Kansas. People aren’t putting up signs, and I have more to say about that.

But one was one that struck me was save women’s sports with two X’s. And so I think– and there’s this embrace of the whole truth discourse, science discourse, and turning it back on people. So I think it’s gotten caught up in all of that. I think that’s what all the anti-vaxxer– it’s a much longer conversation to have about that, but that’s only two seconds about it.

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I think that says a lot from what I saw as well. Interesting, in Kentucky, similarly, there is a Democratic Governor who’s very popular because he’s doing great things. He’s brought a lot of economic opportunity in, and it’s interesting to study how he talks about COVID and about vaccinations. It is not from on top, and scientists tell us– he begins by saying– at 5 o’clock, he came on every day. He’s kind of– I’m with you, is what it said.

He said, we’ve never had to face something exactly like this, so we’re not quite sure. Our scientists are working around the clock to help us. But we’re going to have to go with the best information we have. And then he took it from there. And that is, we should get vaccinations. And you know, where Kentucky, team Kentucky.

He would always appeal to state pride, which he then put together with a muted– science doesn’t go with an insult. It doesn’t go with shaming you for not having a BA. He gave it to you. He didn’t take away your pride. Well, we scientists know because we’re educated. You country bumpkins don’t know. It undid that. There was something healing that we have to look at. We need to learn to talk that talk.

Yeah.

[LISA PRUITT] Yeah. Andy Beshear is– I love following him on Twitter. He is a master communicator. If you don’t follow him, follow him. I really hoped that Kamala would pick him as her running mate, because he is– he does this so well. He does the humility. It’s Team Kentucky. Love Kentucky. Kentucky people are so great. We know how to get things done. Amazing, amazing communicator.

But back to your question. I think things are getting worse by the moment in terms of this feedback loop that I’ve described and that we’re in. Five years ago. I had hope. But I see things happening where we are closer and closer to the precipice where we cannot– I don’t know how we step back because of the level of distrust that exists.

And so I think if the pandemic had happened pre-Trump, we wouldn’t have had all this pushback against the vaccines. We wouldn’t have had all this pushback against masking. But everything got politicized after Trump did his, as you say, this dance, this shaming. So sorry to be so negative. The upside is Andy Beshear. The downside is, I’m not sure how we get out of this mess.

[JENNY REARDON] And Laura Kelly.

Laura, I love Laura.

[LAUGHTER]

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah. Thank you so much for this panel. I had a question that plays into some of what you’ve been discussing right there, which is, there’s a panel last week, I think, at matrix where the long held contention that all politics is local was then, well, maybe now all politics is national. We’ve got national media, national social media, national existential questions that are going to be answered by nationally held bodies, such as the Supreme Court, maybe through these mechanisms that are national, the Electoral College.

But what you’re pointing to, especially with this perhaps contradiction between a Democratic governor of a deeply red state, you’re drawing on really the staying power of the local, of the decline of coal, of the aquifer. Very local processes, geological processes might be affecting these national questions. So just testing out that question of have we moved from all politics is local to all politics is national, where do you find yourself responding to these kinds of contentions?

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I’ll take that one. It’s fascinating to me, the local how different the discourse is about coal, what the locals say about it, what nationals think locals are saying is completely different. The most extreme group that I came to know– Eastern Kentucky Patriots, sent a group to Washington in 2020, and we’re very interested in renewables.

They’d look at some of– there are 300 sawed off mountains in Kentucky where– just mountaintop removal. And they’re saying, hey, be good to have solar panels up there. Be good to have wind turbines. That could give us good jobs. So the locals are looking for solutions and for local leaders and the national– So the circumstances, and we began with that, there are external factors that are at play. But the solutions, I think, are local to– and people who can hear locally.

Let me say one more thing, which is that there’s a whole literature, which I’d love students to do more on, that indicates that the left is less good at reaching out across the aisle than the right is. There’s a study, Pew study, my research assistant, Kirsten’s, who’s half of my book is really thanks to her digging here.

A Pew study that showed that a higher proportion of liberals are likely answer yes to the question, I break off contact with people who say something that I disagree with. Liberal Democrats do that a lot more than conservative Republicans. And the paradox, again, is that another finding shows that conservative Republicans are more likely to feel better about you and accept you if they sit down across the table from you, if they get to look at you and see how you smile and what is it you say. How do you blow your nose? A kind of more personal. So what a paradox. The very thing the left is too snooty to do is what the right is waiting for. That’s an opportunity.

Yeah.

[JENNY REARDON] I think it’s interesting because the thing about biking is, my friends and partners have been worried about, as a queer woman biking across the straight, this could be a problem for you. But the reality is that the bike actually– having an adventure to share with them. Also, you have ridden the roads that they navigate. You understand the conditions. And there’s always real curiosity about–

Basically, I have not found, who the hell are you? I’m like, well, how did you get here?

[LAUGHTER]

What did you eat? Why are you doing this. And think that– I think there’s been a lot of real interest– I doubt I’ve been would be able to talk to the people in the way that I have except that–

That we see you.

And also, I share a love of the land. And I think that really helps. Like, I care about the place. I always think that Donna Haraway’s point about, you have to have some skin in the game. You’ve got to– you can’t just come in with your critique. I did an interview last week with the head of GMD 3, the general– so one of the general– the Water Management District folks.

And he said, I really appreciate that you didn’t come in here with an angle. We’ve been burned. So yeah, I think because I really come into this with a real curiosity and love for land, I think that really helps. And on the national local thing, of course, it’s both. I mean, I– when I was driving the 400 miles, because I didn’t drive 400 miles from– I was at the prison, the federal prison in Leavenworth, which is far east as you could get all the way to far west.

But so I got a rental car and drove and dropped it off, and then bike from there. And anyway, I listened to a lot of talk radio. And that is national. The corporation that bought up all the local radio stations, like– and so people are imbibing national discourse. But it lands locally–

Yes.

–OK? And so I think there is this– there’s a real dialectic relationship between those things. And I find it fascinating watching how it lands differently in these different places. I was thinking a lot about that. That’s great.

[INAUDIBLE]

[CIHAN TUĞAL] I think Lisa wanted to say something.

That’s OK.

Go ahead. Go ahead.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] A favorite concept of mine is Daniel Patrick Moynihan’s famous statement, in politics, you’re entitled to your own opinion, but not to your own facts. It seems to me that we have– we not only have a disconnect between how we hear things, how we receive truths, or the blue commentary on the red truth, but it seems to me that there is a fire hose of misinformation that is coming at people. And if they are unable to parse it, then their truth is not necessarily truthful, but it’s the product of this fire hose of misinformation.

I’m not saying that people who go to college automatically become expert at parsing bullshit. We may become experts at making it and disseminating it even. But we recognize that certain things are and certain things aren’t. We recognize that creationism is a fanciful construction of a religious minority. We recognize that evolution is a truth.

In a world in which people cannot recognize the fanciful and the artificial and the completely nonsensical and the crazy from the truth, how are we to– when you’re sitting across the table, it seems to me you can’t make much progress in the conversation until you can get them to get away from the nonsense.

I think if you went to the people of Eastern Kentucky or the people of rural Kansas and said– talk to them about federal funds transfers, they would be stunned to discover that they are paying out a small amount of taxes and receiving a ton of money from, guess who? California. So they better shut up or we may stop sending the money. I think they have no clue that they’re living on federal funds and federal programs, and we’re the ones that are paying for them.

And they would be– I think they would be stunned to discover some of the truths that we to be truthful because of the way they hear these things constantly, whether it’s Fox News, whether it’s social media, whether it’s Donald Trump, whether it’s the local politicians. What do we do about that? How do we get over that? How we get past that?

[LISA PRUITT] So first of all, I just wanted to speak to the assertion that California’s subsidizing Kansas. There’s actually a lot of sophisticated work on that. I’d be happy to send you some. It depends on how you count things. So it’s not as simple as is often asserted by Krugman, who loves to do his white rural rage thing about every three months in The New York Times.

So it is actually more complicated. It depends on what you count. We would say the same thing– I mean, when we talk about the would be state of Jefferson up North, these people, don’t they know– Siskiyou County is getting a lot more from us than the other way around and so forth.

But, look, I don’t think any of us know how we’re going to– how we’re going to solve the disinformation– misinformation problem. I mean, if someone’s got a good idea. But the only thing I to do is to try to chip– is to try to have conversations with people and try to chip away and educate about where you are getting your information. Because there’s a lot more egregious examples of misinformation than Kansas being subsidized by California. And again, the nuances of that. I’m much more concerned about other types of misinformation than the subtleties of income transfers.

[ARLIE HOCHSCHILD] I would say that income transfers are a matter of shame to the people that get transferred to. They don’t like being on welfare. They depend on it. And they admit it. But they want to be– their pride system has them looking to be contributors, looking to be workers.

And I’ve talked to unemployed coal miners, a daughter of one, who said, as soon as dad was laid off, we went with our food stamps to another store out of the community. Didn’t want people to see it. There’s a whole hierarchy, oh, we’re not like them, them being people who are reliant on– so that’s fact. That’s a fact too. It’s feelings, but feelings are part of the factual world, I guess, as I think it is.

And I guess the second thing I would say is we need to know more about denial. How does denial Happen I think there are structures of plausibility that shift and make it more likely that you’re going to go into a fictional world, and doesn’t have to do with intelligence. And doesn’t even have to do entirely with education. It has to do with feelings. And we have to get rational about feelings.

In other words, got to really grok how they work and what’s going on. And finally, I would say that the left has been in denial about a whole bubbling trend for the last two decades, and especially since Trump, who’s lit the match, has come on the scene. So we’ve not been factual. We’ve not really looked at what’s going on. We’ve been in denial too.

[CIHAN TUĞAL] We’re past 1:30. Maybe the last words from Jenny, if you want to speak to that last question. [JENNY REARDON] Well, I’ll just say briefly. I think we all have a lot to learn about mis- and disinformation. I think in terms of the civic capacity of this nation to think about knowledge, science, and truth is so small. And it’s not that all of us in the room are enlightened either. I think there’s a lot to learn. And I think the more we can be open to that mutual empathy and learning and not being in denial, the better off we’ll be.

[LISA PRUITT] I’ve thought a lot about stubbornness and emotion or how do we characterize stubbornness? Because I think there’s a lot of stubbornness that is keeping both sides from having the conversations and reaching the places that they need to– where they need to be so we can move forward more constructively. Because it just seems like once somebody has dug in their heels, that– I mean, whatever Trump says is helpful and good and right. Then there’s all this shame about having to back up and say, oh, right? So I think stubbornness on both sides plays a huge role in what’s happening.

[CIHAN TUĞAL] Thanks again to all the panelists and to the audience.

[APPLAUSE]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authors Meet Critics: “Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era”

Recorded on October 9, 2024, this video features an Authors Meet Critics panel on the book Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era, by Paul Pierson, the John Gross Distinguished Professor of Political Science at UC Berkeley, and Eric Schickler, the Jeffrey & Ashley McDermott Professor of Political Science and co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies at UC Berkeley.

The authors were joined in conversation by Francis Fukuyama, the Olivier Nomellini Senior Fellow at Stanford University’s Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies (FSI) and a faculty member of FSI’s Center on Democracy, Development and the Rule of Law (CDDRL), and Didi Kuo, a Center Fellow at the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies (FSI) at Stanford University. Mark Danner, Professor at the UC Berkeley School of Journalism, moderated.

The Social Science Matrix Authors Meet Critics event series features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars. These events are free and open to the public.

About Partisan Nation

The ground beneath American political institutions has moved, with national politics subsuming and transforming the local. As a result, American democracy is in trouble. In this paradigm-shifting book, political scientists Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler bring a sharp new perspective to today’s challenges. Attentive to the different coalitions, interests, and incentives that define the Democratic and Republican parties, they show how contemporary polarization emerged in a rapidly nationalizing country and how it differs from polarization in past eras.

In earlier periods, three key features of the political landscape—state parties, interest groups, and media—varied locally and reinforced the nation’s stark regional diversity. But this began to change in the 1960s as the two parties assumed clearer ideological identities and the power of the national government expanded, raising the stakes of conflict. Together with technological and economic change, these developments have reconfigured state parties, interest groups, and media in self-reinforcing ways. The result is that today’s polarization is self-perpetuating—and intensifying.

Partisan Nation offers a powerful caution. As a result of this polarization, America’s political system is distinctly and acutely vulnerable to an authoritarian movement emerging in the contemporary Republican Party, which has both the motive and the means to exploit America’s unusual Constitutional design. Combining the precision and acuity characteristic of their earlier work, Pierson and Schickler explain what these developments mean for American governance and democracy.

Watch the video above or on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

Podcast Transcript

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[MARION FOURCADE] All right. Hello. I think it is Berkeley time. So thank you very much for being here. Welcome My name is Marion Fourcade. I’m the Director of Social Science Matrix. And I am absolutely delighted to welcome you to today’s panel on Partisan Nation: The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era, just published book by our very own Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler.

I’m very excited about this book panel, not only because the topic is so urgent, but also because we have an all-star lineup to present, to discuss, and to moderate. So today’s event is part of our Author Meets Critics series, and it is co-sponsored by UC Berkeley’s Institute of Governmental Studies.

Before I turn it over to our panelists, let me briefly mention a few other upcoming events for the fall semester at Matrix. Tomorrow, we are hosting a talk by Ann Washington from NYU about the limits of predictive algorithms.

And then later in October, we will have two Matrix on point panel on the election. One that’s called Voices from the Heartland with Berkeley’s Arlie Hochschild. And then late in October, Shifting Alignments in the 2024 Election, looking at the changing electorates across the US.

And then in November and December, we will have our last two AMC Authors Meets Critics of the calendar year, a book on authoritarianism in China and health politics in China, and then another book on children without paper– migrant children without paper.

But before I leave the floor to our distinguished panelists, let me introduce our also distinguished moderator, Mark Danner. Mark Danner is a writer, reporter, and educator who, for more than three decades has written on war, politics, and conflict.

He has covered Central America, Haiti, the Balkans, Iraq, and the Middle East. And written extensively on American politics from Reagan to Trump. Danner holds the class of 1961 distinguished chair in undergraduate education at UC Berkeley, and he is the James Clark Chace professor of Foreign Affairs and the Humanities at Bard College.

Among his books are the Massacre at El Mozote, Torture and Truth, The Secret Way to War, Stripping Bare the Body, and Spiral– Trapped in the Forever War.

Danner was a longtime staff writer at The New Yorker and is a frequent contributor to the New York Review of Books. His work has appeared in Harper’s, The New York Times, Aperture, and many other newspapers and magazines.

He has written and co-produced two-hour long ABC News documentaries and an eight-part documentary series on US foreign policy and genocide. And he has received a very long list of honors for his work too long to cite them all, but including a MacArthur Fellowship in 1999. So welcome, all. Welcome, Mark. And the floor is yours.

[MARK DANNER] So we’re a month less a day from the election. And I wonder how many of you, like me, feel like you’re going crazy with election news and can’t really even take it anymore. I wonder how many are desperate that it all be over.

And I wonder how many think that if the election goes in a certain way, the country will be irremediably altered, will be changed into something different, something unrecognizable. Can people raise their hands?

Well, that means that you fit right into this book, Partisan Nation– The Dangerous New Logic of American Politics in a Nationalized Era. Polarization has been written about a lot, but this is by far the finest study and the clearest study and the most convincing study I’ve ever read about the subject.

Not only is it clear and convincing, it comes at an absolutely perfect time because, though it’s a work of respectable political science, it’s also very open to the general reader who is taking a very deep interest in what’s going on in our country during the next 30 days.

And it seems to me, situates some very critical questions and delves into them. One in particular is, have we reached this level of polarization before in the United States? Has it ever happened before?

It examines that question in a very interesting way. It also examines the question of the context that is the relationship of polarization of the political parties to political interests, to state parties, to the media.

And it makes, I think, an extremely convincing case that we are on a bit of territory the United States has never found itself on before. That this particular moment we’re in is unprecedented.

And the word dangerous, the dangerous new logic of American politics is very much, it seems to me, justified by the text of the book, which is, depending on the results of this election and then the future, we could be in a place where the defects in the United States constitutional system could become absolutely critical.

And in effect, the entire system could– they don’t say this in the book, but I’m going to infer it, begin to collapse. So that’s the good news. Having said all this, the book is a fascinating read. It’s bright, it’s smart, it’s completely up to date, and it is thoroughly convincing.

And I’m hoping today we can have a discussion that will take account, not only of the book, but of the election that’s looming over us. It’s hard to avoid it. It seems to me that the coterminous nature of this is completely unavoidable. Here we are.

So I hope I’m asking our panelists, both our co-authors and our respondents, to take account to some degree of the election in their remarks. What we’re going to do is everybody is going to have 8 to 10 minutes. We’ll then have the authors respond for a few minutes. Then we’ll have an open discussion here. And we will then throw it open to the audience.

And I’m going to introduce panelists as they speak. They have many books. They have many honors. I’m going to give you a slightly shortened version of these introductions. And we’re going to start immediately to my left with Paul Pierson, who’s the John Gross distinguished professor of political science at Berkeley, where he also directs the newly established Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative.

He’s the author or the co-author of six books. And I’ll mention in particular, Winner-Take-All-Politics, which is a remarkable, extremely convincing study and dovetails very well with this book. It’s called Winner-Take-All-Politics– How Washington Made the Rich Richer and Turned its Back on the Middle Class. I guess I’ll ask you to start out with 8 to 10 minutes

[PAUL PIERSON] I think maybe I will do that. Thanks, Mark. And thanks to this panel of brilliant and busy people for sparing us some time and sharing their thoughts with us today. And thanks to everybody at Matrix for putting this event together.

I’m going to- I only have eight minutes or so. So I knew that Mark was going to start by talking about the election a little bit. And so I was reaching for the obvious metaphor that I think leads into a discussion of the book, which is right now, there is a storm heading directly towards the coast of the United States, a massive storm, which people will pay a lot of attention to and is going to have massive consequences.

But I think what we’re trying to do in the book is to say why so many storms? Why so intense over such a long period of time? And seeming to grow in intensity over time, which calls for a somewhat different kind of conversation.

And just in thinking about what’s happened with growing polarization in the United States, I think it’s worth just like taking a second to realize that Newt Gingrich, the Gingrich Revolution contract with America, which was seen as a startling intensification of political conflict– partisan political conflict in the United States. That was 30 years ago.

So this has been building for almost half a century now. And so what Eric and I try to do in this book is to figure out why is it so much more intense and seemingly so much harder to dislodge now than at other periods in American political history?

And we do spend a lot of time thinking about the constitution. The constitution was long thought to limit the prospects for intense, durable polarization. We refer in the book frequently to the idea of a Madisonian framework for politics.

And there’s a big asterisk there because those of you who know about the Constitutional Convention, Madison actually lost most of the big battles at the Constitutional Convention. He came away from it distraught.

But also thought that the Constitution was a big improvement over the lamentable articles of Confederation. And so he wrote these brilliant papers and Federalist Papers to explain how this new political system might work and what some of its virtues were, most famously, federalism 10 and federalism 51.

And so in there, he develops ideas about checks and balances, separation of power. Famous idea that ambition must be made to counter ambition. That’s the famous line. But also his ideas about the extended republic.

This really brilliant political theory movie in which he says we used to think you could only have democracy in like a city-state, but it’s actually much better if you have a far flung country where there’s an enormous diversity of interests, so that no single faction is likely to become dominant.

So you combine separation of powers with federalism in a large and highly diverse nation. And a lot of the– if you think about the system of representation that existed in the Constitution, it really emphasizes localism. People are elected from a particular geographic location in the United States, except for the presidency. Politics was to be grounded in localism.

Tip O’Neill’s famous line that all politics is local, a line that you don’t hear people quoting about contemporary politics very much for good reason, but that grew out of key features of the structure of the constitution.

And the result of this in Madison’s thinking was you’re going to get shifting coalitions. There’s not going to be any majority. And so the parties themselves are going to be relatively plastic, open to various kinds of groups. And there are going to be new issues coming up from below constantly.

Think about– you could use as an image like plate tectonics, and the way in which the Earth’s crust is being constantly recycled and reoriented in ways by things that are coming up from below. And it’s going to be impossible to sustain a single clean division in politics.

And we argue in the book that opened to roughly the 1960s, this basic logic was borne out. Doesn’t mean that there weren’t times of intense polarization. There were. I was telling my undergrads, Hamilton, the show Hamilton is basically a story of political polarization, of intense political polarization. There are other stories in there too.

But that’s part of what it is, the formation of that first intense partisan rift. But as we show in the book, it didn’t last very long. Even the worst case of intense partisan polarization, the Civil War, horrific as that conflict was, the partisan nature of it dissipates pretty quickly after the Civil War. Lasted roughly 15 years. And we go through that story as well in the book. So one could look at that and say, OK, the Madisonian logic of the constitution works.

But what we also try to show in the book is that this was not simply an automatic result from the Constitution, that it depended instead on what we call a constitutional order, which includes key intermediary institutions. And the ones we talk about in the book are state and local parties, interest groups, and media. And through most of political history, these have also been highly decentralized.

And just a side note for the political scientists in the room, I think one thing that we’re trying to do in this work, is to suggest a need for a thicker view of politics that thinks about this kind of meso level of social organizations and institutions as being really critical in political life rather than a more stripped down model which has voters, politicians, and a set of rules.

And that’s what makes politics work. And what we’re suggesting is you really need to think about these intermediary institutions to understand how things work. But through most of American history, these intermediary institutions were quite decentralized.

And as a result, they reinforced the centrifugal tendencies encouraged by the constitution, so that local things, there’s a lot of diversity in what’s happening in different localities. And the parties become pretty loose holding companies.

Always shifting and maybe with different messages and different parts of the country. Will Rogers famously said in the 1920s, I think, I’m a member of no organized political party. I’m a Democrat. And there was a powerful logic leading to that.

Over the course of the 1960s and 1970s, all of these intermediary institutions nationalized in the United States. They become part of a national system more tightly connected to the two parties. We have two chapters in the book where we talk about how and why this happens. I’m not going to say a word about it.

Instead, I’m going to finish by noting a critical political event that happened just as this old constitutional order, relatively decentralized constitutional order, was drawing to a close. So just a couple of months more than 50 years ago, Richard Nixon resigned from the presidency.

And there’s actually– by coincidence, there was the cover article in the New Issue of the Atlantic by Tom Nichols, which starts by talking about what a wonderful presidential character George Washington had. But it goes on to say, like most American presidents have had character, except for the former guy.

And in the course of this actually, interesting article about presidential character and about Washington, Nichols says even Nixon resigns at the end. But I think what Eric and I would suggest is that what’s changed is not the character of the president, but the political context in which all politicians are operating.

So back in 1972– and remember, really striking, like Nixon had just won in a landslide. And he was an extremely popular president, unlike Donald Trump, who had won without actually winning a popular majority at all.

But what happened? What happened was that Republicans at that point were a loose team. They were a team, but with enormous amounts of diversity that were being generated by that old constitutional order.

Many Republicans in Congress were eager to protect the powers of Congress. They cared about an executive that was usurping important powers that belonged to the Congress. Many of them hailed from states with moderate electorates.

Organized interests created crosscutting rather than stacking cleavages one on top of another, and most organized interests were only weakly aligned or not aligned at all with political parties. So you were not getting the message if you were a politician from organized interests that you have to stick with the team. You have to stick with the party team.

And these state electorates operated in information environments, decentralized media, largely non-partisan media. They were open to negative news about politicians from the party that they favored. So the informational environment, radically different.

So in that context, some national Republicans could and did break from Nixon. And that in turn created a self-reinforcing cycle, which ultimately undermined his presidency. Support for him gradually weakened across the board.

The investigations went forward. There were lots of prominent Republicans who said that the investigations were serious. You got the same message from the media. And so strikingly as these dynamics unfold, Nixon’s popularity starts to go down, not just among Democrats, not just among independents, but among Republicans.

It’s still much higher among Republicans than it is for Democrats. But it falls dramatically as Watergate continues to unfold. So by the end of that period– by the end of this process, Barry Goldwater goes to the White House and says there may be 8 or 10 Republicans who will vote not to convict you in the Senate, 8 or 10. And Nixon resigned.

Maybe that says something about his character. I’m not so convinced. You could just ask yourself, hypothetically, if Richard Nixon had been president, accused of the same things in today’s political environment where the pressures to maintain your connection to a nationalized team are much, much stronger, would he have resigned?

As we know, much worse actions by a president January 6 did not lead to anything like this kind of self-reinforcing cycle. So that suggests to us that we’re really in a very, very different political setting than the one that existed 50 years ago, and that the constitution does not function the same way in a system in which there are these intensely bound, nationalized partisan teams.

So today’s Republicans operating as in the language that Levitsky and Ziblatt used in their recent book, is semi-loyalists. They’re fair weather friends of the Constitution, but they’re willing to desert it if that’s where the political incentives arise. This may have less to do with their character than it does with the fact that they operate in a very different, more nationalized constitutional order. And Eric is now going to tell you more about that.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Paul. Eric Schickler is the Jeffrey and Ashley McDermott, professor of political science, and he’s co-director of the Institute of Governmental Studies here at Berkeley. I’ll mention a couple of his books. Disjointed Pluralism– Institutional Innovation and Development of the US Congress. And Filibuster– Obstruction and Lawmaking in the United States Senate. Eric.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I want to echo Paul’s thanks to Matrix for putting this event together and for our terrific panelists for sharing their reactions to the book. And so just to pick up in a sense where Paul left off, our argument is we retain the same formal constitutional rules of the game as before, but it’s now surrounded by a nationalized set of mediating institutions that are tied to each national party.

So state parties are now integrated elements of nationalized networks of ideological activists, campaign donors, and policy demanders. They no longer offer a distinctive, regionally-based input into party politics.

And I think a key part of the historical story in the book is that repeatedly when we have had polarization in the past, these state parties provided a kind of entry point for new interests to enter into party politics that cross-cut the parties. And that was a key part of how polarization basically eroded over time in these earlier eras.

Now that there are parts of these nationalized networks, instead of providing that kind of entry point, instead they tend to reinforce polarization. Similarly, interest groups are much more nationally focused and more closely tied to one or the other party.

And we have a more nationalized partisan media environment, especially on the right with the rise of Fox News and Talk Radio that send consistent messages to partisans across the US, in contrast to the decentralized press of the first 150 years.

In other words, we’ve had partisan press before, but it was largely a locally rooted partisan press that allowed different kinds of messages within a party across areas, whereas now it’s much nationalized.

And our argument basically is that our constitution is a poor match for this new political configuration. And that, that has major implications both for the quality of governance and the durability of Democratic institutions. I think I’m going to bracket the point about discussion of governance for the Q&A so that we have get to our discussions more quickly.

But I do just maybe want to flag the one point that if you think about the policy agendas of the two parties legislatively, there are distinctive kinds of opportunities and challenges posed by polarization and the associated legislative gridlock for Democrats as compared to the Republican agenda, which can rely more greatly on executive authority as well as judicial authority.

I want to spend most of the time talking about the impact on Democratic institutions. And we see two main threats arising. First is an entrenchment of minoritarian rule. And I guess here, it’s important to note that while much of the language of polarization is presented in the literature in a way that’s kind of symmetric about both parties, and we do argue in the book that there are important dynamics that are common to both parties.

There are also important asymmetries. And one of those asymmetries is rooted in the extent to which party coalitions now map onto urban rural divides in the US politics and our constitution gives decisive advantage to the more rurally-based interests and especially smaller states.

And so this is actually– and the first period in US history in during period where a party can consistently win a minority of votes for the Senate nationally and win a majority and control that institution, which if you think about our normal logic of what leads to moderation, if you can’t win power without moderating, then a party has to moderate.

But Republicans are able to win a consistent majority in the Senate without necessarily needing a majority. And there are similar dynamics in many state legislatures. And then crucially, they’re able to entrench these advantages.

So, for example, think about through domination of the Supreme Court, where Democrats have won the popular vote for President in seven of the last eight elections, but six of the nine Supreme Court justices are conservative Republicans.

And you can think about this ability to have a majority in the Senate and a majority on the court as allowing deck stacking to take place in a systematic way for favored interests, making regulation much harder, disempowering unions against campaign finance limits, allowing voting laws that are intended to make it harder for Democratic constituencies to vote.

Essentially, hacking the constitution, using hardball tactics that are allowed under the constitution or the court says are allowed to further tilt the playing field in their favor and entrench power. And so you can think about a gradual process of entrenchment that limits Democratic responsiveness.

Second main threat, which Paul talked about with respect to Watergate, is the threat of executive dominance and abuses of power. And I think that the key historical point here is Congress has played a key role in the past in checking presidential abuses. But the checks in the system are undermined by strong party teams operating across institutions.

And so one way to think about this is that these checks rely– its implicit parties are teams. Teamsmanship is consistent with how US institutions have always operated. But at the same time, it’s always counted on members of Congress having incentives. Where you sit determines where you stand and where you’re from determines where you stand.

And what we have now is a situation where party often trumps that. And as a result, that undercuts how ambition counters ambition. All right, so I don’t want to go– I was into too much depth.

But the thought experiment of thinking about what will– in a second Trump administration, the ability of these checks and balances to be exerted through Congress, we’re deeply skeptical of it because of this teamsmanship that will allow any investigation– would essentially prevent investigations under unified party control and undercut their effectiveness under divided party control.

So you might ask, well, is it kind of dismal portrait what can be done about this? And I want to note, we’re not confident about any specific solutions. This is not a book that says, here’s the silver bullet. This is what will solve this problem.

We do suggest some reforms that we think might help at the margins. And part of that has to do with trying to empower centrist factions that cross-cut the parties. So institutional innovations like fusion voting that might give some politicians in, say, swing states the ability to build these kinds of cross-party coalitions, undermining some of the self-reinforcing dynamics we talk about.

But given the serious threats posed by entrenchment by a conservative minority, we also think one of the main implications of our analysis is that if Democrats were to have a window of opportunity to enact policy changes, that they would need to use that window of opportunity to push in particular on democracy related issues.

So there are going to be a number of demands for that were to happen either soon or in four years or at some point in the future to their key policy demands that are urgently felt by their coalition. And in the past, Democrats have tended to prioritize those over political reforms, I think for good reason.

But I think the implication of our argument is that if the political playing field is being steadily tilted in a direction– in a contrary direction, they need to– if they have this kind of opportunity, they would need to think seriously about things that limit the rural urban bias, whether that’s new statehood admissions, about limits on gerrymandering, voting rights– legislation on voting rights, voter suppression to at least take a set of strategies off the table.

And to do any of this, of course, they would need to end the filibuster. And glad to talk about the logic of that. And our basic point is none of these are easy and none of these on their own are sufficient. But the implication of our argument is that a democracy agenda has to be a priority. It’s not going to be sufficient, but it’s essential. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Eric. Francis Fukuyama is the Olivier Nomellini senior fellow at Stanford University’s Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies, and a faculty member of FSI’s Center on Democracy, Development, and the Rule of Law.

We all remember his 1992 book, The End of History and the Last Man, an international bestseller. His most recent books are Identity– The Demand for Dignity and the Politics of Resentment, and Liberalism and its Discontents. Professor Fukuyama.

[FRANCIS FUKUYAMA] OK, thank you. I’m going to– can you hear me? I’m going to stay seated. So Didi and I are here to represent the other side of the Bay. We don’t want the East Bay to have control of American political science. So we’re performing a very important function here.

So I really like the book, and I want to congratulate Paul and Eric for it. It really brings together– polarization has been the focus of a lot of people in recent years. But I think you do a really good job of using the Madisonian constitutional framework as a way of understanding what’s really happening under the surface. So very good work on that.

As a comparativist, I must say that the problem that you describe is actually familiar in a lot of other countries. So for example, Latin America, unfortunately, copied our presidential system. Many Latin American parliaments are very divided and polarized and they cannot pass legislation.

And that leads to what they describe in this book happening in the United States, where actually policy is made by other parts of the government, by presidents or by the courts. And so polarization does not mean gridlock. It means that the real action simply moves to another part of the government.

And that’s Argentina, for example, presidents pass budgets by executive order. I mean, it’s really crazy that Congress doesn’t actually have any input into the basic function of government. But I wanted to make three comments about the different parts of the discussion in the book.

So the first is about media. You talk about how media has fallen into the same polarization that characterizes the political parties and so forth. I think that actually that media landscape has changed even since you wrote the book.

Like me and a lot of other people, we’ve been saying for the last eight years, yes, there’s polarization. There’s all these causes of polarization and there’s social media and the internet. And I just think that that’s become a much more important part of the explanation. And it’s partly qualitative.

I mean, the DW-NOMINATE scores can tell you about voting in Congress, but our polarization has this really very disturbing undercurrent of just complete fantasy. The Democrats are controlling a hurricane and sending it against Republican voting areas in red states.

I mean, stuff that had been completely– conspiracy theories that were completely outside the Overton window of normal political discourse are now inside that window. And I don’t think that, that would have happened if you only had Fox News.

And, in fact, I think Fox News has 1.2 million regular listeners. It’s not very big. Joe Rogan has 12 million, just by himself. And there are other influencers that I think are actually shaping the national conversation and permitting the kind of extreme forms of reality perception that really characterize, especially views on the left.

Now, the second thing I want to bring up is the discussion of the courts and the court’s relationship to the executive branch. So one of the sources of diversity that continues to exist in this country is the bureaucracy, both on a federal and a state level.

You have many commissions, multi-member commissions that by law, have to have bipartisan control. You have different parts of the bureaucracy that have become bastions sometimes of resistance against other executive branch policies.

Republicans are completely aware of this. And they’ve been claiming that the bureaucracy is captured by the left and doesn’t respond to the will of the people. But it depends on which part of the bureaucracy you look at.

The border agents and policemen and parts of the military are not captured by the left. And so it depends on what part of it you’re looking at. But it is a separate area where the dominant party really does not exercise full control. And they’ve got plans to fix this.

So one of the things I personally been very worried about is the stuff that’s contained in the now discredited project 2025, which I think still actually remains a living part of what a Republican administration would seek to do.

At the end of the first Trump administration, they had this executive order creating Schedule F that would allow them to fire basically any federal bureaucrat. You think about some of the positions that are currently for cause positions where it’s very difficult to remove people like the head of the IRS.

Richard Nixon actually wanted to get the IRS to audit his enemies. And you can imagine if you had a Trump loyalist in that position what that person would be able to do. And I fully expect that even though Trump himself has disavowed Project 2025, that this is so core to the thinking of so many people on the right, that they have to get control of the administrative state, that some version of this is going to be put in place.

And that’s why think that a second Trump term is not going to look like the first Trump term because they understand that personnel is their big weakness. They just didn’t have the people to execute or implement the policies that they wanted. And they’re going to try to fix that from the get go.

The other thing is they’re getting a lot of help from the Supreme Court. You didn’t go in great detail into, for example, Chevron deference, the decision– the Loper Bright decision that was taken at the end of the last term of the Supreme Court.

So conservatives will tell you that ending Chevron deference was really simply returning control to Congress and taking that authority away from bureaucrats that never should have had it in the first place. That’s a bunch of BS.

Because Congress is not capable of issuing mandates that can really direct the bureaucracy because of the polarization and other factors. So what it means is it’s a transfer of influence from the bureaucracy to the courts. And all of that stuff is now going to go back to the courts.

The original Chevron decision back in 1984, basically the court argued that the courts do not have the capacity to make decisions on how many parts per million constitutes a dangerous toxin. And therefore, the expert agencies had to have that power. But if you read the decision, they’re taking it back a little bit dishonestly. But that’s what’s happening.

There are other things that are going on. I’m amazed that more attention has not been paid to the Jarkesy decision, which also came at the end of the current– of the term that’s just concluded. This is a really powerful blow against the administrative state because the case underlying it was the SEC imposing a penalty on, basically, a fraudulent financial firm.

And the court in Jarkesy said, you can only do this with a jury trial, which basically just completely undermines the administrative cloud of the administrative state. And we’re going to see the consequences of this where you can’t even find a fraudster without basically taking this thing through a whole expensive long judicial process.

So between all of these things, there is an effort to move a lot of bureaucratic authority, reduce its diversity, and the checks that it presents and put it under the control of a conservative controlled court.

So then the final thing I’d like to say is that this whole book made me reflect on that Madisonian system as a whole. And it wasn’t that great a system in many respects. You could say that there are good forms of diversity and bad forms.

So the good forms, in the economy, some people fish salmon, other people grow cotton, other people do other sorts of things. And so that’s OK. But some of the forms of diversity that existed under the fully functioning Madisonian system were like a bunch of racists running segregated school systems in the South.

I was particularly amused since I care about good government that you mentioned that one of the things that has nationalized politics is the end of big city political machines and civil service reforms that required people being hired on the basis of merit rather than as political payoffs.

So you didn’t have local bosses that needed to be courted by the national parties in order to get anything passed. And in my view, that’s a good thing. But I think you’re right that it did have that effect.

The one thing I would like to raise as a question is that this Madisonian system really does– it’s required because of our electoral system. You say that I think in one of the concluding chapters, that if you didn’t have a first past the post electoral system, Duverger’s law wouldn’t kick in and you wouldn’t have a two-party system that then requires all this diversity within the two parties.

If you went to a European proportional representation or ranked choice voting, maybe you would have actually the diversity represented in separate political parties rather than in this big mush of diverse interests within these big tent parties.

That seems to me a pretty good argument for at least ranked choice voting. I mean, we should at least be experimenting with whether we can modify our electoral system to allow the diversity to actually be made explicit and explicitly represented within the party system rather than this old, very complicated, in a way very non-transparent Madisonian system. So those are my comments.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you, Frank. Finally, I’d like to introduce Didi Kuo, who’s a center fellow at the Freeman Spogli Institute for International Studies at Stanford. She’s a scholar of comparative politics with a focus on democratization, corruption, and clientelism, political parties, and institutions, and political reform.

Of her books, I’ll mention the forthcoming one, which is The Great Retreat– How Political Parties Should Behave and Why They Don’t.

[DIDI KUO] Great well, first of all, Thank you so much– can everyone hear me? For having us today. It was really such an honor and pleasure to read this book. And I want to congratulate Eric and Paul on yet another major contribution to the study of American politics and democracy. The hits just keep on coming.

And I wanted to focus on two reactions that I had while reading this. The first is, as a political scientist, I think the book does a really good job walking this narrow tightrope of having a really clear argument that is theoretically and conceptually robust, that gives us a really clear research agenda for the future, but that is also really broad in its historical scope and in the integration of a lot of what we would call variables that discuss polarization into a coherent analytical framework.

So that was really satisfying to read. But the other perspective I had was, as a citizen reading this book, it was really depressing because I am holding on to the hope that if Kamala Harris trounces Trump in four weeks time that maybe he’ll disappear, the Republican Party will reconstitute itself, and that will have just been an eight-year fever dream.

And this book disabuses you of the notion that that’s even remotely possible. So I’m going to focus these comments on the scholarly implications of the book so that I don’t depress us further, although I will note that I think the most relevant personal fact, to this discussion is, I grew up in Newt Gingrich’s congressional district outside Atlanta.

And at the time when I was a teenager, I thought it was so cool that he was a political science professor, which turned out not to be cool. He did a lot of bad things in our politics. But maybe the real answer to all of this is one of you should become the next Speaker of the House. And you can ride this ship.

So I wanted to focus on three contributions of the book that I think lend us a lot of food for thought. The first has to do with this meso level institutionalism that Paul already mentioned. The book does a really good job explaining why we can’t look at formal institutions alone, but in fact have to look at them alongside the mediating institutions that exist.

Now we have a lot of examples from the literature on Democratic backsliding and the real life examples of democratic backsliding that the sequencing of this is usually an illiberal leader is elected to power and then quickly dismantles the formal institutions.

So sometimes this happens secretly because it turns out institutions are just individuals who can be replaced, but also they very actively go after the media or the opposition as well. Whereas the sequencing and partisan nation is a little bit different.

Paul and Eric argue that the systematic weakening of the meso level institutions, the mediating institutions, happened through a process of nationalization. So they weren’t really under direct assault by an illiberal leader. But instead, there was this structural change over time, beginning in the 1960s that lent them sort of a vulnerability by the time you get intense partisan polarization.

And I kind of wonder about, first of all, whether or not nationalization is always weakening. If we look at the 19th century United States, the process of nationalization that integrated really disparate rural and urban areas through the railways and that led to national communications fostered democracy.

And this is a story of modernization theory and comparative politics as well. You need to have some national interest that can be clearly delineated in order to create political demands. And the progressive movement was a national movement that went after corruption.

We know that federal authority administratively expanded in the 19th century as well, which led to a sort of modernization of governance. So I’m wondering if there are thresholds when nationalization is a problem versus when it’s not, or if we would know ex-ante that nationalization is going to be a problem.

And to return to this question of backsliding, I also wonder if nationalization is a necessary condition for backsliding to be effective, because we know that in a bunch of countries that have experienced backsliding, sometimes their institutions were strong and sometimes they were weak.

But if you have a really ambitious and entrepreneurial, illiberal leader, they can undermine those institutions no matter what. So I wonder if there’s just something about formal institutions that is more prone to attack these days because democratic publics are just losing faith in them to begin with.

A second point that I think is raised by the book that provides a lot of food for thought is this localism point. I think that the book is really compelling and pointing out why to have the kind of pluralism that fosters the Madisonian constitutional vision, you need a really distinct local element.

And it needs to be able to be translated into our political parties and our national governing institutions. And in the 1960s, Eric and Paul argued that the managed advocacy revolution and the kind of nationalization of interest group representation made it much more difficult to have this kind of localism.

But localism hasn’t gone away. And one thing that is absent from the book is a mention of people and how they are participating in politics. And there are two trends that I’d be curious about your thoughts on.

The first is there has been massive protest in the past few years. In 2020, for example, many Americans participated in the largest protests for racial justice in the nation’s history. And this mirrors a trend globally of massive protest where citizens are increasingly taking to the streets because, according to some analysis, they maybe can’t achieve systematic change at the ballot box.

And usually, protest politics ends up manifesting itself in your national politics somehow. But we don’t necessarily see that happening in the narrative of the book. And I’m wondering why. And the second trend is that localism exists, like we all live in local communities.

We know from Eitan Hirsch’s work on political hobbyism that the worst kinds of partisans are the ones who don’t participate at all in politics, but are instead kind of liking partisan messages on social media. But he finds that when people do get involved in their communities, particularly when working on small bore solutions to problems, they can build and sustain a political momentum.

And if we think about the 1990s literature on social capital, we know that the practice of community engagement can create more trust interpersonally and also institutionally. It can create a sense of political efficacy.

So are there promising examples of civil society activism or local politics that you see maybe having resonance or are our mediating institutions just too weak to be able to effectively absorb them?

And I did want to go back to the democratic backsliding conversation, which is in a few examples from the past two years, Brazil re-election of Bolsonaro, France’s re-election– well, I guess she made it to the final round again, Marine Le Pen, and also Poland’s election in which the Law and Justice Party was once again competing.

You had these coalitions of pro-democracy, civil society, and opposition groups that came together, set aside their political differences, which sometimes were quite significant, to say that our number one goal is to block the anti-democratic leader.

We also saw a huge, massive uprising against Bibi Netanyahu’s judicial reforms prior to October 7th of last year. And I’m wondering what it might take in the United States to get the same kind of uprising or kind of crosscutting movement in support of democracy, or if you think that’s possible.

And the final thing to note is about political reform, which Eric spoke about. I urge everyone to read the chapter in their book on political reform because there are so many reform options on the table. And one thing that’s promising but also perilous about this moment in American democracy is there’s more interest in appetite for political reform than there has been, I think, in my lifetime.

And there are just so many options on the table, ranging from your colleague Chemerinsky saying that we should just rip up the constitution and start anew, to Lee Drutman arguing for proportional representation in Congress, which seems very unlikely to happen, as you note, to really smaller things like small donors in elections and ranked choice voting, that kind of thing.

I think that the peril of reform is that there is an enormous amount of time, energy, and money going into these reform efforts. And there’s a real shiny object problem, where every two years, you have a lot of people backing the one reform to rule them all.

And Eric, you say there’s no silver bullet, but the fact is that these resources are being spent. So if you had to pick a reform that you think would have the most effect, which is a really annoying question and I can never answer it when it’s posed to me, what would you say?

And maybe institutional reform has less of an effect than something that would reform the mediating institutions that you talk about, like something like supporting local journalism or a liberal federalist society is something that people have also talked about for the judiciary.

So what is the relationship between all of the energy that’s going into reform, but the very disparate kinds of things that are on the table and the things that will have the most impact? But I just wanted to conclude by thanking you for this book, which was so fun to read, and everybody should read it. And it’s going to start so many really productive conversations about the state of our democracy.

[MARK DANNER] Thank you. Thank you, Didi. Thanks, everybody. I’m going to please–

[APPLAUSE]

I’m going to ask our authors to take a couple of minutes to respond. But I want to say– take the privilege of the chair here and say that I was struck by something Frank said, which is the role of fantasy. I’ve been covering this election and spending some time at Trump rallies.

And I’m struck– I was at one in Las Vegas the other day, and I’m struck by the degree to which I’m supposed to be a journalist. And this entire rally is floating on a sea, not of lies, lies don’t capture it, but fantasies.

And we are seeing a press, whether regional or national, now it’s almost entirely national, utterly unable to cope with this. It simply is faced with social media. Faced with the stovepiping of the current media. It’s unable to cope with these things.

And as we speak, as Paul began with the great image of the hurricane coming ashore, that hurricane is becoming the main issue on the Republican side and the complete failure of the state to do anything to help those who have been hurt by the previous one and will be hurt by this one.

And all that is a complete fantasy. And it’s remarkable to me that, that in the last several weeks of this election can essentially be taking over the information war. And I’m not sure, the remarks in the book about nationalization of the media are melancholy and persuasive.

But I agree with Frank that they don’t necessarily go far enough. There seems to be a difference in kind rather than just a difference in scale. So I hope we can talk about that. Please why don’t you each take three or four minutes to respond, and then we’ll open this up?

[PAUL PIERSON] OK, can you hear that? I’ll try to be brief because that allows me to duck a lot of issues and save some others’ for Eric. Great comments, really. And I appreciate the nice things you said about the work too.

I’ll just maybe pick up on a couple of things that Frank said and focus on one of the many interesting issues that Didi raise. I mean, I think, Frank, I think we agree with you on all these points. And the media is really hard– is hard for social scientists to study, to try to really measure the impact of it.

We’ve had David Brockman here who’s done a great job on that recently. So I think social science has lagged behind the rapid change in media. But I think– and we try to convey this in the book. And I think there is growing evidence about the powerful impact of Fox and other forces on the right, just how important they have. And as you guys say, that’s only been amplified recently.

There’s an article in The Times this morning, the big thing in Republican campaign ads now in national elections is trans athletes, trans athletes. they’re letting trans people compete in women’s sports. And that’s like the thing that is in most, including ads, ads about Kamala Harris in negative ads about Kamala Harris.

And so that plays into this is like the big national issue that we’re going to argue about. But of course, Fox News has been beating that drum for a long time. It doesn’t actually rely on social media to get it out there.

So I agree that social media seems to be just turning the dial to 11. But the dial has been at 10 for quite a long time. The point about the courts, we completely agree with that. I mean, it is and we actually– I mean, book is covering a huge amount of ground, but we say like the most powerful policy maker in the United States now is the Supreme Court. It’s close.

And just if you think about that for a second, do you want to code the United States as a democracy? When that is the case and Democrats have won the popular vote in 7 out of the last 8, it’s almost certainly going to be 8 out of 9 presidential elections, but they only have three seats on the Supreme Court, there is no way to remove these people.

They can be on the court for 40 years. They can do whatever they want, pretty much. I mean, that is– and including lots of decisions like the ones that you mentioned, that to the extent that people are aware of them, they’re extremely unpopular.

So if elected officials did things like that, they would run the risk of not being continuing to be elected officials. But the Supreme Court really doesn’t have to worry about that very much. So I agree with you. That’s just a huge thing.

So Didi, there’s so much there. I want to pick up on this point about the comparative– thinking about this comparatively. And one of the things that we do try to do in this book when we were trying to do too much. So again, very wide ranging.

We are trying to connect the discussion of what’s going on in the United States to this broader conversation about Democratic backsliding. And the kinds of things that make countries vulnerable.

And, of course, it’s not just one thing. It’s not just one story. But we draw in a lot of ways on that literature. So I’ll just give one example that’s very germane to what we’re doing, which draws on Guillermo O’Donnell’s work, in which he talks about how democracies have a system of vertical accountability and a system of horizontal accountability.

Horizontal accountability means basically checks and balances. Vertical accountability means the people hold the government accountable. And what we suggest in the book is that in the United States, the system of vertical accountability, of electoral accountability rests in significant part on horizontal accountability, because that is where voters can see that something has gone wrong, that somebody is behaving like an authoritarian.

So that was the Nixon story. You start to see this division at the national level, the politicians, and that sends messages to voters amplified by nonpartisan media that everybody is consuming. That world does not exist anymore. So no horizontal accountability means it is much harder to get vertical accountability.

So I think we’re not saying that the process of democratic backsliding looks exactly the same in the United States. There are other ways in which you can get into trouble. And there were some people, when we did a book workshop around this book, very smart, prominent political scientists said, this is happening everywhere.

We don’t really need a story about the United States. We need a story about the rise of right wing populism. And we do think you need a story about the global rise of right wing populism. But it’s also true that a lot of comparative work suggests that the two biggest protections for a democracy, if you just want to say, what are the variables that if you mark– if you score high on them, you’re not going to get democratic backsliding?

How wealthy are you? And how long have your institutions been in place? So that makes the US– the fact that the US is in the company of countries like Hungary and Brazil actually makes the US a huge outlier when you think about the fact that we’ve had our institutions for so long and we’re very wealthy country.

And we think this nationalization, combined with the constitution, really helps us to understand why the United States is more vulnerable to what’s happening in a lot of poorer, less, well, institutionalized countries.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] Yeah. Thanks so much for both of those sets of comments. Super helpful. I think maybe build a little bit off of Paul’s comments, we thought about– I think in terms of the backsliding comparative point, one of the– and I think this connects to Frank’s point about well, our electoral system, the two partyism, are institutions giving rise to this two-party system effects the ability to counter an anti-democratic leader?

The coalition in France that get against is a cross party– multipartyism is crucial to it. Prior– for much of US history, while we had an ostensibly two-party system at the national level, there were important openings– initially in the 19th century for third parties that were locally rooted or regionally based to force issues onto the table that the national parties didn’t want to deal with.

You could think about the progressive movement as a kind of cross-party, often used third-party strategies to influence. And those, partly due to changes in electoral rules, banning things like fusion voting, as well as nationalization of our politics, those are gone. You don’t have that Avenue for regionally-based third party movements that could play that brokerage role.

So one of the key reform questions is, are there ways to create functional equivalence of that? And so that’s where reforms like ranked choice voting and fusion voting come in as at least the potential to create those kinds of coalitions.

Because one way to think about it is the Madisonian system survived for so long because, as Nelson Polsby put it, we had 100-party system. Now we have a two. That was always an exaggeration, but it captured an element of truth.

Now that we have this two-party system, these kind of rickety machinery becomes really problematic. And I guess just the one other point I’d want to make in response to actually one of Frank’s comments is one of– the Madisonian system, you’re right.

This book is not a celebration of the Madisonian system as it used to be. We go to great lengths to think about the systematic problems with it. Our claim is that the problems for democracy that we had before were different from the problems we have now.

Not that they were in one sense benign and now they’re not. But I just want to point that it’s easy to get lost in these discussions of polarization. It used to be this well-functioning democracy. Now, it’s not. That’s not our argument at all. But our current configuration has distinctive vulnerabilities that we haven’t had before.

[MARK DANNER] Well, I’ve been thinking about vulnerabilities as you’ve been talking, and a word I would use is apocalypse. I’ve been going to these rallies. And one of the things that strikes me is the degree to which the rhetoric is about the end of time.

On the Democratic side, if this election goes a certain way, there will be the end of democracy. The system, as we know it, will be extirpated. It will be something beyond that. And the interesting thing, which I think not many of my friends know is that the other side is saying exactly the same thing.

That if you go to a Trump rally, he simply says, if you don’t vote and vote in a certain way, we’re not going to have a country anymore. Our country is going to be destroyed. Kamala Harris is dumb as a rock. She’s going to– but it’s not just that she’s dumb, I mean, this incredible, just incredible language.

And it makes me think A, whether that is completely historically unique, whether we’ve ever been in a situation like this or whether you could compare it to 1876 or some other election, number one.

And number 2, what are we looking at after the apocalypse? I mean, obviously, when we’re talking about Democratic backsliding, we’re talking about, for example, the night of the election, counting the votes. What happens in the following days. The election going into the courts, the advantages, as Frank and Paul both pointed out, of certain Republican judges in the court system, what comes after the apocalypse.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I mean, just real quickly on that point, we’ve had elections in the past where both sides thought the stakes were existential. And in some cases were. Well, I think what’s unusual now is having the sequence of elections.

Basically, if you go back to 2000, pretty much each election has felt that if you look at the rhetoric and it’s just been increasing and mounting. And so I don’t think it’s distinctive to– this particular election feels and is distinctive.

I don’t want to deny that. But the idea of both sides saying the stakes here are 1800, that was the case. 1876, that was the case. 1860, that is the case. 1896, that is the case. But it’s not– you wouldn’t see that for 20 years with it just ratcheting up.

[MARK DANNER] But how do you account for the degree of fear that’s being expressed? And obviously, this fear, it isn’t just as it were, academic question. I mean, there have been two assassination attempts on Trump. I mean, many people are expecting violence at the polls. Who knows whether this will happen.

But how do you account– I mean, I’m struck at the Trump rally by how frightened people seem, how incredibly threatened they seem. I suppose part of that, you could talk about what Frank said about fantasies. But is that all we’re talking about?

[ERIC SCHICKLER] I think we have not talked– I mean, as much in our presentation about the asymmetries between the parties. But certainly, if you think about the media structure, there’s an important asymmetry there.

And so I don’t want not to oversimplify, but on the right, the media structure has fed various narratives, some of which are rooted in actual things Democrats want to do, many of which have no relation and have created that sense of existential stakes.

I think my own view is that– or our view, I think, is that on the stakes of what Trump would do is rooted in actual experience. Like one could make the argument that– if you think about Mitt Romney in 2012, one might say that the rhetoric outpaced– the rhetoric on the left about what it meant outpaced the reality. I think that’s a reasonable claim to make. I think by the time we get to 2020 and 2024, I don’t think that’s the case.

[PAUL PIERSON] One thing– we didn’t have time to talk about this. I mean, I do actually think these chapters about what changed are cool. They draw a lot on Eric’s wonderful racial realignment book, and the critical role of the Civil Rights movement and kind of pivoting American politics to a system in which it was clear which was the Liberal Party and which was the more Conservative Party.

And a lot of things feed on that. But over time, what happens is the stakes in American elections grow. How different the world is going to be if one side wins or the other side grows. And you start to see– and that feeds on itself in various ways. It feeds on itself with interest groups.

So you see interest groups picking a side, because if you care about abortion, whichever side of that issue you are on, it becomes increasingly clear that which party controls the presidency and controls the US Senate is going to determine which party, not the individual politician, which party.

And so the groups start to join sides, and that just reinforces it. It just creates this more– so we say in the book the things that used to create breaks, things about this more decentralized system of intermediary institutions that used to create breaks on polarization. Now actually they become engines of polarization.

So the stakes have grown in ways that really are very real. And, I guess, the other thing like fear sells. Fear sells. It certainly sells on the right. And I think it’s interesting to actually think about the differences between the right and the left.

And of course, I have my own, like, yeah, January 6. That’s something to be fearful about. That’s like a real thing. That’s not a fantasy. But, Harris is actually, I would say not selling fear. They actually made a– Biden was to a fair extent. But I think they made a conscious decision that actually that wasn’t what they wanted, even though I think they probably do think that the effects are– that the stakes are.

Turning the page is actually an appeal to get out.

Yeah. And you want to sell– you want to offer hope and stuff like that. But on the right, and certainly, and again, I think media is much more of a driver of what’s been happening on the right. I think that whole– the media environment is just very different on the Democratic side.

And so I do think one thing that we struggled with in the book was we did want to talk about polarization because we do think the development of these two parties as teams all the way down is extremely important.

But the danger in any discussion about polarization is you start to act as if the two parties are the same. It’s just mirror images. And we know there are lots of– a lot of journalists want to talk that way. It allows them to be objective, to think of themselves as being– a lot of political scientists want to talk that way because it allows them to appear to be objective.

But the differences between the two parties, they’re both affected by this nationalization, but they’re affected in quite different ways. And actually thinking about these mediating institutions, I think helps us to understand the ways in which they’re different.

The appeal of a minoritarian strategy is just much greater on the right than it is on the left. The idea that democracy, true democracy in which majorities are making the decisions, that is a threat on the right in a way that it is not a threat.

[MARK DANNER] Frank, Didi, do you want to comment on that, the issue of fear or the– Didi. No. I think I will– since we have 10 minutes left, why don’t I throw this open to our audience. Yes, sir there.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] I think this analysis is very convincing. I’m not quarreling with it at all. But one thing that hasn’t been mentioned specifically, I’d really be interested in whether you guys think that this has played a role in the polarization that you’re talking about.

And what I have in mind is the decision of the Republican Party in the 1960s and ’70s to develop the Southern strategy, which is also a religious strategy because of the overwhelmingly evangelical character of Southern Whites.

And what I kept thinking about when you were talking about this is the overwhelmingly Manichaean understanding of the world characteristic of this evangelical culture. And until the Republican Party catapulted them from the margins of public life to its center, that manicheanism, which you can see, I mean, throughout, all through the ’30s, ’40s, and ’50s, it’s really there.

But these guys, the leaders of the evangelicals, didn’t imagine that they would ever really run the country. So suddenly, they’re there and a lot of the fantasy, a lot of the apocalypticism, a lot of the manicheanism of the extreme polarization.

At least it looks to me like it has something of an evangelical base. And therefore, the decision of the Republicans, I was struck by 2015, all 32 senators representing the coastal states, only two were Republicans, because by that time, the Republicans had decided not to try to appeal to an educated electorate. So they stopped going after those states, so that you have a very distinctive voter base. And anyway, isn’t that decision central to what happened?

[MARK DANNER] Thank you. I think we’ll collect a couple of questions. And I want to mention in response to that question that if you look back at George Wallace’s speeches in ’68, it’s remarkable to what degree they foreshadow Trump. Quite remarkable. Should we collect another couple of questions. Sure.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Just a quick comment. In the 1950s, the American Political Science Association had– all right, all knows what I’m talking about. They bemoaned the fact that we had Tweedle Dee and Tweedle Dum parties. Don’t be sorry for what you wish for. One thing that didn’t come up, primaries, the McGovern rules. Do you have any–

[MARK DANNER] Yeah, that’s in the book. It did come up in the book. How about one more? Right back there. Yeah.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. I’m curious if you think that the legal class and if you want to call that the bar or the legal academic class should be also considered a mediating institution because the Powell Memo and the rise of the Federalist Society could arguably be considered a nationalization along partisan lines that maybe wasn’t nearly as explicit prior to that.

And they also temporally overlap with that process that you identify in so many of your other meso institutions. So I’d love to hear if you think that should be considered such an institution as well.

[MARK DANNER] OK. Paul, do you want to start on that?

[PAUL PIERSON] I’m going to let Eric. I think a lot of these are right in his wheelhouse.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] All right. So first, a question about evangelicals, yes, that is– and the way you frame it is a little bit differently from how we discuss it in a useful way, I think. Our argument, though, is that the racial realignment is pivotal because of unleashing the entry of the Southern White conservatives into the Republican Party, which then meant, as each new social issue came up–

Think about abortion, guns, sexuality, gay rights, The base of the Republican Party increasingly included that constituency. And at the same time, driving away gradually from the Republican Party, the northeastern establishment moderate wing.

And so we see the racial realignment as the kind of essential first step in that process. And we talk about why Republicans had an incentive to capitalize on that, that basically, they had the opportunity they saw to create a conservative majority or a powerful electoral.

At the time, it seemed like it may well be an electoral majority, and for moments, it was, by appealing to that. But the Manichaean point as an element of that, I think, is something we don’t develop. But that’s quite useful.

[MARK DANNER] It’s worth noting that Lyndon Johnson was aware of this right after the Voting Rights Act passed. He predicted it.

[ERIC SCHICKLER] Yeah. No. So we view that as the critical first moment. On the point about the legal class, I think we– so we do talk about the Federalist Society. We thought about it in terms of basically policy demanding group.

So in other words, as part of the group realignment story, the Federalist Society bringing together kind of pro-business interests and over time, religious conservatives and bundling them together in through this legal strategy.

So we don’t necessarily think about the legal system as a separate mediating institution. But that’s not to say that that’s not a super useful move to think about, and especially going back to Tocqueville, the role of the legal class that is, yes, sound extremely promising to think about.

Then the point about primaries, yes. And political scientists have wrestled with estimating the impact of primaries on polarization. But we think that one of the key points is that having voters pick candidates through direct primaries in an era of sorted parties is very different from an era of unsorted parties.

So when primaries are first introduced, it didn’t promote polarization, because if you looked at the constituencies of both parties, it spanned ideologically. Like direct primaries for Congress existed from 1910s, 1906, and it didn’t create polarization, we would argue.

But primaries plus this into this sorted electorate, which is what happened in the wake of McGovern Frazier certainly, we think, changes the incentives of politicians where the concern on the right, especially has been about being primaried.

And so the way to avoid that is to be a loyal team player and be as conservative. Up until recently, it was– and still to basically now, be as conservative as possible so you don’t get primaried. And that obviously overlaps with geographic sorting, redistricting strategy. If you worry more about– if you have less worry about a general election, the primary looms more large– looms largely.

[MARK DANNER] Didi or Frank, do you want to comment on any of these?

[DIDI KUO] I want to weigh in with something Paul has written about, which is this– so one thing that someone mentioned is how the Republican Party mobilizes the working class or non-educated voters.

And this educational realignment has happened in the United States, but also in most of the advanced democracies of Western Europe, where you used to have an identifiably social Democratic Party on the left that had an overwhelming economic ideology that was supposed to be cross-cutting, like across racial and ethnic and religious cleavages, because it was about class instead.

And now, as you’ve had parties that are a little bit more similar economically since the 1990s, in particular, the working class has been more up for grabs. And Paul has written really persuasively about the nature of plutocratic populism, whereby the right has to wrangle together a difficult coalition of plutocrats and business, which is its loyal group.

But also has to use a lot of appeals based on fear and grievance to make sure that working class voters also give them the numbers to be able to win elections. And I think that, as the parties of the left become the parties of the educated urban professionals, that’s going to be problematic as well.

[MARK DANNER] Trump has been really most successful– and Lindsey Graham, when he said Trump is the only one who can build our party, he meant that he was the one who could most sufficiently scare people by this vision of hordes of Black and Brown people coming in to build up its non-college educated White base, mostly male. And you see that at the rallies very much so, that he’s a real artist at this.

[PAUL PIERSON] Maybe I’ll use that as an entry to say one slightly optimistic thing at the end of this. So when Eric and I were writing the conclusion, you’re supposed to say like, OK, now how do we fix all this.

And we gave a general public talk books Inc. And one of my neighbors was there and it was like I’d planted him there to ask this question. He said, well, when a chemist or a physicist describes something complicated, we don’t expect them to come up with some solution. Like it’s enough. You’ve done your job. And I said thank you. And we all went home.

But we do have this thing in the conclusion where it’s the kinds of reforms we’re talking about don’t really feel like they’re up to the scale of the challenge, though I do think have to think small things can feed on themselves. We believe in feedback loops.

And at the margins, they can make a difference. And that can make a difference. So they’re definitely worth doing. But I think something where I think there’s some grounds for optimism, though, maybe I have less optimism than I did a few years ago is demographic change.

So Lindsey Graham before he jumped on board the bandwagon, the Trump bandwagon said the problem with this whole strategy is we’re just not– they’re just not producing enough old, angry White guys. That’s not the demography of the country. Our supporters are dying off and the new supporters are different.

And I do think even though one of the most interesting developments, actually, I think in recent electoral politics is Harris is holding support among White voters overall. It’s not at all clear that she’s going to come close to matching the level of support that she has with Latinos and Blacks. And that could be the difference in the election.

So the idea that as the country becomes more diverse, that will make the coalition– this revanchist coalition, too small to be electorally competitive. I still think that, that may turn out to be right. I think there’s good reason to think that time is not on the side of this right wing populist movement. I’m less confident in that than I was a few years ago.

[MARK DANNER] I hate to think it’s my job to quash any optimism at the end. But I have to say that if Harris gets her current polling among Latinos and Blacks, she will lose. And we’ll have to– obviously, we’ll have to see what happens. But those numbers are distinctly worrying. And Trump’s penetration of those groups has been quite remarkable. And it’s a big story all by itself.

It’s 5:30. This could go on for a very long time. I implore you all to vote and think of the election and not go crazy. And I would ask you, I would thank our sponsors very much. Praise this book. You all should go out and buy it. And at least now join me to thank our authors and our respondents.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Matrix On Point

Matrix on Point: War is Back

War is back. Open military operations in Europe and the Middle East have driven an escalation of geopolitical tensions in those regions. The conduct of warfare is changing, too, fueled by the deployment and sometimes live-testing of new technologies. Meanwhile, a new cold war seems to be settling in. The growth of China’s economic power and worldwide influence has triggered proliferating sovereignty disputes and defensive trade and security policies.

In this Matrix on Point panel, UC Berkeley experts discussed these and other transformations, and offered their views on what to expect in the short to medium term.

Recorded on September 30, 2024, the panel featured Michaela Mattes, Associate Professor in the Charles and Louise Travers Department of Political Science at UC Berkeley; Andrew W. Reddie, Associate Research Professor at UC Berkeley’s Goldman School of Public Policy, and Founder of the Berkeley Risk and Security Lab; and Daniel Sargent, Associate Professor of History and Public Policy at UC Berkeley, and Co-Director for the Institute of International Studies.

Co-sponsored by the Berkeley Institute of International Studies, the panel was moderated by Vinod Aggarwal, Distinguished Professor and Alann P. Bedford Endowed Chair in Asian Studies, in the Charles and Louise Travers Department of Political Science; Affiliated Professor at the Haas School of Business; Director of the Berkeley Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation Study Center (BASC); and Fellow in the Public Law and Policy Center at Berkeley Law School, all at UC Berkeley.

Matrix on Point is a discussion series promoting focused, cross-disciplinary conversations on today’s most pressing issues. Offering opportunities for scholarly exchange and interaction, each Matrix On Point features the perspectives of leading scholars and specialists from different disciplines, followed by an open conversation. These thought-provoking events are free and open to the public. Learn more at https://matrix.berkeley.edu.

Podcast Transcript

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everybody. Welcome. Thank you for coming to our first Matrix On Point of the ’24 ’25 academic year. My name is Marion Fourcade. You know me. I’m the director of Social Science Matrix here. So when we planned this panel with Julia Sizek, I should give her kudos because she really helped organize this back in the spring, we decided to call it War is Back.

And of course, it’s always a challenge to plan an event months ahead because you don’t know how things will evolve. But sadly, the panel and its title are more appropriate than ever. Ongoing military operations in Ukraine and the Middle East have expanded further. New technologies continue to be deployed to deadly and sometimes unprecedented uses, for instance, very recently in Lebanon.

And meanwhile, a new Cold War seems to be settling in. The growth of China’s economic power and worldwide influence has triggered proliferating sovereignty disputes and defensive trade and security policies. So to help us grapple with these issues, we have assembled a fantastic panel of Berkeley faculty. Note that today’s event is co-sponsored by the Berkeley Institute of International Studies.

Now, before I turn it over to the panelists, let me just give you a preview of what we have in stock for you the next few weeks. Tomorrow, we have a presentation by Bradley Onishi on Project 25 and Christian Nationalism. On October 9, our next Author Meets Critics will feature Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler for their most recent book, Partisan Nation.

And then the next two Matrix On Point will be about the election, Voices From The Heartland with our own Arlie Hochschild next October 21, and then shifting alignment in later that same week actually. But right now, our topic is war. So let me introduce our moderator, Vinny Aggarwal.

Vinny Aggarwal is distinguished professor and holds the Allan P. Bedford endowed chair in Asian studies in the Travers Department of Political Science. He’s also an affiliated professor at the Haas School of Business, the director of the Berkeley Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation Study Center, and a fellow in the Public Law and Policy Center at Berkeley Law School. His authored books include, among many titles, Liberal Protectionism, International Debt Threat, and Debt Games.

And he has not one but two forthcoming books, Great Power Competition and Middle Power Strategies and the Oxford Handbook on Geoeconomics and Economic Statecraft. His current research examines comparative regionalism in Europe, North America, and Asia, industrial policy and the political economy of high technology economic statecraft. So without further ado, let me now turn it over to Vinny. Thank you.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Should I come up there.

[MARION FOURCADE] Don’t have to.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, well, I have a mic, so I will just sit down and introduce my colleagues here. So it’s a great pleasure for me to moderate this panel. I think you were optimistic. You said the panel might be obsolete. Unfortunately, I don’t think this panel will ever be obsolete. I think war will be with us for a long time. So even if there’s not war involving the United States, there’s clearly wars going on around the world. And there has been since eternity. I think so, unfortunately, or fortunately for those of us who study war, there’s lots of room to do research.

So without further ado, I’m just going to introduce Michaela Mattes, who’s an associate professor in the Political Science Department. Michaela’s research looks at cooperation and conflict issues, alliance formation, and things like that. Andrew Reddie, who’s at the Goldman School of Public Policy, with whom I work a lot on high technology conflict, looking at quantum computing, AI, synthetic biology, and cybersecurity. And he will be talking about the technological aspects of international conflict.

And Daniel Sargent, my co-conspirator in the academic freedoms seminar series that we run, who is a professor, both in history and public policy. I think beyond that, you can go look at their bios online. So I’m not going to waste too much time. And I’m just going to start in order. Michaela, why don’t you take the floor and you can begin?

[MICHAELA MATTES] OK, so I wanted to start a little bit by interrogating the title of this event. That war’s back, which assumes that war was gone at some point. And certainly, my colleagues who study Civil War would heavily disagree with that. I mean, civil wars have been active and alive and well, you could say, in the 21st century. Thinking of Syria, Yemen, Ethiopia, North Sudan, and then also Myanmar, Burma.

I think when the claim about more being gone maybe is a little bit more applicable to interstate war. And so that’s where my commentary is actually going to focus on, so wars between recognized state members of the international system. And here, of course, there was a time about 15 years ago or so, like in the 2010s, where scholars and observers were very optimistic that war is in decline. So very famously, there was Steven Pinker’s Better Angels of our Nature argument that war is in decline.

In general, we’ve seen this decrease in violence over centuries. We’ve moved away from things like chattel slavery and human sacrifice, some of the more extreme types of torture. And so war will also decline as a result of our ability of humans to use our reason or reasoning skills, in order to create mechanisms to constrain war. And there will, of course, also other scholars such as Joshua Goldstein and John Mueller, who formulated similar arguments. They pointed more to maybe peacekeeping and the strengthening of norms around the constraining the use of force as mechanism for why war should have declined and will continue to decline.

And to be fair, they had a point because after 2003, there was no inter-state war until 2022 when Armenia and Azerbaijan fought each other. And then, of course, the Ukraine war in 2020. Sorry, 2020, Armenia, Azerbaijan, 2022 in Ukraine. And also, there was a very long period of great power peace, really, since World War II, which is arguably the longest period of in centuries. So there was a lot of optimism there.

That being said, some of us were always a little skeptical. I remember being asked in 2010s at my former workplace by a colleague, why do you even still study inter-state conflict? It’s not a topic anymore. And I didn’t quite agree with it, and nor did others. And so some people took this up much more systematically, and I think provided some good evidentiary basis that there really is not a decline in war, even inter-state war.

So I think important there is Bear Braumoeller’s work on Only The Dead, where he shows using data on violent conflict between states, not just wars, but generally, also lower level sorts of violent conflict between states. That there may have been a bit of a decline since 1990, but that there have been other ebbs and flows in history, right? So that war has gone up and down in history over centuries. And so that there is nothing particular or special in this decline that we saw then, and that there’s no reason to believe that it won’t go up again.

He also did some interesting analysis looking at the correlation between various factors that we to be associated with the likelihood of war or violent conflict between states such as alliances, arms, races, territorial disputes, democracy, trade. And so what he found is that the pattern of association between these factors and conflict has not changed over time. So it’s not that the factors that increase the likelihood of conflict have now a weaker association. The ones that increase the likelihood of peace have a stronger association. We’re not seeing that.

Another I think really interesting argument also that questions this decline in war came from Tanisha Fazal, who suggested that scholars often use this operational criterion of 1,000 battle fatalities to define what war is. And so this is problematic because our battlefield medicine has gotten so much better than it was in the past. And so now soldiers can be rescued from the battlefield when they’re injured within this golden hour, right?

The first hour after injury, which really increases their prospects of survival. There are antibiotics, antiseptics, all kinds of other innovations. So that even if fighting actually has the same intensity as it had 100, 200 years ago, we will see fewer soldiers die in these conflicts. In fact, over long periods of time, the ratio of casualty to killed was 3 to 1.

And for the United States, in Iraq, Afghanistan, it was more like 10 to 1. So what this means is that it may look like there is a decline in inter-state war, but that’s an artifact of this criterion that we often use to identify what inter-state wars are, which is these 1,000 battle fatalities. And really, the intensity of conflict is no less than it has been in the past.

Now, I feel like, given what’s happened recently, I think people are more skeptical about this argument in general. There are also other points that one could make, not just addressing that the decline in wars, maybe not quite what others have suggested, but there are other factors that suggest that it’s not clear that war is in decline or has ever been in decline or will go into decline. I mean, for one, the International system remains anarchical, meaning that there is no enforcer that can enforce any kind of peaceful deals between states or that can punish an aggressor.

Furthermore, states remain heavily armed. In fact, when we look at data of the Stockholm International. Peace Research Institute, or SIPRI, and their latest data is for 2023, we’ve seen yet another increase in worldwide defense spending. It’s actually the ninth consecutive year of increase. It’s the biggest jump, in fact, since 2009. And 2023 had the highest military defense expenditures in the world of any year that is recorded by SIPRI, and that even adjusts for inflation, right? So we have anarchy. We have states armed to the teeth.

And we still have plenty of pairs of states or as we call them, dyads, that have significant disagreements between them. I’m sure we all can come up with them, right? They’re the perennials of North and South Korea, India and Pakistan, China and India, Iran and Israel. And then there are some new conflicts to pay attention to such as Somalia and Ethiopia, and Ethiopia and Egypt as well. So there is clearly conflicts between states still.

Furthermore, there is reason to expect that maybe conflict is intensifying. I mean, the great power rivalries were already mentioned, right? So the US and China in particular, that rivalry has intensified using all kinds of economic tools of warfare that Vinny could certainly talk to. I would say that the US, Russia is probably weaker now given that Russia has been so weakened in the Ukraine war. So that’s a very good investment of the US to weaken Russia as a rival by helping Ukraine fight Russia. So that’s maybe less of a threat at this point than China is.

Furthermore, we aside from this great power rivalry, also have other new issues that come up to the table. So in particular, climate change is going to bring up some new potential conflicts. A very, I think high profile one is the Arctic. Once the ice melts in the Arctic, that means there’s going to be major competition over what our significant gas and oil reserves there, and also really important trade routes. So we’re already seeing countries positioning themselves in the Arctic and starting to compete over there, including non-arctic nations like China is.

And then, of course, when areas become uninhabitable, we will see population movements and refugees and migration that can create further tension, that can lead both to civil conflicts and to inter-state conflicts as well. I think another argument to make that conflict is not in decline, we shouldn’t really expect it to be in decline, especially in the future, is that some of the factors that those optimists pointed to that were constraining warfare between states are not things that are permanent. These are things that can change and actually sort of fade away over time.

So some of the arguments were, for instance, about the role of trade in containing conflict, right? Once countries trade heavily, then there is an opportunity cost to conflict, which makes it even less desirable. Well, we have seen in part, as a result of the pandemic, but also in part of a result of great power competition that some of this trade has plateaued and even declined in parts, although there’s a little bit, I think, an increase very recently.

But again, there is no guarantee that this very high trade ties will continue into the future that could constrain conflict. Furthermore, I’m sure most of you or all of you have heard of the Democratic Peace idea, that democracies are less likely to fight each other. And so, yes, after 1990, right, we saw an emergence of more democracies, but that’s been in decline, too. So if we look at Freedom House, the 2024 report, they find that there has been the 18th consecutive year of decline in global freedom scores. So democracy is also weakening.

A third pillar, arguably, of peace in post World War II period and after 1990, was the United States as the hegemon. That would ensure peaceful relations, especially in its areas of zones of influence in Europe and Latin America and some of Asia, and this Pax Americana as a feature that ensured a more peaceful world. Well, I mean, US dominance has declined relative to its closest competitors.

But maybe even more importantly, there is also a lot of hesitation domestically within the US of allowing the United States to be a policeman of the world in the future. So I actually looked it up and it turns out that fewer and fewer Americans are willing to support the US playing a leading or major role in World politics. The last I saw was still 2/3 of Americans. So I think it’s not completely gone at that point. But to the extent that those trends become stronger and the US becomes less willing to become involved in conflicts, that is an important factor.

Another pillar of peace arguably was the strength of norms, such as the norm of territorial integrity. Well, that took a really big hit, of course, with Russia’s attack on Ukraine. And so whether that norm remains intact or maybe even strengthened is very much a function of what will happen with Ukraine in the long run.

So if Russia is allowed to win and take parts of Ukraine, then that will have really Weakened the norm of territorial integrity, and other countries with similar territorial aspirations might just think, OK, we can tolerate some international opprobrium and sanctions in the short run. We just have to wait it out and then we will be able to get that piece of territory, right? So in a way, war holds the key to war here, to future wars is one way to think about it.

Finally, just two concluding comments, both building on Bear Braumoeller’s work that I think are important to highlight. One is that fundamentally, war has a big random component, right? So as scholars, we can identify the correlates that increase the risk of war or decrease the risk of war. But whether war occurs, there’s randomness to this. Whether a particular event is the event that suddenly people think is worth fighting over is something that we cannot easily predict.

So it’s very possible that we see actually no wars happening, even though the risk of war is just as high as it has been in the past. And so that’s something important to keep in mind, that even if we haven’t seen war, it doesn’t mean that the risk of war isn’t high, and that there isn’t this potential for some event that we cannot foresee entirely to really spiral out of control and not just lead to war, but also lead to major war.

And so a second related consideration is that I think it’s dangerous to be too complacent about war. So I think we all sleep better if we think that there’s not going to be much war. But at the same time, I think it is important to remember that it is a possibility in many parts of the world and that the step from war to escalating in a large war may not be a huge step. And so by not being complacent, right, we can more quickly act if disputes seem to be spiraling out of control.

And so just as a mini example of that, I mean, thinking back to the beginning of the Ukraine war when President Biden alerted the various allies that Russia is planning aggression, they didn’t believe it. So I’m European, and German in particular, in the first initial originally. And in Germany, decision makers did not believe that Russia was going to attack Ukraine. I mean, to Germans, it seemed like Russia had integrated into the economic order. It was benefiting from things. It was a partner.

And so there was a lot of reluctance and hesitation to recognize this, and therefore also, delayed action. So maybe if people had not been too complacent about it and had taken stronger measures to really signal to Russia this was unacceptable, maybe deterrence could have worked in this particular setting. And so that’s just important. I think, as we move forward, maybe and I feel like I sound very pessimistic here, though I hear my co-panelists have similar pessimism, so I don’t want to panic everyone, but I think it is there’s some value to being watchful of what is going on.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Michaela. I’ll remember that next time we’ll have you go last, not first, so that everyone won’t be depressed. But brilliant. I think a brilliant discussion of all of the key factors that suggest that war is still with us, unfortunately. So Andrew, are you going to say some really warm, positive, fuzzy things?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Oh, absolutely. Yes indeed, about the AI among other things. No, thanks, Vinny, for corralling us. Many thanks, Marion, for having me. It’s a privilege to be back at the Social Science Matrix. I received support from Matrix as a graduate student. So graduate students, there is a future, I promise. It’s a privilege to be here. So you’ve already heard from Michaela the premise war is back. Maybe troubling, but there’s also a debate that we’re having about whether and how technology is reshaping warfare as well. So that’s where I’m going to end up focusing my remarks.

And I’ll start with a rhetorical question. So what do senators, military leaders, and authors of science fiction have in common? And the answer is more than perhaps you might think. So they have visions of the future of warfare involving technologies, fundamentally different from the present, from super soldiers with biological or robotic enhancements. Have you seen this in The New York Times. It’s there if you look for it, to drone swarms using biometric data. I submit to you the future of life video called slaughterbots. To maneuverable missiles that travel to the target over 6000km/h. Those are hypersonic capabilities.

And I’m more than happy to talk about each of these during the Q&A. That said, my concerns, as you’ll see, are perhaps a little bit more prosaic than some of those headline grabbing technologies. And I’ll do my best to name check each of the ones that you might expect me to talk about. So nuclear capabilities, AI, military integration, advances in ISR, intelligence surveillance reconnaissance capabilities. But before we begin, any given any time that I’m asked to give a talk on emerging technologies, I also want to talk to you about the boring stuff, because the boring stuff is also not going terribly well.

So first, there’s various non emerging technologies, and perhaps mundane concerns that deserve the attention of all of us in the scholarly community and also our policymakers. We have a major challenge inside the defense industrial base. We no longer produce enough bullets and shells to take up what we’re sending overseas to the likes of Ukraine and Israel. We are not currently able to produce a plutonium pit for our nuclear weapons, and that’s despite our nuclear posture review calling for an increase in the number of plutonium pits to be created in order to keep the nuclear deterrent exactly where it lies today.

Moreover, no technology or widget exists in a vacuum. So any time that you see individuals, whether it be scholars or policymakers, talking about hypersonic weapons, for example, the end widget, it’s the very end of the product cycle. We have all sorts of the supply chain risks to worry about as well. So in another life, the National Labs before it came back to the Academy, that was what we were really focused on.

There are a variety of different individual technologies that all go inside any particular capability, each of which are vulnerable to cyber attack. The example that we were talking about up here before. You also have the headlines about the pagers in Lebanon. That’s exactly the kind of thing we’re worried about in the context of our nuclear weapons. For example, our cyber satellites used for reconnaissance capabilities. And so there’s all sorts of things to worry about at this technology meets war intersection.

Second, what constitutes emerging technology as it pertains to warfare is at best, a fuzzy concept. Indeed, in my class on war question mark emerging tech, we spend a lot of time problematizing the concept itself. And ultimately, we have lots of technologies that we overestimate in terms of their proximity. So for example, you’re seeing probably a lot of headlines about Terminator and Skynet and artificial general intelligence.

On the flip side, we also have technologies that always appear 10 years away and then all of a sudden they arrive. How many of you use ChatGPT? And nobody saw that coming. And then all of a sudden, all of our students are writing their essays using it, and we all have to adjust. The invention of a given technology is also the only first step to being fielded by a military.

One need only look at the early years of aviation for lots of examples of problematized use cases. So we were dropping bombs out of hot air balloons and we’re using flammable airships to drop ordnance. Not a good combination. And so it takes time to figure out what strategies and doctrines, and also institutional characteristics go into actually deploying a particular technology in war.

And Michaela gave you lots of readings. So I’ll just point to Mike Horowitz, recently out of DOD and back to Penn, where he runs the Perry World House. He talks a lot about the degree to which the governments and militaries need the institutional capacity to actually come up with the appropriate combinations of technology and how they might be used on the battlefield.

And then finally, we should be skeptical of claims that any particular technology is a game changer. Indeed, that’s one of the things that really annoys me as an academic in this space. What I’m interested in is how each characteristic of a weapon system, whether it be its range, its precision, its blast effects, its radiation effects, how do those characteristics actually end up altering what a country is likely to be able to do with it vis a vis an adversary, by the way.

One of the major challenges we have analytically in this space is it’s not just the creation of a technology in a vacuum. It’s the United States developing a capability, the Chinese developing a capability, the Russians, the Europeans, et cetera. And the ways in which countries around the world think about these technologies looks very, very different. If I were to say AI to all of you, you immediately think of LLMs. In Russia. If I say, they think about robotics and robotic applications.

So if any of you have seen the Boston Dynamics, little robot, it looks like a little dog, that’s what they’re thinking of when we say AI, that’s different for us. So ultimately, we have to be really careful when we talk about what’s actually changing inside of this space.

And I spend a lot of my time thinking about first strike stability concerns and the degree to which deterrence might hold or not hold in a new technological environment, the degree to which technology impacts crisis stability, so how likely I am to escalate a conflict or not. And then also arms race, behavior. And I think Mikayla did a nice job of showing you that that arms racing is actually happening as we speak. So when I’m studying an emerging tech, I want to see how things are actually changing as these various different countries move against one another.

With that said, you probably expected me to talk about the sexy stuff. So here we go. All right, so in the nuclear state of play, are things changing? The answer there is it depends. So to a large extent, we have the Chinese developing new capabilities, both quantitatively and qualitatively. So all of a sudden, US Defense planners have to think about what happens when China has 1,000 nuclear warheads rather than their current 300 to 500.

And also, what happens when they start to have ICBM silos, and a submarine launch deterrent rather than their land-based mobile missiles? And so that impacts all sorts of things. For example, the amount of time that it might take for them to fuel rockets and launch them, which obviously gives us time to respond, and also change the types of risks we might be worried about the Chinese actually bringing upon themselves. So I’ll point to you the fact that it took us more or less two decades to build the nuclear triad that we live with today, right? So the combination of submarine launch forces, ICBMs, and bombers.

And subsequently, we made all sorts of institutional decisions that tried to address this, what we call an always never dilemma. I always want my nuclear weapon to work when I ask it to. I never want it to go off unless I ask it to. Eric Schlosser’s Command and Control does a really good job of pointing out to where that always never dilemma has failed. But if you’ve got a country like China who’s rapidly creating new legs to its triad, all of a sudden you drive up the potential for accidents. And that’s something that we worry about quite a lot.

Also too, I’ll point out that one of the things that senators want to do as soon as they hear that China are increasing the number of nuclear weapons, is that they want the number of nuclear weapons in our arsenal that matches what the Chinese have and the Russians have together, OK? Is that a good idea? Is that not a good idea. For what it’s worth, I’m a fan of offsetting capabilities, not matching capabilities. There’s a tendency in our Congress, bless them, to see an adversary deploying a capability and then saying we need that too.

And so that’s actually traveled to, for example, the Russian development of, and let’s get this right, in orbit nuclear tipped anti-satellite weapon. You saw this in March Time. So the Russians have developed a new capability that would effectively make entire swathes of orbit uninhabitable for our satellite systems, which is a good thing to do if you’re Russia because we rely on our space assets for pretty much darn near everything in terms of our military command and control assets.

And so immediately in response, we had various members of Congress saying we should have that too. Well, the Russians don’t rely on space for command and control nearly as much as we do. So what we should be really thinking about is offsetting capabilities. And so all sorts of different questions about what the Chinese are up to. The Russians, Putin’s never seen a nuclear weapon he doesn’t like. So they’re deploying nuclear torpedoes, you might have heard.

And there’s also renewed conversations about dead hand nuclear systems. So there, you have some of the autonomy concerns matched with nuclear capabilities. So don’t move to Seattle, and perhaps thinking about don’t live don’t live in San Francisco. He also wants to develop and is tested a nuclear powered nuclear tipped missile, which is a terrible idea. You don’t want that to go boom. And indeed, he ended up irradiating part of Finland during one of the tests. So at the same time as you have the Chinese doing their quantitative increase and qualitative breadth, you’ve also got Russia qualitatively moving things as well.

At the same time, you’ve got the End of Arms control as we know it. So various different agreements have collapsed from the INF Treaty to new start more recently. And so there’s real questions about whether we might end up finding ourselves on a period in which we really do increase the number of nuclear weapons again moving forward. And this, of course, happens in the United States at the same time as we’re undergoing our own modernization effort.

And I should be very clear, the program of record does not say that the United States is increasing or broadening capability. It’s the Obama administration’s modernization plan that effectively tries to take type for type the triad. So we’re moving from the Minuteman III, ICBM, to GBSD Sentinel, ICBM. We’re moving from the Ohio class to the Columbia class of submarines. And we’re moving away from the B-2 to the B-21 bomber force. And we’re just doing it on a one for one basis.

But of course, we have conversations about how much that is costing, whether we need ICBMs moving forward, where it is what we might actually spend money, increasing capability. And of course, on the back end, you worry that the incremental increase in nuclear numbers might subsequently increase the likelihood of use. And one of the major debates is taking part in the field, and that I do some of the wargaming that my team does around is really on this low yield nuclear weapons question.

So the idea being that you might want to have low yield nuclear weapons in the US arsenal to match what the Russians have by way of non strategic nuclear weapons. But of course, how do we think about low yield nuclear weapons? Does that make them more usable? Is it more palatable if I’m causing small amounts of damage rather than large amounts of damage? And so that conversation is getting played out right now in terms of the submarine launched cruise missile with the nuclear tip, and specifically whether to deploy that on attack submarines or not.

Of course, the response to that potential development has been met with some of our colleagues, like Vipin Narang at MIT with derision, because obviously, the problem is that if I have a submarine surfacing, launching a cruise missile, and we have nuclear tipped capabilities in the arsenal, now our adversaries no longer know whether they have a nuke coming at them or a conventional asset coming at them. And of course, if it were me, I would assume the worst. And our fear is that our adversaries would too. And so you get escalation spirals from there.

OK, so that was the nuclear weapons. I mean, I guess I brought it up very briefly when I was talking about the plutonium pits. But things are also not going very well in the mundane side of the nuclear enterprise. So the recent congressional Strategic Posture commission report suggests that less than half of our facilities are fit for purpose in terms of the facilities at Lawrence Livermore, National Lab, Los Alamos, Oak Ridge National Laboratory. And so there are real pressures here in terms of us being able to actually feel the deterrent that we’ve come to rely on, let alone think about increases.

When it comes to the AI, hot take time. I’m a bit skeptical about whether AI changes a great deal. We’ve had AI capabilities inside of the military for a long time, nigh on six decades. And traditionally, we’ve used it for things like early warning systems, so signal detection algorithms, anomaly detection algorithms to figure out when adversaries are launching something hot at speed coming from a particular place, and/or to figure out whether they’re doing something unusual.

That said, even in the run up to the Russia, Ukraine crisis that Michaela mentioned, it was actually the blood movement, not the military exercises that was the smoking gun in the data that led to ODNI saying the Russians are going in. So we’ve had these capabilities for a long time. And ultimately, they’ve proved fairly effective.

We also use a lot of the tools that were developed in the Valley to manage supply chains in the military space, too. So predictive maintenance, predictive logistics, right? Moving my maintainers and materiality around the world, such that I have a probabilistic rate of failure in my F-35s, for example. It’s higher than the military would want. And so we use algorithms that help move things around. So in the same way that Tim Cook justifies being CEO of Apple, our military planners, right, also are moving things around the chessboard based on various different algorithms.

But what all of these applications have in common is that the failure modes are fairly mundane. So ultimately, if my engineers and my material are missing one another in Okinawa by three days, I’ll get yelled at, but nobody’s going to die, OK? So one of the applications that does start to worry people is on the decision support side. So the use of various different AI tools to actually help militaries around the world make decisions about what it is they ought to be developing, when they be they ought to be deploying capability, and when they should go, go, go.

And again, there’s a really good video by the Future of Life Institute called TLDR that you can go and watch, that really makes that risk salient. One of my bugbears with that particular video that really pushes on automation bias concerns where members of the military getting an algorithm saying, “You must escalate, you must escalate,” and the human operator is effectively saying, “Yes, yes, yes, yes, yes,” because they’re getting service by the model so quickly. So that’s an automation bias problem.

The issue is what’s the data that actually goes into these algos? So we’re all care carrying, right, academics in this field. And we know data sets like correlates of war, Vinny may have coded it once upon a time. Are we comfortable using correlates of war or MIDS and other data set in the field to make decisions about war and peace? Or even some of the work that I do. Are we comfortable with my synthetic data generating war games to be used to make decisions about war and peace.

I see people saying, no, not really, right? And so can we imagine a world where militaries were overestimate the capability of what you’re able to get here. So there’s massive training data concerns. So altogether, given the failure modes and the potential deleterious consequences of deploying the assets, there’s a lot to be reticent about in terms of how AI is going to be changing warfare, at least any time soon.

Where things actually are moving the needle is actually, again, somewhere where we don’t spend enough attention. But intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance capabilities. Here at Berkeley, we’re developing all sorts of new, different types of sensing, whether it’s synthetic aperture radar, or hyper and multispectral imagery tools, new IR imagery tools. And all of those are getting deployed on increasingly interesting delivery platforms.

From micro satellite systems to pseudo satellite systems, such that we have a pretty good sense of everything that’s actually happening on the Earth’s crust, more or less in real time if you really want to spend the resources to get it. And that has use cases in all sorts of different places from finance, but also in war. And so that really has moved the needle. Indeed, in my view, the Chinese have actually changed their nuclear posture because of these capabilities, and because they feel that we know where their land based mobile missiles are, rightly or wrongly, given these areas, different types of assets.

So will these technologies ultimately change the game? When I say drone to my students, they often think of things like the MQ 9 Reaper, right? Massive systems, 60-foot wingspan, top speed of 300 miles an hour, right? Really sexy system, OK? But the ways that drones are actually being used in the battlefield today are DJI quadcopters coming out of China. That people are throwing over the horizon and looking at the trench next to them.

Indeed, the war in Ukraine has a lot in common with World War I, right? At the same time, as I talked to you about AI, new types of nuclear systems, et cetera. And so that’s something that we really need to square. So right, ultimately, be wary of the science fiction of it all, and really think hard about how things are shifting. So we’re really looking for the discussion to follow, happy to pull on any of these particular technological threads. Looking forward to this session. Cheers.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Andrew. I’m going to ask you later whether AI will kill us all. That’s a different issue.

A different question.

Use against the Russians or the Chinese. OK, next, we have Daniel. Thank you, Daniel. Sargent.

[DANIEL SARGENT] All right, Andrew has talked about the future, so I’m going to talk about the past. And I’m going to lead off with a set piece juxtaposition of classical political theorists. And the problem that I want to use these theorists to interrogate is the political nature of man. To speak to this transcendent question, I’m going to summons two venerable authorities, Thomas Hobbes and Jean-Jacques Rousseau. These canonical theorists of politics, as most of you know, proceed from opposing premises.

For Hobbes, of course, the political nature of man is malignant to the marrow. Avarice, fear, and strife are for Thomas Hobbes, are primordial political condition. It is, of course, to emancipate ourselves from the primordial violence of this pre political condition, Hobbes argued, that we build political institutions. We created a political hierarchy, Hobbes speculated, in order to escape from the primordial violence that Hobbes calls the war with a double R E, of all against all.

This entirely speculative anthropology is, of course, the point of departure for a great deal of modern theorizing about international relations. The familiar premise that world politics are defined by the condition of anarchy, by the dearth of superior authority, that is endures in the writings of canonical theorists from Machiavelli to Morgenthau and beyond.

Inter-state war in the Hobbesian paradigm is both rooted in our fundamental political natures as human beings, and a consequence of institutions that have evolved over time to constrain substate violence, but have failed in the containment of violence at the inter-state level. Wherein, the war of all against all endures, much as Michaela observed in her opening remarks.

Let’s turn from Hobbes to my counterpoint, Rousseau. Jean-Jacques Rousseau’s founding premise is, of course, the reverse of Hobbes’s. For Rousseau, the political nature of man is inherently benign. For Rousseau, what creates conflict and strife is the historical advent of political complexity. The invention of private property, Rousseau argued, thrust men and women into a new era of exploitation and history, into a new era of violence and war. War, in short, is for Rousseau, a result of political institutions, flawed institutions, not of inherent human nature.

Now, back in the early modern period, the conflict between these opposing views of man’s political nature was, in essence, a normative dialogue, a normative conversation for the simple reason that theorists lacked hard evidence upon which to predicate their conclusions. The political nature of pre-political man varieties in the 17th and 18th century was inherently unknowable. Today, we are happily able to bring a little bit more evidence to bear on the question.

Archeological, surviving, anthropological, and even zoological reasoning deployed by way of analogy, points to an overwhelming conclusion. Hobbes was right. War is hardwired into human nature. This, I believe, is a crucial premise from which to interrogate the proposition that war is today back. If war is inherent to human nature, if it’s part of who we are as human beings, we’re going to have to proceed in recognition of the reality that war never went away. The propensity to initiate and to escalate war is part of who we are as humans.

And yet, the historical record nonetheless records a measurable reduction in the incidence of war over the very long term. Conclusions derived from the skeletal remains of hunting gathering peoples indicate, in the pre-political condition, a propensity to violent death far beyond what even the most violent modern societies record. Put simply, we are far less likely to perish at the hands of our fellow human beings today than was the case for our pre-political forebears, say, 10,000 years ago.

How should we explain the macro historical reduction in the incidence of violent death, in the incidence of war? Two hypotheses seem to me plausible. One is moral evolution. I should be clear. Here, I am not talking about changes in our biological natures. Such evolution occurs only at timescales far vaster than the horizons of human history. Rather, I am talking about the possibility of evolution in our normative or cultural precepts.

The second possible explanation for the long term decline of organized violence involves institutions. Perhaps we might contemplate. We have succeeded in building institutions capable of restraining, at least to a degree, are immense and amply demonstrated propensity to violence. In the minutes that remain, I would like to contemplate the utility of each of these explanatory hypotheses with regard to the problem of war in the contemporary era, and I’m going to focus first upon the institutional hypotheses.

Utopians in the modern era have recurrently conceived institutional solutions as a necessary, inevitable response to the problem of war. The examples range from Immanuel Kant’s Federation of Republics, a possibility, of course, discussed in Kant’s famous essay on perpetual peace, to Woodrow Wilson’s League of Nations.

What such frameworks have sought to accomplish in the end is the submission, at least to degrees, of the decision making sovereignty of states to some kind of superior political authority. World government at some level has always situated at the heart of institutionalist solutions to the problem of war. Such solutions, I would argue, have for the most part, achieved little of any real consequence in the modern era, except perhaps at the regional scale.

European integration is probably the outstanding example of a Kantian or institutionalist solution to the problem of war. Elsewhere, whatever institutional solutions human beings have devised to the problem of war have been far more provisional, far more ad hoc in nature than those that Immanuel Kant and Woodrow Wilson envisioned.

The interlude of great power, peace that occurred during the second half of the 20th century, I would argue, owed far less to the institutional accomplishments of the United Nations than it owed to the accidental geopolitical equipoise, the nuclear standoff that we call the Cold War. Put bluntly, the immense power of nuclear deterrence functioned for a time as a meaningful disincentive to the initiation and escalation of great power war.

What this means, I think, is that we have achieved no meaningful institutional solution to the problem of war. Rather, the operative question for today is whether the ad hoc solutions that were improvised in the aftermath of the Cold War– sorry, in the aftermath of the Second World War, in the era of the Cold War, that is, retain the power that they manifested in the classical Cold War era. I would argue that they do not.

Nuclear deterrence has shown itself to be incapable of restraining conventional aggression, as we see in the case of Ukraine. Similarly, alliance relationships have also demonstrated themselves incapable of constraining military escalation by subordinate allies, as we see in the Biden administration’s demonstrated incapacity to constrain the war that Israel is today waging against Hezbollah in Lebanon. In short, the limited ad hoc solutions to the problem of war that emerged during the second half of the 20th century are today demonstrating themselves to be wholly unequal to the awesome and eternal task of war prevention.

Let’s turn then to the problem of culture. To what degree has cultural or moral evolution meaningfully constrained our propensity to wage war? The first point that I want to make is that we should not underestimate the power of culture to exercise a pacifying influence on the affairs of states. This is the point at which I may part company with my colleagues in political science. I would argue that during the medieval era, Europe lacked meaningful institutional solutions to the problem of war.

But the ideological power of the universal church nonetheless functioned as a potent cultural discouragement to the initiation and escalation of inter-state violence. My colleague in the history department, Jeff Koziol, has actually written recently about this medieval experience in his excellent book, The Peace of God. Conversely, I would argue that the erosion in the 19th and 20th centuries of the pacifying force of Christian ideology in Europe led to the rise of secular ideologies unconstrained by the kinds of normative commitment that Christianity had once affirmed.

The result was, of course, the 20th century, probably the most violent century in the long and torrid history of complex human civilization. Here, we might also reflect on the secular ideology of human rights, an ideology that in our times has sought to present itself as a universal and general solution to the problem of war.

Does the ideology of human rights not affirm, after all, the unique and singular value of all human life? Does it not affirm the universality of rights, perhaps including the right to be free from premature and violent death? Unfortunately, the secular ideology of human rights are modernity’s alternative to the secular constraints that Christendom once imposed upon European states, has demonstrated itself in the absence of effective enforcement mechanisms to be, essentially, incapable of constraining war, as the torrid history of substate war in the second half of the 20th century amply showcases.

To the extent that culture has exercised any meaningful, constraining effect on our propensity to engage in violent conflict, I would argue that the operative cultural constraints in our times have originated, not in metahistorical commitments, whether secular or Christian, but rather, in the lived experience of the recent past, in recent historical memory. that is.

On this concluding point, I’m going to offer you just one piece of suggestive evidence. In the summer of 1972, the Soviet Communist Party General Secretary, Leonid Brezhnev, hosted Richard Nixon for a summer meeting. It was held just outside of Moscow in a luxurious dacha. During the course of this conversation, Brezhnev at one point turned to Nixon and declared, of course, a war between us would be wholly unthinkable. We can all agree on that. Both men, it hardly needs to be said, were veterans of the Second World War. Brezhnev, of the Eastern Front, Nixon of the Pacific Theater.

Today, their generation has passed from the scene, and we as a result, no longer possess the tangible human connection to the horrors of past wars that their lived experience provided. The kind of historical reconstruction that writers like me produce, I would suggest, is a poor substitute for that lived experience.

As a result, I would conjecture, the cultural constraints on the initiation and escalation of warfare that we initiated from the Second World War are today fraying. In the absence of effective institutional constraints, constraints that we have failed to devise over the past 70 or 80 years, we must see the inevitable progression of cultural and historical memory as a source for grave concern.

Our problem, I will conclude, is not that war is back, at least not yet. Rather, our problem is that our experience of war has faded, especially in the West, and it is perhaps in the depleted soil of our cultural memory. A cultural memory from which war is all too absent that the seeds of new cataclysms may be germinating. That’s my optimistic conclusion.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Well, it’s been a real fun day so far, so maybe I should just stayed home. Yes, so I think I’m not going to ask questions. I’m going to actually open it up to the audience. And if the audience doesn’t have any questions, I have about 25 questions to ask you, but I will refrain from doing that. So why don’t I just ask for questions? Just introduce yourself if you can. And please try to ask questions, not make statements if you can. Yes, sir. Just introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah, I wasn’t– hoping I wouldn’t be first. Hi, I’m Damian Shanks Dumont. I’m a PhD candidate and Berkeley Law’s jurisprudence in social policy program, where I study international legal history. With respect to, it seemed all of you were struggling with this idea that war is back, and the idea that it was ever gone in the first place. And it strikes me as– and I promise this is in a statement, we’ll get to a question, but it’s background. With respect to Professor Mattes’s point that there’s the threshold that’s written into the formalistic criterion in the Geneva Conventions of 1,000 deaths.

But there’s a secondary criteria on as between the first and the second additional protocols between international armed conflict and non-international armed conflict. And it seems non-international conflict, or what we would colloquially call Civil War, has been a constant presence this entire time. And that still, that rhetoric of non-international conflict still plays a big role in the wars that we’re seeing today.

Putin discussed the invasion of Ukraine as a police action, and today, the denial of Palestinian sovereignty is a big part of the retributivist flavor of the actions with respect to Gaza and now the extenuation of the war against Hezbollah, and the Houthi rebels, these use of indiscriminate weapons that would be blatantly a violation of international humanitarian law, and yet are done and justified through this idea of the criminal law corollary of what Bush’s war on terror was, right? Non-state enemy combatants.

So I would like, I guess, the ruminations of all of you on what role, retribution, and the way that the wars are being played out now in the popular consciousness, in the rhetoric of state officials, and in the media as not actually interstate war, but some third thing that has the flavor of criminal law and yet has these effects of being international war.

[AGGARWAL] Start with you?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I was hoping to get some more time to think about it. I mean, there was a lot in your question, so I’m– can you just state it really succinctly?

[AUDIENCE MEMBERS] How important is it that today, most of the wars, that the wars that we’re seeing are not justified and spoken about as if they’re interstate wars, i.e., World War II, but rather as police actions or war against terrorists, or the inherent right of self-defense as against non-state actors?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I guess one, it’s not directly in answer to your question, but a thing to think about. So there’s some interesting work in international politics about why it is that we have seen a decline in formal declarations of war. It used to be the case that countries would formally declare war, and they don’t anymore. And so there’s some debate about why that is. And some would say that it is actually to try to circumvent some of the constraints of international law that have become much stronger, of course, in the aftermath of World War II. And so we’re not seeing that as much anymore.

Other arguments are more that you don’t want to be seen as an aggressor, right? So I think that, so in part, that maybe would be one way to think about it. The reason there are these statements that what Russia is doing is a police action, or that emphasizes the not inter-state nature, is a way to try to minimize the appearance of international aggression, which I think there are strong norms against that at this point in the world. And the more countries do that, the weaker though, those norms are going to be.

[VINNIE AGGARWAL] Andrew, do you want to add something?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah no, I mean, I think Michaela is spot on. And also too, obviously, there’s a reputation benefit from using that type of language, but there’s also a material benefit. So if you’re Russia, you get to– I’ll turn this back on again. You get to escape the sanctions regime, because you’re able to convince some number of countries that the US action is inappropriate, given the language that you’re using.

To give you a tech flavor on the question, militaries have long been entirely agnostic as to whether it’s a Civil War or a state-based war in terms of the lessons that they’re learning. So the historical example, often, is the Spanish Civil War that effectively created the conditions for blitzkrieg from the Germans. So the Germans were effectively learning from the Spanish Civil War and then subsequently using that. And again, we have all of this conversation today about, well, what is it that the Chinese are learning vis a vis a Taiwan Straits contingency from the war in Ukraine?

And are we learning, potentially, the– ignoring the lessons from the Ukraine in terms of how we should be retooling the US military, given that we tend to like large programs that are incredibly expensive, where the cost of force exchange ratios are never going to be in our favor. And should we be moving more toward attritable systems, for example? And so we’re having that debate as well. And so for the military planning perspective, war is war. I don’t care what you call it. I’m going to learn my lessons from it either way.

[AGGARWAL] Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] I’ll be succinct. Look, I don’t know that the phenomenon you describe is especially novel. The US wages wars in the 19th century against the Spanish empire, against Mexico on the pretext that these states are unable to constrain transnational acts of aggression against the United States. So I think what you’re describing is an old theme.

I don’t see, I’m afraid, international law as a institution that has demonstrated a particularly robust capacity to protect the inhabitants of weak and failing states against acts of warfare by better organized neighbors. I think the only meaningful defense that we have seen to such acts of warfare is the organization of a more effective state.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, Jack. I know who you are, Jack. Just introduce yourself.

[JACK CITRIN] Yeah, I want to say that these were fabulous presentations. Really brilliant. Since I retired a few years ago, I’ve avoided as much as possible political science discussions, but I’m really happy I came to this. I just want to ask one very question. The underlying premise may be unspoken, is that war is a bad thing. Avoiding war is really [INAUDIBLE]. Maybe war is the right thing for a particular state to do at a particular time.

And sure, there can be costs, but if you take the example of Polk initiating a phony war with Mexico, certainly, if you think about the long run benefit, to the US is quite clear, maybe not morally, but in terms of all kinds of material. And I think that’s often the case. And so sometimes, you take in the case of Israel, preemption has often been their strategy, given that they’re surrounded by people who don’t accept their existence. So maybe in terms of war is back, it’s one-sided. The question never went away. I think you’ve convinced us all.

No.

But the particular instances can sometimes, I would think from the perspective of the actor, be rational choice. Just a simple, rational choice. This is to our benefit, and to hell with the UN and to hell with everyone.

[MICHAELA MATTES] No. That one, I’m happy to go first on. When I teach my students in conflict management class, I often struggle with this because they think all conflict is bad. And my reaction is like, no. I mean, sometimes it’s conflict or a really terrible piece. And so that it’s not necessarily a bad thing, I think, is it rational from an individual state actors? Well, our series would suggest it does not. But I think the question more is that normatively always bad or good?

And I don’t think it is normatively always bad to go to war. I mean, I am happy as a German that the US decided to go to war with Germany in World War II. I mean, that was the right thing to do. It was the better thing to do. So certainly, think an interesting extension here is pressing for a ceasefire. That may actually be a bad idea, sometimes to press for a ceasefire fire.

We know from research in international relations, both civil wars and inter-state conflict, if the parties are pushed to a ceasefire too quickly before beliefs have converged about who will likely win at what cost, those types of peace deals do not last very long. So, yes, you’re saving people in the moment, but you’re actually risking a recurrence of conflict later and you may be overall worse off than that. So I totally agree that war is not normatively undesirable under all circumstances.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Good. Andrew.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, I mean, one of the things that Fearon’s bargaining model really struggles with the productive aspects of war as well. So I’m going to take this in a tech direction. No surprise there. I mean, despite the fact that the Valley likes to ignore it, a lot of the inventions that came out of the surrounding 100 miles or so were funded ultimately by DOD. So with thanks to the US military for GPS, the internet, semiconductors, or even prior to that, right? Research that happened in military contexts leading to nuclear energy and nuclear medicine, et cetera. And so there is a productive side of it. Now, right, do you necessarily want that, right? Probably not. But you do get all of these externalities out of it as well.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Sure. Look, I agree with the premise of the question, and I actually agree with the historical case that you invoke. But I think risk assessment always involves two dimensions. One is probabilistic, the other involves the impact that the eventuality would produce. And I do think when you think about those two dimensions of risk impact, you have to think about great power war or systemic war in the nuclear age as an eventuality that would be unambiguous and unacceptably atrocious.

And that’s a reality that I think does bear powerfully on any conversation about war in the contemporary era, and especially on any efforts to assess the risks and prospects of war in relation to historical experience. So I would very much align with historians and political scientists who take seriously the transformative impact of the nuclear revolution for our discussion about war. And I think it has to be reflected upon in the relation to the question that you posed, Jack.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Thank you, Daniel. So next question. Yes, in the back. Could you introduce yourself? Oh, you have the mic. Did you have a question?

I do.

OK, we’ll ask you and then we’ll go back.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] And thank you for your presentation. I have actually three sets of questions. My name is Julian, I’m a visiting scholar in sociology. Sorry, my three sets of questions. The first is about the role of church in designing mechanisms of governance, then the distribution of the experience of war, and then the space for moral in today’s war. And I’ll try to connect them together. So you say that during the middle age, church was some sort of coping mechanism for waging war.

I would say also that historians are sure that the peace of God were also the war against the others. It was very common for church leaders to go to war. It was very common to go to war for the formation of knights and the whole hierarchy. So I’m wondering, which type of regulating mechanisms do you really see at work during that time that would inform today’s war?

Second, you mentioned that there was the first said experience of war was fading right now in the West. I’m quite surprised to hear that because I see also the amount of veterans in the United States. And I’m wondering as well, what the other scholars here make of the fact that perhaps there is a professionalization of war in the West, but the firsthand experience of war and conflicts around the world is certainly rising through refugees, migrations, and conflicts.

So what to make of the distributary between the professional of wars in the West and a civil society is increasingly enrolled into violent conflicts. And third, about moral. That may be more to Andrew, but is there a space for moral discussions in AI wars? And what is it today? Thanks.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, lots of questions. Short answers, please. Start with you, Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Great. Look, I don’t want to take too long on the question. It’s difficult to make statistically well-founded comparisons between medieval and modern international politics. And I’m not presuming to deny that crusades occurred or that they were violent. But when you look at the scale of medieval European warfare and compare it to the scale of modern warfare, or for that matter of pre medieval Roman era warfare, you’re looking at a more marginal phenomenon in the life of the society. And I think that does reflect, to a degree, the power of cultural or normative constraints upon state behavior.

Your second question about– it’s a good question, and I actually hope that more robust representation of veterans in our Congress can exercise a pacifying effect on our statecraft as a society. But if you compare veteran representation among members of Congress, it’s a very easy metric to deploy. The evidence is unambiguous. Our lived experience of total warfare as a society is today minuscule by comparison with what it was for the post World War II generation.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK Michaela, do you want to add anything?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I guess just a couple of thoughts on the war fatigue argument. I mean, my first reaction, and this is not a really good one to Daniel was like, well, I mean, in World War II, they should have learned from World War I and they didn’t, right? But I mean, of course, I don’t believe the one case ever shows something to be incorrect. I think there is– I do agree, though, with the argument that, yes, there are many, of course, soldiers in the US who served in Afghanistan and Iraq, but they’re professional military, and they’re professional soldiers.

And so most people, I don’t think, engage with them very much, right? So it’s not a shared experience among us in the same way that World War II would have been or World War I would have been. And in terms of the experience of individuals in war, there’s some interesting work in international relations where actually, politicians who served in the military but did not fight tend to be more war prone or conflict prone, more willing to use force, than even ones that never served.

And the ones who are the most– sorry, the most warped– sorry, the most conflict prones are the ones who served but didn’t fight, and the ones who served but did fight tend to be actually quite avoidant of conflict. So that it’s a little bit of a mixed pattern.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, really good question. I mean, as you can imagine, there is a massive moral discussion around AI and military integration here on campus. Stuart Russell in engineering school, is a major driver behind the campaign to stop killer robots, which you might have heard of. He’s also fairly high up in the Future of Life Institute that I name checked a couple of times that are producing various different videos to try to drive some public sentiment around these moral concerns.

Toby Ord and Ewen MacAskill, the longtermism movement, you might have heard of. So for them, AI, climate, and nuclear are the three things that we need to be focused on when you’re thinking about risk over the centuries type term. And then more prosaically, right, we have inside of the UN, a group of government experts focused on lethal autonomous weapons issues. Although there, I’ll point to the clashing of realpolitik on the one hand and normative concerns on the other.

And so lots of discussion inside of that framework about the degree to which lethal autonomous weapons are distinct from chemical weapons, or landmines, or cluster munitions. And there’s something of an argument that ultimately, we get agreements like those because they’re no longer militarily useful. And indeed, where they are military useful, like here in the US, we don’t sign the agreements. And so given the lack of certainty around where and under what conditions these capabilities will actually be useful, it strikes me as very unlikely we’re likely to see anything fairly strong coming out of that loss process.

And what we usually tend to find is that the Russians and the Chinese will back one particular international governance conversation, and the Americans and the Europeans will back another one. So, for example, in the cyber domain, we’ve got the GGEs, the group of government experts that are now led by Russia, China. And we the OEWG, the open ended working group, and they actually can’t even come up with a list of common definitions around cyberspace. And so we’ve got the same problem happening in lethal autonomous weapons. That said, I still got to go to Geneva and have the conversation, so that’s fun. But yeah, it’s alive.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Good. We had somebody in the back. Do you have a mic there?

Yeah.

That’s great. Can you just introduce yourself?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, I’m Cat Smith. I’m a fourth year undergraduate studying political science and legal studies. And my question is more specifically for Professor Reddie, but the rest of you are more than welcome to answer. Also, thank you for being here. It’s been an awesome panel to listen to. You talked a lot about the great powers of Russia and China specifically, and the development of nuclear programs. Is there a US agenda for the proliferation of programs for more minor powers such as North Korea, India, Pakistan, and Iran are also programs that are talked about as potentially developing? And how is that being addressed? And then curious if surveillance might be the answer for that, because as you said, China is changing its posture. So how could that work potentially for minor powers?

[ANDREW REDDIE] Yeah, good questions all. So with regards to North Korea, ultimately, that’s what our missile defense capability is supposed to be addressing. Missile defense, by the way, being an autonomous weapon that’s already deployed and would not work if you put a human on the loop. So that’s what that’s for. Obviously, we fear about Iranian proliferation. And also, too, you would fear other countries in the region also responding. So, for example, it’s very unlikely that if Iran were to get the bomb, that Saudi Arabia wouldn’t follow immediately.

Just one note there. When Iran produces its first weapon, it will not announce it. Like the North Koreans before them, you’ll want to have an arsenal that you think is large enough to give you some semblance of survivability. So you’re not likely to know that Iran has a weapon until they have on the order of 30, 50, et cetera, and have figured out how to deploy them, so some sort of delivery system.

India, Pakistan, super interesting. Traditionally, Pakistan was our ally. The war on terror got a little bit icky. Now, we look to India and try to use India as a counterbalance to China. And so we brought them into an arrangement called the quad. The problem with the Indians, of course, is that they still actually buy military equipment from who? Moscow, and have long ties to Russia. And so we have the enemy of my enemy is my friend dynamic, but everybody’s not on the same side.

And so that’s one of the major bugbears that I have with Cold War 2.0, as the way of describing this reality. In some ways, our reality is far more complicated. So I’m just back from Omaha and STRATCOM, and they talk about the 2 plus peer problem. It’s the fact that you’ve got to get this, right, videos where it talks about spaghetti or noodle bowls. It’s noodle bowls of alliance frameworks, and it’s terribly complicated.

On our side, for what it’s worth, the South Koreans are fairly nuclear latent. They can probably produce a capability pretty fast. The Japanese, the same, the Germans the same. And it was obviously here in this building where Walt said, “Give nuclear weapons to everybody, the world would be safer.” I’m not so sure he’s right. But I think that whether we still have the same number of proliferated states in 2030 as we do in 2024, I don’t feel terribly good about it. Not to be even more pessimistic than we’ve been the rest of the time.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Michaela, do you want to add anything?

[MICHAELA MATTES] I wanted to add something pessimistic. Same here. I mean, looking at Iran, right? Just took a big hit to its axis of evil with the decimation of Hezbollah and Hamas. So what are they going to do, right? I mean, it seems to me like shifting more towards nuclear is one way of trying to bolster up. So whatever that will lead to, we don’t know. But just making things a little bit more pessimistic.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] I think we have enough pessimism. Does anybody have anything optimistic? All right, let’s take more questions. Oh yeah, Rosy.

Hi.

Introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] A professor of political science at Temple University, and visiting scholar at the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative. This is a really fascinating conversation. Just a couple, I guess a question based on a few things have been said. So [INAUDIBLE] mentioned rationality around war. And then Julian mentioned the crusades, right? And I’m just thinking about, Daniel Sargent, what you mentioned about the universal ideological power of the church. How about just war? And the idea of there may be some morality to go to war to defend certain ideas and powers, interests, and so forth. So I thought if you have some thoughts about that, and welcome the other panelists too. Thanks.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Absolutely. No, I think that’s a great question. And of course, just war theory, beginning really with Augustine, is the foundational step on the genealogical progression that takes us to the modern Geneva and Hague Conventions, to the institutionalization of rules of war. What we should make of such rules, I think in the end, that’s a normative question.

I think that the effort to institutionalize rules of war entails a recognition of the legitimacy of the premise of Jack’s question, that war can sometimes be just a necessary. It probably also concedes the permanence of war. It may have what we consider to be a normative benefit insofar as it meaningfully constrains the brutality with which war is waged.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Anybody else want to add or should we continue?

Hey.

Yes, sir.

Hi, so I’m TK.

Please introduce yourself.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, I’m TK. I’m a graduate of history PEIS here from Berkeley. I work in the higher education field. I won’t go specifically into it. So we know in the 1960s and ’70s, there were major militant movements on student campuses. They took direct action, violent and non-violent, like People’s Park, right? Black Panther Party. And if you look at the US diplomatic cables around the world at that time, they’re saying like, “Hey, this is making us look bad, right? The intensity of the fighting internally, right? We better loosen up, right? We better scale down, right?

There were talks like this, both the way they treated people here and abroad. But during the Iraq war protests, they said, these were the largest anti-war protests in history and was just ignored, right? It was just ignored because they were very calm, orderly. So I’m just wondering if you think that the lack of– the more pacifist approach to, or the lack of more direct action contributes to the kind of wars we are engaged in right now, and what seems to me to be a disregard for protest movements in general.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK, who wants to start?

[ANDREW REDDIE] I’ll give a crack at it. I mean, ultimately, the salience of national security issues and the body politic, particularly in the US, is relatively low, and always has been. I mean, you can see that in the polling around the election, for example. National security ranks well behind everyone else. Everything else you could possibly be worried about from the economy, which is usually number one, to abortion issues, et cetera. And so the degree to which you’re going to agitate for any particular national security concern is going to be low, all else equal anyway, despite the fact that, of course, that’s the only place where the executive actually has privileged access to policymaking. Terribly ironic. They don’t control the Fed. So I would note that.

I mean, a recent event that sounds similar was Project Maven. So we had in the Project Maven episode in 2017, a group of Google engineers that said we’re not going to complete a DOD contract, which was focused on bringing autonomy into DOD operations, entirely not kinetic, right? So not war facing capabilities. And that was something of a black eye for the government. And they had to think really seriously about who to use in the future because, of course, DOD bringing in Google was their attempt to bring in the next generation of company that wasn’t Lockheed, Raytheon, Honeywell, et cetera. And that was something of a black eye.

Now, of course, after Russia, Ukraine, a lot of the tech companies are now very much in line with the US government. And so Microsoft, for example, provide much of the cyber backbone to Ukraine. And you also have various luminaries in business like Eric Schmidt actually writing the drone policy in terms of thinking who they should be procuring from for Ukraine as well. And so that relationship is very different in 2017 to 2024. So it can turn quite quickly.

[DANIEL SARGENT] Yeah, can I just push back a little bit of the premise. For all of the scale and volume of the anti-war movement, Nixon wins the ’68 election and then escalates the war. And then in ’72, he trounces McGovern, who runs as a peace candidate. So I’m not sure that protest does have such a powerful, constraining effect on domestic politics, as your question presumes. But I do think that you’re right to suggest that domestic politics can be a powerful source of constraint on this country’s, or for that matter, any Democratic country’s participation in war.

That’s the premise of the Democratic peace theory, which has shown itself to be quite robust when tested against the empirical evidence. And I think the historical evidence also affirms the point. The US is slow to get involved in World War II because of the power of domestic politics. Congress in 1938 comes close to passing a pacifist amendment to the Constitution. Voters can and do restrain state behavior, but I’m not convinced that violent protest is the most effective means for domestic politics to exercise that constraining effect.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] Michaela, you work on these issues a little bit.

[MICHAELA MATTES] Well, yeah. So I was going to say that I think that probably a bit more optimistic about the role of public opinion in constraining leaders, and although you sound like it, too. I mean, I’m thinking for one, the US is a special case, right? The US doesn’t have to care. Americans don’t have to care that much about the rest of the world, right? They tend to be safe from other conflicts. If you are Israel, or if you are in Taiwan, or if you’re Japan, or if you’re Germany, international politics matters a lot more to you in those countries.

And I think we’re certainly seeing in Israel, right, that there’s quite a bit of support for going after Hezbollah. And in fact, it’s strengthening Netanyahu’s government. But even in the US, right, probably one of the reasons we’re not seeing President Biden be stricter with Israel and trying to constrain their war against Hamas and now about Hezbollah, is to worry about what that will do to the election, right? I mean, Michigan is a swing state and there’s real concern about, yeah, what progressives might think, what Arab American voters might think. So I think we are seeing these things matter in some ways.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] OK we have time for one last question.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi, my name is Juno and I’m a PhD student in the political science department. And my question is about the role of private industries in the grand scheme of war. Because if we’re looking from a overtime perspective, I guess, one of another pole or another factor that has maybe has not received a lot of attention in today’s discussion is the premise that private industries have had a overtime increase across history. And I’m just curious to the extent to which the accessibility of new emerging technologies could these firms have. Or for example, maybe Tesla can have space capabilities on its own.

And I’m wondering if these increasing involvement and the capacity for firms to do so may have impacts on the interest of inter-state war in terms of firms that may benefit from great power competition, for example, maybe middle power, private industries might benefit from increased competition. And I was just like to hear more about what would be the role of these firms, whether they would be deterring war or whether they would complicate war or things like that. Thank you.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] So maybe quick last responses, and you can make general comments if you’d like to since there’s one minute left.

[ANDREW REDDIE] Perfect. Give me an hour. Yeah, so I mean, Starlink’s the obvious example, and we’ve seen it play a role in Ukraine. And indeed, you can look at any number of the companies that we have newly created here in the US, whether it’s Anduril, Vannevar Labs, et cetera, that are at that intersection of industry and the role it’s supposed to be playing. I mentioned Microsoft before.

That said, though, it’s not a new phenomenon. So we’ve had your Lockheed, your Raytheons, et cetera, for a long period of time. And also too, BMW’s badge, right, is blue and white. Why is it blue and white? That was the propeller, right, on the Messerschmitts. So ultimately, private Mitsubishi, Toshiba, right? A lot of them came out of World War II as well. And so you’ve always had that private industry role inside of war making. So yeah, it’s a dissertation, for sure.

[AGGARWAL] Michaela, [MICHAELA MATTES] I don’t really have any profound thoughts. I also thought that it’s not new, right? The military industrial complex, we have talking for a long, long time about the role in conflict. It seems to me that there are competing interests, right? Different industries have different preferences. And what I’m not sure is what that aggregates up into.

[AGGARWAL] Finally, Daniel.

[DANIEL SARGENT] I’m going to go out on a limb and say that there has been real change. It’s interesting. You’re taking the position a historian would take. Nothing changes. And I sound more like a political scientist. Thomas Jefferson, when he’s minister to Paris, visits the Paris arsenal and reports back. “They have interchangeable parts for muskets. We need to emulate this.” And it’s interesting because what Jefferson is doing is engaging in industrial espionage against France for the benefit of the United States. But the espionage is conducted against a state-run arms manufacturing facility for the benefit of the state-run arms manufacturing facility.

And I think the episode is a powerful reminder of the centrality of state activity in early modern military fiscal states. Today, I think the relationship of the state to cutting edge military production is very, very different. The state has the power to initiate contracts and to set production priorities, but the state is not engaged in the work of manufacturing in the way that early modern states were. So I do think that there’s been real change. And the result may have been to subject state power somewhat more to the whims of private industry than was the case in the early modern world.

[VINOD AGGARWAL] All right, well, our time is up, but thank you all for your wonderful questions and thank you to the panelists.

[CLAPPING]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authors Meet Critics: Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex

Puta Life book cover

On Sept. 16, 2024, Social Science Matrix hosted an Authors Meet Critics panel focused on the book Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex, by Juana María Rodríguez, Professor in the Department of Ethnic Studies at UC Berkeley.

In Puta Life, Juana María Rodríguez probes the ways that sexual labor and Latina sexuality become visual phenomena. Drawing on state archives, illustrated biographies, documentary films, photojournalistic essays, graphic novels, and digital spaces, she focuses on the figure of the puta—the whore, that phantasmatic figure of Latinized feminine excess.

Rodríguez’s eclectic archive features the faces and stories of women whose lives have been mediated by sex work’s stigmatization and criminalization—washerwomen and masked wrestlers, porn stars and sexiles. Rodríguez examines how visual tropes of racial and sexual deviance expose feminine subjects to misogyny and violence, attuning our gaze to how visual documentation shapes perceptions of sexual labor.

For this panel, Professor Rodriguez was joined in conversation by Clarissa Rojas, Associate Professor of Chicana/o Studies at UC Davis, and Courtney Desiree Morris, Associate Professor of Gender and Women’s Studies at UC Berkeley. The discussion was moderated by Alberto Ledesma, Assistant Dean for Diversity, Inclusion, and Equity in the Division of Arts & Humanities at UC Berkeley.

The Social Science Matrix Authors Meet Critics book series features lively discussions about recently published books authored by social scientists at UC Berkeley. For each event, the author discusses the key arguments of their book with fellow scholars. The panel was co-sponsored by the Center for Latin American and Caribbean Studies, the Center for Race and Gender (CRG), the UC Berkeley Department of Gender and Women’s Studies, and the UC Berkeley Department of Ethnic Studies.

Watch the video on YouTube.

Listen to the panel as a podcast below or on Apple Podcasts.

 

PODCAST TRANSCRIPT

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[MARION FOURCADE] Hello, everyone. My name is Marion Fourcade, and I am the Director of Social Science Matrix. So if you don’t know us, Matrix is the flagship institute for the social sciences at Berkeley. Our purpose is to foster and to support exciting interdisciplinary collaborations and exchanges across the social sciences, like the exchange that you are about to hear today.

And for those of you who know us, you know that we have a lot of exciting stuff in store for you. So whether you’re interested in book panels, lectures, or conversations on today’s pressing issues, we have it.

I am especially delighted to open this semester with a panel discussion of Juana María Rodríguez’s book, published in 2023 by Duke University Press. Puta Life Seeing Latinas, Working Sex probes the visual representation of the figure of the “puta,” and how these representations have shaped the criminalization and stigmatization faced by sex workers. Juana María offers a masterful intersectional understanding of sexuality and sex work.

Today’s event is part of our Author Meets Critics series, which features critically engaged discussions about recent books by faculty and alumni in UC Berkeley’s Social Science Division. And I would be remiss not to mention that the talk today has a lot of co-sponsors. So I will list them all: the Center for Latin American and Caribbean Studies, the Center for Race and Gender, the UC Berkeley Department of Gender and Women’s Studies, and the UC Berkeley Department of Ethnic Studies.

Now before I turn it over to our panelists, let me briefly mention our upcoming events for the fall semester. I cannot go over the entire program. We will be there for a long time. But I will mention a few immediate highlights. Tomorrow, we are hosting sociologist Jacob Faber for a talk on racial inequality in mortgage access as part of our collaboration with the NSF-funded working group on Computational Research for Equity in the Legal System.

On September 30, we’ll open our Matrix on Point series with a panel on hidden wars and open wars and geopolitical tensions in the world today. And that panel, which is very exciting, is titled “War is Back,” ominously.

And know that we will host three more Author Meets Critics panels this semester, featuring books by Paul Pierson and Eric Schickler, that’s October; Yan Long, in November; and Stephanie Canizales, in December. So we have much more. So please sign up for our newsletter.

But it is now time for me to introduce our moderator, Alberto. So Alberto Ledesma grew up in East Oakland and received his undergraduate and graduate degrees from Berkeley. He earned a PhD in Ethnic Studies in 1996, and is a former faculty member at California State University, Monterey Bay, and also a lecturer in Ethnic Studies at US Berkeley.

He has held several staff positions at Berkeley, including Director of Admissions at the School of Optometry, and Writing Program Coordinator at the Student Learning Center. He’s the author of the award-winning illustrated autobiography, Diary of a Reluctant Dreamer.

He is currently the Assistant Dean for Diversity, Inclusion, and Equity for the Division of Arts and Humanities here at Berkeley. So without further ado, I’ll turn it over to Alberto. Thank you all for being here.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you. Thank you so much. And it’s really a pleasure to be here, everyone. It is great to be here in this Author Meets Critics panel on Puta Life: Seeing Latinas, Working Sex, by Professor Juana María Rodríguez.

As someone who has explored the themes of identity, marginalization, and the immigrant experience in my own work, I’m particularly excited to moderate this discussion. Professor Rodríguez’s book resonates with me deeply as it delves into the complex visual representations of Latina sexuality and labor, themes that intersect with my own explorations of undocumented experiences and cultural identity.

Like my illustrated work, Diary of a Reluctant Dreamer, Puta Life uses visual media to examine how marginalized communities are perceived and portrayed. Both of our works grapple with the ways in which societal perceptions and legal structures impact the lives of Latinx individuals.

While my focus has been on undocumented experiences, Professor Rodríguez turns the lens to the often stigmatized work of sex work and Latina sexuality. In doing so, she challenges dominant narratives and seeks to humanize those who are frequently dehumanized by society.

Puta Life draws from an impressively diverse array of sources. This interdisciplinary approach allows for a nuanced examination of how visual culture shapes our understanding of race, gender, and sexuality.

I am particularly intrigued by Professor Rodríguez’s exploration of how visual documentation influences perceptions of sexual labor. As we begin our discussion, I encourage all of us to consider how Puta Life pushes us to reconsider our perceptions, and opens up new avenues for more ethical forms of relation and care.

And so I am thrilled to introduce now the distinguished panel. Juana María Rodríguez is a cultural critic, public speaker, and award-winning author who writes about sexual cultures, racial politics, and the many tangled expressions of Latina identity.

As a professor of ethnic studies, gender and women’s studies, and performance studies at UC Berkeley, she is author of Puta Life Latinas, Working Sex, Sexual Futures, Queer Gestures, and other Latina Longings, and Queer Latinidad: Identity Practices, Discursive Spaces. Dr. Rodríguez was honored by the Center for Gay and Lesbian studies with the prestigious Kessler award in recognition of her significant lifelong contributions to the field of LGBT studies.

Courtney Desiree Morris is a visual, conceptual artist and associate professor of gender and women’s studies at UC Berkeley. She is a social anthropologist and author of To Defend this Sunrise, Black Women’s Activism and the Authoritarian Turn in Nicaragua, which examines how Black women activists have resisted historical and contemporary patterns of racialized state violence, economic exclusion, territorial dispossession, and political repression from the 19th century to the present.

Her work has been published in American Anthropologist, the Bulletin of Latin American Research, the Journal of Women, Gender, and Families of Color, Makeshift, Feminisms in Motion and Asterisk. She is a regular contributing writer and editor at large for Strangers Guide and ASME award winning magazine about place.

Clarissa Rojas is a scholar, activist, poet, mama, and movement maker. Her mother’s Indigenous lineages in the Americas root her in the Arizona Sonora Desert. Clarissa grew up in Mexicali, Calexico and San Diego, Chula Vista, where her family migrated.

She lives in Oakland, in unceded Huichin, and is faculty in Chicanx studies, cultural studies, and gender and sexuality studies at UC Davis. Clarissa co-founded Insight, and has authored and co-edited multiple articles, special issues, and books on violence and transformation of violence, including color of violence, the inside anthology, community accountability, emerging movements to transform violence, and most recently, her writing appears in the Journal of Lesbian Studies and Abolition Feminisms.

So with that, I want to invite Professor Rodríguez. Would you please start by sharing your insights and the genesis of the arguments in your book, please.

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] OK. Again, thank you so much for coming. And especially to my interlocutors, it really — I chose wonderful people. Like so many other feminine subjects, by the time I became a teenager, I had already been warned about not dressing like a puta by my mother, hailed as a Spic slut by my schoolmates, ogled, pinched, groped, and treated as an object for somebody else’s pleasure by the adult men in my life.

In other words, I had already been assigned the category of puta by the world, and only had to decide my relationship to it.

As an academic who has created a reputation for herself as a scholar of sexuality, I’ve been rewarded in unexpected ways for writing, quite explicitly sometimes, about my own erotic archive, even as I have also been dismissed or excluded from other opportunities.

These two might be considered forms of sex work, ways of working sex that are pleasurable, profitable, and dangerous in different ways and to different degrees. The differences matter. While this project is invested in probing the slippery boundaries that define what constitutes both sex and labor, it is also committed to challenging the moral and legal hierarchies that are assigned to those differences.

Because while we might consider all the ways that sex could be exchanged for social status, dinner, citizenship, or domestic harmony and a good night’s sleep, exchanging sex for money remains illegal.

Illegal means you can be arrested just for doing your job — denied employment, housing, citizenship, and a host of other state benefits. A criminalized occupation means you can be more easily blackmailed or have your educational and career accomplishments tarnished, something that happens all the time.

It can jeopardize the custody of your child, or worse, your adult children can be arrested and charged with procurement or pimping if they benefit economically from your labor. It means you can have your assets seized or have your social media accounts shut down if you’re even suspected of engaging in illicit activities.

Today, the shadow bans and bank seizures being leveled against Palestinian activists were all first enacted on sex worker communities and their advocates. These are some of the current realities faced by sex workers in the United States, made even more obscene through laws such as SESTA-FOSTA.

Now as a project of intellectual inquiry poised between Saidiya Hartman’s ideas of critical fabulation and Glissant’s right to opacity, Puta Life tracks the figure of the Latina sex worker across a range of visual surfaces to consider how stigma sticks to skin. So after an introduction, I offer two historical chapters, and the first is focused on this singular text, Registro de Mujeres Publicas: registry of public women.

In 1865, Maximilian Archduke of Austria, established a public policy aimed at regulating sex work, which required them to have their name and photograph entered into this single bound folio. And already in this image, we can see that the photo in the top-left has been purposefully lifted out of the record by whoever had the access, audacity, or means.

This is Guadalupe Romero playfully offering the camera just the slightest hint of a coquettish smile, pose lifting the hem of her elegantly styled dress just enough to offer a visual clue of her vocation. So that gesture sort of gets repeated multiple times, but no one else does it quite as well as Lupita.

This is my tocaya, my namesake, Juana María, and she just looks sad. Here’s another Juana, Juana Rivera: 20 years old, seamstress. I found 19 Juanas and two Juana Marías. Her biography states that on the 22nd of April, she returned her booklet because she was leaving the profession.

And the police department is advised to keep her under surveillance, mandase vigilar. Juana Rivera was being kept under surveillance to ensure that she was not continuing to profit from her own sexual labor while trying to evade these new systems of control.

Several times, I find the phrases “se fugo,” she escaped, marking all the ways these women were sexual fugitives who tried to elude capture, tried to escape not sex work, but the state’s systems of sexual control.

Within the pages of Registro, I find another figure that sparks my queer curiosity, a name and a face that appears just a little different from all the others. Their name is Felix. As I continue to stare at this photograph, my eye settles on the stain, the punctum, the open wound where the surface of the photograph has been scratched away.

Felix’s dark wide hand rests gently next to that spot, touching it tenderly. I too wish to touch the open wounds these archives pry open to lovingly tend for the lives held within these bounded pages.

I also discover another queer gem in the archive. It seems that in 1888, in nearby Havana, Cuba, another metropolis, there existed a briefly lived political party of sex workers. They called themselves “las horizontales,” the horizontal ones.

And they used their newspaper, La Cebolla, to call out the sexual and economic extortion they experienced at the hands of the police and to demand their rights as taxpaying workers, the same demands being made by sex workers today.

And even in these four short issues, there are two references to homosexuality, including a heartwarming lesbian poem. Maybe I’ll read it at the end. But again, speaking to the way sex work and queerness have always sort of been bound together.

If that chapter is focused on a singular tome, the next historical chapter presents a broad, far-reaching set of images to reflect about on the visual motifs that get attached to sex workers, as well as to think about the different ways that sex workers appear in the visual record.

I start with Felix Jacques Antoine Moulin, who earned a month in jail and a fine of 100 francs for producing obscene images, like this one. Nevertheless, a few short years later, the same photographer was sent to colonial Algeria to document the queer practices of the new French colony. He spent quite a bit of time in brothels there.

This 1853 image, L’odalisque á l’esclave, exemplifies many of the visual elements that will continue to be associated with sex work. An attachment to ideas of the foreign and exotic, primitive opulence – that tiger print – forms of queerness, and a proximity to Blackness.

These images are from the Storyville archive in New Orleans. The woman on the left is Lulu White, one of Storyville’s most storied Madams. She specialized in octoroon beauties, like herself, at a time when miscegenation was still illegal and scandalous, demonstrating how race itself functioned as a sexual category.

But sex workers are all over the archives of street photography, travel photography, and what would become art photography. Frequently, images would be marked with a street location as a kind of geotracker pointing you to a foreign location or perhaps a distant, exotic neighborhood in your own city.

Because they were out in the street, photographers viewed sex workers as free models, public women they didn’t have to pay for, but whose images they felt entitled to capture. In fact, sex workers show up in the camera rolls of almost every noted photographer, male and female.

This is an image from Eve Arnold. And it initially appeared in Esquire Magazine in an article titled “Havana, the Sexiest City in the World.” But it also marks the moment when photographers could begin to own and label their own photographs, which Arnold renamed as “Bargirl in a Brothel in the Red Light District.” So Cuba actually falls out of that scene.

Part of what I started to notice is that whenever Black sex workers are depicted, they are almost always framed within the terms of tragedy, regardless of class. She’s beautifully dressed. Here’s an image from the series titled simply “Séríe Prostitutas” by the Colombian photography Fresnel Franco.

And we get a series of images that are supposed to register sadness and despair. The photographer here can’t imagine that she might have a life outside of her work. She might have kids she plays with, or a husband she goes to the beach with. It’s about reducing her to the space and place of her labor. It is intended to represent only and always despair.

However, this project started with a very different text. It started in the porn archive, with an as-told-to-memoir that depicts the life, sexuality, and philosophical musings of one of my most cherished Puta icons, Vanessa Del Rio. She follows me on Twitter. The most famous person, yes.

Half Cuban, half Puerto Rican, and fully a New Yorker, Vanessa Del Rio was the first non-White porn star during the golden age of porn. She appeared in hundreds of films, frequently playing the maid, the hoochie mama, the stereotypic over-the-top Latina spitfire.

Her memoir, unique in both form and content, is a huge tome, it weighs about 7 pounds, that comes complete with a DVD made up of equal parts hardcore pornographic images, and titillating and terrifying life stories, many about police violence.

But if you want the porn, you have to sit through the stories. And if you want the stories, you have to sit through the porn. And unlike the silent presence of the women in El Registro, here we have the vibrant voice of one of the most celebrated Latina sex symbols, providing her own musings on Puta Life.

I grew up watching Vanessa’s films. And her birth name, Ana Maria, is a sonic echo of my own. While the rest of the book is full of glossy movie posters and professional stills from her many films and colorful magazine spreads, the photographs that intrigued me the most were the ones from the collection of amateur photographs that she produced with her lover, an S&M aficionado, Reb Stout, pictured here in a blonde wig.

Del Rio describes her initial coming together with Stout saying, it was like you like to wear makeup and women’s clothes and stick dildos up your ass and jerk off and take pictures. OK. Yeah. Many of these images are quite playful and queer, and depict the spirit of endless sexual experimentation that their brief affair was founded upon.

Several portray enactments of the S&M fantasies that Stout and Del Rio explored and performed together. As an actor, Vanessa was involved in many hardcore S&M themed movies, “roughies” as they were called. And she describes enjoying the emotional intensity and physical stamina that they required.

This scene is from the film Top Secret, in which she plays a secret agent named Juanita, who is being tortured, yet her makeup flawless. But the scenes she shared with Stout were something else altogether, and the images that they produced have a wholly different quality. That chapter also includes this quite extraordinary image, one that manages to convey the terror, vulnerability, and ecstasy of sexual submission.

Vanessa tells us that this is her favorite image in the book. It’s also my favorite image in her book. This too is Puta Life, a moment where the everyday pressures associated with living your sexuality in public are transformed into private experiments with the sensorial possibilities found at the limits of subjection.

If Vanessa’s life as an international pornstar offers a view of sex work that seems full of fiery agency and verve, the following chapter returns us to the streets of Mexico City to visit with the extraordinary women of Casa Xochiquetzal, a house for elderly sex workers, some retired, most not, to think about the relationship between the stories we tell and the affects they generate.

The residents of Casa Xochiquetzal are the subject of two books of photography, numerous photo exhibits and magazine spreads, and at least three documentaries, illustrating the fascination with the decidedly queer juxtaposition between advanced age and overt sexuality.

The first book, Las Amorosas Mas Bravas, was a collaboration between French photographer Benedict de Ruz and Mexican journalist Celia Gomez Ramos. That project took about seven years to complete, and as viewers, we get an almost voyeuristic glimpse into this house and their lives.

This is Canela. We’re introduced to Canela’s story, and the journalist reveals that she has Downs Syndrome. Quote, “She’s a little slow, but the girls never talk about that,” end quote. And we’re told that she’s just returned to Casa Xochiquetzal after trying to give love one more chance at 72.

Like her age, Canela’s cognitive difference is supposed to make her an unimaginable subject of love, sex, or indeed of any future worth desiring. But where exactly might we locate the tragedy that is represented as surrounding Canela’s life? In her lifelong disability, in the innumerable ways that precarity brought about by poverty has informed her life choices, or in trying to give love one more chance at 72?

Moreover, how might the narrative emphasis on tragedy obscure the moments of pleasure — sexual, romantic, and otherwise – that might also constitute her life? What are the effective impacts of these different sorts of details, and whose interests do they serve?

This is another resident, Norma, and pages later, she recounts the story of her life through the scars left behind: The stab wounds from knife fights, the scars from suicide attempts, a bite mark, a souvenir from her lover, Rosa.

Norma tells us that she’s a womanizer, a mujeriega, and that she once worked as a lucha libre wrestler, that the father of her firstborn was a travesti named Arturo, also known as Erica. She lists off a long list of female lovers, including Rosa, who was her girlfriend for 13 years and who she would pimp and protect when they both worked the streets. Norma says she’s too tired for women these days. Is Norma who we picture when we think of sex workers or pimps?

There’s a second book of photography that pairs a foreign photographer and a Mexican journalist. This is British photographer Malcolm Venville’s book, The Women of Casa X, that similarly provide brief first person narratives composed by Mexican journalist Amanda de La Rosa.

That book was produced in a single month, and frequently features the women in various states of undress, unsettling the conventions around erotic photography. In both books, these women talk about their lives, including the violence, exploitation, and abuse that they’ve lived through.

But what their stories make abundantly clear is that the harms associated with sex work cannot be separated from the violence of patriarchy, global capitalism, the church, the state, the police, the family.

I also consider several documentaries about the house. This is La Munéca Fea. I just love this cover image. But I focus on a truly delightful film by Mexican photographer and filmmaker Maya Goded that registers a wholly different energy, not of misery and despair, although that comes through, but the felt force of friendship. The film is called La Plaza de la Soledad. And we see the kind of mutual aid and kinship that sex workers have always formed.

The woman on the right is Carmen Lopez, the original founder of the house. And in this scene, she spots one of her clients and is joking about what she’s going to do with her little finger once they get together.

Goded’s relationship with Carmen spans over 20 years. Goded helped Carmen activate the feminist community in Mexico City to fund Casa Xochiquetzal. The film also features a lesbian relationship between Esther, an Indigenous woman and healer, and her lover, Angeles.

Esther often delivers these very touching monologues about what is unseen in the lives of these women. But thankfully, neither Goded nor Esther seems particularly invested in peddling a romantic narrative about idealized lesbian relationships.

In a later scene, the couple are playfully bickering over money and drugs. And Esther positions herself in front of Goded’s camera, while Angeles finishes getting dressed nearby to tell us what their lover squabble was really about.

[NON-ENGLISH]. Yesterday she hit me. She took my money. And later, we ended up fucking. Esther, always pedagogical in her addresses, adds to the camera, but I enjoyed it very much sexually. Everyone is laughing, including Goded, whose image is now captured in the mirror along with a glimpse of Angeles getting dressed nearby.

These moments where the director enters the scene aurally or visually serve to dislodge the imagined distance between the filmmaker and her subject. But what also becomes dislodged are more sanitized ideas about lesbian sexuality, Indigenous identity, sex worker lives, and feminist politics.

So while my work in this book is about sex work and all of the ways that it’s wrapped through the contours of queer life, it’s also about representation, about the perilous ways it can carry our desire for recognition and connection across the vast expanses between us.

Because even if we know that images and stories are mediated and constructed, we know they do things in the world. And while I have never met most of the women that I feature in Puta Life, in the final chapter, I turn to someone quite dear to me, Adela Vazquez, a real living person with a style, a scent, and an amazing past.

I begin by considering the text Sexile, Sexilio, an extraordinary bilingual graphic novel by Jaime Cortez that tells the story of Adela’s life of being assigned male at birth in Cuba, forming part of the Mariel boatlift, and working briefly as a sex worker, later becoming a sexual health educator and transgender advocate in San Francisco.

As is the case for most people, Vasquez worked as a sex worker only briefly, although the different narratives circulating around her life make clear she’s been working sex all her life. In this top panel, we actually see the actual ad that Adela used to promote her sexual services.

But by the time we sort of reach the bottom-right panel, Cortez draws her, rolling her eyes and we glimpse her boredom and frustration at performing the tired narrative of racialized transgender exoticism.

Now, Sexilio is not the only graphic account of Adela’s life. I first met Adela when we worked together at Proyecto ContraSIDA Por Vida, a Latinx HIV Prevention Agency in San Francisco. And I featured her in my first book, Queer Latinidad. A year later, she appeared in the documentary, Documenting Difference, in 2004.

Adela’s trans godchild and my former student here at Berkeley, Juliana Delgado Lopera, published an oral history of Adela, first in the SF Weekly and later in the Collection Cuéntamelo. Here, the arch of her eyebrow is performing its own singular drama.

She’s also featured in the collection Queer Brown Voices, personal narratives of Latinx LGBT activists. And in one class I taught, students read Sexilio and created a Wikipedia page for Adela because nothing says notable like having a Wikipedia page.

But despite these numerous efforts at representing her extraordinary life, Adela, like many of us, is also deeply invested in self-representation. And what better place to share ourselves these days than social media. Adela’s Facebook page does not disappoint.

While her feed is cluttered with the usual collection of political rants and raves, Adela also maintains a photo album there that she’s entitled, The Amazing Past, a visual archive of her larger than life history. Here she is, strutting her stuff for the camera and her audience.

This is Esta Noche, a broke down dive queer Latinx bar, the last queer Latinx bar to close in San Francisco. Some images like these have been digitized from actual printed photographs, and some include captions added through the haze of memory.

All of these efforts at curating her life, serve as a testament to her impulse to give her memories, material substance, even if that substance is digital. Yet even in the presence of the biographical subject, even if Adela was here with us now representing herself, we wouldn’t really know her. Not really.

And that’s as it should be. As we refuse the understandings of representation as knowledge production, a lingering and feeling in friendship, in the fantasy of another world, might point us to other affective pathways of care.

Let me conclude by sharing another photograph from Facebook, a candid photo of Adela from her days at Proyecto ContraSIDA smiling at whoever stopped by with the camera to interrupt her day. Adela was very good at her job, and is rightfully proud of the life changing work she did at Proyecto, recruiting other trans Latinas, many former sex workers like herself to protect themselves against HIV.

But also inviting them to form part of a community dedicated to living to self and community empowerment. But this photo of Adela also makes another point undeniably clear. Trans women, particularly trans women of color, need more than representation.

They need jobs that provide health insurance and employment protection, sick days, and vacation times. Indeed, a job like my own that offers a pension so that one day they can stop working. Similarly, sex workers and former sex workers don’t need rescue. They need rights to live free from stigma, surveillance, and criminalization.

In the absence of these most basic forms of care, our new gender studies colleague, Dora– the brazilianist, Dora Santana, describes the practices of survival and community formed within Black trans femme spaces of impossibility, a practice she calls mais viva, more alive. Mais viva, quote, “the strategies we as trans and Black people use to not be broken at the end of the ” end quote.

But mais viva also demands mass viva, more life. Santana’s invocation of mais viva serves to remind us that survival is always more than protection from physical harm. It is about attending to the weight of a world intent on denying the beauty of your humanity and the psychic scars that stigma leaves behind.

Today, sex workers face a worldwide epidemic of violence and murder. Sex workers are routinely hunted and harmed by those who understand that the value of their lives is deemed negligible, insufficient to warrant concern, let alone protection or justice.

Therefore, my work in this new book also harbors another meaning for Puta Life as a response to Puta viva, a fucking life, a life defined by condemnation, violence, and stigmatized contempt, I offer the possibility of Puta Life, an affirmation of the beauty, value and spirit of Putas everywhere. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much, Professor Rodríguez. Now I invite Professor Morris, please, to share your comments.

[COURTNEY DESIREE MORRIS] Thank you for that. That was fantastic. It’s so good to be here. It’s rare to enjoy reading an academic book as much as I enjoyed reading this book. And don’t get me wrong, I love theory for the same reason. I love couture.

But this is really an extraordinarily powerful work. And so brilliant that it left me kind of speechless. And one of the things that Clarissa and I were talking about was how the text really, it didn’t raise questions for me about the way you approach the work, but it did raise questions for me about myself as a reader, as a scholar, as an artist, as an erotic subject that I really was not prepared for.

So I just wanted to talk more about that. But I’m going to get into my comments here, and I’m looking forward to being in conversation with you about this work that really is just such a triumph. Congratulations. Yeah.

So I’m going to begin by saying in Puta Life, Seeing Latinas Working Sex, Juana Rodríguez invites us to examine the contentious and fraught production of visual representations of the Puta, sexual labor, and Latina sexuality.

Centering the modes of self-fashioning of Latina sex workers across visual cultures, Rodríguez illustrates how insurgent Puta lives are made in the interstices of quote, “crimanalizing states and the judgments of petit publics, ” end quote.

Telling a different story about Puta Life requires different modes of relationality and methodology than the traditional Western mono disciplines can provide. Thus, Puta Life employs an interdisciplinary methodology ranging from exploring the role of photography as a tool of 19th century colonial statecraft to close textual readings of sex workers’ visual and narrative biographical accounts of themselves to, quote, “explore the creation of sexual meaning and what might lie beyond it,” end quote.

Drawing from state archives, historical and contemporary documentary film and photography, biography, visual art, and graphic novels, Rodriguez creates a promiscuous archive of pouteria that is born out of a deep identification with the figure of the Puta, and that also reflects her own erotic subjectivity as much as that of her research subjects, which I thought was the best part.

The analytical objects that she selects from this archive are varied and wide ranging, selected not for the authoritative power that they confer to render a grand narrative of Puta Life, but rather for the haptic resonances that they present to Rodríguez as both researcher and subject.

The politics of identification that structure the text are felt in Rodríguez’s careful and effective handling of the subjects that she encounters in the archive. And so I won’t rehash the discussion of the Registro, but I was really struck by the way that you talk about and you examine how the Maximilian state mobilized photography as an emerging visual technology of state surveillance, criminalization, and labor regulation.

She sifts through this visual archive, attempting to understand how women navigated this hierarchical system of organizing sexual labor, and how the politics of race, class, and nation shaped the state’s management of sex workers.

And I was particularly moved in the portions of the chapter where you talk about encountering women who bear your name in the Registro, your [NON-ENGLISH] and this experience of encountering your name over and over in the archive. Rodríguez writes tenderly of her, tokayas asking, quote, “did Juana María also dream of adventure and freedom? Did my tokaya taste joy.”

This kind of speculative narrative, what Saidiya Hartman refers to as critical fabulation, the attempt to read beyond what the photograph or the archive itself can yield, the attempt to touch an unknowable past that wears your face or bears your name unsettles historical narratives of the Puta that mark her as unknowable political subject, and calls for rigorous forms of care and archival inquiry.

This is also apparent in the treatment of Félix, who I love this figure, and I just sat staring at this photo for what felt like forever. And so looking at Félix and their ambiguous gender presentation, which is left unaddressed and unresolved in the archive, right? It doesn’t offer you a clear answer of who this person is. And so rather than rush to claim Félix as a trans ancestor, a move that I think probably would have been really satisfying for many of us.

Instead, you embrace the incompleteness and indeterminacy of the image itself, and the space that it allows for, quote, “an imagined queer futurity,” end quote, where Félix and all of the subjects of the Registro are able to, quote, “escape the vice grip of representation to become fugitive traces of the images left behind to no care.” So beautiful.

In this way, I see Rodríguez performing a kind of radical feminist self-reflexivity rooted in an ethics of accountability and answerability to her subjects, past and present. In addition to its analytical function, Juana frames Puta Life as a pedagogical text that invites us to take seriously what the Puta can teach us, not just about our own erotic desires and selves, but also about the larger structures of power that police and discipline are desires.

It reveals the ways that we are all implicated and implicated in Puta Life, often in ways that we may be reluctant to explore because they compel us to reckon with the complexities of our own lives and the exploitative sense. Deal with your own fucking life.

This kind of analytical humility, a willingness to approach the Puta, a figure that we think we know from a place of beginner’s mind and embodied experience, opens a range of complex and contradictory possibilities for how we might sense the Puta in a different register. And it certainly did that for me as an artist.

And I’d love to have more of a conversation about this as a kind of embodied text, as a thinking about the ways that you tap into the body as a way of beginning to sense the Puta. And you talk about the importance of sensing knowledge rather than thinking, which I found really interesting.

I found this to be a work of profound vulnerability and beauty, characterized by, as Judith Butler writes, a willingness to be undone by the encounter with the research subjects, with the Puta within and without.

This is especially apparent in Rodríguez’s reflection on aging and the labor of sex work. And I thought about this a lot in the chapters on Vanessa Del Rio with Adela and with the women of the [NON-ENGLISH], and how Latina sex workers of many kinds navigate the challenges of working in a sexualized economy of value and desire that privileges youth beauty in class while obscuring the labors, the sexual labors of elderly and retired sex workers.

And I was really struck by the way that you write so movingly about seeing yourself reflected in these aging sex workers and how you and all of us, we’re all getting older, how we navigate the tensions between our ageless desires, as you say, and getting older in a social order that disappears the sexual lives, labors, and subjectivity of elders.

Another indication of your practices as a kind of vulnerable observer, as Ruth Bejar might say, is the way that you assume an intentionally ambivalent sort of narrative orientation towards both yourself as researcher and subject, as well as your research subject, and the contradictions inherent in any attempt to render a subject legible.

As you argue, quote, “whether as a photographer or a writer, to think about representation is to think about the granting of permission, the stated or unstated permission to look, to linger, to record, to circulate, and to transform the meanings that images might convey.”

These tensions over who has the power to narrate, which we’re going to talk a little bit more about in a second, form a central preoccupation in the text that I really think adds to its analytical force. Nowhere is this felt more clearly than in the chapter on the mighty Vanessa Del Rio, one of my longtime heroes.

I’ve been fascinated with her for years. And your treatment of how she narrates her Puta Life on and off screen demonstrates how a more textured and complex rendering of Puta Life, quote, “requires that we wrestle with the ability of speaking subjects to narrate their own complex realities even and especially when their interpretations unsettle the preexisting logics we might wish to impose.”

You offer a model for meaningfully engaging with research subjects who dazzle us, who confound us, who baffle us. Writing that, quote, “this is a lesson that bears repeating. Not everything makes sense.” End quote.

And indeed, as you argue, the truth of our erotic lives often does not make sense. And yet it is precisely in our illegible desires that the future conditions for queer horizons of possibility that have not yet been borne may materialize.

And I was thinking a lot as I was preparing for this talk, I listened to a really terrific interview that you gave about the book on the LA Review of Books podcast, and I thought i it was a really thoughtful and interesting interview.

But nevertheless, I was struck by what seemed to me to be a kind of moral uneasiness or discomfort or kind of squeamishness about the attempt to narrate Puta Lives at all. And the implication seems to be that Puta Life is so complex and so overdetermined and so distorted as to be fundamentally unrepresentable, or that all acts of representation do a kind of inherent violence to these lives.

And that kind of pushback that I’ve certainly had that experience in my own attempts to teach sex work in the classroom. And it seems like you have encountered some of this in the reception of the book as well. And so I’d love to hear you talk more about that.

But they illustrate how Puta Lives are obscured not only by official state discourse that marks sex workers as moral or social threat or hapless victims, but also by ostensibly progressive or radical feminist frameworks that are so weary of the punitive uses to which narrative can be put that they refuse the work of narration altogether.

And so, as you demonstrate, this is really an untenable position that in effect ends up relegating Puta Life to the criminal margins in ways that threaten sex workers and make the conditions of their labor precarious.

And so I think you really definitely negotiate that critique with a keen awareness of the dangers and challenges of representation, and how visual regimes of racialized sex and gender, knowing that render the lives and labors of sex workers illegible in the public sphere operate.

And so instead of making a claim to epistemic transparency, you follow the work of the Martinican philosopher Edouard Glissant by insisting on the right of sex workers to their own forms of opacity. And as a scholar, you refuse the kind of will to knowledge that underwrites normative representations of the Puta, while insisting on the need for these lives to be seen and narrated.

And then the last thing I’ll say is I was really struck by– throughout the book, there’s this kind of thread of queer femme friendship that for me really is kind of the condition of possibility for the work. And I felt that so clearly in the chapters on Vanessa and on Adela.

And it made me think of Michel Foucault’s interview, friendship as a way of life, in which he talks about sexuality functioning as quote, “a means not to discover the truth of one’s sex, but rather to use one’s sexuality to arrive at a multiplicity of relationships.” And so friendship here functions as both a method of seeing and being in the world.

And so following Foucault, I see Puta Life as countering the refusal to explore, quote, “everything that can be troubling and affection, tenderness, fidelity, camaraderie, and companionship, things that a rather sanitized society can’t allow a place for without fearing the formation of new alliances and the tying together of unseen lines of force.” So I see all unseen lines of force kind of cohering in the text and these really beautiful ways.

These unruly and promiscuous forms of relationality reveal a different mode of life, as Foucault argues, or a different mode of relationality cultivated through sexual practice that brings us into organic forms of what Samuel Delaney terms contact and exchange, both those that are tied to the market and others that exceed the market, which are constrained under heteronormative regimes of marriage, domesticity, family, and the rule of the father.

And so I was touched very deeply by Adela’s response to that chapter where she says very simply, [NON-ENGLISH]. It is a very sweet, deeply affecting, and instructive moment. For while, Rodríguez powerfully makes the case for the singular importance of Adela’s trans everything life. We also understand that this is one interpretation of her life among many others.

There could never be enough to say about Adela’s complex biography, and no one could ever transparently know Adela. But that is no less true of all of us. And the extension of what Avery Gordon terms complex personhood to our inscrutable research interlocutors is the first step in telling stories about Puta Life that might take us closer to an embodied affective sense of the multitudinous cells that are contained within Puta biographies of all kinds, including our own.

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much. Professor Morris, that’s fantastic. So now I invite Professor Rojas to please offer your notes.

[CLARISSA ROJAS] I enjoyed this so much. Thank you both. This is just so, so lovely. And obviously, the text, I agree, moved me in ways that I was not ready for nor expected from an academic text. And I think some of that has to do with the methods you choose, the style of writing. And so I’ll speak to some of that as well. And it engaged a kind of playful engagement that I think in some ways my remarks will also engage that or reflect.

So dear Juana, if your plight in Puta Life was that we fall in love with, that we see the life in the Puta in you, the Puta in ourselves and Putas everywhere, then you have succeeded because Puta Life, testament of a visual and historical archive of Puta Life, living and legacy against a script of erasure, victimization, and exoticized exteriority inspires just that.

How lovingly your writing, and I guess we all concur here, made me see perhaps my ancestor Felix Rojas. The details of Felix’s life in a portrait, the subject leaps from the abject captivity of the two dimensional springing forth, a deep curiosity in life worth knowing. Who was Felix Rojas?

A subject like the others, like the author herself, with a quest to be loved, touched, adored. it is in these moments of candid, introspective memoir that the author reveals her vulnerability, dislodging academic treatise and methods returning to intimate aspirations.

Quote, “these women speak to me because I know they have something to teach me about the realities of my Puta Life. Their faces and their stories obligate me to sit with emotions that I might wish to expel, to ponder my own relationship, to living and aging, desire, and rejection, loneliness, and heartbreak. To dwell in the dusk of my own archives of feeling.” End quote.

After all, at the heart of this book is a quest to make Puta Life more livable for all of us. And to do just that Juana shapeshifts method, Puta Life asserts a knowledge production that is at ease and unknowing and a methodological reckoning with unruly practices of sensation, memory, and imagination.

The sensory drives after all this, the project of a struggle for corporal autonomy. The social transformation beckoned by Puta Life. Against the grain of a historical subject that is stigmatized, criminalized, controlled, disappeared, despised as much for their race and poverty as their sex work, in quote, “their humanity obliterated.”

So the word Puta, writes Juana, quote, “I add life, the possibility of a life that will exceed the word and remake it.” End quote. Juana invites the reader to reach for the traces of felt possibility that might inspire more ethical forms of relation and care.

And today is [NON-ENGLISH]. No school or work, a holiday in Mi Patria Natal in Mexico. A day to remember the call to revolutionary struggle that upended the Spanish colonial regime and imagined a new republic and the masses flocked to El Zocalo and city squares everywhere to memorialize El Cura Criollo Hidalgo’s call once made in 1810 in the town of Dolores.

Yes, it is in the genealogy of this memorialization that the park marking queer beach and Dyke and trans marches in San Francisco gets its name, Dolores Park. And as the call for liberation imagines anew the republic anchored in the patriarch of the nation, forgotten feminicidios, unnamed just this once, the Traidora Puta Malinche reclaimed by Chicana feminists as lover, mother, freedom seeker, once enslaved, brilliant translator.

Instead today, the nation invokes yet again a future promise of the Mexican nation as liberated from Spain by Spain, the Criollo masculine subject of Hidalgo, a rendering of the neocolonial patriarchal Mexican imaginary.

Not the reference I prefer of thousands of feminists descending in 2019 in El Zocalo to the cadence of [NON-ENGLISH], the oppressive state is a sexist pig.

So it is fitting that we address the subject of the Puta today. After all, what the Puta [NON-ENGLISH] invoking, of course, Frederick Douglass’ interrogation. And further, what the Palestinian [NON-ENGLISH].

So I walk with Palestine at the center. The recent massacre [NON-ENGLISH] last week, beloved land I visited over 20 years ago, amidst yesterday’s death of a brilliant scholar and writer, Elias Khoury, who mapped the future of Palestinian freedom in his epic [NON-ENGLISH], gate of the sun, which he brought to UC Berkeley in this very building 18 years ago when I had the chance to meet and learn from him and his work.

As a daily death counts persist, how can we not center Palestine? And what I ask can be learned from and about Puta Life, about the liberation of both Putas and Palestine in conversation.

How does mapping, writing, imagining Puta Libre accompany mapping, writing, imagining, and struggling for Palestine Libre. Juana invites us to consider “que todos/todas somos putas” . The Zapatistas once invited us to proclaim [NON-ENGLISH] Zapatistas to return the dislodged expelled Indian in us as Chicanas and Mexicanas.

To commit to a futurity that liberated the Indigenous from the continual colonial claws of the neocolonial Mexican Republic [NON-ENGLISH] Palestines. So [NON-ENGLISH] Juana, I offer some excerpts of Puta Life in conversation with Noura Erekat’s justice for some law and the question of Palestine. And Edward Said’s the question of Palestine, among other Palestinian voices.

And why Noura Erekat’s text so centrally? Because the National Leadership of Faculty for Justice in Palestine recommends it as one of the five essential texts to read this fall to inform the Palestinian struggle across college campuses. You can join one of the 125 FJP chapters across the US to further engage this text. And Noura is no less also a UC Berkeley alumni from the Bay.

Long-term sister organizer, now professor of law at Rutgers, a foundational member to the originating second formation of Students for Justice in Palestine here at Cal, where SJP was born some 30 years ago. And organizer of the first National Student Conference of the Palestine Solidarity Movement in the United States, which I attended also here 22 years ago during the Second Intifada.

One, Puta Life. In their ongoing demands for love, respect, and care, these women of [NON-ENGLISH] remind us all the ways we are entangled in the radiance of the universe, united in our stubborn insistence to live on. Stigma, conditions, the life, and death of sex workers.

Three, the call for self-determination upends the eliminatory logic that for so long has marked the Palestinian as a site of expendability. Justice for some. Puta Life. Native presence, survival as resistance, acknowledge presence in the face of social demands to disappear.

Five, Puta Life. Vanessa Del Rio and Adela Vasquez turned victimization into expansive narratives of sexual prowess. Quote, “Venessa Del Rio is invested in asserting more than her agency, wants to describe her pleasure, the joy and satisfaction of sexual escapades. Del Rio refuses to vanish to either feminist narratives of exploitation, shamelessly relishes the dirty sensory Puta Life.

Six, justice for some. Palestinian self-determination signifies an ability to pursue a future collectively and individually as a condition of possibility and not as a form of resistance to the condition of social death.

Seven. Against the script of erasure, various forms of attempts at captivity, the abject rises up, insists upon living. Hartman. Puta Life. Eight. Quote, “recover the insurgent.” state punishment and juridical violence, doling out shame as technique of biopolitical control.

Nine, October 7. Do you condemn Hamas? 10, Rafeef Ziadah. We teach life, sir. But still, he asked me and Ms. Zaidah, don’t you think that everything would be resolved if you would just stop teaching so much hatred to your children? Pause. I look inside of me for strength to be patient. But patience is not at the tip of my tongue as the bombs drop over Gaza.

Today, my body was a TV massacre made to fit into soundbites and word limits and move those that are desensitized to terrorist blood. And between that war crime and massacre, I vent out words and smile. Not exotic, not terrorist.

And I recount. I recount 100 dead, 200 dead, 1,000 dead. We teach life, sir. We Palestinians teach life after they have occupied the last sky. We teach life after they have built their settlements and apartheid walls after the last skies. We teach life, sir. We Palestinians wake up every morning to teach the rest of the world life, sir.

11, Puta Life. The negligible value of the Puta’s life at most negligible. At worst, hunted, denied the value of life. The violence committed against them is to be expected, if not deserved.

12, Puta Life. Connection to sex work must be minimized to humanize the subject. 13, Said. The question of Palestine. The plight for Palestinian self-determination enters official discourse in the United States as terrorism. Do you condemn Hamas?

14, Said. The Palestinian struggle is overwhelmingly penalized, defamed, subjected to disproportionate retaliation. 15, Puta Life. My hope is that we will care more about the sex workers’ life enough to reimagine the psychic and material conditions of their lives.

16, Puta Life. Sex workers as feminist insurgents on a magnitude of scales. 17, Said. The Intifada is a blueprint for Palestinian political and social life. Palestinians as feminist insurgents on a magnitude of scales.

18, justice for some. Freedom is a metaphysical aspiration transcended, embodied corporal sensate and beyond. 19, Puta Life. In their ongoing demands for love, respect, and care, these women of [NON-ENGLISH] remind us of all the ways we are entangled in the radiance of the universe, united in our stubborn insistence to live on.

20, Puta Life. The felt sense as infinitely unfolding possibility that inspires greater and deeper relations of care. 21, by taking up the name, they refuse the stigma. Puta is [NON-ENGLISH]

[APPLAUSE]

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] Thank you so much. So this has been an amazing, very powerful, rich, and evocative conversation. And the book certainly deserves this kind of attention. But that means that we’re a little behind time.

And so I wanted to invite you, Professor Rodríguez, just to give a brief response to what you’ve heard. And maybe we do have about 10 minutes, maybe leave some time for at least one question.

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] I’m really happy to– I’ve spoken enough, happy to open it to the floor.

[LEDESMA] Here we have a question here.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Were you able to– oh, thank you. Were you able to look at this movement to honor or at least honor the pain experienced by comfort women and other women in its– I think there’s six court cases right now all over the world of about statues that are controversial.

And I was wondering, did you have a chance to talk to the comfort women– I mean, excuse me, the women of your book about spiritual practices, whether it’s honoring– I think it’s [NON-ENGLISH]? Were you able to get into that at all?

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] What I think is curious is people always assume that I did interviews, that I did oral histories, that this is generally what we do. And so much of the scholarship on sex workers is either about law or policy or that

My focus was on representation. I was looking at what was already documented. But I think it’s interesting that, that move to ask the question was precisely the move that I was not wanting to make. There are sex workers all over the world. I understand what’s happening with the comfort women and career right now. There’s just everywhere.

And everywhere I speak, people will freak, oh, this archive, because there are also archives everywhere, including here in the Bay area, such a rich sex worker history. So in terms of the question, I think it was less about asking women some kind of verifiable truth and looking at forms of representation. But I appreciate the question. Yes.

Maybe one quick more question before we wrap up. Does anybody have another question? I did have one question. I think I began asking you– oh, great. We’ll end with that question.

I really loved in here the very opening of your remarks that you framed it as like Puta had already been assigned to you, but it was up to you to decide your relationship to it. And I was wondering, at what point you knew that you would one day write about Vanessa specifically or about– yeah, the way that Puta shaped the ways that you navigate your life too?

[JUANA MARIA RODRIGUEZ] That’s a really good question. And it also speaks to the Academy. So in my dissertation, which became my first book, Sexual Queer Latinidad, I was writing about identity in cyberspace. And the name of the chapter was called Welcome to the Global Stage– Confessions of a Cyber slut, I think was the subtitle.

So in my dissertation, I sort of outed myself, claimed this term. And I don’t think I quite realized what perhaps the implications for that. I did get a job. I still have a job. So I guess that– yeah, so that was sort of putting it into the academic sphere.

One of the reasons why I care so much about this is I work on a college campus where so many people are supplementing their incomes by doing work that sometimes is illegal. Other things like OnlyFans, not illegal, but totally stigmatized.

There are stories– one story of a doctoral student who her dissertation advisor refused to write her letters of recommendation after she came out as having worked as a sex worker. So the fact that sex workers are stigmatized, that there’s an afterlife for that, questions of technology, certainly be important to that.

But that stigma has very real material consequences. And so, yes, I have written about that. And in some ways, I don’t know what jobs or grants I haven’t gotten because of that. But for other people, those consequences are incredibly real and profound.

Thank you.

[ALBERTO LEDESMA] So thank you all for joining us today for this insightful discussion of an amazing book by Professor Juana María Rodríguez. It’s been a privilege to witness the rich exchange of ideas among all of our panelists– Dr. Rojas, Dr. Morris, as well as engaging in some dialogue.

Throughout our conversation, we explored the complex intersections of race, gender, and sexuality, and how visual representation shapes our understanding of Latino experiences, particularly in the context of sex work.

We touched on the importance of challenging dominant narratives and the potential for more ethical forms of relation and care. Themes that resonate deeply in both Professor Rodríguez’s work, and our broader discussions in the fields of ethnic studies and gender studies.

I want to thank or offer my heartfelt thanks particularly to the Social Science Matrix, to Marian, to Chuck for helping us with the technology. And let’s not forget Julia Sizek, who had organized this panel, and we couldn’t do it last term, for all they did.

I also want to thank all of you for attending today and for being here and hearing this powerful presentation. Your engagement and thoughtful questions have certainly enriched this dialogue. Thank you again for coming. And we look forward to seeing you at future events.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Article

Faculty, Staff Celebrate Social Sciences Fest 2024

On April 18, faculty and staff from the Division of Social Sciences — along with their families — convened at the Faculty Club for Social Sciences Fest, the annual celebration of the social sciences at UC Berkeley. The gathering provided an opportunity for members of the UC Berkeley social sciences community to connect over food and drinks. Several children in attendance enjoyed balloon animals, coloring, and other fun activities.

Dean Raka Ray
Dean Raka Ray

Raka Ray, Dean of the Division of Social Sciences, expressed gratitude for how the division’s members have weathered a tumultuous year. “I want to acknowledge with pride the way the departments in the social sciences, and in particular the chairs, have worked so hard to repair frayed relations and always to do the right thing to keep the community together in circumstances that haven’t always been easy,” Ray said.

Ray also shared her optimism for the division’s future, noting that incoming chancellor Richard Lyons is a social scientist. “My job is to remind him that he is a social scientist,” Ray said. “But although the Provost has been helping to resource us, we are still under-resourced. In spite of that, all of you nurture your students, you produce research that matters, and you do massive amounts of service, not just in the department, but for all of campus. It makes me amazingly proud to be able to represent you.”

A Year of Highlights

Ray listed a variety of highlights from the past academic year, including the creation of a comprehensive internship program that aims to help prepare students from the Division of Social Sciences for meaningful careers.

“I noticed there wasn’t really a structured way in which social science students could get internships at all,” Ray said. “Through our donors, we’ve been able to not only find paid internships, but also money so that people who want to follow their heart and do internships that are unpaid are able to earn minimum wage at least.”

Ray also noted the Fall 2023 creation of the one-year Master of Computational Social Science program, which has already accepted a cohort of 25 students selected from hundreds of applicants. “That shows how much it was needed, so that’s very exciting,” Ray said.

Other highlights included public recognition for UC Berkeley social science graduate programs. Several of the division’s graduate programs received top rankings from U.S. News and World Report, Ray said: the Departments of Sociology, Psychology, and History ranked #1 in the nation, while the Departments of Political Science and Economics ranked 4th best.

Other points of celebration included awards won and books published by faculty, as well as the Matrix Faculty Fellows Program, which supports assistant- and associate-level faculty members from the division for continuing work on research that has a significant impact across multiple disciplines. “We have supported eight faculty thus far and we’re going to support for more next year,” Ray said.

Divisional Awards

Raka Ray and Chris Walters
Raka Ray and Chris Walters

The Division of Social Sciences’ Distinguished Teaching Award was established to encourage and reward faculty members who have been exceptionally generous and effective in both undergraduate and graduate teaching.

This year’s Distinguished Teaching Award was given to Chris Walters, Associate Professor in the UC Berkeley Department of Economics. “Chris does the hard job of teaching popular core and required classes, but he inspires his students tremendously,” Ray said. “He’s also an exceptional advisor to graduate students, and has done a lot to bring in diversity and inclusion into his syllabi to reflect new criticisms of more conventional studies.”

Upon receiving the award, Walters thanked his wife, his colleagues, as well as Berkeley students. “I’ve had the pleasure of working with a lot of really talented undergraduate and graduate students since I’ve been here,” Walters said. “I teach classes in labor economics, which cover potentially difficult, broad topics like minimum wages, the economic impacts of immigration, market discrimination, and so on. In my experience, our students approach those topics with a lot of maturity and intellectual seriousness, and it makes them a real pleasure to teach.”

The Distinguished Service Award, established to recognize a staff member who has made extraordinary service contributions to their department and to the campus, was given to Harumi Quinones, Student Services Director in the UC Berkeley Department of Psychology.

Quinones “has done so much work in not only keeping the morale of the staff and department up, but she’s also been doing incredible work to make psychology even more inclusive,” Ray said. “She really led the effort to remove unnecessary barriers that were preventing people from coming into psychology. Once she did that, the number of psychology majors went up by 50%. But it is still the number one program in the country. Good things happened, as opposed to people’s fear that bad things would happen.”

Harumi Quinones
Harumi Quinones

“I feel so blessed to have had so many faculty supporters who listen to me, and who really were thought partners in thinking about how we can better support students who are interested in psychology,” Quinones said. “I just want to thank this whole wonderful room of supporters and the phenomenal colleagues I have on this campus for helping make wonderful things happen.”

Panel

Storytelling and the Climate Crisis

Contemporary writers and activists have described the climate crisis as, in part, a crisis of the imagination, of culture, and of storytelling. Recorded on March 11, 2024, this panel featured a group of authors and scholars of different genres — science fiction, journalism, history, literary fiction, and comedy — discussing how the climate crisis has impacted their craft and what practices of storytelling have to offer us at this pivotal moment in human history. This panel was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Department of English, the Department of History, and the Berkeley School of Journalism.

Panelists

Daniel Gumbiner is a novelist and editor based in Oakland. His first book, The Boatbuilder, was nominated for the National Book Award. His new novel, Fire in the Canyon, was published by Astra House in 2023. He is the Editor of The Believer.

 

Annalee NewitzAnnalee Newitz is a science fiction writer and science journalist. They are the author of nine books including, most recently, the science fiction novel The Terraformers. They are a contributing opinion writer at the New York Times, a columnist in the The New Scientist, and the co-host of an award-winning podcast, Our Opinions Are Correct.

 

Aaron Sachs is a professor of History and American Studies at Cornell University. He is the author of several books, most recently, Stay Cool: Why Dark Comedy Matters in the Fight against Climate Change (NYU Press, 2023).

 

Rebecca SolnitRebecca Solnit is a writer, historian, and activist, and a graduate of the Berkeley School of Journalism. She has written more than twenty books, including Orwell’s RosesHope in the DarkMen Explain Things to MeA Paradise Built in Hell: The Extraordinary Communities that Arise in Disaster; and A Field Guide to Getting Lost. Together with Thelma Young Lutunatabua, Solnit edited the 2023 collection Not too Late: Changing the Climate Story from Despair to Possibility.

 

Rebecca Herman (moderator) is associate professor in the History Department at UC Berkeley and author of Cooperating with the Colossus (Oxford University Press, 2022). She is currently working on a book about the unlikely ban on mining in Antarctica, told through the stories of the military wives and children, artists, writers, activists, soldiers, and scientists who traveled South in growing numbers during the 1970s and 80s.

 

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[JULIA SIZEK] Hello, everyone. Welcome. I’m Julia Sizek. I am the postdoc here at Social Science Matrix. And it is my pleasure to welcome you all today for this lovely panel that we are about to have on storytelling and climate change, which is perhaps not as lovely as a topic as I think the panel will be. So our lovely panelists will hopefully bring us some redeeming hope in this time that is not always as optimistic as we would like.

And on this optimistic note, we would love for you to support our panelists and the books all of them have written. So we have a sampling of some of them up here, if you want to just peruse, but we also have put some QR codes up if you want to support independent bookstores and purchase the books.

Since we are here at Matrix, it is my obligation to tell you about some of our upcoming events that we will be having in the next couple of weeks. So if you are interested in California issues, on Monday we will be having an event about the conservatorship system in California, which as you may know, is a system through which people are conserved and put under court order to basically get their lives together.

But this system is both coercive for many and can also work to help people with issues like drug addiction. For those of you interested in climate change issues, next week we will also be having an event on Greening infrastructure that will be featuring the work of some of our most promising graduate students here.

It’s always a pleasure to have graduate students be an important part of these conversations that we have. And then on next Thursday, the Berkeley journalism school will be hosting an event that will also feature one of our panelists here Rebecca Solnit, on Thursday, March 21.

So those are just some of the upcoming events. You can also find more at our website, which is Matrix.berkeley.edu

So now, without any further ado, I’m going to introduce Rebecca Herman who is one of our Matrix 2023-2024 faculty Fellows, and also an excellent writer in her own right. Her first book Cooperating with the Colossus was published by Oxford University just in 2022 the book is really an interesting look at a topic that we don’t view as being a communitbased History Project, which is about the process of US military basing around Latin America.

More relevant to our topic today, Rebecca is currently working on some environmental issues in Antarctica, and I invite you to ask her about them. They’re very interesting. And so with that, I will hand it over to Rebecca and eventually to our panelists.

[APPLAUSE]

[REBECCA HERMAN] Thanks. All right. Thank you all for joining us, especially on this spectacularly sunny day. I always wonder how the sun might impact turnout at an event, no matter how compelling the event is. Thanks also to my panelists for being here. I’ve been really looking forward to this for months.

So in recent years, prominent writers, scholars and activists like Amitav Ghosh, Adrienne Maree Brown, Mary Hegler and Rebecca Solnit, among others, have been calling our attention to the work that storytelling can do in the face of the climate crisis.

If for a long time writers and activists were focused much of their energy on convincing the public that human made climate change was happening, now that they’ve mostly succeeded in that task, narrative and story are freed up to do all sorts of other things. And so part of the question that I’m eager to hear from the writers on this panel about is, what can and should they do?

The panel brings together four writers who work in and across different genres. We’ve got comedy, history, science fiction, science journalism, literary fiction and nonfiction essays, to share with us concretely how climate change has impacted their work and the particular promise and strengths the different narrative forms present for connecting with people around climate.

So the format of today’s event– bless you –will be pretty straightforward. I’ve asked each of the panelists to come up and speak casually for about 10 minutes, and then we’re going to open things up to the question, two questions from the audience. And before we kick off, I’m going to briefly introduce all four of them so that they can come up in succession.

Did my mic just do something? It’s sort of in and out. OK. All right.

So I was saying the format. All right. And then I’m going to introduce them all at once, that’s right. So between the four of them they’ve published over 40 books. So if I gave a really comprehensive introduction, you will be here listening to me all day.

So I’m going to say a little bit about them and then all four of them had a new book come out in 2023 that are all relevant to this topic. So I’m going to say a few words about each of the 2023 books, which you can link to through the QR code up here, and then we also have copies of them that you can check out up here after the panel.

And we decided you’re going to go in the order that you’re sitting right. First up we’re going to have Aaron Sachs, who’s a professor of History and American Studies at Cornell University. And his 2023 book is Stay Cool, Why Dark Comedy Matters in the Fight Against Climate Change. And I suspect we’ll hear more about this book in a minute.

But in the book he observes that the environmental movement has been, quote, “the least funny social movement that’s ever existed,” and he draws on the historical importance of dark comedy for other communities that have faced horrific oppression and dark times, to make a case for why comedy can contribute to the fight against climate change.

After Aaron, we’re going to hear from Rebecca Solnit, who is a writer, historian and activist and a graduate of Berkeley’s Journalism School. She has written more than 20 books, so she did a lot of heavy lifting with that overall book count, including Orwell’s Roses, Hope in the Dark, Men Explain Things to me, A Field Guide to Getting Lost.

Her 2023 book is a co-edited volume with Thelma Young Lutunatabua. Is that correct? Called Not Too Late, Changing the Climate Story From Despair to Possibility, which brings contributions from a number of important voices in this space, including several that I mentioned at the beginning.

Then we’ll have Annalee Newitz, who’s a graduate of Berkeley as well of the English department, a science fiction writer, a science journalist and co-host of the podcast Our Opinions are Correct.

Their the author of nine books. The Four on the website is an unforgivable typo and I publicly apologized. Most recently, the science fiction novel The Terraformers, which is the 2023 book, although they have a book coming out imminently also, but not on display. Not currently on display.

The Terraformers came out in 2023, and that book takes readers to the year 59,006 and beyond, to the planet of Sask-E where the novel’s protagonists are preparing the planet for settlement when the book begins.

My own anxiety about climate change has required me to eliminate dystopian books from my diet. And so The Terraformers is a really, for me was a breath of fresh air to read and a great example of the way science fiction can engage with climate questions.

And then we have Daniel Gumbiner, who’s a novelist based in Oakland and the editor of the magazine The Believer, also a Berkeley grad from the English department. His first book The Boat Builder was nominated for the National Book Award, and his new novel Fire in the Canyon came out in 2023 with Astra House.

The book is about a California family living in the foothills dealing with all sorts of things that California families deal with, including now the ravages of, and perpetual anxiety created by wildfire. So I’m really so thrilled to have these four panelists with us. And I’ll turn it over to Aaron. You’re up first.

[AARON SACHS] Well, thank you so much, Becca, for the invitation and for organizing this. And thanks also to the other panelists. It’s really a privilege to be here with you. I’ve also been very excited about this for months. And thank you all for being here.

So in dark times like I think we’re living through right now, I feel as though we need to draw on all the different coping strategies that human beings have developed over the millennia. I think I’m on this panel and that was just confirmed, because of the work that I’ve done on comedy and I promise that I will get to that.

But first I actually wanted to mention a couple of other forms of storytelling that have been important through the ages and that I have found myself turning to quite a bit over the last several years of my ongoing midlife crisis. And those are music and religion.

I’m very lucky to have been married to someone for almost 25 years now, who is, among other things, a semi-professional singer and for the last decade or so she’s been part of a multiracial choir called The Dorothy Cotton Jubilee Singers.

Some of you probably know Dorothy Cotton. She was a civil rights activist and educator, worked very closely with Dr. King, and wound up spending the last few decades of her life in Ithaca, where I live. The Jubilee Singers specialize in Negro spirituals and also do some gospel.

And I feel like I can testify, having gone to dozens of their shows at this point, that their audiences and I really think this is true, no matter what is going on in the world or if it’s not too presumptuous to say, no matter what’s going on in their personal lives, they leave the auditorium visibly uplifted.

And this happens to me as well, and it’s kind of shocking every time because I’m a Jew from Boston and never in a million years could I have predicted that I would eventually find solace in songs that are almost entirely about Jesus.

I should acknowledge that I was raised as a reform Jew, which is basically the same as Unitarian. Religion was always somewhat important to me, but really for what I would call secular reasons.

So for instance, Passover was my favorite holiday because it really it was an excuse for our extended family to get together and have a giant feast, and also because it is a holiday that is largely about storytelling.

The Passover Seder exists in order for Jews to take time out every year and repeat, retell the story of the escape from slavery in Egypt. And I found that quite moving, and over time extremely comforting.

And there’s one particular passage. This is from Exodus, chapter 14, for those of you keeping track, that has become particularly important to me in recent times. And I thought– it’s very short, I thought I would just share it with you since it’s almost spring, almost the season of Passover and I really find it to be very powerful storytelling. It goes like this.

“And so in the middle of the night the Jews arose and fled with their unleavened bread and whatever else they could carry. And they continued all the next day and into the night, and began to feel it was safe to rest. But then they came to the shore of the Red Sea and it ran high and fast and they could not cross.

And they looked behind them and saw Pharaoh’s army bearing down for the Lord had hardened Pharaoh’s heart. And then the leaders of the Jews looked up at the heavens and said, seriously?” This is the King James version.

“Seriously? What was the point of helping us escape if we were just going to die here in the wilderness. Were there not enough grave sites in Egypt?” that’s actually in the Bible, you can check. Serious.

And of course, the amazing thing as you all know, is that the Lord appreciated the joke, parted the waters and the Jews crossed to safety, which just goes to show, if you’re really good at Gallows humor, you can control sea levels, which could come in handy.

  1. So now we’re at the Comedy part. I started thinking about comedy in connection to climate change mostly because I was depressed and all of my students were depressed. And this was true from the moment I started teaching Environmental History, which is back in 2005.

I had to grapple with the question of how to present this rather difficult material without making all of us in the room feel worse. At the time, my main strategy was to focus on hope. I actually assigned Rebecca Solnit’s book Hope in the Dark, which had just come out in 2004. On display.

And I talked a lot, as Rebecca also often talks a lot, about the uncertainty and contingency of history, how history shows that nothing is predictable, nothing is inevitable. It all depends on how people choose to act, which means that we always have the power to reshape society through our collective action.

That helped for a little while. Then after a few years, this is when my midlife crisis really kicked in, I really felt I was losing hope, in part because I was dealing with both parents getting Alzheimer’s disease. This is when I really started to appreciate comedy.

Because when you start to lose the people best to something like brain damage, you have to laugh at the ridiculous things that they say. And I think I can say, from my own experience, that your loved ones will respond much better if you laugh than if you look horrified, which you are often tempted to do unfortunately.

It was my friend Jenny Price– and if you don’t know Jenny’s work, she has a book called Stop Saving the Planet! Exclamation Point, which is very fun to check out I would recommend it. Jenny helped me connect the personal and the political in this case and see that the kind of comedy I was relying on to cope with what was happening with my parents could actually also help in the context of the climate crisis.

Her main approach had to do with communication. We could get our message across better if we delivered it with a smile, instead of a sneer or a grimace. And I agreed completely, as did a number of social scientists who were just then beginning to publish studies suggesting that humor was more activating to people than, say, fear mongering. Not a shock, but the studies helped.

These social scientists also tended to emphasize that we should use what they referred to sometimes as good natured humor, so jokes that felt relatively safe and cheerful. And that also made sense to me. Although, I personally felt that what I needed was something a little bit darker.

And in addition to that, by, let’s say the mid-20 teens, it started feeling to me like the real challenge for environmentalists was no longer convincing people that climate change was coming for us, but rather dealing with the overwhelming despair that many people were starting to feel because it had become clear to them that climate change was already here.

So that’s when I started looking more deeply into the history of dark comedy and started realizing how apt gallows humor could be for this current moment. It turns out, and Becca referred to this at the beginning, that people in the Western world have been relying on jokes, and especially people who have experienced oppression, have been relying on jokes for thousands of years to gain some purchase, just a little purchase on their horrifying realities.

One of the great scholars of gallows humor named Antonin Obrdlik, wrote in 1942 that gallows humor should be understood in his words as an index of strength or morale on the part of oppressed peoples. So this was 1942. Maybe you could tell from his last name, which has four consecutive syllables that he’s Czech, so he’s writing as he put it based largely on experiences in Czechoslovakia following the advent of Hitler.

There is actually quite a lot of Holocaust humor, meaning humor from during the Holocaust, which some people today have a hard time fathoming or accepting, but I think it’s a really important thing to know about. And there’s quite a lot in the book. Prisoners in concentration camps organized variety shows and circuses and cabarets.

There was a group of friends at Treblinka who used to say to each other, hey, don’t eat so much because we’re the ones who are going to have to carry your body out of here, which was a very dark joke because, of course, they had hardly anything to eat at all. It’s also well documented that enslaved African-Americans had a very rich dark comedy tradition.

I’ll just quickly give you one of my favorite examples. So Ike comes into the master bedroom with breakfast one morning and the master says, Ike, I had the strangest dream last night. I went to Black person heaven and I found that the buildings were crumbling and the streets were full of potholes and the people were starving, even though it was heaven.

And Ike says, yeah, that is strange. But I’ll tell you, I had an even stranger dream last night. I dreamed that I went to white person heaven and the buildings were beautiful and the streets were paved with gold, but there wasn’t a single person there. Imagine that, nobody made it to white person heaven.

So it makes perfect sense to me that young people are starting to hold up signs at climate marches saying things like “I was hoping for a cooler death.” And elderly celebrities are doing climate comedy videos where they stare at the camera and say my grandkids are spoiled, anyway. They could use a little hardship.

And stand up comedians are coming up with lines like “bringing kids into this world is scary, so I’m thinking about buying my boys a kayak.” I actually bought two kayaks for my family during the pandemic, as many people did, but honestly, they did not really help. I thought my midlife crisis was bad when my parents were in decline, but now I have three teenagers and that turns out to be even worse.

On the plus side, my kids make me so insane that at least I don’t really have time to worry about the climate crisis anymore. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I always feel that break– well, in journalism we were trained to talk about breaking stories, which is always being the first person to tell a story. I also love the phrase in terms of breaking stories that trap us, that stall us out, that point us in the wrong direction, that prevent us from seeing stories that are cages instead of doors.

And I think there’s something on the left that happens a lot, which is the rhetoric, like, “we need to start tomorrow,” which is always assuming it’s not yet– nobody’s doing anything. It’s not happening yet.

We haven’t done a damn thing. And so just because some of you may be slightly left in this crowd, I thought I would just mention that I think my basic premise is we have a lot of new stories that have really evolved in my lifetime, radical transformation from the mainstream stories, even 30 years ago where Indigenous, or 35 years ago, where Indigenous people were almost completely written out.

People used to talk about the nature culture divide, as though there were two co-equal and separate spheres, et cetera. So our new stories are seedlings. They need to be watered and tended and seed collected and promulgated, but they’re here.

Fredric Jameson famously remarked “someone once said it is easier to imagine the end of the world than imagine the end of capitalism.” I’d like to paraphrase that to say that some people find it easier to imagine the end of the world than the end of the fossil fuel industry,” even though the industry is in real dire straits right now, as my friend Antonio Juhasz, one of the country’s most brilliant oil policy analysts, told me last week.

So every crisis is in part a storytelling crisis, and that’s as true of the climate crisis as anything ever. A lot of people, and this is why we produce the book Not Too Late, the website study guide and et cetera, Thelma and I. So a lot of people don’t know the essential things they should, or should have been told, including that we have the solutions, we know what to do.

The climate movement has achieved a lot, which is not the same thing as enough, obviously, and won many victories, including perhaps the most significant victory of all, awakening the public to the nature of the crisis, its urgency and creating a majority population in this country and across much of the world that is eager to see action in response to climate change money spent, et cetera.

The whole idea that nobody cares is not really there. And to break another story, we’re often told that our job is to convert the climate denialists, which is A, a complete waste of time because it doesn’t work. B, they’re not very large or important. And C, I think the real job is always not to convert our enemies but to motivate our allies.

We have what we need. We just need to activate it, at least in terms of people who agree with us. So some of the storytelling problems are specific to climate, some are larger problems of imagination. By problems of the imagination I mean that the ways a lot of people imagine power and change are, well, disempowering.

We all get handed a version in which power resides in a very few people an elite of officials and the wealthy and highly visible, but change often begins in the shadows and the margins, among people who are not yet known or may never who may also be marginalized or dismissed or low status. This is true of every human rights movement and a lot of environmental and climate movements and campaigns.

It’s also true that ideas are very powerful and they almost always– all the good the progressive ideas, the ideas that have made the world better, begin in the margins in the shadows and move towards the center. People in the center are blinded by the spotlights on them. But we don’t have to be.

And so when it comes to this migration of ideas, I think of it as a reminder that ideas are powerful, which should fortify anybody doing work in the Social Sciences and Humanities at a University, despite the fact that so many departments are being dismantled and we’re so often told what we do doesn’t matter.

But back to power, the easy thing to see is the end of a campaign when a president mouths a new value, a court hands down a constructive decision, a legislative body passes a good law. Change ended there. It didn’t begin there and the news stories often forget the long journey of a good idea.

Martin Luther King Jr. famously said that the arc of history is long, but it bends towards justice. But whichever way it bends, because it bends and we’ve seen a lot of bending in the other direction lately, whichever way it bends, you have to be able to see the arc. And I’m pretty sure by arc he meant a gradual curve, not a sudden angle as if history took a sharp left. Although, sometimes it does.

So I’m seeing it as sudden because change has been going on all along, but you finally recognize it. The expectation that change will be swift and the failure to perceive it when it’s not, impacts politics and public culture for the worse. A common source of uninformed despair is when a too brief effort doesn’t bring a desired result or when one loss becomes the basis for someone to decide winning is impossible and just quit.

It says that if you tossed a coin once and decided it always comes up tails, so you shouldn’t bother. The best movie I’ve seen about all this is a 2022 documentary called To the End. It traces the creation of the Sunrise Movement, the US climate organization for people under 30 started in 2018, and their launch of the Green New Deal, showing how it influenced the Biden campaign’s climate platform deserves credit for build back better.

And finally, yes, in reduced and compromised form, but still cross the finish line in August of 2022, after most of us have had given up on it as the Inflation Reduction Act. That is by taking only a five year time frame, it shows what ended up as a huge piece of legislation began as young idealists nobody had ever heard of dreaming of change, and by tracing that trajectory shows that young people grassroots campaigns and good new ideas have power.

The short term version gives you politicians giving us nice things. The long term version shows you movements shifting what’s considered possible, reasonable and necessary, setting the stage and creating the pressure for these events offering a truer analysis of power.

There’s a wonderful scene in To the End in which Alex O’Keefe, then creative director of the Sunrise Movement, declares as he unloads a station wagon, “people who do nothing, people who have not even canvassed or anything, they start critiquing your strategy to win. But how are you going to win? What’s your strategy? Is it realistic? Can we win?

Who cares if we win, man? We’re just unpacking boxes. You do things step by step.” His patient commitment to do what comes next, including unpack the car, the next thing and the next thing and the next thing, because that’s how campaigns work. Reminds me of Greta Thunberg’s famous– I guess I’m only reading famous almost cliched statements in this talk, but I put it together this morning.

–of Greta Thunberg’s famous 2019 declaration “avoiding climate breakdown will require cathedral thinking. We must lay the foundation while we may not know exactly how to build the ceiling.” And that encodes a story that tells us two really beautiful important things, as I understand it. One is that addressing the climate crisis is a long term project calling for many kinds of labor, as building a cathedral was. You may only have one brick to contribute to it, but a million people with one brick is a pretty big structure.

The other is that we must work towards a post-fossil fuel world, knowing that the solutions are continuing to evolve. For example, solar and wind were expensive, utterly inadequate technologies at the beginning of this Millennium, but are now cheap, effective and being implemented at a dizzying rate while battery storage and materials are also evolving at an astonishing speed.

A lot of people are still kind of stuck in the early Climate Movement Era where we didn’t really have any solutions, except austerity, energy conservation, fucking compact, fucking fluorescent light bulbs, et cetera. We’ve moved beyond them, thank God.

So people often imagine the future as a version of the present in which something already obvious expands, rather than one in which wholly new actors, movements, ideas, technologies values, may change the rules.

I spent a lot of last year saying that, while it is very hard to imagine the year 2073– and I have to update this, but I’m more familiar with 1973 than 1974, so bear with me. Well, it’s very hard to imagine the year 2073 now, nobody in 1973 could imagine 2023 in all its radical difference, both wonderful and horrible, from where we were then.

But all the good things we’ve gained are because people fought for them, campaigned for them, organized for them for enviornmental protection that was inseparable from the radically bigger, deeper, more widespread environmental knowledge intelligence, awareness since then. Fought as the burgeoning Queer Rights Movements, Indigenous Rights, Latinx Rights, Asian-American Rights and Women’s Rights Movements then.

Even as what those goals should be, what the language should be, what the norms should be, continue to evolve. And the Black Civil Rights Movement served as a model for them all and never stopped. Like them, we must work towards a future we can imagine, but cannot know, and learn along the way. That’s what I think cathedral thinking also means.

And we must learn to tell stories in which some loss is inevitable. Some has already happened with climate chaos, but it does not mean we can give up or that we are going to lose everything. Everything we do matters.

How much time do I have left? OK.

I’ve long found that Americans are so unenthused about uncertainty. They often replace the truth of uncertainty with false certainty, declarations about what is going to happen as though they had the gift of prophecy with a tendency towards doom and gloom and negativity. Optimism, pessimism, cynicism and doomerism, all have this in common.

They assume they know what will happen. And if the future is already decided, then nothing is required of us. Frontline communities facing annihilation don’t generally indulge in this kind of passivity, but the comfortable too often do because it gets us off the hook.

If we already know what’s going to happen, we don’t have to do anything. And for those of us who just go sit on the couch, that’s easy to say if it means your children are going to starve or you’re going to be driven out of your ancestral lands. There’s no sofa there that you can kick back on.

So hope, or my version of it, is just the recognition that the future is unknown because it’s being made in the present by what we do or fail to do. And it’s with a commitment to seize the possibilities, because possibility is another term for uncertainty. You risk failure, but doing nothing is another kind of failure, a nothing ventured, nothing gained kind.

I love the prison abolitionist Mariame Kaba’s aphorism “Hope is a discipline,” because likewise people often confuse hope with confidence and feeling good. There’s a lot of confusion between thought and feeling, particularly around climate, between emotions and ideas, which is why I’ve taken to saying I respect despair as an emotion, but it shouldn’t be confused with an analysis.

You can feel terrible and not surrender as people in desperate circumstances often have and often do. There’s some evidence that the fossil fuel industry loves and supports doomerism and defeatism because it serves their ultimate purposes. So I also want a story of defiance in which we don’t give them what we want. And I want stories that make people spit in their eye and refuse to surrender.

I think here of Timothy Snyder’s admonition in his List of 20 Ways to Resist Authoritarianism, right after Trump was elected. “Do not surrender in advance” was one of them. And I think it’s really important for climate too, do not surrender in advance. And while these are not stories per se, they are the preconditions, the mindsets that make some stories possible to tell or send other stories packing.

Two, we don’t just need technological change crucial, though it is. We need imaginative change. I do not believe we will do what the climate needs us to do out of an abstracted rational analysis.

We will do it out of a heartfelt understanding that everything is connected that burning fossil fuel kills places, species, fellow human beings, social systems, that the world itself is made of systems, not isolated individuals. And to believe that not out of a sense of grim responsibility or obligation, the classic white people guilt way of framing things, but of what Robin Wall Kimmerer describes as reciprocity, a sense of giving back out of gratitude towards the beautiful abundance of what has been given.

The good news is that among, at least some of us, this worldview has been steadily growing the past 30 years, thanks in large part to the people who never lost it, the Indigenous communities whose perspectives have been crucial in the most practical, as well as the most imaginative ways to climate action.

Science itself is now offering aligned stories in which nature is largely socialist, not capitalist, by which I mean it’s driven by mutuality, symbiosis, interdependence and cooperation, not the version of competition so popular with the social Darwinists.

I also believe we’re afflicted by a story pushed hard by right wingers and the fossil fuel industry, that we currently live in an age of abundance. And that doing what the climate requires of us means austerity, sacrifice, renunciation. It definitely means fewer hamburgers, but they’re gross anyway. I get to enter some personal bias here. I have not eaten one in this Millennium. Ew!

There’s a better story to tell in which the great majority of the world’s people live in austerity and poverty now and one in which we’re constantly sacrificing lives, cultures, politics to the deadly literal and political poison that is fossil fuels.

We’ve accepted a dirty smoggy polluted world as so normal it’s hardly perceived. I think of that moment in the pandemic when a huge amount of noise stopped from machines and people suddenly heard birds afresh, and when in Northern India a huge amount of pollution stopped and there were cities seeing the Himalayas in the distance for the first time in decades.

Doing what the climate crisis requires of us could assuage the crisis of hopelessness and despair about the future. Redesigning the world could make a world that’s more accommodating of diverse people, young, old, with disabilities, all income levels. We can make it what we want. We have to radically redesign the world.

If we can lead with good stories, we can redesign it to be a better place for a lot more of us and a more that includes other species and other parts of the world, as well as our own species and our own particular corner of the world.

Rethinking what constitutes wealth could mean shifting from the idea of accumulating wealth and possessions to security in our communities, confidence about our future and a wealth of time, because if we’re not consuming so frantically, we don’t have to produce so frantically. A wealth of time for relationships, including not only social relationships, but relationships to our own interior life and to the natural world and other species.

Finally, I think we need news stories that are not lone individual, rugged manly, hero stories when they’re superhero stories and the hero’s relevant quality, that the Ubermensch quality is the ability to endure and inflict tremendous violence. That’s not actually how the world gets changed.

The world gets changed for the better, largely by people who are patient, tenacious, can inspire others, can draw people together, build alliances, solidarity, find common ground and imagine a better future. Thank you all. I rushed through that because there was a lot.

[APPLAUSE]

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I think the pathway to this podium is part of the dark humor that we’re propagating here. Thank you again for having me. This is really awesome. It’s great to be back in my old academic haunts.

I have kind of a funny career, which requires me to balance between doing science journalism, which is evidence based, where one tries one’s very best to tell the truth and I also write science fiction, where one tries one’s best to lie. And make things up. But I do try to make my science fiction as evidence based as possible as well.

And I want to tell you a little bit about the coming together, but also the clash between those two worlds and the way that we express stories about them. So let me tell you about my summer vacation last summer. I was lucky enough to join a group of environmental scientists at the Marine Biological Laboratory in Woods Hole, which is in Cape Cod, Massachusetts.

There’s a couple of Marine Biological labs there actually, the whole town is kind of overrun by scientists. And what we were doing was a group of journalists like myself were joining a team led by the environmental chemist Anne Giblin whose work is terrific. She’s done a lot of investigation of how chemical changes in the tundra in the Arctic are triggering other kinds of cascading effects.

And she also looks at the area around Woods Hole. There’s a Bay there called Waquoit Bay, which has become the subject of a great deal of study of looking at how nitrogen loading in the water leads to deoxygenation, and that leads to fish die-offs. I’m sure those of you who are familiar with environmental crises have heard about this before.

So I go there and I get to tag along with them while they’re doing things that to me are deeply exciting. Like, we get to put on waders, go into the Bay and dig up chunks of algae, and then we put them into a fricking mass spectrometer. I mean, first, we had to dry them out and do a bunch of stuff, you can’t just like throw algae at a mass spectrometer. But I’d never seen a mass spectrometer before. I’d been writing about them for like decades, OK?

And I’m always, like, mass spectrometer, pretty badass. And I saw it, and I literally was freaking out, and the scientists thought that was very cute and they let me kind of stand next to the mass spectrometer. Do not touch. It has a laser in it, so it’s a little bit dangerous.

And to me all of these things were just incredibly exciting. And I kept kind of gushing at them about how this was really amazing. And then somehow it got out among the scientists that I write science fiction, which I had sort of– I had come into this fellowship being like I’m a very serious science journalist. Here are my books that are all science journalism.

And they got so excited and they were, like, we love science fiction. We want to talk to you all about science fiction. And I’m, like, I’m a little embarrassed. I wrote this novel about building ecosystems. It’s quite silly and it’s not what you guys are doing out there with the algae. And they were, like, no, no. Actually science fiction is incredibly important to us.

And in fact, one of the scientists at EMBL, one of the papers he’d published became the basis for Ray Naylor’s novel The Mountain in the Sea. Highly recommend. Great book about octopus cities. And he was just thrilled. He was, like, did you know my article was cited in a fiction book?

[LAUGHTER]

It’s, like, that’s not going to get you credit for tenure pal. But they I had a couple of theories about why it was that science fiction got these scientists so excited. And I think part of it is these are environmental scientists who are, of course, constantly thinking about the future. They actually are gathering tons of data and trying to use computer simulations to project into the future how these inputs into the environment are going to continue to change the environment.

That’s their entire job. They’re environmental scientists, so they study change over time, change over long periods of time, as Rebecca was kind of pointing out. These are things that happen on massively long time scales. And so I think that they are in fact, in some ways, engaged in extremely evidence-based acts of science fiction. They’re looking at this sort of speculative future.

The other thing I think that makes environmental scientists interested in science fiction is that environmental science is a very collective practice. You cannot just go out by yourself in one lifetime and study an ecosystem. You have to have someone like Anne Giblin, who’s a chemist. We also had someone with us who studies food webs, so looking at biological relationships between life forms and actually not even just life forms, but also kind of the chemical precursors of life.

And of course, at the Institute itself, there are people who are studying everything from inorganic chemistry to communications, how to communicate with the public. So they’re very used to this idea that tons of people have to come together in order to discover anything. But the problem is that, as a science journalist, and for them I think, as scientists trying to curate their careers, they’re really encouraged to think about great individuals.

I can’t tell you how many times I’ve gone to an editor at a major magazine or newspaper and said, I really want to write a story about this group of 10 people who did a thing. And they’re like, yeah, no. Pick a person. There has to be a person who’s like the leader. And hopefully they’ll be hot so we can have a picture of them.

And this is not how anything is done. No such thing as science that’s done by like one hot person and in waders with algae. And so the thing that science fiction can do really well, I think, is actually give us an opportunity to tell stories about collaborations between a number of characters that take place over a long period of time.

And so I want to finish it up in my last couple of minutes here by telling you a tiny bit about my novel The Terraformers, which came out last year, which is about a group of environmental engineers on another planet trying to create novel ecosystems.

There’s a little kink in their plans, which is that they are all, in fact, owned by a interstellar real estate corporation, which develops artisanal handcrafted planets. And they’re developing an Earth like world. So the world is owned by the real estate company, but so are all of the people on the world because they were genetically engineered to be good workers who create these ecosystems.

And the people on this world are not just Homo Sapiens. In fact, Homo Sapiens is kind of a weird identity that you might kind of choose to have, if you have the money. But these are mostly kind of knockoff hominids. And then of course, the major characters in the novel are moose.

There’s a really great moose romance. There’s a romance between a sentient flying train and a cat, who’s an investigative journalist. So this is a world where I did want to have a sense of coziness, cozy humor. It’s not very dark humor, except in some places. But also I wanted to suggest what happens to personhood in the future, if you actually take seriously the idea that our environments and our ecosystems are full of living creatures who all have something to contribute.

And so what I wanted to do with that kind of imaginative world was kind of posed to my reader the question of, what would it look like if you were trying to shepherd an ecosystem and every member of that ecosystem could come to the table and tell you what the fuck they want from you? What if the cows on your farm could say, hey, I’d actually like things to be different?

There is a radical revolutionary cow in my novel, by the way, who does some pretty awesome stuff. And what would happen if we took seriously the requests of moose about where they got to migrate? And so in my novel the basis for this idea of all of these different parts of the ecosystem coming to the table, is a deep seated belief in something that they call the great bargain.

Now remember, this is a novel set in 50,000 years. So there’s a lot of culture that’s happened between now and that future. And the great bargain is the word that they have for the scientific process that has allowed them to speak with non-human animals.

And so there’s all of these non-human animals who are part of this great bargain. And I wanted to allow readers to have that idea in their heads. I mean, I was very deliberate about it. I was like, I want people to think about the great bargain, and how do we get to the great bargain? And how do we think about our relationship with nature or what we call nature? How do we think about our relationship with our ecosystem as a bargain?

Not as us capitulating, not as something capitulating to us, but us entering into a bargain. And it’s a bargain that we keep. And that’s another promise in the novel, is that this bargain is kept, all of the treaties are kept that they make in the book.

And so basically what happens when you write fiction, I’ve found, like The Terraformers, is that I was able to show these communities at work, but also the book takes place over a period of many thousand years. So we’re able to see how an ecosystem evolves, but also how a social movement evolves over time and over the generations, and how the gains made by moose who fall in love in one generation.

How those are passed on to the next generation of people, who set up a fantastic public transit system for the planet and those people pass on their wishes to the next generation, which includes this investigative journalist cay who falls in love with a train and exposes the corruption of the evil corporation that runs their planet.

And maybe that way they’ll have a chance to change things again and seize control of this privately owned nature. Thanks very much for listening.

[APPLAUSE]

[DANIEL GUMBINER] Hi, everyone. I’m Daniel. This is so cool. There are so many– I want to talk about so many different points that my fellow panelists have raised, but I’ll try and keep this short, so you guys can ask some questions too. I wanted to talk a little bit about my book Fire in the Canyon, which came out this year and sort of the origins of it and how it came to be.

There are no moose romances, alas. But it’s a contemporary tale about a family living in the Sierra foothills, who are confronting the threat of wildfire. And what happens essentially is that a wildfire moves through their town and it sort of sets in motion this chain of events for these different members of this family, the Hecht family.

And in the book you follow each member of the family and see the way in which the aftermath of the fire affects them. And I think, obviously wildfires are intensely covered in the moment when they occur. There’s lots of journalism. But then in the aftermath it’s a little bit quieter.

And so that to me seemed like the province of a novel, because the story goes on right. People are still there and the story doesn’t stop in the days after the wildfire. So I wanted to explore the emotional experience of what happens after you go through something like that.

And the inspiration really came from returning to California actually. I grew up here, but I was living in Las Vegas for a little while for a job. And when I came back, even in the years that I had been gone, I felt like the shift in the way that wildfires were affecting my friends and family all over the state was so dramatic compared to even like the last few years that I had been gone.

And I was really struck by that, as someone who had grown up here and how different the Summers felt and the Falls. And so I felt a sort of obligation to bear witness to that. And that’s sort of where the impulse to start the story came from. But then, and this is a panel obviously on storytelling, there were these questions that arose and challenges that arose of telling that kind of story.

And I think one of the most difficult things I wrestled with when working on this book was figuring out the lens of it, figuring out how wide the aperture would be essentially, because obviously climate change is a massive subject. It’s a vast subject. It’s sometimes very difficult to even wrap our heads around how much is implicated.

But humans aren’t usually emotionally moved by a sense of vastness they’re usually moved by the particular. We’re hardwired to relate to each other on a personal level. And so I had to figure out a way to tell the story that felt authentic and moving on a personal level, while not feeling like it was also reductive and not taking in the full scope of what the issue actually is.

And I think that’s one of the biggest challenges about writing on Climate Change in any genre, really. And it can be a challenge in nonfiction, but particularly in fiction where you’re often working to try to move the reader and to have them emotionally connect to a story.

And that’s so essential too in fiction, because that’s the work that fiction does, that’s what makes it powerful, is that ability to grab you and emotionally transport you. And so that was one of the challenges. And what I decided to do was to just really zero in on the particular and work from there, and let that expand out into the broader story.

So there’s a very concentrated story in a lot of ways. It’s looking at a very specific thing, but the hope is that it alludes to everything else through that small specific detail. Another one of the challenges was actually thinking about the political in the work. And obviously Climate Change is a highly politicized topic. And in some ways, when I wrote the first draft actually, it didn’t really engage the political that closely.

And there was something about it that felt off to me, which was something that often happens in the process of writing something. There’s something wrong, you don’t know exactly why, but it’s just not sitting right with. You don’t have the answer, but it’s missing something. And for me, it felt like it was sort of coy, in a way, to not engage this the political dimension of this thing, which was so obviously political.

But it also felt like when I tried experiments with incorporating political threads into the story, that it just overwhelmed the personal aspects of it, and kind of drowned it out. And I think that is a particular challenge of writing about climate change, is that balance between letting the political just kind of subsume everything else and still managing to incorporate it in some way.

And so what I ultimately did with regard to that was to basically try to let the political speak through the characters concerns. And that was a really big turning point for me in revising this book, was basically figuring out a way to through the lived concerns of the characters, to speak to some of these issues. And once I did that, it felt like the key had sort of turned in the book and I was seeing it in a different way and it allowed it to feel more honest to me.

The last thing I’ll say is just that I think in writing fiction one of the most important things it can do is create a sense of communion. And I think that’s something that we really, as many of the panelists have alluded to, we really need that sense of neighborliness in this moment.

And I think there’s a way in which we can sometimes feel alienated from our fellow people and feel like we are sort of suffering in isolation with some of these subjects. And it’s so important, I think, in this moment in particular to identify our shared experience with each other.

And so that’s, I think, one of the other things that storytelling can really play a role in this moment, is kind of opening up those conversations, uniting us. One of the most interesting parts of writing this book actually was I did a lot of research for it and that involved talking to a lot of people who had been through different kinds of experiences with wildfire.

And those conversations were so interesting and really varied. But one of the consistent features of them was that everyone really wanted to talk to me. I had sort of gone into it thinking, oh, it’s going to be hard to get people to open up about this. I don’t know if it’s going to be– this might be a challenging research project.

But really the experience was that once people were invited to share, they just really wanted to talk about it. It was on a lot of people’s minds. They didn’t feel like there was a forum for them to express what they had gone through.

And so I think that is something that’s so important in storytelling, to keep our levels up collectively as a group, whether that’s through your own writing storytelling in that regard or whether that’s through private conversations, groups like this. So I think that’s another thing that’s really important and something that storytelling can kind of uniquely– a way in which it can uniquely serve us in this moment. Thanks.

[APPLAUSE]

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] How to use one of these things? It sounds like a lot of your exploration on story writing is pushing back against despair.

REBECCA SOLNIT] Are you talking to me or to all of us?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] –a lot of this throughout. No. And I guess I’m thinking of the counterpoint to Aaron’s dark humor, which I love of course. But have we feasted for a long time on stories of despair? Why has despair been our go to disposition? If you have any thoughts on that.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] Do I ever? But I don’t want to hog the time.

That’s a great question.

Say something.

And I think that it serves as status quo, capitalism, commercial culture, et cetera, to tell us we’re consumers, not citizens, that we have very little power, that the power rests in the hands of the mighty, the elite minority to whom we should be very nice to get what we want. I think we don’t have a lot of stuff that familiarizes us with how unpredictable the world is. And I opened with the famous “It’s easier to imagine the end of the world than the end of capitalism.”

And of course, I think, even the end of capitalism frames it as either like everything is capitalism and the only alternative is nothing is capitalism. I think of it more as all of us in our friendships and our passions, if we do volunteer work, donate money to noble causes, et cetera, are doing anti-capitalist things all the time. Gardening is kind of anti-capitalist.

Unless you’re employing a poor person to do it for you. I was just in West Marin where I saw a lot of that. So I think a lot of things work hard against people feeling powerful, confident, relatively at ease with a world. Either people think change is all for the worse or that nothing ever really changes. Usually they believe both of those things at once.

I think, in a sense, it’s like we have bad equipment, equipment that’s poorly adapted to reality and understanding change, understanding power, often understanding how much worse things were. As an old feminist and a longtime climate activist, when Roe versus Wade got overturned, a lot of people were like, oh, feminism is completely rolling backwards.

And it’s like, well, we did have this right for 50 years. I don’t believe we’re never going to get it back. But you broaden the lens to look at Argentina, Mexico, Spain and Ireland, for Catholic countries that all gained abortion rights recently. Or you go back into deep time until the Griswold case came to the Supreme Court and people didn’t have a right to birth control.

The world in which I was born into was so horrifically and brutally unequal for women who were excluded from almost every corridor of power. Marriage was an institution of inequality. So I feel we have a lot of stories where amnesia and despair are closely related, in my view. You can’t know the future, but you can understand patterns and possibilities from the past. So I think that’s a big piece of it.

And the US is a very amnesiac culture. And I read that part of why people are not more anti-Trump, ’cause a lot of them don’t even remember what the world was like 3 and 1/2 years ago. It’s legit for kids who– 18-year-old voters who were 10 when Trump got elected. It’s not so legit for people over 30.

So I think all those things feed despair as well as, when I started talking about hope 20 something years, 21 years ago, I ended up saying “hope is a frilly pink dress nobody wants to show their knees in. Despair is a black leather jacket everyone thinks they look cool in.” So it’s also kind of a style factor.

Those are my top 5,000 explanations. Thank you all.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I wanted to add something really quickly because being in the world of science fiction, we think about these things a lot around, whether people are writing dystopian or Utopian or hopeful science fiction. And one of the things that I’ve found, because The Terraformers is quite a hopeful book in a lot of ways, although it has a lot of dark elements to it as well, is that when you write something dystopian people think it’s quite serious.

They take it as being weighty and literary.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] Black leather jacket.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] Yeah. And actually I thought it was interesting that you described hope as being a frilly pink dress, because I think it is something that is sort of marginalized, feminized, degraded. It’s viewed as unserious. Somebody naive, someone who doesn’t truly understand the world. And so when you try to offer a more hopeful vision, sometimes it can feel like everyone is just shutting you down because it’s just not, it isn’t something that an educated person would believe.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I heard her.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Yes. I was just saying that this is true in my experience in historical scholarship as well. And certainly was my disposition as a college student, which is when I became more and more interested in history, I wasn’t interested in high school. But it was almost like the more obscene the better. It’s why I study US Foreign Relations in Latin America. It doesn’t get any worse than that.

But this book that I’m working on now is about Antarctica and it ends with a ban on mining. And so of course, that’s not the end of the story. It’s not everything tied up in a bow, but it is weird to be a historian writing a book where the arc actually ends in a place that is sort of a weird happy ending. So I can relate to that across the historical genre as well.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Well, it was a pleasure to listen to you all talk about your work and your books on climate. I have also written a book on climate. So I know how difficult and also how important it is as well. But mine is on artists reimagining the Arctic and Antarctic and it’s called Climate Change and the New Polar Aesthetics.

And it deals with storytelling, but in the context of art and filmmaking specifically on these regions. But I wanted to ask and, I mean, this is something we all grapple with, and I’ve read Rebecca Solnit’s work and had really appreciated it in a lot of ways because, I think, yes, the serious is usually, becomes extremely masculinist and limited.

And I too stay away from the apocalypse and all that kind of fear mongering and thinking in my own writing. But I always have trouble hitting a balance between being furious that we’ve blown through the 1.5 centigrade mark.

But the way people also respond to emergencies in such a sort of short sighted way. And it’s like a balance in our writing in a sense of how to open up conversations and keep the pressure on simultaneously and get people to feel like they can contribute and act as well, and push against passivity.

And so I feel like it’s so interesting how you’re all sort of figuring this out in terms of novel writing. I mean, from my experience, it seems like, once people become part of the first line communities, then they really wake up. And it’s really, to me, depressing that people have to be hit by Hurricane Sandy or Hurricane Maria in order to understand the huge stakes here.

So I was just wondering if you could just speak more to, how you think through these different kind of layers, levels, emotions? Whether it’s humor or horror, as the cases in some of the work I write on, the horror genre. And how do you keep this balance and tension going simultaneously?

[AARON SACHS] It seems like maybe the fire angle. I don’t mean to put you on the spot, but just what you were saying about frontline communities, I don’t know, if you were thinking about that.

[DANIEL GUMBINER] Yeah. I think the first thing that came to mind in terms of just balancing these different waves of emotion around frustration and then wanting to remain hopeful to at the same time, is just sort of trying to be honest about that and look at it soberly and not try and make it other than what it is, which is that it is really frustrating.

And there are also hopeful elements, in both of those things are true. And just trying to acknowledge that and continue to work within that seesaw state of mind, because that allows you to see it most clearly. And I think seeing it most clearly is the best way to act in a wise way around it.

I think– actually thinking about the despair question a little bit too. The thing that came to mind for me is that, well, despair and depression often arise when we feel like we don’t have a voice or we are disempowered or our voice is not allowed. And so I think if we are feeling despair, it’s often because we haven’t found a door through which we can imagine, achieving what we feel like we need to achieve.

But those doors do exist in this moment, like many of the panelists discussed them. And so it’s a matter of seeing that clearly and being like present of mind enough to find the frame of mind that works for you.

So I think acknowledging it and being frank about that helps you chart a path forward.

[AARON SACHS] I guess I would also just add very quickly that, for me, part of it is trying to work on multiple fronts at the same time, in multiple ways. So in my contribution today I was really focused on how we, who are activists or engaged in various ways, need to work on our own mentality or mental health,

But also in the book, I talk about how we can use humor through satire to attack the people who are doing things we disapprove of, and also how we can use humor on ourselves to make ourselves sort of less grim and sanctimonious.

Becca was saying history is often dominated by a tragic metanarrative environmental history even more so. I mean, it’s almost like a full embrace of tragedy and despair and just the sort of teleology, the fate of everything going wrong, everything being despoiled. And I think making fun of that tendency in ourselves could also be a useful strategy.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you all. I’ve really enjoyed this. I think each of you have spoken to this a bit but I’m curious whether you can talk more about everyday ways of engaging with storytelling and how we might be more expansive with those.

So specifically for folks who aren’t professional writers where do you see opportunities for us to expand the places in which we’re telling stories the media that we’re using and the ways that we’re engaging with them? Particularly when we live in a culture where often the act of reading is so solitary. I’m curious what your thoughts are on that.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] When I put out Not Too Late, I felt it covers a lot of different aspects of the climate situation, energy, technology, culture, colonialism, et cetera. And then I realized we hadn’t actually given people a practical what-can-I-do guide. So that’s now in the digital book and will be in the next printing, and it’s a free download pinned in my Twitter account.

And on the Not Too Late website and stuff. But I feel like everybody is a storyteller. Some of us have the joy and luck of publishing books. Every conversation is a story conversation. There are stories underlying, oh we’ll never win. Oh, we actually can remember all these times we win.

So I feel like a big part of being a climate activist is just being an informed and constructive participant, whether it means bringing climate up without just being like, oh, I read another really terrible statistic, but kind of like wow, did you know that solar is now the cheapest form of electricity ever known on Earth? Or that.

So I feel like there’s a lot of different pieces as a storyteller. And it’s not necessarily just stories specific to climate. I think our stories about where– as I was saying, I wrote Hope in the Dark 20 years before we put out not too late. Where does power lie? What does change look like? Where do we find our own power?

And again, I think memory is to hope as amnesia is to despair. So I think just equipping yourself to participate in everyday life, because these things– the world really gets changed not by a book, but how a book, whether it’s Silent Spring or whatever becomes how people tell the story about.

Oh, pesticides are not these miracle things that will save us from bad bugs. Pesticides are poisoning us and birds and disrupting the whole system. And so I feel stories need to go, I hate the word viral at this point in history for some reason, but they need to become something that’s everybody’s equipment, not just a few writers.

So that’s how I think about it. I don’t know what the other people here might say.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I’ve been thinking a lot about this article that Astra Taylor wrote. Yeah, we love her. She’s a filmmaker and she helped spearhead The Debt Collective, which is a group devoted to relieving people of their debts. And she talks about this idea of the right to listen. So not the right to speak, but the right to listen.

And she describes how the Debt Collective, as a movement, deployed this idea when they would get together in big groups like this or even bigger, and people would just tell stories about their debt. And this is a hugely taboo subject, especially in the United States. People do not like to talk about money, how much they owe, how much they make.

And just the act of sharing how much they owed, what it had done to their lives, was really transformative. And I think that that to me is how storytelling comes into everyday life.

I think any time you get together, even with just a group of friends informally or a group of people on a Discord server, or if you’re on Mastodon or some social media thing that’s not Facebook or X, you have an opportunity to listen to people and hear their stories and share and realize that you’re not alone.

And a lot of what Rebecca was saying, that we are actually working to change things and it’s very easy to feel isolated from that. But in fact, it’s just a conversation away and it doesn’t have to be fancy. It just has to be talking.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hello. Thank you very much for this total panel. I’m a PhD student here in the History Department, and I’ve been trying to grapple with the question of what kind of storyteller I want to be. I’m thinking about the past and the present. And in this process I’ve been told that I need to be eligible to the historians, that I shouldn’t really pay attention to the president.

I should stick to the sources. And so my question is, in your respective fields, either historical scholarship, science journalism or fictional writing, how do you negotiate with your respective fields expectations of what your writing should look like and to bring forth, or perhaps tap into different ways of imagining, different ways of storytelling to get out of this storytelling crisis that Rebecca Solnit highlighted? Thank you.

[REBECCA HERMAN] You’ve thought a lot about this. I wonder if you should.

[AARON SACHS] Sure. I’ll just chime in quickly about that since you are a PhD student, the academic part, I’m glad you already used the word negotiate because that is something you can always do, and that’s in my experience, it’s something that graduate students forget that they have the power to do.

And I think one of the strongest ways you can negotiate, and I mean in the most immediate terms with your advisor or your committee, but also in the broader terms that you were asking about, your intended audience, is to cite models of works that have been successful in your field and do exactly what you most want to do in terms of communicating.

Because I can guarantee that there have been models in whatever field you’re in within history, there have been very, very successful books that have told their stories and including first books, including dissertations, that have told their stories in different ways, that have been published with trade presses, that have appealed to different kinds of audiences, simultaneously academic audiences and, say, activist audiences.

So that’s where I would start.

[REBECCA HERMAN] And I’ll just say in the 40 plus books I didn’t give you summaries of in their entirety, is an edited volume that Aaron co-edited called Artful History. And it is about– it has many, many examples of work that is strong scholarship and beautifully written.

Do any of you want to speak to that, or should we take another question? We have about 10 minutes left.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I would just say super briefly, as a recovering academic, I would say also that if the kind of writing and storytelling you want to do takes you beyond the Academy, that’s OK. Like there’s jobs for people like us outside the Academy too and I used to not think that when I was a grad student, and all I wanted was a tenure track job.

But there are ways to be a public intellectual and to do the kind of work that you want to do beyond the Academy. So if you find that you’re butting your head up against those limitations too much, just remember there’s the big world out there too and we’re here and you’ll survive.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Sure. We could do that and then close it that way.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi. Thank you so much for your talk. I’m an undergrad in both English and Environmental Science, so I really appreciate the grouping of topics, I guess. You mentioned a lot about how all labor is necessary in the climate crisis and working towards addressing these issues. So I guess, how do you reassure yourself that writing is valuable and especially in a society where scientific discovery is much more valued and talked about?

How do you reassure yourself that your writing is worthwhile and has purpose, and especially before you’re well-read and published that that work is contributing in a meaningful way?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER #2] Yeah. My question is surrounding, I think it’s hard for people who– it’s hard to get people to show up for things, even if it is something that those people want to do. I think that the attendance at this event is a testament to how wonderful you all are, so props for that.

I guess I’m wondering if there has been any through line through what you all have seen success in terms of whether it’s something you want people to physically show up for, something that you’re asking people to do, contacting or representative, those sorts of things. When those kind of campaigns have been successful, what through lines have been for that?

[AUDIENCE MEMBER #3] Hi. Sorry. My question is angled towards, being conscious that we have two journalists in the panel, in the context of losing thousands of jobs, journalist jobs in the US right now. How do we tell, where is the space to tell international stories? I just came back from two years in the Brazilian Amazon. I do journalism. And the stories being told here are really different.

And the stories that I hear from traditional Indigenous peoples are not reaching a national or international level. And I myself am struggling to be able to tell the stories because they don’t seem hopeful or like solutions to journalism.

[REBECCA HERMAN] Great. Who wants to speak to those for concluding?

That’s a lot.

[AARON SACHS] I’ll jump in with one thought in response to the very first question from our undergrad. And thank you very much for coming. It doesn’t matter, writing doesn’t matter.

What I mean is there’s no way of knowing if you’re writing is ever going to matter. And Rebecca has said this many times very much more elegantly than I can say it, but I agree and I have very much lived that, and I think that if you want to write, that is enough.

If you feel that it’s important to you in the moment, that is enough. And then you can hold on to the uncertainty of whether it will matter to anyone as a kind of hope. Everything is uncertain. I asked a similar question when I was in undergrad to one of my mentors and my main concern was, well, how do I say something new?

How can my perspective matter when so many people have said all of these things? Look at this bookstore, look at all of these amazing books. And he was, like, that’s not the problem. You are going to say something completely different because there’s nobody else like you in the world.

The rest is just chance. It’s true there are a lot of books out there, but who could have predicted. And one of Rebecca’s examples that I remember very clearly because I teach Thoreau every year in Environmental History, is there is no way that anyone living in Thoreau’s time would have predicted that we would still be reading Thoreau in the 21st century. You just never know.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I want to jump on what he said, which was so helpful. I taught at art schools for a while, the San Francisco Art Institute and California College of Arts and Crafts back when it still had its full name. And I really struggled. I started in my 20s with “very few of these people are going to make a living as an artist.” What are we teaching them? What are we giving them?

I think when you enter into any creative act, and writing really hones this, you become a producer of meaning rather than a consumer of meaning. You learn to think for yourself, you gain a capacity to analyze, assess, find a point of view, think deeply. Think that is incredibly valuable whether or not other people see it, it reaches other people.

And so it has an inherent value in what it makes you as a person in the world versus being like a passive consumer or somebody who accepts sort of received opinion.

And then also I write a lot, as was mentioned in the intro, I’m also on the board of Oil Change International Third Act, the advisory board of Dayenu, a Jewish Voice for Climate. And I have the Not Too Late project with Thelma. I kind of hedge my bets by donating, joining actions.

My younger brother who lives in Berkeley is a well known Climate and Human Rights organizer, and I’ve been tagging along with him for world– oh, my God, almost 40 years. And he helps organize, I show up.

So I feel like no matter what else you do in your life, you’re always a citizen, and there’s always other– I don’t want that to just, and I don’t mean citizen in the sense that you have legal status, I mean that you’re a member of the community who can show up in different ways, participate in different ways beyond your profession and that never stops, no matter if you’re an incredibly successful writer or dancer or filmmaker or something like that.

And I have always found that activism feeds my work. I come in touch with remarkable people. I feel over and over with Occupy Wall Street, Indigenous Rights Movements I was part of or supporting in the ’90s. The Women’s Movement, et cetera. I’ve literally seen the world change profoundly in ways if I was disengaged, I wouldn’t.

So it’s incredibly worth doing. You’ll find out why. It’s inherently worth doing, but you’ll find out some of the reasons why by doing it. And oh, my God. We have all these other questions. But it’s great, we have all these other panelists. Passing the ball.

[ANNALEE NEWITZ] I mean, I feel like a lot of these questions do come down to, why should we right when everything is on fire and shouldn’t we be like putting our bodies on the line instead of engaging our minds in this uncertain environment, where we’re told every day that journalists are being fired or being laid off or venues that we love disappeared, nuked their websites overnight? That kind of thing.

I mean, of course, at a time like this, if you’re a writer who wants to write about social change or justice, you are going to be discouraged. Dominant culture is going to tell you that what you do is worthless. Thinking is worthless. Writing something down, what if only one person read it? That’s worthless. Well, I don’t think so because I’m a writer, so I am prone to despair.

And it is a rough profession just like teaching, just like any other profession that you’re going to go into, if you’re interested in the sciences or the humanities. But I think about the fact that so many books and articles and just little things that I’ve read, have come to me from someone who’s obscure, who nobody maybe reads or maybe like one person checked the book out in the last 10 years.

And those things matter to me so much. There are books that I think about almost every day that were never bestsellers, that were never taught in some frickin’ English survey class, but they changed me and they live in me. And I think, honestly, if you write something and one person reads it and they’re like, wow, that was badass, you have succeeded.

And fuck capitalism. Fuck the idea that you need to have a fancy job or some credential. The goal is to be heard and to listen to others. And that’s what you do when you write.

[REBECCA SOLNIT] I would just add very quickly to the last question, is we brought in people from all over the South Pacific, somebody from Pakistan, the Philippines, et cetera, and embattled parts of the US, Navajo, New Mexico, New Orleans, Black New Orleans, et cetera, and we don’t need to tell all the stories. And a lot of what you can do as a journalist is be a conduit for other people’s stories, stories from elsewhere.

And I think becoming an amplifier for stories that aren’t being heard enough Is so much what writers try and do, whether they’re people dealing directly with wildfire or cats having romances with trains, but I digress. And so I feel like that’s a big part of the job. And I love that you brought up Astra and deep listening. Yeah, we need to tell stories. We also need to hear stories or hear people in search of a story to know what’s needed out there.

And now I’m like, what about the middle question?

[DANIEL GUMBINER] I would say that it feels like some of this connects to your question too in terms of just finding a community of people who can support your work, even if there are trials and tribulations with getting it published, but finding that audience, no matter what I mean, I think I love this book called Art and Fear that is about just making art, despite its many challenges.

And one of the principles that the authors talk about is this idea of finding an audience no matter what. Building in an audience to your life, no matter what that looks like to just make it so that you can keep producing. And maybe the editorial tides change, and suddenly the kind of work that you’re doing becomes in Vogue and you’re right there.

And you’ve been doing it in the deepest, most meaningful way for the longest and you’re perfectly positioned. But you’re still producing and you’re still doing the thing that’s important to you, if you have that audience in the first place. Because you can’t really control the editorial tides. That’s sort of not in your power.

All you can do is kind of control the work that you’re doing and make sure you put yourself in a position to do something that’s meaningful to yourself.

[REBECCA HERMAN] All right. Well, thank you all for joining us. And I want to thank the panelists again, if you’ll all give them around of applause.

[APPLAUSE]

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

New Directions

New Directions in Greening Infrastructure

 

As the effects of climate change become more obvious, moving away from fossil fuels has only become more urgent. But to do so, new energy sources – and new infrastructure – are desperately needed.

Recorded on March 20, 2024, this panel features three early-career scholars from UC Berkeley presenting their research on the greening infrastructure and the green energy transition. The panel included Johnathan Guy, PhD Candidate in Political Science; Caylee Hong, a PhD candidate in Anthropology, and Andrew Jaeger, PhD Candidate in Sociology. The panel was moderated by Daniel Aldana Cohen, Assistant Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley. Co-Sponsored by the Socio-Spatial Climate Collaborative, the Berkeley Climate Change Network, and the Berkeley Economy and Society Initiative.

Panelists

Johnathon GuyJohnathan Guy is a PhD candidate at UC Berkeley. He studies the political economy of development in South and Southeast Asia, focusing on the politics of climate change and the energy transition. His ongoing dissertation project, “Selecting for Solar: The Political Incentives Behind Power Generation Project Section,” attempts to understand the diverging trajectories of power sector buildouts in India and Indonesia.

Caylee HongCaylee Hong is an attorney, interdisciplinary researcher, and educator. She is currently a Ph.D. candidate in Anthropology at UC Berkeley, where she researches urban oil production in the Los Angeles Basin. Her dissertation examines the ways that diverse stakeholders navigate the decommissioning and redevelopment of century-old oil fields in the heart of cities, including Los Angeles and Long Beach. She has published research on infrastructure finance, the environment, law, and citizenship in AntipodeAnthropological Theory, and Fieldsights.

Andrew JaegerAndrew Jaeger is a PhD Candidate in Sociology at UC Berkeley. His dissertation analyzes the political economy of climate change in California.

 

Daniel Aldana CohenDaniel Aldana Cohen is Assistant Professor of Sociology at UC Berkeley, where he is Director of the Socio-Spatial Climate Collaborative, or (SC)2, and serves as a faculty affiliate in the graduate program on Political Economy. Cohen works on the intersections of the climate emergency, housing, political economy, social movements, and inequalities of race and class in the United States and Brazil. As Director of (SC)2, he is leading qualitative and quantitative research projects on Whole Community Climate Mapping, green political economy, and eco-apartheid. He is the co-author of A Planet to Win: Why We Need a Green Deal (Verso 2019), and is currently completing a book project called Street Fight: Climate Change and Inequality in the 21st Century City, under contract with Princeton University Press.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a production of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary research center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[JULIA SIZEK] Hello, everyone. We’re going to go ahead and get started. Thank you for coming. My name is Julia Sizek, and I am the postdoc here at Social Science Matrix. And today’s panel, New Directions in Greening Infrastructure, is about a topic that I actually find particularly interesting in my own research, which is this big question of like, if we’re going to switch to greener energy sources, then how are we actually going to create the infrastructure that we need for it?

And in my own research, this has appeared in the guise of, like, a much stranger being, which is the sort of ghost of transcontinental railroad right of ways and how they get used for other purposes, both for infrastructure, as well as for a potentially comically evil water project in the Mojave Desert that I have done a lot of research on.

And here I think we actually have a lot of similar questions, which is how do we take these old fossil fuel infrastructures and these old rules that we have created with fossil fuels in mind and transfer them to a new system that we want that will be, you know, theoretically greener and better for the environment and more sustainable overall? So these, obviously, are not only technical questions, but they’re also social scientific ones. And that is why we have invited our panelists today to speak about them.

So today’s panel is part of this New Direction series here at Matrix. And this is a series that features the work of junior scholars here on Berkeley’s campus. One thing that is particularly great about this series is that it is working with graduate students and people who do not have tenure and are not tenure track people at the university, which I think are an untapped resource in terms of looking at research, and also some of the people who have the most interesting ideas here because they aren’t yet old and stodgy. OK.

And then just to advertise a couple of our– and then part of this is it’s also been co-sponsored by some other centers on campus, which include SC 2, Bessie, and the Berkeley Climate Change Network. OK.

And our upcoming events– we have a couple of exciting events, some of which might be of interest to you all. So on April 1, we have a discussion of the book Nature-Made Economy– Cod, Capital and the Great Economization of the Ocean here for you nature people. On April 4, we’re going to have a discussion of the book The Gender of Capital.

On April 22, we will have an event on caste, education, and social struggle in modern India. And then on May 1, we will have a discussion of the book Puta Life– Seeing Latinas, Working Sex. And you can find out about this and other events that we have here at Matrix on our website, which is matrix.berkeley.edu.

So, with all of that out of the way, I can introduce our lovely moderator Daniel Aldana Cohen. So he is an Assistant Professor of Sociology at the University of California, Berkeley, and Director of the Sociospatial Climate Collaborative, which is one of the co-sponsors of this event. Also is a faculty affiliate in the graduate program on political economy.

Cohen’s work focuses on the intersections of the climate emergency, housing, political economy, social movements, and inequalities of race and class in the United States and Brazil, which is a very broad and also important topic. He is the author– the co-author of A Planet to Win, Why We Need a Green Deal, and is currently completing a book project called Street Fight, Climate Change and Inequality in the 21st Century, which is under contract with Princeton University Press. So without any further ado, I will turn it over to Daniel.

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] Am I coming through on the mic. Sorry for the scratchy voice. No?

[INAUDIBLE]

Oh, OK. OK, here we go. All right. Sorry for the scratchy voice. I’ve been on recruitment duties for the last three days talking about how great Berkeley is. OK, I’m thrilled to be here. This couldn’t be a more important topic. Estimates of how much new investment will go into things like greening infrastructure are in the range of $3 to $9 trillion per year for the next 25 to 30 years. So this is arguably the battleground over which many of the big fights over equality, sustainability, democracy, and so on will be fought in the coming decades.

And as you pointed out, Julia, the PhD students here are actually the faculty of the faculty since we run around to meetings, but what we learn we learn from the PhD students. So I’m thrilled to learn from three of them today.

So we’ll be hearing from Jonathan Guy, who is a PhD candidate here at Berkeley. He studies the political economy of development in south and southeast Asia, focusing on the politics of climate change and the energy transition. His ongoing dissertation project– Selecting for Solar, the Political Incentives Behind Power Generation Project Selection– attempts to understand the diverging trajectories of power– of power sector buildouts in India and Indonesia.

Caylee Hong is an attorney, interdisciplinary researcher, and educator. She is currently a PhD candidate in anthropology here at Berkeley, where she researches urban oil production in the Los Angeles basin. There’s a lot of it.

Her dissertation examines the ways that diverse stakeholders navigate the decommissioning and redevelopment of century-old oil fields in the heart of cities, including LA and Long Beach. She’s published research on infrastructure, finance, the environment, law and citizenship, and antipode anthropological theory and field sites.

Finally, Andrew Jaeger is a PhD candidate in sociology– my wonderful department here at Berkeley. His dissertation analyzes the political economy of climate change in California. He’s published in Social Problems and on his dissertation topic in social forces.

So each will speak for about 15 minutes, then I will ask a question or two. We’ll open it up to the audience. We’ll be here till about 1:30– no later than 1:30, I should say. So, um, so thrilled. Jonathan, I think you’ll kick us off. Oh, Caylee. Oh, my apologies. Different orders. Caylee, please come on up.

[CAYLEE HONG] I think I’m properly mic’d up right now. Awesome. Thank you, Daniel, for the introduction. And thank you to the Social Science Matrix for inviting us to be here today. And thank you as well to the co-sponsors, and particularly Chuck and Julia, for organizing today’s discussion.

So I’d like to begin with a basic query, which is, what are the lasting impacts of our 100, 150 year-long experiment with oil and gas? This question prompts a striking observation– that even if we, as Daniel mentioned, rapidly transition, hopefully, away from fossil fuels and move beyond our dependency on oil, we’re still going to be entangled with not just the carbon in the atmosphere and plastics everywhere else, but also with fossil fuel infrastructures, and particularly oil and gas wells.

We have punctured tens of millions of holes into the Earth, some as deep as 40,000 feet. And in order to prevent leaks into the atmosphere, groundwater, soil of, say, explosive methane or noxious hydrogen sulfide, each well must be decommissioned. And that’s technically called, at least here in California, plugging and abandonment. So basically, it’s a process whereby you remove these external infrastructures and contaminated soils and then fill the wellbore with cement.

Yet, across the world, including here in California, we are still without any real plans, regulations or incentives to decommission wells at scale. As a result, wells are often left interminably idle or deserted altogether by their operators. And in the United States alone, there are an estimated 57,000 orphan wells. And this number could be actually as high as 746,000, and I would say probably even higher than that.

So my research focuses on the LA Basin. And with 68 named oil fields and over 12,000 wells, there really is no place on Earth that has so many wells so close to so many people. And here’s a map of LA County that gives you an idea of the massive spread of wells across this whole area.

So most wells in LA County are inactive. And so the yellow dots, again, are those idle wells that I mentioned. So they’re not– they’re not– they’re not active, but they’re not plugged and abandoned. And then the red dots are plugged. The blue you see here are, in fact, the only sites in LA County that are, in fact, today active.

So over the course of 18 months of fieldwork conducted between June, 2021, and January, 2023, I explored how residents of LA County are navigating the decommissioning and redevelopment of urban oil fields. And today, I’m going to focus on one specific field called the Los Angeles City Field. And that is– you can see it up on the map. It’s really in the center, in the heart of LA. It’s a 4 miles-long strip that’s considered the most urbanized oil field in the nation.

And there, I ask how residents living atop of this field, which is just a mile away from downtown LA, are organizing their neighborhood, called Vista Hermosa, to decommission hundreds of deserted oil wells. This organizing, which seeks to make known the persisting risks of wells and to secure their decommissioning, is shaped by and must necessarily confront the invisibility of the problem. And so today, I’m going to focus on just giving you an idea of what I mean by this invisibility in two ways. One is this surface invisibility, and the second is invisibility in regulator well records.

So first, let’s go to the city’s surface. Nearly all the wells in this neighborhood of Vista Hermosa are no longer active. They’ve been deserted by their operators, some over 100 years ago. And so this past, at least on the surface, is invisible.

And this is– these are a series of pictures taken from in and around the neighborhood. And so this is what you’d see if you were to walk around it today– again, a rather everyday scene. Now, the work of residents has been to draw attention to these wells, which, again, as you can see, can’t be seen, yet continue to haunt the landscape and residents’ bodies, including through higher rates of cancer, asthma, and other illnesses that residents have documented.

So if this is what the surface looks like, this is what the subterranean reveals, an absolutely enormous number of wells in this LA field. And the pink dots here are the ones that are idle. So, again, they’re not active, but they’re not actually decommissioned. And the gray dots are plugged. And most people who are living in this area don’t know that they exist at all.

Oil was discovered in the LA City Field in 1890. And for 50 to 60 years, people produced oil, absent any regulations. And when these wells would stop flowing or an operator, for example, would go bankrupt, people would fill the wells with dirt and then build homes beside or on top of wells. And by the time regulations came into place starting not until 1915, there were already thousands of wells that were drilled throughout this area. And then over this time period, the city of LA emerged alongside of and within the LA City Field.

During fieldwork, I saw residents mobilize to raise awareness of these wills– of these wells and their risks. And here is a photo– or here’s two photos of two community organizers, Danny and Rosalinda, who are holding up historical photos from the same spot in their neighborhood. And this discrepancy between the past and the present landscape highlight the persisting effects of this bygone era of oil production.

And then here’s a couple photos of the Vista Hermosa Community Group actions from the last couple of years, including an oil well tour from May, 2021. And that’s the photo on the right with some Sunrise Movement members. And the photo on the left is from an August, 2022, rally which was organized to shame a developer who had allegedly failed to decommission at least two other oil wells that were underneath an affordable housing project in the neighborhood. And the new housing project, you can see is, the large building in the background.

So there’s a second kind of invisibility at work as well. And that is gaps and uncertainties in well records, which are essential to decommissioning work. And here, my research draws upon the records of the California regulator, which nowadays is called CalGEM, the California Geologic Energy Management Division.

And for brevity, I’m going to mention just one specific well called Rogalske 1. both these images are from the CalGEM, so the state regulator’s records. And they show a surface scene, a regular house in this neighborhood, and then the subterranean scene, which is comprising of mostly idle– again, those purple wells– including now Rogalske 1, which I’ve identified with the red circle. And this well is now plugged and abandoned.

But it’s decommissioning history reveals the extraordinarily challenges that the city residents and also regulators faced. This well was drilled sometime in the 1800s, but it actually only became known to CalGEM and residents after new tenants started complaining about a rotten egg smell, which is indicative of hydrogen sulfide.

As you can see from this map, CalGEM’s records actually showed that there was a well present. But according to the regulator, this map and its other documents were, in fact, not reliable. So, therefore, the state didn’t have an obligation to either physically locate it, and therefore to decommission it.

CalGEM rightly points out, however, that the surveying techniques from the 1800s when this was drilled are not dependable, that street names and other markers have changed. So a well can easily be 100 years off or so. And in a densely populated urban neighborhood like Vista Hermosa, 100 yards, I mean, is absolutely enormous.

So, eventually, it took the landowner using a jackhammer in the dead of night to physically locate the well. And here is a video of the grand reveal of Rogalske 1, which was located mere feet away from the household’s front door.

Yeah, so this is what it looks like. It’s not much. But it really did take a landowner with a jackhammer to tell and to identify it so that the regulator could eventually plug and abandon it, which did happen. But it took three months and almost half a million dollars.

So this question of what to do with aged wells is taking on urgent significance nowadays as the city redevelops former oil fields. Currently, rapid real estate development and the need to address critical housing shortages in LA are compounding these long persisting environmental harms.

And here are some of the numerous recently completed and planned housing projects in Vista Hermosa. And existing residents like Danny and Rosalinda, who I mentioned earlier, argue that the dangers that are posed by oil wells, their leaks, their explosions, their health impacts are being exacerbated by the neighborhood’s transformation into a much denser place as these market rate luxury rental units are replacing single family homes and modest apartments.

While this construction boom creates opportunities to decommission wells, the developments also worsen existing risks in two ways. So first, developers don’t know where wells are located. As we saw with Rogalske 1, there are potentially hundreds of wells that are not documented or poorly documented.

And this creates a scenario where developers can plausibly deny responsibility for decommissioning wells just as like we saw with CalGEM. And then second, the city of Los Angeles allows developers to build directly over top of wells, which is contrary to CalGEM’s strong recommendations. This, on the one hand, promotes densification.

And many of us here today will know why that is important in planning for our energy futures. But it means that if there ever was a leak, the well could not be accessed. And the problem is that once a well is drilled, it actually never disappears even if it’s properly plugged and abandoned. And the former deputy director of CalGEM explained to me that, and I quote, “until we get hit by an asteroid and the Earth is removed along with the wells, the wells will remain a conduit.”

So in conclusion, as we transition energy regimes, we are faced with the expansive spatiotemporal reach of fossil fuels, which extends by way of infrastructures beyond the fossil fuel era. Greening infrastructures will mean accounting for our ongoing entanglement with pipelines and refineries and millions of wells. And as Vista Hermosa shows, processes of cleanup and decommissioning and transition will shape the future paths of not just energy production, but also really our municipal futures for generations. So thank you very much.

[APPLAUSE]

[JOHNATHAN GUY] Great. Hi, everyone. Thank you for coming. And thanks to Julie and Chuck and the Matrix for putting this on. My name is Johnathan Guy. I’m a PhD candidate in political science. Today, I’m going to be talking about my dissertation project, Selecting for Solar– Electricity Planning, State Structures and the Politics of Distributive Control.

I’m first going to talk about the motivation for the project, what the question is and why I’m choosing the case an empirical focus that I am, which is comparing India and Indonesia. I’m going to dive into this comparison. And I want to say as a preface, this is very much an ongoing work in progress. I have six months of fieldwork planned out this coming year. So I’ll have more refined findings after that.

But based on my case reading and preliminary visits to each country, I’m going to talk about three contrasts between the countries that I think– three potential explanations that explain why India has gone for renewables and Indonesia has not. And then I’m going to tie it all together at the end and zoom out to other countries and think more about how we can think about the political drivers of the energy transition. OK.

So we all know the story, right? We all know by now, you know, the first two decades of the 21st century are a story of falling renewables costs. Through investments in industrial policy and innovation, solar and wind have become cheap– cheap enough for many developed and developing countries to use at scale. But there’s a lot of variation, right?

And so my dissertation is trying to make sense of the variation in the uptake of wind and solar power– uptake that, at first glance, doesn’t seem to follow any recognizable pattern, right? So this is one of my favorite things to do, is to list the countries that had the highest levels of wind and solar as a percentage of electricity generation.

Does anybody have any idea what these countries might have in common? Right, they’re kind of all over the board. There are rich and poor countries, democratic and authoritarian, right, politically stable and unstable. When there’s much more of a pattern and we can talk about differences between wind and solar– wealthier countries, countries with higher levels of state capacity tend to adopt wind at higher rates.

But I’m going to be– my dissertation is much more focused on this comparison between India and Indonesia. Right, these are two countries that have pretty similar political systems, right, parliamentary democracies. They’re also both heavily reliant on coal and have very high– coal is integrated deeply into both political systems. Yet, we see this huge difference, right? We see– we see India incorporating wind and solar to a much greater extent in its electricity generation supply. And this puzzled me.

We can further dive into some of the data and show that just as India has really taken off since 2014, 2015, right, with the advent of the Modi government, we see similar patterns in power generation buildout on the fossil fuel side as well. Whereas India has dramatically decreased the pace of its– the addition of coal-fired capacity, in Indonesia it has increased over the same time period, right?

And we can also see this in terms of the project pipeline, right? There is the– the vast majority of coal plants in the pipeline– or not the vast majority, but the majority have been canceled, right? And in India– whereas in Indonesia, there are some cancellations, but we see to much greater extent exerted– a political effort, sustained political effort to build coal plants.

So why this difference, right? So previous scholarship has identified some potential reasons for India’s solar growth, and especially under Modi. One explanation is that Modi made very serious political commitments to wind and solar, and particularly solar, because he– he was elected and inaugurated the year before the Paris Agreement was signed. And he wanted to make– he also wanted to signal to international audiences and to domestic audiences that he was a modernizing reformer. This is an explanation that’s been advanced.

A second explanation is that solar is pretty cheap in India. Solar is higher– there are higher levels of irradiation, right? The sun shines more days of the year than in Indonesia. And then explanation three is that India is overall much more open to foreign investment. And this– since wind and solar are technologies that have been broadly developed in China and the Global North, that this explains why there’s been greater uptake.

But on further– both all of these explanations are sort of complicated or refuted by further investigation of these cases. Number one, Jokowi was similarly positioned, right? He was elected at the same time as Modi in 2014, had very similar– he also was elected on the basis of being a sort of modernizing reformer, right? But instead, went for coal, right?

Explanation two, solar is cheaper in India. There’s a lot of evidence to suggest that this might not actually be the case. And in fact– and further, there are plenty of very high solar penetration cases that have worse sunlight than Indonesia, for example, Vietnam.

And while India might have more foreign direct investment in general, this is not true in the power sector. In fact, a lot of India’s solar investment has been domestic. And a lot of Indonesia’s coal investment has been foreign.

So I’m going to talk about some of the case evidence. And I’m going to draw three contrasts. The first is in the status of India and Indonesia’s coal supply chains at the time that wind and solar got cheap, right? So here, we have graphs, first, of Indonesia’s coal supply chain. This is just showing production and exports relative to consumption. And in many ways, it’s showing the health of the supply chain.

It’s, you know– and here, we see that Indonesia’s supply produces far more coal than it consumes. It exports the vast majority of its coal. This has not always been the case. Whereas India, despite having just as much if not more coal than Indonesia, still relies on coal imports for an increasingly large share of its production, although this has been mitigated somewhat since the beginning of the Modi era.

So what is driving this difference, right, given that these countries have comparable coal endowments? Well, as I argue, this has to do with the deeper story of the deeper histories of coal exploitation, right? So compared to India, Indonesia’s coal industry is relatively young. It wasn’t really, really developed until the second half of the dictatorship that existed in Indonesia from the 1960s to the 1990s.

It wasn’t until the energy crisis of the 1970s that initial policy investments were made. And eventually, the industry took off. The rents that came from the industry were distributed fairly narrowly. And it wasn’t really until the 2000s that they were distributed more broadly, right?

And so, ultimately, Indonesia’s coal industry began to boom just as wind and solar got cheap. And part of the story of coal plant construction is a story of economic insurance, right? The government wanting to create domestic demand for coal in the event that there are downturns in the export market, OK?

India’s coal story is very different. India’s coal story is one of– it goes– begins much earlier because India democratized earlier and stayed a democracy. A lot of– as I argue, a lot of the rents associated with coal development, coal mining, have been stretched to accommodate various political constituencies and their demands. I can talk more in the Q&A if folks are interested about the different kinds of rents and how–

But the broad story is that by the time of the 1990s, these rents were placing tremendous strain on India’s ability to produce coal cost effectively. And this produced this import dependence and this energy security crisis. And so because of this, right, India experienced a supply chain breakdown. This created strong energy incentives, or energy security incentives, to make investments in solar policy, right?

Ironically, a lot of these– you know, the political incentives both to go for solar and the political incentives that sabotaged coal in the Indian case had to do with short-termism, right? Usually, when we think of climate politics, we think of– and green investment– we think of the ability– short-termism as a bad thing, right? Because we need the ability to impose big costs today in terms of benefits tomorrow. And as I argue, the opposite logic drove the transition in the Indian case.

OK, the second contrast. So renewables in general do thrive on outside investment. And by outside investment, I mean not just foreign investment but investment by private actors, right? So here, we can see some cross-national evidence for this, right? On the x-axis is financial liberalization measured by the Heritage Foundation. And on the y-axis, we have wind and solar share of electricity.

And we see there is a strong relationship between financial liberalization and wind and solar uptake, right? And this reflects broader scholarship that has found that sectoral governance and broader institutions governing finance are more important for the adoption of wind and solar than specific instruments in some cases like fee and tariffs or auctions. OK.

But there are a lot of commitment problems that stand in the way of wind and solar investment, right? These are emerging industries that developing countries are generally inexperienced with. And often, because of for various reasons, governments find it difficult to maintain and keep promises over the long term as is necessary in order to attract and sustain investment.

And here, we see an example of that in India, right, at the state level. Initially, it was actually very difficult. This headline is from about five years ago. It was actually very difficult to get state governments to agree and maintain their commitments to investors.

In Indonesia– Indonesia, like India, attempted to liberalize its power sector in the early 2000s. Unlike India, Indonesia was unsuccessful. The Supreme Court struck down the law. And so as a result, India and Indonesia have very different ownership structures and governance structures in the power sector.

In Indonesia, a single state-owned monopoly, PLN, dominates the generation, transmission and distribution segments. There is also– because electricity tariffs are set at the national level, often PLN is very constrained in its budget because of the political demands for subsidies. And as a result, it’s been very difficult to get PLN to invest in renewables because they have a higher share of upfront costs.

So an example of this is in the lead up to the 2019 elections, the government placed tremendous financial strain on PLN by not refusing to allow it to raise electricity prices. In response, PLN lobbied very hard to avoid renewables investment, OK? How much time?

A couple minutes.

Couple minutes? OK. So I’m going to zoom through this. So in India, by contrast, there was– both a lot of power procurement and the tariff setting happens– is both liberalized and happens at the state level rather than the federal level. Because of this, the central government didn’t face the same kind of fiscal pressures that state governments do. And so the result has been, sort of, battles between the center and the states over renewables procurement, where the center wants more because they don’t bear the political cost, and the states fight it.

The exception to this has been cases in which there are significant political incentives to expand capacity because wind and solar can be built quicker. Governments that are facing greater power deficits have had political incentive to build capacity quickly. And as I argue, that has incentivized them to build out wind and solar. OK.

So the takeaways from the investment story is that short-term incentives have kind of been bashed in the political economy of climate change literature because the incentives of these governments in developing countries to provide a lot of short-term benefits like electricity subsidies has seen to crowd out these longer term investments that are necessary for decarbonization. But as I find from my case evidence in India and other places, in cases where rapid increases in electricity supply are important, those lower– shorter construction times of wind and solar can actually cause short-termism to benefit decarbonization.

OK, I’m going to maybe skip to– I only have a couple of minutes. I think the political alignment stuff is more tentative. So maybe I can talk about, what are some overall takeaways from the comparison between India and Indonesia? One is that institutional constraints on the ability to control rents associated with traditional sources of power generation results in increased renewables.

And this has become really clear in India. I didn’t have really time to go through the story about coal India. But essentially, in Modi’s case, a lot of the rents associated with coal production were not really something that he could control. And because of that, building out renewables was more politically attractive. And I think we see similar cases in Turkey and South Africa.

Secondly, having domestic supporters capable of undertaking renewable projects efficiently instead of relying on foreign investment can make renewables more attractive to incumbents. In Indonesia, Jokowi didn’t really have the domestic corporate sector capable of executing these solar projects in the way that Modi did. Further, these firms were aligned with the BJP generally– not always against Congress, but generally with the BJP. And this was really important for making solar politically workable.

OK, so what can we learn overall? Number one, the fate of solar and wind relies, in part, on the status of patronage politics in developing countries, especially in traditional power generation sources, right? So what is the opportunity cost politically of going into solar and wind instead of continuing to invest in traditional power generation sources?

Number two, short-termism isn’t always a bad thing. Renewable energy has, especially wind and solar, has some short-term benefits that are important to consider. It’s also important to think more about the role of incumbency, right? Do incumbents have control over these rents that they use politically to manage their coalition, rents that are more typically associated with traditional power generation sources? When they don’t, a renewables transition is more likely.

And this has lessons for us here in the developed world as well in terms of thinking about negotiating agreements like JETP, the Just Energy Transition Partnership. You know, how compatible are the distributional benefits of these partnerships with the kind of incentives that incumbents face to maintain their ruling coalition?

Yeah. And I’m going to skip these cases because I think we’re out of time. I’m out of time. But–

You can take one more minute.

Well, I can tell you a little bit more about these cases, right? Like, I think that the political logic extends. I think that one key thing that broader cases show us is that the short-term benefits of wind and solar– benefits that are often– that come from shorter construction times are only valuable in environments where incumbents are actually able to make wind and solar projects proceed pretty quickly.

And in Bangladesh and Nigeria, even though that there are very strong political incentives to increase electricity supply, the governments have a very hard time negotiating with investors. This lengthens the process of solar and wind project completion and sort of dampens the sort of time benefit– the incentives that come from that time benefit, rather.

Yeah. In South Africa and Turkey, you see cases where there is initially, like, a lot of government support for renewables. And then, in both cases, the government pulls back. And I argue this has to do with democratic backsliding and the erosion of constraints between the executive and the governance of the power sector, right? In both of these cases, as, you know, Erdogan and Zuma get stronger, they’re able to control the rents associated with coal, and natural gas in the case of Turkey.

And once they– while initially they were constrained and they had more incentive to build out these alternative patronage networks in wind and solar, once they obtain greater control over the traditional sources of rents, it becomes their incentives. This is why these energy transitions stalled, is my argument. Anyway, thank you very much.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[ANDREW JAEGER] All right. [CLEARS THROAT] Is my mic audible? How was that? Great. OK, I’m trying a new thing of having my notes on my slides on my iPad. We’ll see how that goes. OK, thanks to all the organizers. Really appreciate this opportunity. And it’s been great so far.

So, yes. I’m Andrew Jaeger, PhD candidate in sociology here. My title– the title of my talk today, The Emerging Infrastructure of Carbontech. I’m not super happy with that title. Any suggestions welcome. Let’s see. Advance. There we go.

All right, I want to start with actually kind of a meta theoretical methodological approach relevant to the title of this, our discussion today. In discussing the political economy of climate change in many aspects like infrastructure or political coalitions or various sections of capital, our understandings of what green is have become, I think, somewhat dangerously reified, fixed, taken for granted, right? I mean, I think everyone here would recognize immediately that if we think about solar or wind, like, how green are those actually? That’s socially and politically constructed, right? It’s a starting point here.

The second you say green or fossil, we all here, probably, immediately have in mind a certain set of technologies, a certain set of actors, a certain set of battle lines that are just understood as naturally there. And one of my big arguments in my dissertation is that this is changing. And it’s been changing very quickly over the last five years or so.

Therefore, the usefulness of that heuristic, of green versus fossil, is waning. I do think it has been very useful in the past. But my argument– part of my argument today is that it’s becoming less useful.

And there’s two big reasons for that. One is that there is a far greater variety of technologies that are climate-related that could be considered green, but their greenness is open for debate very much. And the old battle lines, in many ways, are blurring.

As the technologies change– not only because of that, but I think largely because of that– the options for climate action are widening. It’s not just the old story of the fossil fuel industry wanting to go one way, which is basically block all climate legislation, and the climate action being a fairly straightforward task of building out renewables as quickly as possible, electrifying everything as quickly as possible, which, again, from the start, was always a socially, politically constituted strategy that was not– has no inherent greenness to it.

Also, more controversially, we’re arguing today, is that the fossil fuel industry appears to be going green in many ways. All right, advance. Oh, there we go. OK. I’m also going to suggest a different approach to thinking about this rather than just the old opposition between green and fossil, which, again, hasn’t been very useful and has no bearing on these wonderful talks today.

The way that I’ve been thinking about developing– trying to theorize this is to instead start with a different question, which is that, how are competing political actors framing particular climate technologies as green solutions and mobilizing them into broader techno-political projects? And what do I mean by techno-political projects? I’m actually taking out a lot of the [INAUDIBLE] I have to throw out here because of time.

I just want to say that these are basically political– long-term political movements that have embedded within them a vision of the future that they project out. They organize a coalition around that future. And there is a certain set of technologies embedded within that vision.

There’s a tension there, right, which we all recognize when we think about solar and wind. The tech needs to work. The tech needs to be viable. And the tech needs to be profitable. Because otherwise, private industry is not going to invest in it. And we have, as Brett Christopher– if anyone’s there– when was that? Last week– made very clear that profitability is the key metric for private investment, not cheapness, right?

OK, I’m going to shift into the empirical section now. So the first empirical claim here is that there is a new political project that is ascendant. I’m calling it carbontech. It’s organized around a growing set of technologies aimed at capturing, using, storing, and otherwise managing carbon emissions.

There is a lot of hype around this stuff. It comes from Silicon Valley. I’ve written a lot about it. It comes from the state of California, state officials and federal officials, and, in fact, states all around the world, especially at oil states. There is also a lot of critique of this project as it develops.

One of the main critiques, the most common critique, is that this is just literally a scam or a sham. These technologies just aren’t real. I hear that in my field work all the time, where I work with environmental groups, environmental justice groups.

And they have good reason to claim that, right? I mean, the fossil fuel industry, who is one of the main actors arguing for using these technologies, they’re not exactly– this industry is not exactly trustworthy, right? We have good reason to doubt what they’re talking about.

Another set of arguments is that there’s a moral hazard associated with these technologies, right? So when the IPCC, for instance, builds in to their projections of how to reach 1.5 degrees especially, but even 2 degrees, and they put in– and it implies billions of tons of carbon capture by 2050, 2045, 2030, uh, that sounds like it is creating a major incentive for states around the world to slow down on investing in renewables, to slow down the green transition as normally understood.

The other big critique is that this stuff is just too expensive, right? We’re talking about major infrastructure investments here, huge footprints. This photo here is– well, not photo– this rendering here is actually a very important distinction. This is not a real place. This is a rendering.

This is one of the most flashy, in many ways, politically viable and appealing versions of this sort of technology. It’s usually called CDR, or Carbon Dioxide Removal. And it is a purely technological approach to pulling carbon dioxide just out of the atmosphere, right?

So the dream of this stuff is you can put these big air-conditioning sort of systems out anywhere you want. You can build up a bunch of renewables around it. And you can– as long as you have the capital to do this, you can basically pull out as much carbon dioxide out of the air as you can bring money in and power, and to some degree, water.

The debates over this on both sides, the hype– and the hype– and the critics, they don’t have much empirically to go on, right? These are essentially hypothetical speculative debates. There are some exceptions.

That is, basically, within the last 15 years, there have been a number of mega carbon capture projects, mostly on coal and natural gas plants. And those have not gone well. This has gone very poorly, for the most part. And so that is essentially the empirical basis on which this debate has turned.

But in the last couple of years, there has been real movement. These investments, the Silicon Valley hype, these state incentives that have been moving towards investing in this stuff are actually, you know, breaking paydirt, right? They’re actually being deployed to some degree, right?

And so my empirical project here, which I’ve really only been involved in for the last few months– the vast majority of my research has been on the what you might call the political and ideological infrastructure of carbontech, right? The way that it was organized and legitimated around, the way the investments were created around them and hyped around them.

This latest research is really tracking the actual construction of the infrastructure of carbon management in California, which means infrastructure for taking it out of the air or capturing it from industrial sites or agricultural sites, as we’ll be talking about today, transporting it in different ways, processing it, using it, or storing it underground. And this is essentially exploratory research at this point. I’m just really interested in who’s building it, what’s being built, how it’s being built and why.

And the main research activity I’ve been pursuing in the last couple of months with this is essentially building a really big database. And it is pulling from a number of state and federal databases and private investment data which is from PitchBook.

Today, I’m just going to give a broad characterization of the actual progress so far. And then I’m going to zoom in on just one technology which a lot of people do not think of when they talk about carbon management or carbon capture, but is actually by far the most prevalent form of it in California and, in fact, in the US.

All right. So before I– let me look at my notes here. Yes, before I jump into this– OK. So this next chart is going to show evidence from California’s Sequoia database. This is essentially our big major database. Any time there is a big– well, even a medium-sized, I would say, project. Any project that might have some kind of impact on the environment, you need to usually pull a Sequioa permit.

And all those permits are available online. I have downloaded all of them since 2000. There’s about 280,000 permits. And so I’ve been processing through those. And this is the result so far. And you should– while the actual numbers are definitely– this is an alpha version, I would not– I would take them with a grain of salt still at this point. Yes, just take them with a grain of salt at this point.

The general direction that it shows I think is still valid. And it is fairly clear. I want to make just a few points here. One is that– yes, I think that’s still– it’s not visible enough. I can say more. I’ll say more.

The first half of the– the aughts saw very little investment on this. We’ve been increasing more or less linearly since 2000. And there has been a major– point number two, industrial CCS. There’s four project types up here. Three are types of digesters. Those are fairly simple, relatively simple carbon capture systems.

They actually capture methane, which is CH4 for greenhouse gas of course, from landfills, from wastewater sites and from agricultural sites, especially dairies. And if you look here, you can see there’s been an enormous growth in the use of dairy digesters in California, especially over the last five years.

The third point is that industrial carbon capture and storage, which is what that shiny direct air capture carbon dioxide removal plant would fall under, is actually fairly rare. There are only about– I count about 10 big industrial carbon capture projects, real projects that have actually been built to some degree over 24 years, and several of them– those over the last few years. That is very new. It is difficult to say much about that infrastructure at this point, though I can say something about them. I have been researching.

So let’s look at dairy digesters. Again, this is by far the most prevalent form and the form that has been growing the most rapidly over the last five years. What are these? Most simplest form, these are tarps over manure. These are still– I said simple. These are still multi-million dollar investments, $4 or $5 million per dairy on average.

Because once you capture this, what’s called biogas, from the cow manure, you have to process it quite a bit. And you have to have some kind of transportation network set up to actually turn it into what’s called renewable natural gas. And once that’s been done, it is more or less interchangeable with regular old natural gas.

And that is used for two things. One, the thing it’s been most used for is it’s compressed and it’s used in certain vehicles, especially buses and heavy duty trucks. They’re actually natural gas– you’ve probably never– I’ve never actually been to one of these fueling sites but they do exist, where you can actually fill up truck or bus with compressed natural gas and run a somewhat cleaner vehicle with it.

The other is, simply, it is blended into by utilities into the natural gas supply. That’s a relatively new thing. All of this is driven by California State subsidies and regulations. Hundreds of million dollars in tax breaks– I think that’s an– in tax breaks, rents and regulatory credits. I actually think this is an underestimate. I’m working on trying to get a better investment of this.

The growth– over here, this is pulled. Another part of the data set here pulled from EPA and California Department of Agriculture sites shows– I think that’s fairly visible– the last few years just are almost– it looks like an exponential rise in these things. And that is essentially because, first, there was a major [INAUDIBLE] in 2015 when California State implemented a new program that gives grants for the development of these. It unlocked a lot of financing.

There was also a change to the regulation that gives credits to these projects for the natural gas that they sell into the transportation system, which made these projects far more valuable. So the profitability of these projects directly obviously drove– is driving investment. And that profitability is determined not by any kind of market forces whatsoever, but by regulatory credits, right? This is a knob that is turned by the state by CAR– yes, by CAR, the California Air Resources Board.

What else can we say about this? It’s geographically concentrated. It’s almost entirely in the San Joaquin Valley, which is just north of Caylee’s site. This is the center of the California– the current center of the California dairy and oil industry. And they are clustered within the San Joaquin Valley.

And this is due to, basically, economies of scale. So what happens is the digesters are located on each of these dairies. And they pipe to some kind of central facility, where the processing happens. And then it is piped off to be used in these fueling sites– two minutes, OK– or to the actual utilities directly.

As these are concentrated in these areas, they’re also concentrating, more or less, environmental injustice in those areas, which are already some of the most horrible sites of, you know, air and water pollution in the state. The environmental justice movement in California has been fighting these things for years, years and years.

What else? What can we say about the investment here? Who is actually building these things? Well, there’s a firm called CalBioGas. It’s the largest developer. They’ve led at least 73 of the 170 active projects. I think it’s probably more than that too. Again, still working on this.

Who’s CalBioGas? Well, they’re a joint venture between California Bioenergy, which is a long-standing, you know, tech alternative fuel firm who mostly specializes in developing dairy digesters. And they have actually developed some of the technology for dairy digesters. And they’ve developed the expertise to manage these projects. So it’s really California Bioenergy which is doing the legwork of developing these projects. But Chevron has been a financial partner since at least 2020.

And one of the great– my research findings scoops here is, you know, it’s known publicly that there’s been a joint venture between Chevron and California bioenergy for all these years. They’ve actually entered into multiple joint ventures. But when an LLC like that enters into a joint venture, you can’t actually tell, like, what kind of equity which partner has, for instance.

And, actually, luckily, thanks to state filings where they– every single time they build one of these clusters, California Bioenergy, they applied for a tax break from the state of California. And when the state of California reviews those at a public meeting, they always publish their agenda with appendices for each of the tax breaks that they are considering.

And they always include the ownership structure of whoever they’re thinking of giving tax breaks to. And so I’ve actually never seen this reported before. But CalBioGas is about 56% Chevron. So most– in other words, the main owner of most of these clusters of dairy digesters is Chevron.

OK, wrapping up, the main point I wanted to make today. The leading edge of carbontech infrastructure, that we usually think of carbon capture as this shiny stuff, direct air capture and so on, it’s actually far less glamorous than that. It’s basically tarps over manure.

Digesters have been the leading edge of carbontech infrastructure in California. There’s been– there was a slow development of them over the aughts, increasing in 2010, and really an explosion in the last five or so years.

Why do I think this has happened? Well, first of all, they plug and play with the existing infrastructure, right? That renewable natural gas can plug right into the existing fossil infrastructure, which will be with us for even longer the longer that this– the more successful this project is, right?

The other reason, this solves a major problem for both of those industries. On one hand, all of these mega industrial dairies have a lot of manure that they have to handle. That’s actually just a problem that they– it’s a cost to them that they have had to deal with forever. This turns that cost into a profit center. They just get a revenue stream from this.

They don’t even have to manage. In most cases, they don’t even manage these digesters, right? It’s CalBio that manages the digesters. They don’t even really do any of the legwork. Other reason– yeah. Yeah, I’ll stop with the reasons there.

The other big point I want to say is that industrial carbon capture is probably next because it’s following the same sort of trajectory that the digesters followed. They recently have won major state and federal subsidies.

You’ve probably heard about them in the bipartisan infrastructure law and IRA from the federal level. California has been trying to subsidize– trying to get industrial carbon capture off the ground here for a long time. And there is now real serious money going into that from the state, from federal, and from Silicon Valley and other private investors.

They also are just about to clear some major regulatory hurdles in California. I was down in Bakersfield just a couple of weeks ago at some of the big public hearings. OK, I will– I’m ending here. And they’re just about to clear the big hurdle. They’re about to be able to store all the carbon they want to capture underground. This is a major deal. They’ve been trying to do this for years.

The last point, carbon capture can be both expensive and profitable. It kind of doesn’t matter how expensive it is. That’s one of the main arguments that’s been made against it. But as Brett Christopher was saying last week, to tie in to my initial point, profitability itself is socially and politically constructed, right? The viability of this stuff depends on maintaining those strong state subsidies.

I am, in some ways, committed to the idea that I think that this stuff is really growing, right? That’s been my argument for a long time. I think that the trajectory for growth is still there for a long time. But this is the weak point for those of us who think this is not the way that we should be going. It’s the subsidies and it’s the construction of this stuff as green. Thanks.

[APPLAUSE]

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] OK. [CLEARS THROAT] Thank you so much for three wonderful presentations. We’ve been talking a lot. So let’s just open it up actually right away and see if folks up here have questions. Julia has a mic.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] It’s for Andrew, my question actually. He explained how state incentives can expand the construction of dairy digestive sites and all of that. Could you explain a little bit more what are those incentives and if they could be utilized for other areas in, like, greener infrastructure, such as solar panels or something like that. Thank you.

[ANDERW JAEGER] OK. Yes, thank you for that question. So the two big subsidies– well, there are three big subsidies really. One is the grant program which comes from the state, which gives grants to project developers who are spending $5, $10, $20 million on centralized facilities and for processing this gas and building out the actual digesters at the dairies.

It’s considered an advanced technology. This is the same tax credit that gives money to chip fabricators and solar energy labs. Actually, I don’t know if you know Solyndra, the scandalous multi $100 million California solar firm. One of their early grants from this program was to Solyndra.

The other big subsidy is– actually, the major subsidy is called the Low Carbon Fuel Standard. And it is kind of complicated. I don’t want to take up all the time talking about it. But essentially, it is a subsidy for what are considered green alternative fuels. And this stuff is considered a green alternative fuel.

And the calculation that the state makes, more or less arbitrarily, of how green it is determines how much subsidy they get, and therefore the investment in this stuff. And in terms of solar, yes, there are also many subsidies for solar as well and things like this. But I think they’re insufficient.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. Three very, very good presentations. I kind of– it kind of goes to all three of you, the question. And then I have a comment, and that is the responsibility of owning the energy infrastructure.

And I was thinking in your case, I would think there must be some responsibility somewhere with the sort of– for me, coming from Norway, it’s very strange that you can live above an oil well. So I’m just wondering, how does that work with the responsibility?

And Jonathan, you talked about mostly solar and also wind. And two weeks ago– or last week, Brett Christopher was here and said that– and presented a book, where he said that we don’t pay enough attention to the infrastructure. So with now the electrification of society, we have this very much focused on like, how can we make wind and solar profitable? But the infrastructure is kind of also a very big question and challenge.

So, for example, I can give one example from Norway today. We have just had gave money to the first very heavily subsidized offshore wind licensing. And the connector only goes to Norway– even though it, like, it would make would make it much more profitable if you also sent it to Netherlands, to Denmark. And this is because it becomes so politically contested. But it’s just one example. And then so I’m just wondering if you could comment something about– if that plays into your case with how much does the infrastructure cost in India or if it’s relevant at all.

And then, Andrew, I see also a lot of the political and economic drivers of the energy transition and the whole. I really liked being challenged on the green versus fossil industry and how we think about it. And if I can find my question here.

Well, I think what makes it simpler when you talk about CCS over geoengineering, it’s actually become something we can relate to. And it also has an infrastructure, where it’s kind of co-benefiting. But I’m wondering, like, if there’s any emphasis on this other– we have this different silver bullet. So CCS is one. What about blue hydrogen? Is there any talk about that here? It’s like the new bus.

So blue hydrogen is natural gas, where you take out the CO2 and store it somewhere. And that becomes– I’m from an oil state– or now gas. That’s what we pride ourselves of. And this is driving the development for new– this becomes a major argument. So the oil industry, oil and gas industry, will now drill for more gas in the long-term.

Now it’s going to be sent to Europe as the gas they need, natural gas they need. And then we’re going to carbon capture it. And I think it’s a very valid point with IPCC giving this leverage, which makes everything more complicated for what is green and what is brown and et cetera.

[CAYLEE HONG] Yeah, sure. Thank you for the question. So legally, it’s extremely clear that an owner or operator of a well is responsible. So that responsibility comes out through the polluter pays principle in California. But also, in individual leases, there’s almost always an obligation to decommission.

The problem, of course, is that we’ve seen in California, and really all over North America, is that oil and gas operators, whether they’re these– in my presentation, I’m talking about operators that drilled 100 years ago. They were mostly individuals. Some of them were hand-digging holes. They didn’t even have the technology to drill. So that’s exceptional.

But really, what’s happening nowadays is a kind of three-fold way in which responsibility is ceded, including in places like LA still. One is that, like we saw with my case study, the operator just disappears. Like, there’s no– as a corporation, they just– you can’t even find them. They’re gone.

More commonly, they go bankrupt, right? So there’s all sorts of loopholes and legal debates about how decommissioning obligations or environmental responsibilities gets paid out in this sort of waterfall of priority in a bankruptcy. But as recent cases in California show, usually, operators, because there’s never enough money to go around, will not end up paying for decommissioning costs. So that goes on to the state.

And third, what’s even probably more common, and which a lot of organizers and the state is paying attention to, is the transfer of these old wells to a smaller producer. So for example, Chevron, the California Resources Corporation, Exxon, large, well-capitalized firms, what they typically do is will sell down to smaller and smaller operators. And then that– at the end of this chain, they will go bankrupt.

So California, for example, has passed legislation to try to prevent those transfers where wells can’t be bonded. But yeah, there’s a major distinction between– or gap– between what’s legally required and what actually happens in practice when it comes to responsibility.

[JOHNATHAN GUY] I think the question was about, what’s the role of cost in– oh, like supplementary, like investments for wind and solar, like, in terms of grid management. Yeah, I think– I guess the way I think about this politically is that it’s another upfront cost. And it’s the one that is really a public good in the sense that everyone benefits from it because it increases the connectivity of the infrastructure.

And what’s interesting is that in India, we see a much more sustained effort to upgrade the grid and to also– and also in grid storage. I think that there are kind of two reasons why this is happening. One that I alluded to is that the central government isn’t fiscally constrained in the same way that these states are. They have the ability to make investments. And they don’t face this kind of subsidy trap that the states do.

And then second is that, basically, India is trying to diversify upstream into all these sorts of technologies in energy storage, in green hydrogen. And I think that there’s the potential to create new rents there and to benefit these firms. I think there’s also a security component to the story, like trying to– because a lot of these– like, green hydrogen has crossover benefits, spillover benefits in defense. So yeah, those would be my guesses. Yeah, thank you.

[ANDREW JAEGER] Thanks. Yes. There’s a lot I can say about that, but I’ll be– I’ll be quick. Yes, hydrogen is– there’s a lot of hype around hydrogen here as well for very similar reasons. And actually, one of the main reasons– one of the main arguments against these dairy digesters that are being deployed right now is that they are undermining the push for green hydrogen.

Because they more or less function– the RNG that’s produced more or less functions as an offset that the blue hydrogen producers can use to prevent– you know, to release themselves of their regulatory burden, right? Yeah, I think I’ve talked a lot. So I’ll stop there.

[DANIEL ALDANA COHEN] Good. Thank you, thank you. My voice has gone missing. All right, we’re at 1:27. So I will make one brief remark and then we’ll wrap this up. And if folks want to talk more with the panelists afterwards, please do. I have zillions of questions for all of you which we’ll get to in the shortness of time because we don’t have time anymore.

I think this panel confirms my feeling that the relationship between humans, capitalism and the planet can be summarized in just two words, which would be built environment, and that those two words, built environment, also named the common ground almost literally between almost all scholarly projects around the climate question. So I think it’s really fascinating to have three very different approaches coming from three very different disciplines, different questions. But they all kind of converge on the fights over the literal reconstruction of our physical interface with the planet.

So this has been super provocative. I think in the longer conversations that we’ll be having over the years, I think it’ll be really interesting to think about the disciplinary resources, but also obstacles to the research programs we’ve laid out here. Because I see you all transgressing conventional scholarly boundaries and research programs in ways that are very exciting. And I wonder how universities can change to more– to enable the kind of work that you’re doing so that this research program can flourish to help us all face down these emergencies.

Thank you all very much for coming– Julia for organizing the Matrix, Chuck, who’s hiding behind a wall, making this all work. And thank you again once again for coming, being part of this conversation. And let’s keep this going. Thanks.

[MUSIC] [APPLAUSE]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. For more information about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

California Spotlight

Conservatorship: Inside California’s System of Coercion and Care for Mental Illness

Recorded on March 18, 2024, this panel focused on Professor Alex V. Barnard’s book, Conservatorship: Inside California’s System of Coercion and Care for Mental Illness. The book analyzes conservatorship, a legal system used to take legal guardianship over individuals deemed unable to meet their own basic needs. This controversial system, which has come under fire from civil liberties and disability rights groups, is at the center of state policies for mental illness, homelessness, and addiction. Through interviews with policy makers, professionals, families, and conservatees, Barnard shows how the system operates, and its many shortcomings.

At this event — part of the Social Science Matrix California Spotlight series — Professor Barnard was joined by Lauren Rettagliata, whose comments on her lived experience of the system complement Barnard’s discussion of his research. The discussion was moderated by Jonathan Simon, Lance Robbins Professor of Criminal Justice Law at Berkeley Law.

The panel was co-sponsored by the UC Berkeley Institute for the Study of Societal Issues (ISSI), Department of Sociology, and the Center for the Study of Law and Society.

About the Speakers

Alex V. Barnard is an assistant professor of sociology at NYU, holding a PhD in sociology from UC Berkeley. His work examines cross-national differences in the trajectory of people with severe mental illness between different institutions of care and control. His book, Conservatorship: Inside California’s System of Coercion and Care for Mental Illness was published by Columbia University Press in 2023. He is currently working on another book, tentatively titled, Mental States: Ordering Psychiatric Disorder in France.

Lauren Rettagliata is the mom of four sons, the oldest has Autism, the youngest has Schizophrenia. Almost five decades ago, she worked on committees that formulated federal legislation that ensconced into federal law protection for a free appropriate education for all children. Lauren found herself back home in California at the time her youngest son was diagnosed with Schizophrenia. The world changed for her. She had to search the streets and delta for her son who spent many years homeless and fell into drug addiction. Her son has been conserved. Lauren’s advocacy now centers around Housing That Heals.

Moderator

Jonathan Simon joined the Berkeley Law faculty in 2003 as part of the J.D., JSP, and Legal Studies programs. He teaches in the areas of criminal law, criminal procedure, criminology, legal studies and the sociology of law. Simon’s scholarship concerns the role of crime and criminal justice in governing contemporary societies, risk and the law, and the history of the interdisciplinary study of law. His published works include over seventy articles and book chapters, and three single authored monographs, including: Poor Discipline: Parole and the Social Control of the Underclass (University of Chicago 1993, winner of the American Sociological Association’s sociology of law book prize, 1994), Governing through Crime: How the War on Crime Transformed American Democracy and Created a Culture of Fear (Oxford University Press 2007, winner of the American Society of Criminology, Hindelang Award 2010) and Mass Incarceration on Trial: A Remarkable Court Decision and the Future of Prisons in America (New Press 2014).

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[WOMAN’S VOICE] The Matrix Podcast is a presentation of Social Science Matrix, an interdisciplinary reserach center at the University of California, Berkeley.

[JULIA SIZEK] My name is Julia Sizek, and I am the postdoc here at the Social Science Matrix. And today, we are extremely excited for this important event that is about a topic that is very politically relevant in California. As we were discussing right before we started, the votes on Prop 1 are counting, which is, of course, an issue relevant to the system of conservatorship, which is what we’re here to discuss today.

So you likely already know a little bit about the system of conservatorship. A legal infrastructure and medical system that has developed in order to take care of people that have been deemed to be gravely disabled. Conservatorship is a very head end system, and it rarely makes the news aside from Britney Spears, who is a very famous case.

But it’s a system that is both very important and very hidden, one that our guests today Alex Barnard, knows very well. And Dr. Barnard is a graduate of the sociology department here, so we are especially happy to welcome him back to say hello. This event is part of our California Spotlight Series which addresses topics of interest to residents of the Golden State.

So we also do have some other upcoming events here at Matrix, some of which might be of interest to those of you who are attending this event for various reasons. So tomorrow which is March 19, we will be having an event with Nick Romeo called The Alternative, How To Build A Just Economy.

On Wednesday, we will be having an event called New Directions in Greening Infrastructure about the energy transition. On April 1, which will be after spring break, which is next week, we will be having an event on a book called Nature-Made Economy, COD, Capital and the Great Economization of the Ocean. On April 4, another book event on The Gender of Capital.

And then once we approach the end of the semester, we’ll be having some events on Caste, Education, and Social Struggle in Modern India, as well as a book event on Puta Life, Seeing Latinas, Working Sex by Berkeley professor Juana Maria Rodriguez. And you can, of course, find our other events on our website, which is matrix.berkeley.edu.

And then just before I introduce our moderator today, just a note for the folks who are online. If you want to ask a question during the event, please put it in the Q&A box. And if you’re having some sort of technical issue and you aren’t able to hear someone or you’re having some sort of problem like that, put it in the chat and we will get back to you as soon as we can.

Yes. OK. So now I will introduce Jonathan Simon who will be moderating today for us. He joined the Berkeley Law faculty in 2003 as part of the JD/JSP and legal studies programs. He teaches in the areas of criminal law, criminal procedure, criminology, legal studies, and the sociology of law.

His scholarship concerns the role of crime and criminal justice in governing contemporary societies risk and the law in the history of the interdisciplinary study of law. His published works include over 70 articles and book chapters and three monographs, which I will list here– poor discipline, parole in the social control of the underclass, governing through crime, how the war on crime transformed American democracy and created a culture of fear, and finally, mass incarceration on trial, a remarkable court decision in the future of prisons in America. And so without any further ado, I will turn it over to Jonathan.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Thanks so much, Julia. And let me extend my welcome as well to the Matrix? Audience here in the building, as well as to our audience online. I hope I’m coming through clearly enough, if I’m not, Julia will certainly signal me and I’ll try to improve it. I’m very excited by this conversation.

There are a few topics that have animated as many of us in California for as long as this one, and we have a terrific panel to educate us today. So I want to get to them very quickly. But let me start by saying this. A little more than 20 years now of teaching legal studies here at Berkeley, I’ve never ceased to be amazed at how much Americans in general and I think Californians maybe in particular love law, and especially law in the books.

And how convinced we are that if you get law right, everything will follow. That you want to change society, you need to change the law. And so we can just look at our history, whether it’s prohibition or more recent wars on drugs, segregating society or desegregating society, creating a legal right to abortion or ending Roe as we know it, have all been demands made by people who fervently believed that we would live in a better world if we could change what the law is on the books.

And if you think about it, there are few areas in, certainly, recent history where I think– few areas of public interest and public policy that have drawn quite as much of this, you might say, mythical belief in the power of law to do either good or evil than the issues around civil commitment, conservatorship that we are addressing today.

Many of you know that in 1969, California was one of the leading, maybe the leading, state to pass a landmark law revising how the state exercises its truly awesome sovereign power to civilly commit people to coerce them sometimes into custody or into treatment or into some combinations thereof.

And that law is distributed by various people as having transformed California society in many, many ways. And ever since that– over 50 years ago, now 55, we have passed numerous laws. If you think that we don’t have enough laws in this area, first of all, I urge you to read the book and talk to Lauren, and I’m going to introduce them properly in a moment.

But one of the things that makes it so interesting to me is that not only do we really care about this law and the related laws, but today we attribute many of our most persistent evils in our state to having gotten this law either wrong or not right enough. And that includes unhousedness. That includes rampant public drug use and drug sales in the center of many of our large cities. It includes mass incarceration.

That motivated me to write an article on this and opine on how we could solve these problems, as well as seemingly more mundane problems like automobile break ins, property crimes, retail theft, et cetera. So in a way, changing the law of conservatorship civil commitment has the glow of a panacea to many today who think that we could get it right.

Now, I’ve spent much of my career trying to show Berkeley undergraduates for the most part that story about law on the books is at best a myth, and that it’s really the law and the action that matters. And there’s a lot that goes with that. One message is, whether you won or lost the battle over law on the books, things are just beginning because we really don’t know what that law on the books is going to do, and reversing it, how it’s going to do as well.

Notwithstanding that background knowledge and the experience I should have had. As I said, I wrote my own law review article on this topic arguing that mass incarceration was such a horrible evil that we ought to delve back into the law and try to get the balance right between freedom and coercion in the form of prison.

And again, I would say having now read Alex’s book more carefully and listening to more survivors and their family members, that there was a huge amount of naivete to think that we could just give judges clearer guidelines or even fancy terms like dignity or values like dignity and expect chains to follow in any kind of automatic way.

So in my experience, if you want to break out of the enormous power that myths, rational myths– since we’re in a sociology related adjacent space, we might describe them as especially the myth of legality that changing the law on the books is the key to changing society, there’s only two ways to get away from those myths in my experience.

One is by deep empirical research that forces you to overcome your assumptions and the assumptions of the people that encouraged you to go out in the field, and living and experiencing the dilemmas of this system directly through your loved ones and through your own struggle to foster their lives and well-being.

And we are very privileged today to have two people who can speak exactly to those sources of knowledge, and I’m going to introduce them in the order that they’re going to speak. Alex Barnard on my far left here is an assistant professor of sociology at NYU. As you noted, Julia, he holds a PhD in sociology from the University of California, Berkeley.

His work examines cross-national differences in the trajectory of people with severe mental illness between different institutions of care and control. His book– this is it, Conservatorship Inside California’s System of Coercion and Care for Mental Illness, was published by Columbia University press in 2023.

He is currently working on another book tentatively titled Mental States Ordering Psychiatric Disorder In France. And I’ll note that he had done a lot of research in France when he wrote this book, so it’s already informed in many ways by a cross-cultural knowledge that most of us ignore or don’t have.

To my immediate left is Lauren– I’m sorry, my notes here just give you a first name, but I know you’ve got a–

That’s OK.

–last name as well, and I will get to that in a moment. Here we go. Lauren is the mom of four sons. The oldest has autism. The youngest has schizophrenia. Almost five decades ago, coincidentally, she worked on committees that formulated some of the first federal legislation that ensconced laws protecting a right to free and appropriate education for all children.

Lauren found herself back home in California at the time her youngest son was diagnosed with schizophrenia. The world changed for her. She had to search the streets and delta for her son who spent many years homeless and fell into drug addiction. Her son has been conserved. Laura’s advocacy now centers around housing that heals, and we’ll hear more about that.

So Alex and Lauren are each going to speak for about 15 minutes or so, then I will moderate a Q&A with all of you and with our online audience. So without further ado, please join me in welcoming these experts, true experts, here to the Matrix.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALEX BARNARD] Thank you so much for taking some time out of your day to be here. I’d like to thank the Social Science Matrix for the invitation, and especially my past and perhaps forever advisor Marion Fourcade for organizing this event. It’s really special to share the stage with Lauren who is a really instrumental support early on in this project.

And as that kind introduction just noted, perhaps I’m an expert, but I’m an expert only because of the hundreds of people who have shared their expertise and their experiences and in many cases, their pain and their struggles with me. So my work on this topic began when I was a PhD student here conducting a comparative study on decision making in public mental health in France and the US.

And towards the end of my PhD, I began hearing about proposals across the Bay in San Francisco to use conservatorship and ordinarily obscure medical legal intervention to address some of the combination of urban suffering, urban disorder, and addiction that I could see every day on my bike to campus.

Yet, I quickly realized there was almost no academic research or government oversight into what was happening to people already on conservatorship. And so with an intrepid group of undergraduate research apprentices here at Berkeley, we sought out to provide some of that analysis.

My core argument in the book is that as a result of what I call the state’s abdication of authority, California’s mental health system is producing both an excess of coercion that offers neither the social control that is being demanded by the public or politicians, nor the transformative care that some of the state’s most vulnerable citizens ought to receive.

And concision is not my strong point. [? Keris ?] [? Myrick ?] recently described my book not really as a book but a tome, but I will try and give you a brief version of it through telling one story, the story of Serge [? Obolensky ?] who I first interviewed in 2021 and I’ve had the pleasure of getting to in the last few years.

So you used to be able to search for no hands, crazy, and Hollywood on YouTube and find him. In one video that seems too Hollywood to be true, the camera person is focused on an LAPD officer who is laying out a spike trap in the road to put an end to a car chase in progress. And the video pans over to a man with no hands, a grizzled beard, and caked in dirty hair. He’s shouting at the sky and clapping his two wrists together.

These videos capture Serge’s external behavior but not his internal suffering. And when I interviewed him in 2021, he didn’t give me a lot of details about his background but says that he suffered an accident with a firecracker in his late teens he lost both his hands and one eye. His parents were scientologists and adamantly opposed to psychiatric treatment, even though he showed signs of developing psychosis. He was evicted from his apartment in 2001 and spent more than a decade homeless in Hollywood.

So he describes it, it was very hard, very painful. “I didn’t have shoes. My hair was dirty. I was hungry all the time. I was freezing cold at night, and I didn’t have a blanket or anything. It was really bad.” Serge was on the verge of becoming part of a shocking and shameful statistic, a massive rise of homeless mortality in the state that has grown much faster than the homeless population itself, as you can see from the chart.

Los Angeles went from 500 homeless deaths in 2014 to over 2,000 last year. While some of this is a consequence of the rise of new and lethal substances, it also reflects an aging unhoused population. The years and years that people like Serge have spent on the street accumulates into both increased vulnerability and increased skepticism of the health and social service interventions that are supposed to help them.

So everyone who has lived in an urban area of California has seen Serge or someone like them and asked the question, why isn’t somebody doing something to help him? Some people wonder why Serge wasn’t being offered housing through programs like Housing First. While others ask, why is it that California’s laws make it so hard to force someone like Serge into treatment?

Yet Serge was not being left alone in some kind of homeless state of nature. In fact, one of the things that Serge remembers most clearly from that period is many, many 5150s. A 5150 refers to the part of California’s Welfare and Institutions Code that allows a police officer or designated clinician to deem somebody a danger to self, danger to others, or gravely disabled, which means unable to meet their need for food, clothing, or shelter as a result of mental illness and transport them to an ER evaluation. 5150 is also the title of a Van Halen album and a Machine Gun Kelly song. Now you know.

In Serge’s case, the voices in his head would tell him to run into traffic, and police would pick him up and take him to a hospital. Sometimes the voices would tell him to trespass and he’d be arrested instead. Serge’s case speaks to a neglected truth. What we often hear that California’s laws are particularly strict, if we look at the rate of these 72 hour holds, California actually has a very high rate of short term involuntary treatment. And if we look at 14-day commitments, somewhat longer 14-day commitments, California sits in the middle of many European countries.

What Serge did not experience during his years on the street was a conservatorship. So a conservatorship, also known as a guardianship, is a legal measure by which a judge grants a third party the power to place somebody in a facility, including a locked one, or two them to receive treatment and control their finances and personal decisions.

Serge was always released by an ER within 48 hours. A clinician declared that Serge was meeting his need for food because people in the neighborhood would occasionally buy him a meal. He met his requirement for shelter because he knew to sleep in a doorway when it was raining. Sometimes if he had been transported to a hospital in another neighborhood, they’d even provide him a taxi back to Hollywood. A few times, he said the discharge social worker tried to connect him to a shelter, but he didn’t go.

This outcome is not surprising. Despite the state’s rate of high rate of short term involuntary interventions, the number of people receiving long term interventions versus via somewhat misleadingly named permanent conservatorship, which lasts one year, has gone down. Again, this isn’t because civil rights laws, which have been largely the same since 1967 are getting stricter, nor is it because the treatment system is doing a better job of stabilizing and healing people.

I think it would be remiss if I didn’t say, this system that is producing proliferating short term involuntary interventions has extreme racial disparities built into it. So this is data that was put together by San Francisco. It’s looking at the number of people in the city in fiscal year 2021 who had eight or more 5150s in one year. And you can see in that population, 50% of the people subjected to that were Black or African-American. San Francisco as a reminder is now 5% Black.

Kerry Morrison realized that there was another explanation for the mixture of abandonment and short and pointless coercion that Serge was facing. She was head of the Hollywood business? Improvement District, an organization that some scholars have roundly critiqued for advocating the criminalization of unsightly homeless individuals.

But Morrison did much more than demand the police arrest or 5150 Serge. After all, Serge was already being regularly detained. What Morrison realized was that there was no accountability for ensuring that these detentions actually accomplished anything. She was getting at something akin to my conclusion in the book.

Although California’s landmark 1967 law, the Lanterman-Petris-Short Act granted the state the power to adopt any rules, regulations, and standards as necessary to implement it, the state has largely abdicated that authority. It provides no guidelines as to the goal of the conservatorship system nor best practices for how legal criteria like grave disability should be operationalized, nor serious oversight of the locked facilities where many conservatees wind up.

The state’s own power has been dispersed among a fragmented field of public and private actors that are using or opting not to use that power in keeping with their particular bureaucratic imperatives or funding constraints. As a result, you’ll see getting someone care in California looks like, as one mom told me, the result of luck and heroics rather than a functioning system.

In Serge’s case, Kerry decided to step in. She concluded that Serge and others like him were missing an air traffic controller to ensure that they actually progressed through the system rather than simply cycled in and out of it. So she in a group of local nonprofits and charities mapped out on a whiteboard everything they knew about the Hollywood top 14, the individuals in the neighborhood they identified as the most vulnerable and most likely to die if left on the streets.

They were the ones who combined information from homelessness, law enforcement, and mental health agencies that ordinarily ignored one another. They assembled all this information into a dossier and hatched a plan. The group would wait for a day when a particularly sympathetic doctor was on call at the local hospital. During that physician’s shift, the bid’s foot patrol would watch for Serge to run into traffic and call LAPD.

Meanwhile, someone from the Hollywood top 14 team would camp out in the ER so that before Serge was released by the ER, they would show the doctor the dossier and say if you let him go, this has been the pattern and he’s vulnerable. Everything worked like clockwork, she told me, and that did not make for a less tragic scene.

She tells me the police had to handcuff him, but he doesn’t have hands. So they use zip ties and he was kneeling on the ground. There’s all sorts of law enforcement all around him. When Morrison talks about her work, she says, this is how we help people in America.

Importantly, the team arranged for Serge to be taken to a county hospital, and this is an important point and offers a moment to talk about a theme that politicians like Gavin Newsom have really hammered on in recent months, which is California’s desperate lack of treatment beds.

My research documents a warzone like triaging of scarce beds by which families, clinicians, and first responders scramble to get extremely sick people into facilities. I want you to watch a discharge social worker plead for a miracle that would convince a hospital to keep a homeless pregnant woman with schizophrenia one night.

Given this, it might surprise you that from a comparative perspective, California is not noticeably underequipped. If we look at all locked mental health facilities in the state, California sits between Australia and Denmark with more than the UK, Canada, or Sweden.

What creates this shortfall is first California’s immense need. The combination of the nation’s highest real poverty rate, half the county’s unsheltered homeless, waves of austerity in the mental health system, and not just under Ronald Reagan, and mass incarceration have created vulnerable people like Serge who essentially do not exist in many European countries.

Moreover, California’s locked beds are used badly. California has the fourth largest state run hospital system by capita, but most of those beds are used for people found incompetent to stand trial treated just enough so they can be judged and punished. And as a harrowing recent report by disability rights California found, many people in locked facilities in the state linger there for months or years after being cleared for discharge because the private residential treatment providers the state relies on won’t take people with comorbid medical needs, substance abuse challenges, or history of violence.

Most of California’s acute care psychiatric hospitals are privately run in for profit. As you can see from the yellow bars, half of the state’s beds authorized to take involuntary patients are in such facilities. But private facilities are not engaged in any project of Foucauldian social control. Instead, they keep people as long as insurance is paying and discharge them when it stops. In LA, private hospitals have an astonishing readmission rate of 37% within 30 days.

Serge, however, was brought to a county hospital. Public facilities like these are more willing to eat the costs of holding somebody for a long period while waiting for a conservatorship. And you can see that in the brown bars on the right showing the proportion of conservatorship referrals coming from different types of facilities. This does not say anything about the quality of care being offered.

So in Serge’s case, the dossier passed through an ER up to the inpatient unit where after waiting a requisite 17 days, the doctor applied for a conservatorship. That dossier was then evaluated by a County agency, the public guardian, and referred for a hearing.

Now, in theory, conservatorship hearings are a point where law and medicine, where rights and care collide in a delicate balancing act. But Serge doesn’t remember his public defender fighting for him or even that he spoke to the judge. He just remembers the doctor testified that he couldn’t take care of himself and it made him upset. Serge was placed on a conservatorship.

So what does it mean to be conserved? Popular culture like the Netflix movie I Care a Lot and Britney Spears case have painted a picture of a guardianship industry riven with active exploitation. But people with mental illness rarely have the kind of assets that would attract an unscrupulous private conservator.

Serge was thus the charge of an obscure county agency, the public guardian. Depictions of public guardians also emphasize, as one 1972 profile put it, that they have total power to decide when they’ll see the sunshine again. In practice though, public guardians have caseloads that range from 60 to 100 people and a limited budget consisting primarily of their wards social security checks. Far from having overbearing parents, conservatives often seem like latchkey kids.

One public guardian reflecting on the public’s increased desire to see more people conserved lamented to me, they think it’s a magic wand. Oh, let’s get them conserved, and then everything will be solved. But we only have two powers, placement and medication, and we have no placement budget.

So in Serge’s case, the court ordered the public guardian to place Serge in a long term care facility. But hospitals and guardians have little leverage over these facilities whose beds are scarce and for which counties have to compete. So Serge was stuck for months on inpatient until one day Kerri went to visit him and he was gone.

The hospital wouldn’t tell Kerry where he was citing privacy laws. Kerry raged. Our system does not want to even acknowledge that there might be someone out there who cares, who might be the lifeline, the connector could provide people with $5 or whatever. When we were speaking with Kerry and Serge, Kerry reflected, if we did not go looking for you, nobody in the world would have known where you were. You would have been completely alone.

Kerry eventually tracked Serge to a locked facility on the outskirts of LA. These Mental Health Rehabilitation Centers, MHRCs, are inauspicious places. At the facility I visited, which is not the one pictured, you have to look carefully at the vine covered fence around an exercise area out back to realize that it’s topped with barbed wire. The facility was eerily quiet.

It has no staff psychiatrist. It contracts for physicians to meet each resident once every two weeks. There are no licensed psychologists providing one on one psychotherapy. Most of the activities are groups on anger management or living skills put on by program counselors who the manager told me were uncertified people who would otherwise be working in McDonald’s.

While I was touring, a woman came up to me to show me poetry she was writing with titles like “Locked In” and “My Incarceration”. At that moment, I felt like crying. I had been hearing about the desperate need for more MHRC beds and seeing that need. But when I finally saw them, I realized we were clamoring for people to shuffle empty hallways in silence for months or years waiting for the next antipsychotic injection.

But Kristen, a nurse from the local public health department who joined on the tour, saw things differently. She runs a County independent supported housing first program and talks about a client who is refusing to be in a higher level of care even though they recently found him in a bathroom almost in a coma defecating on himself with near fatal blood sugar.

It’s so great to see people cared for, Kristen said, also fighting back tears. For some people, an MHRC is just better and safer. And when it comes to whether you see conservatorship as abuse or compassion, your reference point matters a lot.

In Serge’s case, Kerry and her compatriot eventually found a contact in the Department of Mental Health who had stretched privacy laws to tell them where Serge had wound up. Kerry drove to the far reaches of LA to meet him and made a distressing discovery. Although Serge had been conserved for months, he had not actually met his public guardian.

Concretely, that means he wasn’t having any of his social security check transferred to him, so he couldn’t even get food from the MHRC’s small snack bar. Kerry raised what she called holy hell with the county, and within a day or two, Serge’s public guardian reached out.

Serge himself was surprisingly lacking in antipathy towards those who treated him. He expressed his gratitude for the unlocked board and care home he step down into, a setting that provides 24 hour supervision and help with medication management. However, these facilities are evaporating statewide as a result of rising property values, increasing labor costs, and, again, decades of state indifference.

Lauren has visited many of these facilities, and she’s really the person to ask about what makes a good or a bad warden care. In any case, when we spoke, Serge enthusiastically told me about working on his GAD and the new prosthetics he was getting through the aftermath foundation, which helps people who have fled scientology. He was also in the process of dropping to a lower level of care.

When Serge came off conservatorship, he was given a full service partnership, California’s highest level of voluntary services, which would visit him multiple times in his and care. But in California, no level of care is supposed to be permanent. And the future, he’ll have to get to the clinic himself. That’s him getting his GED.

So Serge is a striking success story, but did conservatorship have to be part of it? Kerry told me that for many of the people in the Hollywood top 14, by the time her team engaged, there was nothing left between death and conservatorship. Serge himself was conflicted. Towards the end of our interview, I asked him what I think the question we should all be asking– is there anything that you could have offered you in those years that you would have accepted to get you into housing or treatment?

He said, I would have accepted both, but no one ever offered. I said, if somebody is going to give you an apartment or a hotel room, would you have said yes? Definitely. What would you have said if a psychiatrist visited you and offered to renew your prescription? That would have been good.

Opponents of expanding conservatorship see these kinds of narratives and the evidence that many people in California are requesting housing, drug treatment, or mental health services don’t get them as evidence that the crisis on California’s streets could be addressed without expanding forced treatment.

Instead, we need to engage people with persistent offers of the things they want, which for some people would drew them into treatment was a promise to get them an IDD or a trip to the dentist. And by relying on peers with lived experience to make the connection rather than just traditional clinicians.

Yet at a different point in our interview, Serge gave me a different answer. He told me that in the throes of psychosis, he didn’t necessarily want treatment. As I asked, you’ve had a lot of experience with the mental health system. If you were in charge and you could change one thing, what would you change first. And he said, that they can serve me earlier. So you would have them serve you earlier? Yeah. Even though you didn’t want it? He said, if I got off the street earlier, that would have been better.

Serge’s ambivalence was common in my interviews with dozens of people who had received forced treatment in California. While some people described what they had experienced unequivocally as torture, others perceived it as a difficult but at a certain moment in their life necessary intervention.

I am reaching the end here. But the idea that there are people who need mental health treatment but who, due to traumatic past interactions, bad experiences with medication, or due to the symptoms of their illnesses themselves, cannot accept it has driven three major pieces of reform that I want to briefly review as I close out my presentation.

The first are care courts passed in 2022. These are civil courts that can order people to follow a treatment or housing plan and obligate counties to provide it. These courts don’t have a strong enforcement mechanism, but they can refer a person to conservatorship. Conservatorships themselves are going to get easier to get.

SB43 passed in 2023 changed conservatorship criteria to add substance use disorders and include medical care and personal safety alongside food, clothing, and shelter. Currently 56 of 58 counties in the state have delayed implementation of the law citing capacity limitations, which is why Prop 1, which continues to hang in the balance– we actually don’t know if it’s going to pass, which promises $6.4 billion for new beds, some of which can be in locked facilities, is likely to be so impactful.

My own research suggests that the definition of grave disability expands or contracts based on available beds. So I think this may be the most significant of these reforms. I’m currently finishing or starting moving towards publishing some current research that shows that these reforms put California at the leading edge of a national trend.

Citing concerns about homelessness, mass incarceration, gun violence, and youth mental health, states nationwide have introduced 1,600 bills in the last decade related to involuntary treatment, which with a group of assistants at NYU we’ve been cataloging. Democratic states like California, Oregon, and Hawaii are at the forefront.

Whether these reforms are a pendulum swing towards the bad old days of mass institutionalization or course correction towards a more balanced mental health system depends enormously on implementation. And this is why I think there’s value in California taking seriously a rigorous evaluation component and being ready to shift its approach depending on the results.

So I’ll close with five concluding thoughts, all of which reflect my own somewhat conflicted conclusions in a book where conservatorship really was at one moment a form of abuse, at other moments a life saving tool, and in some cases like Serge’s, perhaps a bit of both.

The first is that California State government has abdicated authority over the conservatorship system. Conservatorship is an immensely powerful government tool, but government doesn’t actually determine how it gets used. The consequences that people like Serge experience both repeated short term coercion and abandonment, sometimes within 48 hours.

My second conclusion is that while there is an absolutely an enormous need for more voluntary treatment and housing in the state, I’ve also found that for a subset of people, these will not meet their current needs. Every housing first provider intensive outpatient program or peer support outreach team I’ve observed has emphasized that they have many clients who need but cannot get into a higher level of care.

For this reason, I wrote at the end of my book that I thought an accountable careful targeted use of conservatorship could help some of these individuals. But as time goes on, I am more and more doubtful about whether the state could actually consistently provide this.

Fourth, my interviews with service users highlights the extent to which our focus on Access to beds and care has often come at the expense of discussing what actually happens to people in those beds, why some people are afraid of sleeping in those beds, and concerns about quality more broadly.

Finally, I recognize that my ability to call for nuance and compromise reflects the privilege of an academic able to take a step back and claim some distance from this issue. Still, I think the near failure of Prop 1 is an interesting caution. The large no vote reflects a surprisingly effective campaign from advocates for voluntary treatment. But I think it also reflects a growing backlash against any spending on homelessness and mental health.

Historically, the biggest divide is not between those who are for and against involuntary treatment between families and service users but between those who believe we have some collective responsibility for addressing these issues versus those who embrace a kind of nihilism about whether anything can and should be done.

The time to do our best to combine our various expertises and approaches to show that we really can do better is now. On that note, I’ll express my intense gratitude and look forward to hearing from Lauren. Thanks for hanging in that slightly longer than promised presentation.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Thank you so much, Alex. We will–

[APPLAUSE]

–bring Lauren up to the podium and I guess maybe move the slides.

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA] First off, Alex, thank you for inviting me to present with you. I think your book was amazing. And I think many families like mine feel that it is something that needed to be done, and we really thank you for the research. This is a picture of me and my cohorts. And I want to thank everyone here in the room. And many of you who are online.

If you look at this, well over on the left, you’ll see Rose King. Rose King actually was one of the people that penned the Mental Health Services Act, along with Darrell and Rusty [? Seelix. ?] She was the person who really moved it. She was the head of the Democratic Party at the time, and she moved forward.

And next to her is my dear friend and the person I toured California with, Teresa Pasquini. And I’m in the middle there before I went gray.

[LAUGHTER]

So hello to everyone. I am one of the many moms on a mission to help those with a serious mental illness and substance use disorder. Those forgotten and disposed of. The discarded accumulating on our city streets, and also the forgotten. Those in their community, but living stunted existences in their loved one’s back rooms.

So this is the slide all of you have seen. What it is so important to me is that actually in 1974, I actually left the state of California because my oldest son at that time was diagnosed with childhood schizophrenia. Because in the DSM III, there wasn’t yet the autism designation.

And he was going to be placed at the Agnews State School because I kept hammering away, everything I know, everything I read, you’ve got to start working with him when he’s two, when he’s three. They said he– they could take him when he was four, but he would have to go to the Agnew State School.

My husband and I became panicked. I was a researcher, and I found a school district in Texas, the Cypress Fairbanks School District. And that’s where I met a lot of other moms like me, and we really– what that school system had that California didn’t had was an early childhood education program.

And my son, who everyone wanted to put at Agnews State School, today is a janitor at Dreggers, a really nice supermarket. He’s been working. He’s not on SSI. He’s not on SSDI. He’s completely a great human being who drives a car, but prefers to live with his family. We’re one of those old Italian families where if you don’t get married, you live with your family forever.

[LAUGHTER]

Now, this is a slide I asked permission from the Public Policy Institute of California to show. And this gives us an idea of exactly what is happening to people like many of our loved ones who end up just not on the street but actually in jail. And this is one of the saddest things that is happening.

This is why I really became involved. I can’t live with the status quo. I can’t live with when my son goes off of his medication, and he will at some time. Hopefully maybe there’ll be a miracle and he won’t this time, but then I have to search and many times find him in the delta of California involved in the meth trade in what they call meth island, which is Bethel island. Many times he’ll be on the street.

And when Theresa and I were on our first tour right in our own county, this is why it’s all grainy and not so great, is this is what we were up against. So the status quo has failed to help the most seriously and persistently mentally ill and indicted. These are the people who are suffering from psychosis that prevents them from receiving the medical care and psychiatric care they need. People who are not just in danger but whose psychosis will bring great harm to them or someone else.

I accepted the invitation to speak with Alex today to describe to you what LPS conservatorship means to families like mine. There are the A words. They are paramount in any discussion about conservatorship. The first, anosognosia. The false conviction within a person that nothing is wrong with their mind. It stems from the physiological byproduct of psychosis and accompanies about 50% of schizophrenia occurrences and 40% of bipolar cases.

The second is the A word, appropriate. I worked in at the federal government level in the 1984, and one of the things that we had our longest discussion on was the use of the word appropriate in a free and public education, that it had to be appropriate. And I think that this is paramount to our understanding because as you mentioned, it’s not necessarily the laws. It’s the implementation of the laws. It’s the implementation of what happens.

Appropriate, like anosognosia, is essential when decisions are made regarding treatment and placement. We hear so often about least restrictive environment. But too often, appropriate has been dropped. This word appears in state and federal legislation and is essential. It was placed there to assure that in all placements, what is done will bring benefit and prevent harm.

We want our loved ones civil rights protected through a due process hearing. We want the conservatorship to come up for renewal every year. We want a person who is conserved to have a placement review hearing if they disagree with their placement. We want the structure of the LPS conservatorship to be there to prevent further harm for the person to be given the opportunity to live as full a life as possible. And a conservatorship does that. All those things I mentioned, it does that today.

In California Senate Bill 43, the new LPS conservatorship statute when finally enacted in every county in California will give us the opportunity to see if medical intervention can enable people with a severe and persistent mental illness or addiction to recover in the appropriate, least restrictive setting.

Senate Bill 43 changes the definition of grave disability in two ways. It clearly states severe substance use disorder as a reason someone can be considered for conservatorship. And why personally this is important to me was, believe it or not, when someone has been in the system for a long time, their records get lost.

I happen to be a pretty faithful researcher and record keeper, so I kept mine. But I thought it was amazing when my son’s conservator told me that my son, he felt, what really didn’t have that much of a mental illness but what he had was a substance use disorder. Of course, he had a substance use disorder. He was a meth addict.

But everyone had forgotten that since he was 17 and 1/2– and now he was in his 40s, that he had schizophrenia. This gets forgotten. And what we can’t do is we can’t sit there and argue which came first, the chicken or the egg? They’re both very, very severe medical situations that need to be looked at.

The other is, and most importantly, what this new LPS conservatorship statute does it it adds a person’s inability to provide for one’s personal safety or necessary medical care to the old statute that was only concerned with a person’s inability to provide food, clothing, and shelter as reasons for a person to be held on a conservatorship.

The Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Agency, SAMHSA, the federal entity that gives guidance to the state mental health system, describes recovery as this– a process of change through which individuals improve their health and wellness, live a self-directed life, and strive to reach their full potential.

A real life situation, though, is not addressed in this definition. What happens when a person is suffering from psychosis with a delusional thought process and has lost touch with reality? Conservatorship addresses this. It provides a structure needed so that lives may be stabilized and a person has a chance at recovery.

I logged many miles touring the state with Teresa Pasquini. Our mission was to find housing models that could be replicated that ended the human log-jam that sent people back to the street and locked doors where many fell into addiction and zombie like existences. We visited many types of living environments included the mental health rehabilitation centers and adult residential facilities. Now, I’m going to go through and show you some.

This is the best of the best of the institutes of mental disease, or as we call them in California, the mental health rehabilitation centers. This is in the Central Valley of California. It is not a nonprofit. I don’t think that the family that owns it are making huge amounts of money. They’re a family of psychiatrists, and this is the gold standard in the state.

Theresa and I have been to many, and this is what we need to have. This is why we don’t have as many as that. Because the counties or the insurance companies now have to pay $450 to $500 a day average. But what if we did that? What if we actually took that amount of money? I think we may, not for all, but for many stop that revolving door.

This is Eva Wells Behavioral Health. Now this is a for profit, not locked. But what is amazing about Everwell Behavioral Health is, they cherry pick the people who came to them the least. Remember there’s a shortage of beds, so everyone who is vying for– and I don’t like to call them beds, but placements within a facility, they can say no, we don’t want that person.

They’ve got diabetes. It looks like they might be losing a limb because of gangrene. They might have a colostomy bag. We can’t take them. Or they may be coming out of Napa State Hospital or another state hospital. But oh, put them in there. They have also– they might be a pedophile or something like been diagnosed as being a pedophile. So Everwell will take everyone– will take people before most other places will.

This is one of their facilities. It’s out in the Stockton area. One of their chief things that they really want to do is they want to give people real food. That they don’t have a psychiatrist and a psychologist on staff like CPT does. That’s the one good thing about CPT. They do have people with master level clinician status there.

But now this is the gold standard when we travel the state for facilities that contract with the counties. That means, these are people that aren’t on private insurance. And almost everyone after many years on the street or many years having a severe mental illness or substance use disorder is going to be using the county behavioral health system.

Synergy contracts with our county behavioral health systems. 95% of the residents are, as you can see, on Medi-Cal, Medicare, or Veteran Affairs. There are facilities– there’s one in Morgan Hill, there’s one South of Morgan Hill, and now they have a group of them that are opening up in Stockton. Almost everyone there is conserved. So you don’t have to be in a locked facility. You can be in an unlocked facility.

When I showed you– the other three previous ones I showed you were classified as for profit, OK? One of the reasons they were classified as for profit is, until just recently, in order to build a facility or in order to enhance a facility, you had to go get a loan from a bank. It’s very hard to get a loan from the bank if you’re a nonprofit. A for profit is a different story.

So that’s why many of the people and the places that you see caring for those with serious mental illness, they are for profits. This one is not. It is a nonprofit the problem for me– for the problem for the people that are there– it was amazing. We spent two days there looking at this place. They keep their residential program only to those with a schizophrenic, spectrum disorder.

But look at the cost. Look at what they managed to do. They’re charging families about $40,000 a year. Of course, they have other foundation money that is keeping them alive and well. And these figures are 2019. I haven’t checked in with them, but this shows you what can happen. It’s cheaper to care for people in a facility like this.

And what they did in Santa Anna was, they bought this block that was falling apart. This cul-de-sac that was falling apart, they purchased all– they purchased three homes at the top of it and then worked with the other two families and offered them a lot a really good price to move out, and they took over a cul-de-sac in Santa Ana.

Now, Santa Ana is in Orange County, but it’s not your wealthiest part of Orange County. So it is a good place. They’re on the bus route. They can go to community college. There’s a lot that can happen there. They have a few people who are conserved, but not everyone. OK.

So to prevent homelessness and the endless cycle from street to jail to the emergency room, we need to move from scarcity to abundance. And we don’t have– what I showed you, there’s just not enough of those. When someone is seriously mentally ill or addicted and is discharged from an emergency room, we must ask, discharge to where? Back to the street is not appropriate. It is wrong.

Appropriate is a key to providing the correct care. The setting must bring benefit and not cause further harm. Too many people are sent back to unsupported living situations often left on the street to die 20 to 30 years before they should. That’s a fact with schizophrenia.

It is a fact also that most large counties find their jails are their largest behavioral health treatment facilities. And then there are the open air asylums found in our urban areas and encampments along our byways and rivers where those suffering from untreated mental illness and addiction live and are preyed upon.

And if you’ve been to downtown Los Angeles– I know that Alex spent some time with my friend Susan [? Partovi. ?] She ministers and brings her medical ability to those that are in the open air asylum of downtown Los Angeles. We the people of California still have promises to keep. The promise we made when we closed the state hospitals, and we would provide treatment and care for the most severely ill in their communities.

We abdicated our authority. It was and is our responsibility to call on state legislators to provide adequate funding. Instead, we passed on the authority first to the state who passed it on to the counties, but we the people never funded a system of care that we promised.

Not all people can recover to the point where they will need a room key and the availability of supports and services. This is housing first, and it works for a lot of people. It’s not a bad thing. It’s a really good thing, but not for all. Prevention, early intervention, and peer supports are essential. But let us not forget those who need more, those who need intensive psychiatric support, those who need to see a psychiatrist, psychologist, or master level clinician very frequently to assure correct treatment is given so that they are not living in a world filled with psychotic delusions. This is housing that heals.

Our robust group home industry developed for those with an intellectual disability because a sufficient amount of funding followed those who need intensive care within the community. As you can see from the bottom arrow over there, if you have an intense intellectual developmental disability and you’re in a facility that has more than five beds, the state is getting close to $12,000. The state is giving $12,000 a month for their care.

For adults with a serious mental illness, it’s about 1,000. And the reason it’s 1,000 is they back out the Medi-Cal and Medicare portion, which is about $300, and then that leaves with less than 1,000. Also, all good board and cares will also keep back and give their person some money. So when my son has been in situations like this, the facility is probably getting about $750 or $800 a month.

In our tour of the state, we observed that both for profit and nonprofit entities can build and provide care within the community. I know that LPS conservatorship saves lives. I have also seen it fail because conservators sometimes do not understand the intensity of the illness that– and they want to treat the person in a setting that is not structured enough.

Too many of our loved ones have left housing placements that are not appropriate and ended up enslaved in the underbelly of the drug world or worse, dead. This is Allison Monroe. She’s a dear friend of mine. This is her daughter, Diana, who passed. She left a board and care, which really wasn’t a high enough.

Conservators have a great responsibility. And when people are not put in a place where they get enough support and structure, they wander off, and they end up like Diana does. And that was dead from an overdose of fentanyl. So thank you very much, and I appreciate your patience.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Thank you so much, Lauren. And our audience here has been terrific. So I think we have time for questions as well as for online. So I’m going to invite my real experts to have a seat so that they can field these questions. And should we go back and forth between the room and the virtual world? We have a couple in the room. We could do two at a time perhaps. You guys are all right with that?

Yeah.

If there is demand. Give people a moment to not feel the Goffmanian stigma of raising their hands. Do we have something online we could start with? There we go. Richard.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] I just wondered if either or both of you has anything to suggest about the strategy that California should pursue for the next year or five or 10.

That’s–

Was there another–

[JONATHAN SIMON] Anyone want to add on to that?

Can you say it again, please?

Do you mind repeating the question?

I think it was, what’s the best course California should take in the next one to five years in this area?

Please.

Can you–

Just until you get the mic. Thanks.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Can you talk about the process of competing for beds between different counties.

I’m sorry I couldn’t hear.

[ALEX BARNARD] The competition between counties for beds. And do you think– I mean, there’s what should we do in the next five years is really– I mean, It’s a great question, but it’s also such a vast question. So maybe I’ll just target thinking about, again, we have this huge discussion about beds. We need beds, beds, beds.

And I think we need to have a much more careful discussion of– a bed is a mattress. And you can build a bed in a congregate homeless shelter and you can build a bed in a state hospital that is highly secured and you’ve built two beds, but that’s really, really different.

And so I think a couple of things I talk about in the book. I mean, I think that the need for more– I mean the need for more housing is– that’s our baseline. But the need for more residential treatment settings, I think, on the ground, you really, really see it. But does it need to go into building more locked settings?

I think one thing we could start by saying is that many locked settings have many people who have been deemed appropriate for discharge. By any standard, the people are not supposed to be there. But for a lack of step down providers, therapeutic unlocked settings, people are stuck in these placements.

And so I think really trying to figure out, what is the thing we need between these locked settings and between people being able to survive on in supported housing, what is the process, the skills people need? I think that missing middle of the continuum is probably where I would invest the most.

But I do think it’s maybe not just about for profit or nonprofit. Nonprofit, I think you’ve really helped me challenge my sociological biases against anything for profit on that. But I do think we have a system in which counties are currently bidding against each other to get access to these scarce beds, which has all sorts of– I mean, it increases costs, it gives a huge amount of leverage to these facilities to decide who they’re going to take or not take, and it has these super tragic consequences in terms of people being scattered around the state.

Because I talked to one county that had 100 beds MHRC in the county, but they could only afford– they had only won the contract for six of those beds and they were actually losing that contract to another bigger county. So all of their conservatees were going to be sent out of county even though they had a facility in the county.

And I talked to county mental health directors who were very honest of like, we’re just buying up– we’re going to the neighboring county and we’re buying this up. And when I talk to people in the state, they’re like, yeah, that doesn’t make sense. Counties shouldn’t be doing that. It’s like, yeah, if only there was some layer of government above counties that could– so I think there’s a–

[LAUGHTER]

So I think there’s a huge amount of– there’s a lot of opportunity in terms of smart investments to use the beds that are available better, And I think there’s a need for a much more rational system. One psychiatrist described getting into these facilities is a beauty contest where you misrepresent and lie about somebody’s needs in a way that will make– you make it so they won’t get ruled out. I mean, I think I’ve lost a little bit the thread of this response. But I think there’s a lot of space for sorting out the residential treatment system in which I think a more engaged state government could be incredibly helpful.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Lauren, do you have a take on that?

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA]Yeah. Could you move it back one?

Let’s see here. Oh, there we go. Have a real expert.

So I’ve been on both sides of the aisle, on the IDD committee and the seriously mentally ill committee. And the one reason why things aren’t getting built and the one thing– and because you can build it. But if you don’t have the money to actually provide the treatment and care, what we’re going to end up with is like a picture I saw in San Diego that broke my heart. And that was, in getting ready for the Affordable Care Act, that they were going to have this bridge housing.

And what the bridge housing was basically looking like the worst inside of prison. They had beds stacked three high, six across, three across an aisle and three across. That people are not going to stay. People who are ill need to be in an environment where they can get well, and that will cost some money.

And we do ha– we did, as a state out of our gen– see, there’s general fund, pays for those with an intellectual developmental disability. We on the severe mental illness side, it’s realignment one and realignment two an MHSA, and leveraging all those dollars so we can pull down federal support dollars from our federal dollars.

So this is where we as California are having a problem. Maybe Cal Aim– hopefully, Cal Aim will open up and cause more money to flow into places like I showed you like synergy and Everwell so that money will be there so that they can actually expand their services.

They’re not about to go out and to build new facilities unless they know that the money to pay their clinicians, their psychiatrists, and their psychologists are going to follow them. Now, synergy has a great model, and it is– and that is, they have what is called a certified mental health clinic right next door to their facility.

Because our California law does not allow them to be at the same address. So they’re actually– they’re wise about it. So they are able to bill because they have a facility with 90 people in it. They have a full time psychiatrist, two full time psychologists and master’s in social work there, and they have broken the code, all right?

Other places like Everwell do it a little bit differently, but they do need more than $45 a day. We’ve got to be realistic. And that is what– even with patches, each county, if they use their MHSA money wisely and they use their real– they can actually bring down some federal dollars, and they can pay for better care at the better facilities. But no one is going to build these facilities until we actually get real about what it costs to get someone well.

[JONATHAN SIMON] There’s a follow up on this because I’m really struck by this chart, Lauren. Thank you so much for sharing it. And I would love to get both of your thoughts on this. I mean, what account– a, what accounts for this huge disparity in treatment between intellectual disability and mental illness? We’re taking one group of people and we’re giving them at least something approximating what they need. And we’re taking another group and essentially not even coming close to it in a way that guarantees both their suffering and our own confusion as to who’s responsible for it. So what would it take to bring this top number down to this much more adequate amount? Is that a federal piece of legislation? Is it a new state law, and why haven’t we had it?

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA] Combination of both.

[ALEX BARNARD] Yeah. I mean, I think it’s so striking that Frank Lanterman was the sponsor of both the Lanterman-Petris-Short Act and the Lanterman– it was called the– now the Lanterman Developmental Disabilities Act, and they really did set up two very different kinds of systems. That the mental health system was set up as they’re these grants to counties, but counties can use them how they want.

And in the end, the counties really didn’t serve the population of people coming out of the state hospitals. And the commitment with the Lanterman Act for people with developmental disabilities was set up as an entitlement program, that the funds would match the need automatically as opposed to the mental health system where it’s still written in the law that services will be provided to the extent resources are available.

And so there’s a very different architecture and a very different kind of commitment that was made very early on, I would love to dig in to understand that. But I do think there are some researchers that have looked at the different discourses around deinstitutionalization and how people were represented and the extent to which there was an incredible amount of stigma.

But also this idea that if you take people with mental illness out of the mental health system and you just put them in the community with these new magic medications, they’re going to be productive citizens and everything is going to be fine, versus a very paternalistic discourse around people with developmental disabilities that is often, they was presented as the forever children that we have this obligation to.

So we can find problems in both processes, but I do think it’s significant that no one is saying we need to re institutionalize people with developmental disabilities. So I think it suggests that the idea of deinstitutionalization, there was a failure in its implementation particularly for people with mental illness.

But that’s not– clearly, this is a process that could have gone much better if the kind of commitment that was made. And if you dig into the developmental disability system, you immediately find tons of problems. I’ve done some interviewing about it because within the mental health space, we hear, oh, it’s so much better over there. So I wanted to go see if that was true.

And you hear about all these problems, but at the end of that interview, someone says, but thank goodness we’re not the mental health system. That this system, it does work better. And I think it’s really tied to this idea that there’s an entitlement, they’re going to evaluate a person, and after that, the state has the responsibility for contracting for the services that were evaluated as necessary and it’s not constrained funding wise in the same way.

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA] I agree with everything you said, but I think we also have to be realistic in that in the 70s and 80s when the funding streams were being developed, people with a mental illness were seeing as having bad behavior. And people with an intellectual developmental disability, people knew something is really wrong with them.

Their behavior is not like everyone else’s and they may need help because their brain doesn’t– their brain and central nervous system and with their gut system, it is not working properly. We didn’t see that, I think. And when we did– people in this room probably did, but there’s a large swath of the population that didn’t. They thought it was bad behavior.

And that if it was an illness, that if we just gave them the medication, they’re going to get better. Well, guess what, not everyone with schizophrenia, with bipolar gets better. A lot of people do. And that is wonderful. And I work diligently with brain and behavior and the researchers out there, we’ve got to keep going. It’s going to get better. But not everyone gets better on psychiatric medication.

And I think we thought we didn’t know what was going. Also, Borden care’s work really well. If you have 12 people or 6 people in a home for those with an IDD, when you get people who have schizophrenia and they have been taking their medication for a while and everything, they want a community.

They don’t want it– in Borden cares, there is so much regulation. They can’t cook. You can’t make your own meal. You can’t do your own laundry. You can’t even have a garden in your back yard– in the back yard. So we need a different way of doing it. We need places where they have a community too within a community so that– much like a college campus. We need that, but not big huge institutions . No one wants to go back to having 1,000, 2,000 people in a state hospital. That’s awful, and I’m glad it stopped.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Thank you so much, Lauren. Do we have some folks online? Otherwise, we can–

[JULIA SIZEK] Yeah, we have a lot of questions online. So I’ll just– I’m going to read a couple of them. So one from Martina Satris who says, the determination of who is incompetent to control their own lives, money, and living places historically aligns with those not valued by society.

Native Americans are an example within California history, and she references the Palm Springs checkerboard for Agua Caliente and the guardianship system that was used, I think, during the 60s. With a broadening loosening of conservatorship, how do we insure against cultural bias informing who is determined to not be mentally competent?

And then I’ll highlight one other question from Cari, who says that she’s grateful to hear these stories and wants to honor Diana and many people who have lost their lives as a result of the country and state’s unwillingness to adequately fund truly holistic, life-affirming care and support for folks and their families.

I’m wondering about the potential for more expansive support for families, communities that care for their loved ones with SMI. What do Lauren and Alex think about creating more funding for care teams of psychiatrists, social workers, occupational therapists, et cetera, who could provide wraparound support for families, caregivers while keeping their loved ones in the home.

[JONATHAN SIMON] So why don’t we tackle those two and then I think we’ll have time to come back for a couple more from the room.

[ALEX BARNARD] Yeah. I think the– I mean, racial disparity in historical disparities in who’s deemed incompetent is something that looms over my– something that I think looms over all of this in the sense that, again, I think that there are situations that I encountered in my research where it felt like conservatorship was the only option. And that’s what led me to this conclusion of, well, could we have an accountable conservatorship system, a well regulated conservatorship system, carefully evaluated conservatorship system?

But it is true that if we kick the tires on any part of the mental health system and look at who’s facing more mechanical restraints in ERs, who’s more likely to have involuntary medication? Who’s more likely to in the most recent disability rights California report, who’s more likely to be stuck in jail even though they no longer even they legally can’t even be in jail but they’re waiting for step down placement? It’s like the– it’s always people of color.

And the fact that it is– there’s no place where we don’t find that, to me is like– it is the thing that makes me certainly makes me wonder about what I– this vision of, you could have this accountable conservatorship system. It’s just that hasn’t been created anywhere. There’s no place where we don’t see those racial disparities, and I feel like that’s something that is we have to sit with and think about for sure.

I think this question about support for families is so core, and I think this– I think that was also raised in terms of the professional. We have a huge workforce crisis in California, and I think that’s why it was interesting they mentioned– I don’t remember the exact list, but we need to be thinking about other sets of professionals to be involved in this– occupational therapists, peer supporters, psychiatric nurse practitioners, and bringing in a broader set of expertise.

But I think certainly, one of the ways– one of the consequences of the state’s abdication of responsibility in this space is just the assumption that families will pick up the slack. And I think that has been deeply unfair across the board, and I think there’s a huge amount of responsibility for creating better supports for families.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Lauren, did you want to comment on that or?

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA] Well, my experience in the experience of many of the hundreds of advocates– and I do get probably about 100 calls a year, is that when someone is so ill that they will qualify for a conservatorship staying in their family home at that point probably is not the answer. Maybe it will become the answer, but it isn’t the answer at that time.

The other thing that I think that Alex shows in his book that I think was really good is that our public guardian system is in chaos. It really does doesn’t exist. It’s not even a state– public guardians. Office is a nonprofit institution in my own county, the conservatorship office is– it’s in deceival. It’s not there.

That when we are guardian– our public guardians for those of the serious mental illness and our conservatorship programs are different in every single county. And they are drastically underfunded in my County. I’m sure that in your counties, they are too. But I actually know the dollars and cents that are in my county, and I can say, this is tragic. We have to build a system and we have to make sure that our public guardian offices are financed.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Let’s take one or two more, and then we’ll give a final word. So how about you and you over here.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you. Thank you so much to all of you for talking about this subject. I have a lot of questions. How do I boil it down? I’m really interested in this slide and the conversation about different disabilities. It was actually something that I was thinking about in reading the book and wanted to ask Alex in the conversation at the very beginning about language when you were talking about the different ways to talk about mental health, that you didn’t include mental health disability.

And so I was curious about that. And this, I think, just– I was alarmed a little bit, there’s so much within disability community and just marginalized communities in general of pitting groups against each other. And so how can we learn from each other without saying, well, they have it better than we do? Which I know is not what you were intending to say, but I think it’s easy for people to go there.

And it’s a really interesting question for me about, how do we learn from different disability models and see what’s out there? And how do we allow people with mental health issues to connect and learn from other people with disabilities, which never happens in institutions across disability? And I thought I had one related question.

Why don’t we–

Sorry, just the last thing on institutionalization was, it reminds me of the burrito rule that gets used as a sign of whether it’s an institution. Can you get up at o’clock in the morning and get yourself a burrito? And so just curious how do you see that playing out in this issue?

[JONATHAN SIMON] We get one more, and then we’ll come back for a final word to our panelists. I thought it was right here in the gray. Thank you. Sorry.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] I guess I wanted to see if you guys can talk a little bit more about the connections between disability justice and the carceral system. Just because I know one of the slides was saying that a good chunk of people who do suffer from mental illnesses do wind up in the carceral system. So I wanted to see how you would go about talking about that, and also how maybe defunding one system can really help out with the funding for this system maybe, I don’t know.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Thank you very much for that. So let’s come back to Alex and Lauren, and we’ll thank them.

[LAUREN RETTAGLIATA] You mentioned about the carceral system. I sit on the– I’m the family member on the Affordable Care Act work group that the governor has formed. And there are nowhere near the amount of people that are being petitioned into care court as they thought there would be, which is a good thing because it’s giving each county time to get its sea legs.

But one of the strange things that they didn’t think of is that they are having people who are in jail, not in prison, but are in jail are actually filing petitions so that they can become– be brought before the care court and receive the promises that are being made in the care court. There are a number of people.

Also, the Affordable Care Act did not think that there would be as many family petitioners. How they missed that one, I do not know, but they did. And so those are the things that I see that– if I had my way, I would– when they do the intake in the jail, if someone presents as if they’re 5150, could be 5150 or even close to it, discussion should stop and they should be sent to the psych emergency center or emergency room or the standalone psychiatric facility, and that’s where it should begin.

[JONATHAN SIMON] Alex.

[ALEX BARNARD] Yeah. I mean, there are– there are several questions on the table. So let me– the language one was something I did think about a lot and knew that I got it wrong, but the question was how wrong to get it? In the sense, that the terms itself are so contested. Even if you say, people with mental illness. Well, some people contest that they have– the whole point is that there’s a debate.

So I will say that at the end of everyone I interviewed for this, I asked them this question of how do you think– what are the words that speak to you on this topic? How do you want to describe this? And mental health– for the people who had experienced involuntary treatment, I didn’t hear mental health disabilities that often.

And I think that’s– it’s interesting. And I don’t– and I think there’s the question of people first language. I think disabled people has caught up, but mentally ill person still feels very– something that people are very uncomfortable with. So the language question, I think, is fraught and I don’t necessarily think I got it right. And I appreciate that feedback.

I think the– looking at something like this, I will say, I don’t hear anyone in the mental health space saying, we should take some of the money from developmental– people with developmental disabilities and bring it over to the mental health world. I think it’s a– we would like to have parity with that.

Obviously, the sad situation we’re in is when these things do become zero sum. But I think there’s more we could learn than just the money piece of this. I’ve had some interesting conversations about services for– again, for this group of people, for people who have very serious behavioral issues but are in placements that are not locked but with two on one staffing or with Plexiglas windows– there are actually a whole lot of design innovations and staffing innovations that I think there are things that to be learned from that are not necessarily being learned from in the mental health space. And I wish I had more time to learn about that.

But we are–

[JONATHAN SIMON] We are at time.

–in fact, at time. So I just want to thank all of you. I want to thank the UC Berkeley Social Science Matrix for putting on this really important California spotlight on conservatorship. I want to recommend along with Lauren that you read this book because it really is totally apropos to our situation. And I’d like to invite you to help me thank our two panelists for this terrific discussion.

[APPLAUSE]

[ALEX BARNARD] Thank you. And I’m very happy. If you have comments or feedback or questions or critiques, please send them. I would be very–

[INAUDIBLE].

I could sell you a copy right here, I suppose. But–

[INAUDIBLE] book tour.

Yeah. But thank you very much for your time and for coming.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[WOMAN’S VOICE] Thank you for listening. To learn more about Social Science Matrix, please visit matrix.berkeley.edu.

 

Authors Meet Critics

Authors Meet Critics: “Terracene: A Crude Aesthetics,” Salar Mameni

Recorded on March 4, 2024, this Authors Meet Critics panel focused on Terracene: A Crude Aesthetics, by Professor Salar Mameni, Assistant Professor in UC Berkeley’s Department of Ethnic Studies. Professor Mameni was joined by Mayanthi Fernando, Associate Professor of Anthropology at UC Santa Cruz; Sugata Ray, Associate Professor of South and Southeast Asian Art and Architecture in the Departments of History of Art and South & Southeast Asian Studies at UC Berkeley; and Stefania Pandolfo, Professor of Anthropology at UC Berkeley.

The panel was co-sponsored by the Program in Critical Theory, the Art Research Center, the Center for Race and Gender, the Center for the Study of Sexual Culture, the Department of Art History, the Department of Ethnic Studies, the South Asia Art Initiative at the Institute for South Asia Studies, and the Environmental Arts and Humanities Initiative.

About the Book

Salar Mameni
Salar Mameni

In Terracene, Professor Salar Mameni historicizes the popularization of the scientific notion of the Anthropocene alongside the emergence of the global war on terror. Mameni theorizes the Terracene as an epoch marked by a convergence of racialized militarism and environmental destruction. Both the Anthropocene and the war on terror centered the antagonist figures of the Anthropos and the terrorist as responsible for epochal changes in the new geological and geopolitical world orders. In response, Mameni shows how the Terracene requires radically new engagements with terra (the earth), whose intelligence resides in matters such as oil and phenomena like earthquakes and fires. Drawing on the work of artists whose practices interrogate histories of settler-colonial and imperial interests in land and resources in Iran, Iraq, Yemen, Kuwait, Syria, Palestine, and other regions most affected by the war on terror, Mameni offers speculative paths into the aesthetics of the Terracene.

Podcast and Transcript

Listen to this event below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

[MUSIC PLAYING]

[JULIA SIZEK] Hello, everyone. We are going to go ahead and get started. My name is Julia Sizek, and I’m the postdoc here at Social Science Matrix. Today, as you all know, we are here to talk about Salar Mameni’s new book, which we are all very excited about if not already have been excited about for a while.

I have been super lucky to actually watch this book along its journey to publication because when Salar first came to this campus, we did a matrix feature on this book. And then also Salar was a faculty fellow with us last year, which was awesome. This is also a plug for anyone who is an assistant or associate professor at Berkeley. You can apply to be a faculty fellow for next year. The applications are actually due in about a week and a half from now. So all of this is to say we have really enjoyed seeing this book come to publication. And also to have this as part of that journey is really awesome.

Terracene is a book that really brings together terror with terror, bridging how the war on terror, which, of course, is also a war over natural resources with other longer terrors of colonialism. So using art to help theorize the Terracene as a way to creatively bridge the affective experiences of terror with the science of the Anthropocene, this book really is an amazing contribution to both art history and to theories of the Anthropocene. So I’m excited for that, this event.

And before we get truly started, we want to thank our co-sponsors, which is a very long list, the Department of Ethnic Studies, Critical Theory, Art Research Center, the Center for Race and Gender, the Center for the Study of Sexual Culture, Art History, the South Asia Art Initiative at the Institute for South Asian Studies, UC Berkeley, and the Environmental Arts and Humanities Initiative, which maybe speaks to the way that this book has really touched many different fields of scholars across campus. This is also part of our author meets critics series as you know. So if you know of a book that’s coming out in the social sciences, please let us know because we would love to feature it.

Our other announcements are some of our upcoming events at Matrix. So we have a couple of events actually later this week that you all might be interested in attending. So first, we’re going to have an event about AI on Wednesday, which is organized by one of our faculty fellows. And then on Thursday, we’re going to be having an event about obstetric racism, which is organized by another one of our faculty fellows. It’s very faculty fellow and former faculty fellow heavy week. And then next week we’re going to be having an event on Monday about storytelling and the climate crisis featuring different writers of fiction and nonfiction and how they think about integrating the climate crisis into their work.

The following week and going into spring break, we’re going to be having two events that are of particular interest to those interested in California issues. So one of them, conservatorship is going to be about the California system of conservatorship, which is about care for mental illness. And then we will also be having one of our new directions panels, which features the work of junior scholars about greening infrastructure, so a lot of upcoming and extremely exciting events.

And now to move on to our event for today, so I will go ahead and introduce Stefania Pandolfo, who will be our moderator today. She is a professor of anthropology and a member of the programs in critical theory and medical anthropology at UC Berkeley. Her work centers subjectivity, imagination, trauma, and the experience of madness with a focus on the Maghrib in Islam and in conversation with psychoanalysis and Islamic thought.

In recent years, her research and writing have reflected on forms of the subject and ethics straddling psychical political, religious, and aesthetic processes and vocabularies. She is currently working on a book on aesthetic experience, violence, and psychic pain based on her ethnography and on collaborations with a number of artists. So without any further ado, I’m going to turn it over to Stefania to introduce Salar.

[APPLAUSE]

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] Thank you. I really don’t deserve this big introduction because I will be doing very little here. I will just be moderating. But thank you. It’s a great honor actually to be here and participate even maybe a little bit later a little bit more to the discussion about Terracene, which is a really remarkable work that spans many fields but also that attempts to give us a vision of aesthetics that is transformative and profoundly important in this moment.

But let me just begin to say a few facts about Salar. Salar Mameni is both an artist and a scholar. And he says so at the beginning of his book, which he actually– he tells us how he moves between different genres in writing these books. And the sensibility of the artist is present from beginning to end. He’s also an assistant professor in the UC Berkeley Department of Ethnic Studies and an art historian by training, specializing in contemporary transnational art and visual culture in the Arab, Muslim world with an interdisciplinary research on racial discourse on transnational gender politics, militarism, oil cultures, and extractive economies in East Asia.

He was formerly a UC president’s postdoctoral fellow in feminist studies at UC Santa Cruz. And he has a PhD in art history from the University of California San Diego and a BFA in fine arts from the Emily Carr Institute of Art and Design. He has published articles in Brazilian science, women and performance, Al-rida, journal, Fuse Magazine, Fillip review and Canadian Art journal.

Salah’s first book Terracene– that we will discuss today– A Crude Aesthetics Duke University Press 2023, considers the emergence of the Anthropocene as a new geological era in relation to the concurrent declaration of the war on terror in the early 2000s. And playing on words terror and terror, he proposes the term Terracene and Terrance as for the inhabitants, so the terracing, in order to think the planetary in conjunction with ongoing militarization of transnational or transnational regions under terror.

Terracene engages contemporary art and aesthetic productions and particularly those artists that most directly speak to the sensibility and the various material inscriptions in the body and on the senses of the author so are both arbitrary, personal and yet profoundly connected, and paying particular attention to artists navigating the geopolitics of Petro cultures and climate change. Research for his second book– and I want to mention this because it’s to me it’s important. It emerges from the first book in a very interesting way– engages histories of medicine, and in particular of trans medicine and the endocrine system.

So he’s currently conducting archival research to understand visual representations of fluid bodies within Islamic manuscripts prior to the rise of the scientific discipline of endocrinology in the early 20th century. And in fact, to some extent, his research in manuscripts within the Islamic tradition is very present at the very beginning of the book with the creation story. His research has been supported by the Hellman Faculty Fellowship and the Social Science Matrix.

I wanted to say literally two words before beginning the discussion of the book. At several points in his powerful and moving book, Salar cites Walter Benjamin’s Adagia Fiat ars, pereat mundus, create or make some art and the world be destroyed. It is a quote from the conclusion of Benjamin’s famous essay the Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction published for the first time in 1935 where Benjamin returns to the site of war, WW I, and the lurking preparation of WW II through the rise of fascism.

All efforts to render politics aesthetics, Benjamin culminate in one thing, war, and conclude Fiat ars pereat mundus says fascism. And as Marinetti, the futurist, writer, poet admits, expects war to supply the artistic gratification sense of perception that has been changed by technology, continues Benjamin. This is evident in the consummation of La Perla. It is self-alienation, Benjamin says, that has reach– it’s self-alienation has reached such a degree that mankind can experience its own destruction as the aesthetic pleasure of a first order. This is the situation of politics the fascism is rendering aesthetic. Communism or what Benjamin called a redeemed humanity in other places responds by politicizing art.

And this book is an attempt to politicize art on this thin line where one could slip into fascism and one doesn’t, in which there is always a risk, which is also a risk of self dissolution. There is the risk of disappearance. There is the risk of becoming crude. And it’s a book that– it has as the discussants will talk about, I’m sure, a first part that is in the mode of critique that establishes what is a terrorist, a regime of terror from within which certain have not right to the possibility of expression in any way and have been targeted and reduced to resources.

And then there is a second part in which this question of what is a political art is brought to the fore in which we are reading about the possibility of sensing with injured organs. The fact of the encountering crude as the history of oil production, which is also the object of devotion among the Indigenous population in different parts of the United States because it contains the memory of organic life and the spirit of the dead, we encounter the art forms.

And I was most struck by the work of Diana Al-Hadid, the Syrian artist in the US who are experimenting and yet really writing from within an unspeakable experience of being at the heart of a trauma that is not a trauma that will be objectified but as a trauma that will engender the possibility of forms that will continuously dissform themselves or dissolve themselves through those sculptures that dissolve and drip down becoming a phantom limbs or simply going back to the Earth and becoming resources. Or in the work of Larissa Sansou, the Palestinian futurist who is actually imagining a dystopian future in an incredibly sarcastic and powerful way.

We will talk much more about this. But I also wanted to say a last word to the very personal register of this book, which has a profound element, a dimension of autobiography. Even though the autobiography is also an autobiography in which the memory, the body, the senses that are not separated from the conscious, there is a whole theory of perception in this book that, that perception that has been altered by technology as Benjamin says and that in which the author remembers being under the bombings during the Iran-Iraq War and being poisoned by a poison, which is a memory that will also be the material out of which those creations will be born. Thank you. And please help me to welcome Salar.

[APPLAUSE]

[SALAR MAMENI] Good afternoon, everybody. You can hear me, right? Good afternoon. Thank you so much, Stefania, for the introduction, Julia, for the introduction. It’s really an honor to be in conversation about the book with my colleagues at UC Berkeley, Professor Pandolfo, Professor Ray, and Mayanthi Fernando who’s coming from UC Santa Cruz to join us for this conversation. It’s truly an honor. Thank you so much.

When you see a book in its covers, it feels finished it looks finished, but it’s really not finished. For me, it’s still a work in progress. So I’m sure I will learn a lot from this conversation which can have a different life. I also want to thank the Social Science Matrix for hosting this event. As Julia said, I was a fellow here. And it was just last spring that we hosted a series of conversations here on ecology and medicine in the context of Transgender Studies. So it’s good to be here on the eighth floor. Also grateful for the co-sponsors of the event, and in particular the Department of Ethnic Studies that’s hosting a cocktail event after this at the faculty club. So please join us.

All right, so Terracene, so I’m going to talk briefly 10, 15 minutes just to introduce the book before we go to the conversation. So I’m going to start with a title. So Terracene is a term that I coined for the book in order to engage the notion of the Anthropocene. And as many of you know, the Anthropocene is a proposal for a new geological era that’s kickstarted by the human, the Anthropocene.

It was a term that was proposed by Paul Crutzen and Eugene Stoermer who repopularized the term. It was already coined prior to the 2000s. And they wanted to propose that as being a term that could be adopted for our new geological era. So from the beginning when the term was proposed, it came under criticism from many different disciplines. And in the humanities and the social sciences, the term was taken up by in particular feminist, critical, race, and indigenous studies scholars as having quite a lot of shortcomings in terms of creating a homogeneous concept of the human, the Anthropos, proposing that the human species is this homogeneous concept.

So there were a lot of different kinds of critiques that engaged the concept of the Anthropocene. I’m going to give you four of those just as a refresher to the critiques of the Anthropocene. So first, the concept was criticized for the fact that the concept of the human is a racialized idea. So it’s a racialized construct that doesn’t include most humans and non-humans. So it’s a category that’s a racializing concept.

Secondly, this construct of the human is political. So it was a concept that allowed European colonizers to colonize lands across the globe, to extract resources and do so in the name of the human, what was deemed to belong to the human. Third, this concept of the Anthropocene built a particular relationship between the human and the natural world which led to what we understand now as climate change. So pollution, mass extinction, melting of ice caps, viral diseases, et cetera, these are all concepts that came from this particular notion of the human, this particular way of understanding what a human species is and does.

And fourth, the critique was, well, this concept doesn’t stand in for all of humans. There’s a particular angle that this concept takes. There’s a particular edge that it has. Or in the words of Sylvia Winter, it’s a genre of the human that’s being engaged in the concept of the Anthropocene, that Anthropos. And that this European genre of the human is placing a huge multispecies categories of peoples and things at risk. So there’s an imbalanced distribution of risk that’s being produced through this concept.

So these critiques already existed when I came to the concept. So the Anthropocene literature already had much of this critique and more already present. So what was my intervention? So from my angle when I first started engaging Anthropocene literature, I became really interested in, as a historian, in thinking about when the concept was coined. So it was really striking to me that the concept or when it was proposed to be taken seriously coincided with the war on terror as a geopolitical way of describing the planet.

So this is the early 2000s when everyone’s really interested in thinking about time and giving images of what the new century holds. But also looking back, so there was a particular interest in historiography and temporality. And the war on terror gave a particular vision of how to understand the 21st century. And the Anthropocene was also proposing a particular image of the planet. So I was really interested in putting these two together. So even though the Anthropocene engaged with a massive temporality that went beyond the idea of the human species or how we could understand the humans engagement or destruction of the planet, it was nonetheless a concept in time. So I was really interested in historicizing that concept in relation to the war on terror.

So the central question that the book asks– and that’s how the book started– was to ask, What is the relationship between the Anthropocene and the war on terror given this coincidence of their engagement in the early 2000s? So I give you a whole book’s worth of answers to this question. But I think there are two main proposals that I make that are maybe the most significant. So those are the ones I’m going to share with you.

So first, I argue that the terrorist, the concept of the terrorist, is a racializing other of the Anthropos. So while the Anthropocene is proposing a category of the human species, the war on terror is proposing a particular category, the terrorist, after whom the– or towards whom the war on terror is being waged. So reading these two together, I saw the terrorist as the other, the racial other of the Anthropos in the concept of the Anthropocene.

And it was important that the terrorist was actually a non-human concept. So the terrorist was a vast category that couldn’t be easily defined. It included non-human entities like infectious disease and toxic landscapes, but it also obviously included less than humans, so what we more readily associate with the concept of terrorism. So bio terrorist, suicide bombers, these are figures that show up a lot in that discourse.

So for me, the notion of the terrorist was a multi species designation that was essentially racialized in relation to the human, to the Anthropos. So this argument, of course, built on a huge literature that had come out since the early 2000s. People who studied the war on terror, so just to mention a few people Anjalee, Fatima, Raza Kolbe, Brian Massumi, Elizabeth Pavanelli, Neel Ahuja, Joseph Puglisi, Jasbir Puar. These were all people who really studied how terrorism was defined even though it was such an ambiguous concept and brought attention to how that definition was often in relation to ecological disasters, such as hurricanes or insect, swarms or viral disease, et cetera. So that was my first proposal.

My second proposal in the book is that the war machine that’s built to target the terrorist, most of whom, of course, are found or concentrated in the region in West Asia from Afghanistan to Palestine, the war machine relies on oil. And so it also happens that oil is concentrated in this region as well. So a large part of the book is dedicated to describing the cyclical process through which oil is extracted, pollutants are dumped, and terrorists are produced. So I don’t take the concept of the terrorists for granted. It’s an attention to how that idea is produced in relation to the Anthropos. So that’s the overall conceptual structure of the book.

And so now I’m going to give you a little bit of the meat of the book that holds up that structure. And in order to do that, as Stefania was saying, it requires talking a little bit about me. So in terms of my training, I’m an historian. I’m not a geologist. I’m not a military analyst.

And I spent some time talking in the book about what it means to speak about the Anthropocene as a non-scientist, of course, breaking down that dichotomy between art and science, but also how to speak essentially as a non-human, so as a racialized queer, transgendered, other, a Muslim, also most importantly, a person who was marked for eradication as a child living under a war from the age of 3 to 11. And the Iran-Iraq War was the precursor to the Gulf War and a precursor to the war on terror. So there is a lineage of those wars that I trace and track through my own biography in the book.

And so due to this personal biography, I talk a little bit about what it means to gain an esthetic education, gain a sensorial education in relation to war, and what it means to read the world through that sensibility. So it’s difficult to do. It’s hard to write from the personal in a political way. And so I developed three narrative strategies or maybe what I’ll call methodologies to do that work. And maybe there are more, but I’ll share these with you.

So first, how to look to one’s own experience. So inserted throughout the book are sections where I break with academic form. And I speak about my aesthetic education as a child of war what it means to be an auditor, for example, of war while you’re in a shelter, for example. And so these are instances in the book where I foreground experiential and embodied ways of knowing, which can be difficult to do when studying both war and also climate change.

So in the literature of the Anthropocene, one thing that’s often cited is how difficult it is to sense the Anthropocene. The Anthropocene is not something you can just name. You can’t readily experience it. I mean, we can experience fires and hotter days, but it’s hard to have an individual experience that spans such a massive time scale. So by definition, the Anthropocene spans a particular time scale.

And so the concept of the Anthropocene is famously difficult to describe through aesthetic experience. So that’s one thing I try to do. And also the idea of– or the experience of war is also one that’s difficult to describe aesthetically because often, war leaves its mark on you through trauma. And trauma is famously absent from the aesthetic experience because trauma is when your sensory, your ears, your eyes, your other kinds of senses, have received an overload. And so that overload shuts down aesthetic experience.

So this is something I talk about in the book. So what does it mean to theorize a new notion of aesthetics through trauma? It’s a dichotomous concept thus far. So I’m hoping someone will maybe talk about the sublime and if not, we can discuss this in the Q&A. So, yeah, that’s one narrative and methodological difficulty that I had to navigate while doing that.

The second one was to look to intellectual and creative productions of others. So a lot of the artists that I look at in the book are people who I identified or gravitated towards in order to think through a shared experience. So Diana Al-hadid, Larissa Sansour, Morris Allahyari, who’s here in the audience– thank you for coming– Glad Gazeran, Fatima Al Qadiri, Alia Ali, Reza Negarestani, these are some of the artists who are in the book. And those who have showed up in my work prior to the book but who have contributed, people like Abbas Akhavan. Other artists, Ryan Tabet, Joumana Mana, these are people who I have been thinking with for over 10 years even if they’re not in the book.

And so these artists and their works really allowed me to understand my experience, my aesthetic experience, my aesthetic draws in a collective way. So whether or not I was successful, I really was trying, while I was writing the book, to push back against the role of the art historian or the art critic to write about an artist or to write about an artwork. So really my intention, again, whether or not it was successful, was to write with and to think with the artists that I was engaging.

The third strategy that I used was to look to the aesthetic capacity of inanimate things or entities. So what I sometimes call Terrance in the book, sometimes I call more than humans. And so one of the entities that I think with in the book more extensively is oil naturally. And so for that, I look to moments where one’s mine or an artist’s senses are intoxicated. So they come into contact with oil and gas. And so there’s a disorientation that happens, or there is a visionary moment that happens through that intoxication. So there’s a change, whether an enhancement or diminishing of perhaps an olfactory capacity that changes one’s way of sensing the world.

And so here, of course, I draw a lot on works of disability studies scholars who really have made ways to teach us how to think with senses that are not common, for example, to all, which is how aesthetic theory often talks about the sensus communis, which is what gives you aesthetic experience. So people like Mel Chin’s work, for example, really opened some avenues of thought for me in this realm. And I’m almost done.

So I also towards the end of the project– and it’s both a blessing and a curse that I came towards the end of my project– was to really draw on Islamic knowledge systems. And what drew me to some of that work was the way that Islamic cosmologies and ecologies really decentered the human. So it was a non-anthropocentric way of looking and perceiving and thinking about the world, a re– for me, it was a re-understanding or re-learning of what it means to think with sacred landscapes, what it means to think with theocentricity. And so you see some of that showing up in the introduction of the book but also throughout the book.

And so it’s a blessing in that it is pushing me into a new direction for the new book project where I will certainly engage with Islamic cosmologies and aesthetics to think about biological ecological entities and their overlap. But the fact that I didn’t think with that from the start, I feel maybe the book would have been somewhat different had I done that since the beginning. So, OK, just by way of summary, just a few words, the book is really inherently anti-war. It’s anti-military. It urges an end, a divestment from military expansion, which, of course, all of that tends to rely on colonial exploitation, genocide, and resource extraction. So in this moment, it really urges an end to militarism, to genocide, and perhaps asks for ceasefire now. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] Sugata Ray is Associate Professor of South Southeast Asian Studies and Architecture in the Department of History of Art and South Southeast Asian Studies and is also Director of the South Asia Art Initiative and the Climate Change Initiative at the University of California Berkeley. His research and writing focus on climate change and the arts from the 1500s onward. His recent books include Climate Change and the Art of Devotion, Geo Aesthetics in the Land of Krishna, 1,550-1850. It was published in 2019 and awarded the Society of Architectural Historians of Great Britain Alice Davis Hitchcock Medallion and the American Academy of Religion and the Arts Book Award. And another book, Water Histories of South Asia, the Materiality of Liquescence, which was co-edited in 2020. He is currently writing a book on the question of the animal and animality in the early modern period and is co-editing Ecologies, Aesthetics, and Histories of Art that will come out in 2024.

[APPLAUSE]

[SUGATA RAY] Let me begin by thanking you for the kind introduction and for inviting me in this conversation. I’ll just begin. Capitalocene, plantationocene, technocene, homogenocene, corporatocene, eurocene, manthropocene, plasticine, thermocene, pyrocene, even white supremacy. Thanks, Nick Mirza, for that one.

Monica’s ad infinitum, the numerous designations that have emerged in the past 20 years or so to define our current geological epoch, the Anthropocene, as a period of cataclysmic human-induced climate change gestures towards the urgent imperative to reconsider the genealogies and the histories of our besieged now. But whose cene is the Anthropocene? If the suffix cene, connoting new, suggests that a recent geological epoch is the period of the Anthropocene, this cene we must also concede needs to be placed in a scene.

With its root in the ancient Greek scheme, a temporary dwelling used for dramatic performances, the term scene had entered the world of art writing as early as 1638 with the German philologist Franciscus Junius, the painting of the ancients in three books. While the word scene implied both a sequence of dramatic action and the area set aside or an arena where action unfolds, the way Junius used the term in his treatise on aesthetic principles, it is in this sense that we must also turn to the scene of the Anthropocene in Salar’s Terracene. But more on that soon.

Turning to the scene of Anthropocene visuality, Nick Mirzoeff had suggested in 2014 that the aesthetics of the Anthropocene emerged as an unintended supplement to imperial aesthetics. Anthropocene visuality, as theorized by many, is a top down modality of imperial aesthetics, the conquest of the planet by converting it into a picture that emerged with Europe’s early modern empires. For Mirzoeff, the scene is a port city in Normandy, heavy with smog produced by burning coal as seen through Monet’s Impression, Sunrise.

Anthropocene visuality as materialized in Western Europe in the works of artists, such as Monet, Mirzoeff argued, entailed both the naturalization and the aestheticization of colonial capitalist natural resource extraction systems based on industrial level consumption of fossil fuels, such as coal. The visuality might have been a supplement as Morozov rightly notes, but it completed the ability to rule. But we could trace the origin story of our current capital eugenic planetary crisis to the epistemic moment when our planet was discursively transfigured into a terrestrial globe with Ferdinand Magellan’s circumnavigation of the Earth while attempting to search for a Western route to access spices from Southeast Asia. The world with its myriad life forms was, in the words of Heidegger, conceived and grasped as a picture in its totality thereafter.

In the Terracene, we turn to yet another scene of the Anthropocene visuality. As Salar notes, destruction stories are not all that there is to narrate. And on a personal note, it is really hard for me to address the question of terror after what’s happening over the last five months, the last 500 years. So I am tired, and I’m angry. And I will follow bell hooks and convert my anger into compost earthly matter. I’ll talk about Earth and earthly matter.

Radical in scope, Terracene holds space for other modes of planetary imagination that offer a rebuttal to the scientific technological notion of the Anthropocene. Origin stories matter. Today I want to think alongside Salar. Salar’s book begins with the following question, What is the ecological imagination of this creation story? How does it intervene in current scientific historiography, according to which we have entered the new epoch of the Anthropocene? How does engaging this story as a living knowledge system disrupt the hegemonic secular scientific worldview?

Indeed, our embattled ecological present requires new art histories aligned with other registers of thought beyond narratives that solely focus on the global history of post 1500 European imperialism that impelled the annihilation of human and non-human life on an unprecedented worldly scale. It is, I imagine, no coincidence that Salar begins Terracene with his personal retake on a creation story from the genre of Ajáib al-Makhlúqát, the Wonders of Creation, of which al-Qazwini’s work is the most famous example.

Salar tells us, “The world was once a flow that fused into a mass of rocks we knew as mountains. The mountains rested on two horns of a bull who stood on the back of a fish. The fish in turn balanced on the wings of an angel.” As Salar rightly notes, “One of the most striking aspects of this creation story is that its worldview does not revolve around the human yet the human cannot be dissociated from the long due history of ecological imperialism and climate colonialism in the Anthropocene.”

As the Indigenous epistemologist Doreen Martinez writes, “Climate colonialism forces a re-embodiment and relocation of how, why, and who is at fault who is responsible.” “Thus if one line of the Terracene takes us to a dystopian present, the ongoing world of terror, Salar writes, trapped between the double bind of neoliberal capitalism and colonization through artists, such as Diana Al-hadid, whose powerful mediation on oil is on the cover of the book, another line takes us to an eco aesthetics that can perhaps be best imagined as an aesthetics not in the enlightenment sense of a sensible cognition but through Guattari’s ethical aesthetics aegis of an ecosophy that enunciates the desires, aspirations, and optimism of living well despite catastrophes propelled by the ruthless forces of colonialism and neoliberal capitalism.”

It is this line of thought in the book that I want to foreground today, a world, as Salar writes, of earthly beings, of compost, of beings coming out of Earth, a narrative told from the perspective of Terrance, the creative multi-species inhabitants of militarized and extractive regimes who bear embodied scars of terror and who also propose and practice resilient strategies for life. While for the most part scholarship on the idea is resilience has centered around contemporary, civil, and political capacities to recover, the aesthetic imprint of imaginative practices can provide us with a lens to understand resilience as an embodied experience of living as resistance in the age of the Anthropocene.

The Terracene we learn requires that we think with ancestral knowledge. As Salar writes, “Some of those knowledges exist in ancient deities who have protected, devoured, destroyed, or delivered life disease, fires, earthquakes, floods, and cyclones. These deities appear here as creative and speculative knowledge holders.” And as Jessica Horton and Janet Berlo observe in a different context, once we take Indigenous worldviews into account, the new materialisms are no longer new.

Post-human critiques from disciplines, such as anthropology, have by now linked the geological non-life and the biological life to re-imagine the vitality of entanglements across life worlds. Along the same lines and entangled disposition to use Salar’s words, “From within art history promises to disturb the post-enlightenment foundations of the discipline that emerged from a specific Western bourgeois intellectual culture with roots in European global colonial expansionism.”

The globe, we must acknowledge, materialized in the age of the Weltbild or Heidegger’s modern world picture, think magazine. And in our pixelated age, as Gayatri Spivak wrote 20 years ago, the globe is on our computer. No one lives there. It allows us to think we control it. The planet is in the species of alterity belonging to another system yet we inhabit it on loan.

For Spivak, this global is indelibly connected to the alienation of neocolonial apparatuses that contiguously link post 1500s territorial empires to current transnational capitalism. In the wake of such long histories of global finance capitalism, Spivak proposed that alterity remains underived from us if we imagine ourselves as planetary subjects rather than global agents, planetary creatures rather than global entities. And it is no coincidence that Spivak conceived of planetary as best imagined from the pre-capitalist cultures of the planet.

In the Terracene, artists from West Asia, Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Yemen, Syria, Palestine are excavating pre-capitalist ontologies for our embattled now. For instance, the Mesopotamian deity, Huma, resurrected by the contemporary Iranian artist. There are other aspects to the book, the limits of archival retrieval, listening to the Terracene, the agency of crude oil, conceptual frameworks that will be key to current debates in art history.

But given that I have been allocated 15 minutes, I will leave you to follow these lines of thought. Neither do I want to rehearse the histories of matter, material and materiality, and imagination enunciated through images, films, intimate conversations, and archival research that Salar emphasizes. Rather as an art historian working on the early modern Indian Ocean world, I want to give a sense of how the methodologies of the book offer me and those who work in adjacent or not so adjacent regions and time periods modalities of rethinking transversal linkages between climate crisis and artistic practices, in other words, the book’s impact on current disciplinary questions.

Terracene inspired me to take a fresh look at one of the Mughal Emperor Jahangir’s political allegories where he stands on a globe shooting at the head of his enemy, Malik Ambar. I am currently writing a book on Jahangir. And for that reason, very self-interested one, I must admit that Salar’s retake on this old Islamic cosmological concept of the world fish on which the Earth rests through the intermediation of the cosmic bull intrigued me. Painted by Abu’l-Hasan in around 1620, in this instance, the cosmographic origin story shared across the islamicate Indian Ocean world that stretches from West Asia to South Asia is represented with the latest European scientific achievements, the globe, think Magellan’s circumnavigation of the world, and the concomitant creating of the world as a picture.

The emperor stands on a terrestrial globe of the kind made in Antwerp around 1600. The globe is placed in turn on the back of a naturalistic bovine with its head turned in europeanised foreshortening. And both Jehangir and the bull stand on a fish, a nature study in the manner of Giorgio Liberale from Udine.

Art historians have read the celebrated painting as a visual testament to Western European science being appropriated outside Europe as a form of coeval global modernity or even a remaking of Western scientificism, science gone native, so as to speak. Even as such readings offer a productive history of global flows and modernities beyond the West, the overdetermined emphasis on scientific rationality in scholarship on this painting takes me to Spivak.

The globe is on our computer. No one lives there. It allows us to think we can control it. The planet is in the species of alterity belonging to another system and yet we inhabit it on loan. What does it mean to be a planetary subject rather than a global agent, a planetary creature rather than a global entity? I have been wrestling with this question of the species of alterity.

In the wake of totalizing accounts of global techno aesthetic connectedness fueled by a World economic order that has become the de facto story of our species level modernity or so it is claimed, Salar’s Terracene offers an art history that obscures the boundaries between art and the natural environment between animate being and inanimate matter. Salar’s propositions on the vitality of matter and material in a catastrophic time when environmental precarity has etched its mark on every aspect of life, I would argue, opens new passages for art histories, passages that take seriously intellectual traditions outside of post-enlightenment Western Europe where the fuzziness of human, non-human assemblages were commonplace.

And that is only one aspect of the Terracene. I invite you to explore the many other passages the book offers to provincialize the [INAUDIBLE] hyper-real Europe, that Europe, reified and celebrated in the phenomenal world of everyday relations of power as the scene of the birth of the modern. Thank you.

[APPLAUSE]

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] So Mayanthi, Mayanthi Fernando who is here from Santa Cruz who came for this event is Associate Professor of anthropology at UC Santa Cruz, where she’s also provost of the Kresge College, a living learning community for undergraduate students. Her research interest include Islam and secularism, human, non-human entanglements, and more than secular multispecies ecologies, histories of the body, liberalism and the law, and gender and sexuality. Her first book, the Republic Unsettled, Muslim French and the Contradictions of Secularism Duke University Press 2014 examined the intersection of religion and politics in France, alternating between an analysis of Muslim, French politics, ethics, and social life and the contradictions of French cellularity laicité that this new Muslim subjectivity reflects and refracts.

She is currently working on a second book titled Beyond the Anthropocene Secular on the imbrication of cellularity in the Anthropocene and how secular moderns might conceptualize and cultivate multispecies world making otherwise. She has held residential fellowship at the Institute for Advanced Studies in Princeton and the School of advanced studies in Santa Fe. And she has published in a wide array of academic journals in non-academic venues. So thank you. And I leave this to you.

[APPLAUSE]

[MAYANTHI FERNANDO] So first let me thank Salar, Julie, and Charles for this invitation to comment on Salar’s wonderful book Terracene, A Crude Aesthetics. It is a particular pleasure for me because I first met Salar and encountered this work many years ago at the Center for Cultural studies at UC Santa Cruz. And one of the great pleasures of being a scholar, because it’s certainly not the salary, one of the great pleasures of being a scholar truly is witnessing a fellow scholar’s project move from its initial stages to book form. So I’m really thrilled to be here commenting on Salar’s work in final form.

Though final form is perhaps a misnomer since one of the things that Salar does so beautifully in this book is open up rather than definitively answer a set of important questions. What exactly is the Anthropocene? And what political work is that term doing? To what or whom does Anthropos refer? How might we imagine the human differently more capaciously? Or is the human too racially overdetermined a concept species? With what new terms should we reimagine and remake the world? And what about the scene in Anthropocene? How do we better account for and listen to the existence in this scene? This geological time space, the terrains of this playing on cene, C-E-N-E, and scene, S-C-E-N-E, might we approach the Anthropocene as a work of art as well as of history.

What would an aesthetic approach to the Anthropocene look like? Or importantly, since one of Salar;s key contributions is to emphasize the sensory, what would an aesthetic approach to the Anthropocene, one that accounted for terrains, humans, and more than humans, too, what would an account– sorry, what would an aesthetic approach to the Anthropocene feel like?

Salar has already laid out the book’s major interventions and arguments. So what I’m going to do in my comments is pick up a few threads to riff on. I’m inspired here by Salar’s own poetic imagination and the connections made across objects, theories, and histories. So I want to start where Salar started with that creation story from the 13th century Islamic text known in English as wonders of creation and oddities of existence.

And this is a quote from the manuscripts in English. “The world was once a flow that fused onto a mass of rocks we know as mountains. The mountains rested on the two horns of a bull who stood on the back of a fish. The fish in turn balanced on the wings of an angel.” What is the purchase of opening with that particular story? Mameni notes that creation stories like this rupture linear time and confront our attachment to logical schemas according to which historiography is organized.

This creation story thereby opens a path for Mameni’s subsequent discussion of the deep time of oil and with it a temporal imagination that exceeds the temporality of the human of Anthropos. Creation stories like this also compel us, Mameni continues, to contemplate our ongoing existence in relation to species and environments they conjure. And in so doing, these stories interrupt the hegemonic, secular, scientific worldview of the Anthropocene without offering in its place a comprehensive, totalizing narrative.

But why begin with this particular story drawn from the Islamic world? Mameni notes that the book engages numerous disqualified sites of knowledge as relevant to the environmental discourses of the Anthropocene. And obviously, there is also Salar’s own history with stories like this. But I think opening this way with this story from this religious tradition from the Islamic tradition also does profound and important political work. After all, Islam is not usually understood as good to think with by most secular moderns, including in the academy.

Many academics writing about the Anthropocene and the more than human tend to see the world’s monotheisms, and especially Islam as a sterile dead end. And I’m constantly struck by the casual Islamophobia and some of this work. And they have turned instead to indigenous ontologies as our best hope out of the Anthropocene. This is not in and of itself a problem. As Mameni also shows, indigenous traditions and indigenous scholarship offer valuable critiques of the Anthropocene and vital modes of thinking and being differently.

But in the West, when certain others are designated as saviors, it usually means others are designated as monsters and terrorists. Michel-Rolph Trouillot called this duality the West’s Janus-faced other. And it has a long history, starting with Jesuit priest Bartolomé de Las Casas’s distinction between Indians to be saved and Moors already damned. These distinctions have little to do with the actual populations interpolated into this geography of imagination, but they have endured.

In contrast, Mameni refuses this Janus-faced other. In fact, critically turns those two sides– the fantastical noble savage and the phantasmagoric terrorist, turns these two sides to face one another, to speak to one another as more than just fantasy and phantasmagoria. Mameni does this by tacking back and forth in the book between Islamic, pre-Islamic, and indigenous ontoepistemologies to help us think the world anew. Again, in this day and age, this is an incredibly important, critical, analytical move.

Let me return to the creation story of the world held up by bull, held up by fish, held up by an angel. As Mameni writes, and I quote, “One of the most striking aspects of this creation story is that its worldview does not revolve around the human. In fact– and I’m still quoting– the counterintuitive order in which the world is stacked in this creation story also asks us to contemplate the limits of rational thought and by extension human mastery over the workings of the cosmos. This creation story refutes the humans’ ability to fully grasp the world through verifiable knowledge. Instead, it appeals to our poetic, speculative, imaginative intelligence through which we can grasp what is known about the world,” unquote.

This creation story and Mameni’s reading of it and also Mameni’s insistence that we must attend to the sensory aspects of what it is to be a Terran reminded me of another story told by another group of Muslim philosophers, the Ikhwan al-Safa or brethren of purity, a group of 10th century Muslim philosophers. The Ikhwan authored a 52-volume encyclopedia on the mathematical, natural, and psychological sciences that included an epistle, the longest, called the case of the animals versus man before the king of the jinn, in which animals contest humans claims to mastery over them in the court of the jinn.

The Ikhwan, ventriloquizing the animals, spend a great deal of time on animals distinct physical form and sensory capacities. The epistles fourth chapter called on the acute sense of the animals holds that there are many animals with finer senses and sharper discrimination than humans, such as the camel who finds his footing on the most punishing and treacherous pathways in the dark of night. And I’m quoting here, “or ewes who can birth multiple lambs in one night or those lambs who each finds its way to its dam without any doubt by the mother or confusion by the young in contrast to humans, say, the animals, for whom a month or two or more must pass before they can distinguish their own mother from their sister.”

Other chapters go into great detail about the physical form of various creatures, like the long tusks and great bulk of the elephant or the delicate wings and tiny proboscis of the gnat. Yasuda, leader of the bees, carefully outlines the intricate and ingenious body and wonders form of his species which enable them to build dwellings more aptly and skillfully than your, i.e., your humans artisans better and more ingeniously than your builders and architects. And different animals rely on different senses for their well-being. And I quote, “Some like hawks and eagles rely on their keen vision and powerful flight. Others like ants, dung beetles, and scarabs have a powerful sense of smell. Others are led to their needs by their sense of hearing as are the vultures. And some are guided by their sense of taste as are fish and other aquatic animals.”

In arguing their case, the animals also insist that although their every movement is worship and praise of God, humans do not understand much of what animals do or say. At one point, the nightingale exclaims, and I quote, “We praise, sanctify, celebrate, and exalt God morning and evening although these humans do not comprehend our songs of praise.”

Earlier in the trial, the parrot has made a similar point. If you could follow the discourse of the birds, they say to the humans, the anthems of the swarming creatures, the hymns of the crawling creatures, the hosannas of the beasts, the meditative murmur of the cricket and treaty of the frog, admonitions of the bulbul, homilies of the larks, the sand grouse lauds and the crane celebrations, the cock’s call to worship, the poetry doves utter in their cooing and their soothsaying, and the soothsaying ravens and their croaking, you would realize that among these throngs are orators and eloquent speakers, theologians, preachers, admonishers, and diviners just as there are among the sons of Adam.

Why can’t humans follow the discourse of the birds, the anthems of the swarming creatures, the hymns of the crawling creatures and so on? Because humans, too, have very specific sensory capacities and incapacities as underscored by Islamic scholar Muhammad Assad. In the message of the Quran, Assad discusses the jinn, explaining that the term jinn signifies beings that are concealed from man’s senses, i.e., things beings or forces which cannot normally be perceived by man but have nevertheless an objective reality of their own. Assad, like the Ikhwan, emphasizes human’s perceptual incapacities and our limited knowledge as humans in accessing the cosmos and its many worlds. And in so doing, he defines the human as an ontoepistomological limit. Our inability to know our epistemological threshold is an effect of our bodies, our biophysical makeup or ontology as Homo sapiens.

So I want to think Mameni alongside Assad and the Ikhwan with regard to Mameni’s emphasis on the sensory aspects of the Anthropocene and how we might cultivate a post Anthropocene ethics and politics for the amalgamations of humans and other than humans inhabiting toxic and militarized wastelands. “Knowing the Anthropocene essentially, Mameni continues, would require sensing ourselves as part of a multispecies environment across large stretches of time. Such an experience is difficult to fathom,” unquote. And yet there are many parts of the book when such a sensing across species in ways that exceed what we have come to think of as human sensory capacity comes into view.

In fact, one of the most fascinating aspects of Terracene is how Mameni attends to the soundscapes and feltscapes of the Anthropocene where the sound of aerial bombardment travels through the gut bypassing the ear completely where sense organs are overloaded in war zones, punctuated by loud, screeching, buzzing, or humming sounds. Mameni mostly focuses on human sensibilities. But we might extend that frame of analysis to more than humans as well to the carrots wilting and pungent soils, the cats quivering under awnings, the goats lacking calcium, as Mameni describes in another chapter, the interspecies experiences of land and aerial bombardment of the Iran-Iraq War.

In another chapter on Fatima Al Qadiri album Desert Strike, Mameni wonders if what the artist has composed is the sounds of the Terracene and notes that, quote, “Her work moves our bodies in vibrations the way an earthquake would,” unquote. Vibration, of course, is how many creatures sense the world and their way in it. I wonder too whether the sensory overload of trauma that Mameni describes by exceeding the capacities of the five senses of secular modernity might bring us closer to the heightened and even synesthetic capacities of many of our non-human cohabitants.

Mameni then seems to be gesturing to a embodied interspecies kinship of feeling with that the Anthropocene perhaps inadvertently produces. At the same time, as Assad and the Ikhwan insist, our bodies and senses are constitutive of ontoepistemological limit as humans. I read Mameni’s emphasis on bodies, vulnerable porous bodies in a similar vein as both possibility and limit and as part and parcel of Mameni’s insistence akin to Assad’s and the Ikhwan’s on the limitations of what it means to be human. All three refuse human mastery as both an ontological reality and an ethical political stance as the only way forward to live ethically in the cosmos.

Given the very different disciplinary traditions these three figures across time, the Ikhwan, Assad, and Mameni– given the very different disciplinary traditions of these three figures across time, I want to end with a question to Salar about how to approach the secular more robustly and richly as analysts. And this is a very selfish question because it’s one I’m really struggling with as I write the second book.

What Salar points to is how cellularity and the Anthropocene are imbricated. And as Stefania noted, I call it the Anthropocene secular in the book I’m currently finishing or not finishing. The Anthropocene secular is premised on a fantasy of human mastery over nature, time, death, bodies, and so on. This is the secular in its major keys, let’s say. And Salar’s analysis of the Anthropocene is both discourse and practice critically analyzes these major keys.

But what about the secular in its minor keys, the moments, spaces, and sensibilities that do not adhere to secularities, distinctions, between science and superstition, mind and body, and so on? The reason I ask is that most of us in this room are secular moderns. How could we not be? And yet, I imagine, that many of us are like Salar compelled intellectually and effectively by the non secular tradition Salar is taking up to imagine the world anew. Our bodies, animal bodies, as they are, are vulnerable to the vibration of earthquakes, bombs, and other sonic modalities of destruction, creation, and communication.

As Salar writes, that first creation story about the mountain on the bull, on the fish, on the angel appeals to our poetic, speculative, and imaginative intelligence. I suppose I’m asking about secularity as a substrate of ethical sensibilities, attitudes, and dispositions that are distinct from the scientific secularism of Crewdson and the like. Minor more dissonant dispositions and sensibilities that remain open to the poetic, the speculative, the imaginative.

I don’t mean this as an apologetics– #notallsecularmoderns– rather to think analytically about how the secular is constituted by both major and minor keys. And to better attend to these minor keys is to hold open the possibility– as Salar does in this book– to hold open the possibility of finding common cause across a diverse range of struggles religious, secular, non-secular, asecular that could usher in more generous, more ethical modes of interspecies cohabitation. Thank you. And thank you to Salar for this amazing book.

[APPLAUSE]

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] It’s yours. Now this is– now, I’m going to invite Salar to respond or to add whatever he wants to add. And then we’ll decide.

[SALAR MAMENI] And then we’ll decide, OK. Thank you so much. Such rich responses. It’s really incredible. So I think I’m going to start by not answering but engaging Mayanthi your question around the secular.

[INAUDIBLE].

Yes. I think so. So how to approach–

Not too much? Yeah, OK.

That’s fine? OK. So how to approach the secular more robustly. So I think, for me, the first way that I would think about this question, obviously not answering it but the first way of engaging with the question is to think about famously religion as a category is the invention of secularism. And so that dichotomy between the religious and the secular religious benefits the secular to define itself as the secular.

And recently, I’m going down some rabbit holes, and I’m reading people who were writing around the Islamic Revolution and who were thinking about what it meant to engage Islam in the ’60s and the ’70s at a moment when Islam was totally discredited as a possible thought system to engage. And some of the proposals that I’m reading are questions around how we might think humanism, so liberal humanism, as a project that comes out of Greek modes of thinking gods.

So liberal humanism takes up a particular relationship between the gods, Greek gods, and the human as defined in polytheistic modes of thinking. And so the person I’m reading is talking about how within the Greek theology, the gods are forces of nature and by definition, antagonistic towards the human. And so liberty, this idea of liberalism, freedom, comes out of getting the gods off your back and becoming independent and so on.

And so there’s a particular way of thinking the theos, the god that creates the antagonist human who is trying to become liberated. And that is what remains with us in terms of liberal humanism in terms of the materialism of secular thought. And so this person is proposing that Islam does something distinctly different in that there is no original sin in the way that Christianity takes up from Greek thought. But what Islam does is to– I mean, so there are so many other ways of thinking about this but to allow the human to build different relationships with “the god.” So it’s not necessarily an antagonistic relationship. And so what does it mean to take on that responsibility?

And alongside that, I’m reading Anna Gaid who writes about ecology and Islam. And she talks about passages from the Quran where the mountains are offered to take care of the world. The other entities are offered that by God. And the mountains say, this is too much. I’m not doing this. The mountains are like, this is actually a huge responsibility. And so the human is the foolish one who says, OK, maybe I’ll do this.

So I think, for me, as someone who was more of a vernacular Muslim and now is trying to be more of an educated Muslim, one of the takeaways for me always from Islamic thought was the limitation of the human, so the fact that rational thought only takes you so far. And so this hubris of the human, I think, inherently for me is not within Islamic thought, which– yeah, so I guess, there might have been different kinds of interpretation of that over the years.

So maybe I don’t know how to segue that into Sugata’s really wonderful reading of the book. But one thing that you said that really stuck with me was this idea of the resilience of the living. And so at this moment, for the terror and for the non-human for the amalgamation of multispecies beings that are deemed terrorists, living is an act of resistance, which is food for thought. It makes me think about how we define living, how we define resistance, how we are, of course, the liberal humanist horror when it

comes to–

–active resistance to give up life–

–are basically based on this redefinition of what it means to be a living organism. The continuity between living and non-living, these are some of the things I talk about in the book, I think, in relation to Sansour’s work and her reading of that gray area or the rethinking of what it means to be a living being. So, yeah, should I ask questions?

No, I–

If you have questions–

If you have questions, you should ask questions. Otherwise [INAUDIBLE].

[SALAR MAMENI] Let me think about questions.

And I will take that privilege before [INAUDIBLE].

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] I wanted to go back to something you said when you said I hope someone is going to speak about the sublime. And rather than speaking about the sublime, it’s in the part of the book, which is more precisely about the crude aesthetics. And on the question of what might be an aesthetic, which is not fascist, is if I can go back to what Benjamin was citing, from Benjamin at the beginning, which you cite at the beginning of this part, and ask you to say a little bit more about this because it is a thin line.

You talked about visions when you were speaking. And yet the visions that you’re talking about are visions that are not visions that could be understood in the terms of the Kantian Sublime because you say in the book, that the Kantian Sublime is an approach to aesthetics that is calming or that inscribes the possibility of a distance, which eventually would lead to the position of the viewer of the one who experienced or who has an aesthetic experience in terms of contemplation.

And you are not speaking of an aesthetics of contemplation. And you are not even using the word resistance. You’re not using the word resilience. You’re not using any of those words. You are speaking about a being impressed in the sense– I mean, not just in the metaphorical sense, in the literal sense of impression by events. And that’s how you go to trauma. You go to beyond the pleasure principle in Freud. And you go with Freud and beyond Freud in asking the question of what does it mean to be invaded by sensory experience that it is overwhelming and that makes it impossible to think. But then you also want to say that beyond thinking, there is something else, which is not the sublime. And so if you can tell us more.

It has to do with oil. It has to do with dissolution. It has to do with form and distortion and deformation. And it has to do with the creation myth. It has to do with creation. So tell us more.

[SALAR MAMENI] Yeah, thank you. Yeah, I mean, when you think about aesthetics so often there are these available concepts that come from enlightenment aesthetic theory. So sublime was or is a concept that is everywhere in the Anthropocene literature because it speaks to that experience of awe. And so the Anthropocene is a disastrous globe. And so you in awe. And so that’s the concept that’s used often to describe the Anthropocene.

Weirdly, it’s also the concept that’s used to describe war. So a lot of the literature I cited in the book talk about 9/11 as a sublime moment. And so I found that to be extremely problematic. And it assumed a particular viewer, not– it wasn’t just useless for me to work with because it was within the humanist and anthropocentric mode of thought, but it was also thinking of a very particular– well, I guess, yeah, a particular kind of human who could stand at a distance and not be affected by the disaster that was happening.

And so for me, I wanted to theorize an engulfment and potential destruction by the event, so what happens in those moments. And so I think both of you actually offered us these alternatives, you talking about anger turning one into thinking with dust and with mulch perhaps. And you’re talking about the limits of the five senses and how the five senses is itself that kind of a construction. So I think at the time, I was really struggling with how to do that. But once I got over it, I– I feel like there is so much possibility for thinking outside of the enlightenment discourse of aesthetics. And I know you do this kind of work.

As you know, I read that section of your book where you talk about the jinn over and over again when I was writing about Morrison’s work because there’s something about these kinds of entities, such as the jinn, that put pressure on what it means to limit the sensory to the visible world. And so it forgets about many other modes of being the ontology of what we might call a human that has more to it than just the material world. And that’s another Islamic cosmological worldview that I thought was important. Should we open?

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] Yes, we should open. It’s not just– it in such a way that you become– So now I’m going to take questions, comments. Comments, if you want to make comments, you can also make comments. It doesn’t have to be a question and for the three of them. And so please-

How much time do we have?

We have about half– 20 minutes.

Yeah, but [INAUDIBLE].

OK, we’re over.

Yeah, it wasn’t 36?

No, it goes until 5:30. So we– I mean, obviously, if you have to go, you have to go. But we’ll close out in about 10 minutes just because that’s the sane way to do it.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] First of all, congratulations on this amazing book. And it’s so wonderful to celebrate with you. And I had a question about your methodology and how it relates to the thematics of the book that you’re trying to work through. I was struck by you were saying something that really resonates with me, too.

You’re trying to write a book not about writing about art or writing about artists, but to write with them or to think with them. So were you thinking of your relationality as a critic with art and artists in parallel and related ways with the rethinking of ontologies and relations in the rest of the material here between the human and the non-human? Is there like– if you’re moving towards a human unexceptionalist ontology, here are– you also simultaneously moving toward a decentralizing of the critic, too. As part of that project of the humanist perspective, the critical perspective, how are those two things linked for you?

[SALAR MAMENI] Yeah, thank you, Long, for the question. Yeah, absolutely. I think being the objective observer of anything or being– sometimes I talk to students about hovering above and looking at the world from above forgetting that you might fall. So having that perspective that’s holistic, I think, never served my project, and it was not something– obviously, feminist scholars, queer scholars do this.

But in terms of art history in particular, I really didn’t feel like I had too many methods for not doing the kind of thing where you write about art. So that was a real struggle. How do you not do that outside of doing the anthropological version of it where you interview your artists and you show that dialogue? So I think what I ended up thinking was– what I’m providing is a theory of a particular shared experience that is not homogeneous.

So there are aspects of these artworks that are speaking to the same situation that I found perhaps myself in or I want to think with. And so then I gravitated towards those moments. And I think a part of it was also thinking about my selection of the works. What kind of curatorial process goes into selecting not just artworks but also your citational practice? And who are the scholars you think with and, et cetera? And so all of that required that kind of a perspective where you’re thinking of yourself as one amongst many.

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] I think what we can do now maybe is taking a few questions, and then you will just respond to a group of questions.

And for the panelists, too.

Yeah, or from the panelists as well. Oh, for the panelists, yes.

It’s OK. You’re the star.

Yes, please.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Hi. Thank you so much for speaking. OK, thank you. I guess I have a question about the variations in the creation stories based off of the images that we saw. So I’m curious whether the order of all of the different components are– is it static? Are there different versions of the creation story that are floating around? Is this the first time that you saw these particular orders of the creation story? Yeah, I’m curious about the variation between those images and how you’re thinking about that. Yeah, thank you.

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] Are there are other comments so that– as I say in my class, we have very few minutes. So, yes.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] One other little thing out, Sugata’s list of all of the scenes from earlier– yeah, I guess, maybe it’s almost a question to the entire room about what– is it now that scene becomes synonym for thinking ecologically and then we attach capital? Or is the scene the same thing as a suffix in all of these? Yeah, I just start to wonder about the proliferation really.

But not everyone’s done the reading, right.

Yes, it’s true. It’s true.

Yes.

And we just have a few minutes, so we’ll just maybe take these two.

I didn’t want to silence anyone.

[SALAR MAMENI] So with these ones– both of you have seen these two. Yes, there are many other variations. And you can already see that. I think we saw three. And all three are different. I like that. I think there’s something really interesting about that. And when I was writing my own creation story at the beginning, I did my own version of it, my own translation of it because it’s a living story. And so I think living stories lend themselves to variation. And so it’s not a fixed idea.

And so with Jahangir’s, I think that’s the first one I ever saw. And with that one, of course, the emperor–

Yeah.

–the emperor is standing on top of the globe. So he’s actually creating a anthropocentric version of something that was not anthropocentric to begin with. So I think–

He becomes the angle.

He becomes the angel. Do you want to say more about that?

[SUGATA RAY] Therefore, I think what Salar’s work does is opens up this question because when we think of imperial systems, we think it’s around the figure of the ruler, the emperor, monarch, or whoever. But when I read this, and I read go back to that, it opens up ways of thinking alterity. And I think that’s the productive aspect of this creative myth that it’s unlike things that are fixed once, they are written. Cultures in pre-modern cultures are circulated. And even contemporary culture, it circulates across.

And things change. Translations happen. Different iterations happen. And that gives it the flexibility to have different meanings, whether it’s– and you see it across. You see it in Southeast Asia. You see it in Central Asia. You see it– so, yeah, so I think that’s the creative part. And I think what Salar does is opens up a way of thinking about the Terracene in that way provincializing the figure of the emperor as well.

[INAUDIBLE].

Did you want to say something about it?

Me? So I think all of us are trying to think about the scene through two words. One is the cene as the period, the Anthropocene, the Holocene. And the other word is the scene as S-C-N-E. That’s what we were after, the scene. So I was talking about the scene as a space where theater happens. So if you look at the definitions, everyone is OK with the C-E-N-E. And everyone wants to change the first part of it. So whether it’s the white supremacy or– comes up with crazy ideas– or the Anthropos, or–

Yeah, but I think what is important also for this is to complicate the scene, not just the agent here, the agent, whether it’s the white man, or whether it’s colonialism, or whether it’s climate change. So all of these assume that the scene is universal. And I think that’s the interesting part about, again, going back to this book is questioning of where is the scene of the Anthropocene. And what does that mean to think about the scene of that? [INAUDIBLE]

[SALAR MAMENI] Why am I answering your questions? Well, and I think– sorry, where are you–

No, no. Go ahead.

I think most of the coinages probably other than Haraway’s thylacine think about the perpetuator of climate change, so capitalism, et cetera. So I think this one does both. But I felt like it was also important to think about this new era, this new geological era from below and not to always superimpose the Anthropos by another name at that beginning.

[MAYANTHI FERNANDO] And I think the other thing you can go back to some of those, the angel on the bull on the– that whole thing is that what you also see there with the disappearance of the human or the lack of appearance of the human, a lot of these kinds of creation stories, I don’t know, call them mythological– whatever you want to call them, also presuppose that these non-humans have relationships with one another that are imperceptible to the human.

And that, I think, is also really interesting to think with alongside the concept of the scene because, again– and I think this is what this book really does is try to– what does it mean to think from below? And it also means that we are not part of many of these scenes. And so what is that Then how do we begin to think about that? I think that there are interesting ways in which those two questions are actually linked. And I think your book just does– what I love about it is that it really does take humans also as bodies in a really profound and fundamental way. So what are you?

Yeah, yeah. One more, Allen.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah, I was curious about whether the scene– and looking at the images that you’ve all been showing, whether the scene is cosmology, so the cosmic or the universe? And I’m struck with these images of the Christian renditions of these that the Cardinal points– the missing one is the lion, which is Leo, Saint Mark. The fish is Pisces. The bull is Taurus. And so they’re all different apostles who represent the Cardinal points. And the angel is Matthew, so those correlations and so these mystic traditions, I guess, across different religions and different recreations of scenes as cosmologies.

This is the last time, and then we’re done.

[SUGATA RAY] So I think what the interesting part here– yeah, the interesting part I’ll just add very quickly with Salar’s point is that– so what it does is that you’re right. I mean, it’s a shared tradition. It’s a shared tradition in terms of either whether you go about the text or even actual live practices across, let’s say, what is called the Middle East, what is called South Asia, what is Africa, where you have these shared connectivity. But I think, which also goes back to your point, it’s the question of capital.

I mean, that is that red line that creates the Anthropocene in that sense. And I would also like, to your question, would add bring in the point of secularism is also a product of capital formation. So how do you then Anthropocene? Of course, the formation of capital.

So you have Christian. And most scholars would say that medieval cosmography– Heidegger would also say that– medieval cosmography is whether it’s Christian, Islamic, Hindu, Buddhist have these potential that then get reduced to the world as a picture, precisely with imperialism. So I think the point is, Where do you draw the line in terms of the loss of our gods and the creation of the world as a grid? And that’s a secular capital conjoining as well.

Yes, although I wouldn’t– I mean–

I don’t know, yeah.

To be continued.

To be continued.

So I’m just–

OK, on that note,

[STEFANIA PANDOLFO] We’ll be continued. It will be continued.

[APPLAUSE]

 

[MUSIC PLAYING]

 

Understanding AI: Humanities x Social Sciences x Technology

(A recursive figure created by GPT-4 from Dąbkowski & Beguš 2023)

While advances in the performance of AI models have seen enormous successes, a profound understanding of how learning happens inside the models remains to be thoroughly explored. Understanding how AI learns has the potential to help us gain novel insights in science, technology, and other fields, as well as to observe novel causal relationships in various types of data. Interpreting the internal workings of AI models can also shed light on how the human mind works and how we are similar to and different from machines. The answers to these questions have highly consequential implications across disciplines, which is why it is imperative for scholars from a variety of fields to come together and collaborate.

On March 6, 2024, Social Science Matrix hosted a symposium focused on understanding and interpreting AI, an important new frontier in AI research. At the symposium, speakers identified immediate challenges in AI interpretability and explored how the humanities, social sciences, and the tech world can join forces in this highly consequential research. The event was organized by Gašper Beguš, a 2022-2023 Social Science Matrix Faculty Fellow.

Watch the video above or on YouTube.

Panelists

 

Lecture

Understanding Land-based Psychological Trauma in Light of Epistemic Justice

Recorded on February 8, 2024, this video features a lecture by Dr. Garret Barnwell, South African clinical psychologist and community psychology practitioner. The talk was moderated and coordinated by Andrew Wooyoung Kim, Assistant Professor of Biological Anthropology at UC Berkeley.

Listen to the talk as a podcast through the player below, or on Google Podcasts or Apple Podcasts.

Abstract

The places we live are inseparably connected to who we are. Our relationship with these spaces we come into being through is somewhat foundational to our knowing and being in the world. They shape who we are, and we, in so many ways, shape them, inscribing them with personal meanings and finding social coordinates in them.

In this talk, Barnwell uses vignettes to describe how this takes place, emphasizing that these bonds are most evidently seen when threatened. Basing his insights on several years of clinical experience and critical psychology theory, he draws attention to how people’s psychological relationship to place is threatened through grievous acts of epistemic injustices — violence directed at knowledge and speech. These forms of epistemic injustice include the silencing, misrecognition, threats, and killings of land defenders, as well as systematized land dispossession in the name of capitalist expansion and mining. Decolonial and critical psychologies teach us that the language we come into being, which privileges certain politics, ways of knowing and being in the world in relation to such places, has a bearing on subjectivity — what can be said and what is unsayable, and, thus, unactionable.

He describes how such forms of epistemic violence threaten these psychological bonds and produce psychological trauma. Around the world in these extractive zones, Indigenous and land-based resurgent movements play a critical role in defending against epistemic injustices for the flourishing of life. In conclusion, Barnwell draws attention to how such resurgent groups use different forms of land dialogues and speech as integral parts of community resistance and psychological healing.

About the Speaker

Dr. Garret Barnwell is a clinical psychologist working as a psychotherapist and community psychology practitioner. He is most interested in different forms of accompaniment and resistance to extractivism for the flourishing of all life. Barnwell was an expert on the landmark youth-led #cancelcoal climate case launched against the South African government’s plans for new coal-fired power. He is also a member of the American Psychological Association’s Climate Change Advisory Group. Barnwell’s writing includes several expert reports, special issues, and a book, Terrapsychology: Further Inquiry Into Self, Place and Planet (with Prof Craig Chalquist). He is a research associate at the University of Johannesburg in South Africa.

Transcript

[ANDY KIM] Good afternoon, everyone. My name is Andy Kim. I’m an Assistant Professor in the Department of Anthropology here at UC, Berkeley, and also an honorary researcher at the University of the Witwatersrand in Johannesburg, South Africa. And I would like to welcome you to today’s event. Thank you so much for joining.

Today, we have a fantastic speaker, Dr. Garrett Barnwell. And the title of his presentation is Understanding Land-based Psychological Trauma in Light of Epistemic Justice. So I’m also a faculty fellow here for the 2023-2024 academic school year. And I’ve organized both this event and a lecture that will be coming up on March 7, actually my birthday for Dr. Dana-Ain Davis coming from CUNY, New York.

Before I introduce today’s speaker, I just want to highlight a few other events that will be coming up at the Matrix. First, on February 15 is an event called Surveillance and Privacy in a Biometric World, which will take place next Thursday from 4:00 to 5:30. We have a lecture on Black Success and White Backlash by Sociologist Elijah Anderson on the 20th of February. Another lecture on February 22 about Included-Variable Bias and Discrimination by Sharad Goel, Professor of Public Policy. And all these events are online, as well as, other events will be coming up and information on the Matrix website.

So it is now my pleasure to introduce today’s speaker. So Dr. Garrett Barnwell is a Clinical Psychologist working as a Psychotherapist and Community Psychology Practitioner. He’s most interested in different forms of accompaniment and resistance to extractivism for the flourishing of all life. Barnwell was an expert on the landmark youth led hashtag, #CancelCoalClimateCase launched against the South African Government’s plan for new coal-fired power.

He is also a member of the American Psychological Association’s Climate Change advisory group. Barnwell’s writings include several expert reports, special issues, and a book called Terrapsychology, Further Inquiry into Self, Place, and Planet co-published with Professor Craig Chalquist. And he is currently a research associate at the University of Johannesburg in South Africa.

And I just want to remind our online participants to feel free to ask questions throughout the talk and after the talk using the Zoom’s Q&A function. And please welcome me in– please join me in welcoming Dr. Barnwell.

[GARRET BARNWELL] Thanks very much, Andy. And also, thanks for everyone that’s here and the invite, as well as, everyone that’s online. And I’m going to jump straight into it. And if you’ve got questions, I’d love to also hear what’s your thinking behind it. I’m also trying to make sense of some of what I’ll speak about today and any thoughts, ideas, or comments, there’s space to really explore and speak about what interests you.

So what I’m going to do is I’m going to go through a bit of my thinking with you today. So the world is at a dangerous crossroads. Our dependence on the extractive resources is pushing the Earth to a new hotter and more barren reality. Climate change is more severe and widespread than previously expected. Disasters such as mass species dials, droughts, and wildfires are occurring at unprecedented levels. Most of the world’s ecosystems upon which life depends have been irreparably harmed.

Nearly 3/4 of the Earth’s surface has been exposed to some form of land degradation according to the IPCC’s 2019 publication on land– sorry, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. This destruction is inseparable from a demand for resources that is unsustainable on the Earth which cannot keep pace, lacking the ability to replenish itself annually. In fact, at the moment, it would take almost two earths at this time to do so.

According to the IPCC, climate-related devastation is expected to worsen dramatically over the next two decades. Around the world people, particularly Indigenous land and environmental defenders, and fenceline communities are resisting mining, logging, and industrial agricultural projects in life and death struggles.

These struggles play a crucial role in contesting the ecological catastrophes. Many of these land and ecological justice struggles slow the tide of capitalist extraction around the world. This is not something that’s often spoken about is actually how much do these struggles prevent as well when it comes to carbon output and also the destruction of our planet. How many projects don’t go through because of people on the frontlines of these areas around the world and their struggles.

Even though the IPCC and the IPBES, the Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services, acknowledges the significance of Indigenous ecological knowledge for constructing a viable future for humanity. They overlook the extractive conflicts happening in these areas that threaten our planet’s survival.

There’s a devastating cost. The organization Global Witness has been tracking threats against land and environmental defenders since 2012. In just over a decade, more than 1,910 people who were standing up for land and environmental justice issues have been killed.

Out of these at least, 1,390 defenders lost their lives after the signing of the Paris Agreement in 2015. Global Witness and academics such as Mary Manton and Philip Lyon explain with every death in communities resisting extractive industries, there are countless other threats. We see this all around the world in South Africa in particular as well, physical violence, death threats, strategic litigation against public participation. And if anyone wants to ask afterwards, I’ve got very particular examples in the work that I’m doing but also with people that I’m very close to me that have experienced significant threats.

The decolonial theorist Walter Mignolo argues that the lived experience of how coloniality is felt is essential in resisting and delinking from today’s experiences of coloniality. Coloniality is a decolonial concept rooted in Anibal Quijano’s works. Maldanado Tourists explains that coloniality refers to our colonial logic in today’s society conceives and constitutes power and knowledge.

Decolonial theorists use the term coloniality as a shorthand to refer to European Colonialism’s interrelating legacies and practices that underpin the broader arc of modernity. Most land and environmental justice struggles that I’ve encountered are also decolonial struggles and I’ll speak a bit to that today. And they seek to resist coloniality and the ecological exploitation whilst also imagining a better world in the future.

Psychology has not largely neglected such struggles and today I’d like to take the opportunity to discuss the resistance to what I speak of as place-saving, what I’ve described as the psychological process associated with harms than to place attachments, including to ancestral land, the unsettling of traditional ecological knowledge systems, intergenerational identities, and ancestral relationships to place stemming from historical land and ecological injustices in light of the epistemic turn that we see in theory.

I’ll unpack these ideas as I move along and also suggest ways in which social scientists could play a meaningful role in accompanying such struggles through the practice of witnessing and I’ll offer some personal examples.

I believe that social sciences, including here in psychology, can support the transition towards a pluriversal world that centers epistemic justice, an active stance that affirms different ways of knowing and being in the world, and which seeks to build a world free from extractive violence that deems other ways of knowing and being in the world a threat to be annihilated.

Now I’ve drawn a bit of my psychoanalytic background. Psychoanalyst Jacques Lacan reiterated through his works that we come into being through the language of others. He meant that as speaking beings, the meaning, symbols, and laws that structure our world are inscribed by the language of other people both in our immediate lives and society at large.

What is communicated or withheld, what is allowed or not allowed to be said influences our sense of becoming in the world and shapes our knowledge. For example, when we are born we enter into the language of our parents or our caregivers, those around us, what they name us, they desire for us and what they communicate shapes our understanding of the world and who we become.

The language is interwoven with the broader languages, the norms, the cultural meanings structuring society which Lacan calls the symbolic order. Whether our parents or caregivers recognize us through love, respect, or genuine interest determines how we relate to and enter the symbolic order, as well as, all the enigmatic messages that we encounter that are very difficult at times to translate.

And we can speak about that but including when they’re hostile messages and that difficulty of translating these messages. At these moments Lacanians assert that we encounter a choice of taking on the language of the other.

When we are younger, this choice is false though. Lacan compared it to being robbed, your money or your life. If we do not take on this language, we may not survive. For instance, we must communicate to meet our needs and to adapt to and thrive within a world already structured by language. Taking on this language can be seen as a life affirming act because if we do not, we can put ourselves in radical opposition to the symbolic order or society at large.

However, in taking on this language of the other, we undergo an alienating process where aspects of ourselves that are beyond language and at times in close attunement with more than human world can become alienated. This is because our relationship with the corporeality of the material world can never be fully articulated within language.

The language we come into being into inscribes the world with particular meanings that give us social coordinates. For example, in relationship to the more than human world, some animals are given particular privileges in the process of naming. For instance, in Western capitalist society, for instance, cows are something deemed as livestock, source of protein, dairy products, leather, and not much more than this usefulness to become a kind of product or commodity.

However, in other cultures, like in South Africa, a cow is sacred, something to be revered and representative of wealth, masculinity, and ancestral connections. We can go on with these comparisons for days. Importantly, through this process, we become split subjects whose unconscious is ordered by society’s ideals, demands, and desires. Also being alienated within this existence due to the indescribable losses we suffer, as well as, living with very complex ungraspable, unsayable aspects of our being that connect us to all life on this planet.

In her article “The Trauma of Language,” Lucy Canton describes this process as potentially traumatic as we encounter a range of enigmatic messages from society privileging certain ways of being over others that need to be translated in some meaningful way for survival.

An example I can share is from South Africa where the former colonial apartheid regime, Privileged Whites, while systemically oppressing Black people and other People of Color coming into being through apartheid as a symbolic order was violent, as it deemed Black people and People of Color a threat to be annihilated, to be materially deprived and underserved.

This was also dispossessing communities of land to gain access to mineral and agricultural riches, simultaneously, exploiting Black and Brown bodies for Labor for the Construction of a racist white society. Although in South Africa, apartheid has been dismantled, these colonial logics still operate and shape people’s encounters with extractive industries today and you’ll hear many people speak about extractive industries as the new kind of colonial outposts in the global South.

Much of the experience of land-based trauma or what I refer to as place severing is part of this larger arc of colonial capitalism. All the varying but globally networked systems of labor, financial flows, and conceptions of property that constituted colonial economies. I would just like to share an image– [CHUCKLES] –an image that represents this kind of myth.

So extractivism as a specific mindset and set of actions aimed at maximizing gains through the extraction of resources was a key facet of colonial capitalism under the rubric of modernity. Coloniality names the narrative fiction and violent rhetoric that posits that there is one progressive Euro-American-centric pathway in history.

According to this myth, following a different development path would deem such communities inferior, underdeveloped, or primitive. This is not the case but the energy behind this violent rhetoric is powerful and has threatened Indigenous peoples over centuries. This myth of progress also sanctions extractive projects without informed consent under the guise of development agendas or at worst, the militarism of just wars.

Central to the structural violence of coloniality is also the epistemic mark of the colonial deference which argues that Eurocentric knowledge, practices, and modes of being are superior to other lifeworlds deeming the latter invisible, inferior, or threat to accumulate privileges and progress.

Mignolo and Walsh write that there is named this Eurocentric logic after the locus of enunciation where it’s been spoken from, naming the territorial, institutional, economic, and linguistic locations of historical actors who believe their way of being is the only correct way of engaging with others in the more than human world.

According to Walter Mignolo, Eurocentrism is historically grounded in Christian conceptions and images of the world that claim the totality of truth and proclaim what is good and evil. There’s a kind of judgment that’s projected onto other life worlds.

For instance, in South Africa and the world over, Christian evangelizing missions facilitated colonialism’s expansion by violently unsettling Indigenous ecological knowledge and social bonds to place. Thus, Indigenous peoples’ epistemic territories where knowledge is created in relationship to place and intergenerationally constituted are devalued, diminished, or harmed.

For example, in the Limpopo province of South Africa in the Northern region, some groups of people are reconstituting their relationship to sacred sites such as forests, waterfalls, and lakes. For instance, this Lake Fundudzi is seen as a sacred site that holds so much that we can speak about afterwards.

But years of colonial and apartheid-era violence has structured relationships. So for instance, at the time of not so long ago– not so long ago, rituals were conducted at these sites. People were basically told that they couldn’t pray at these sites anymore, couldn’t conduct rituals, and that this had to be done within a church, therefore severing the relationship to these places but also creating the pathway for resource extraction in the Forestry Industry in this area.

So this connection paved the way for colonial agricultural economy being established and the epistemic mark not only on people who have relationship to these sites but these sites themselves and the associated practices caused severing took place and facilitated the expansion of logging and the forestry industry.

And I’ll provide an example, a beekeeper I spoke to offered a testimony of this experience in which he described how his family was forcibly resettled from their ancestral lands to allow for logging and also, their resistance to this. So I’ll read you the testimony now.

It’s from a beekeeper I interviewed in one of these processes of free collection. “They came and collected the soil and took it to Pretoria, the capital. They used to dig it out at different places. They then started to plow the pine trees from Macumbani to Macorani, to [INAUDIBLE] to Jieni. Further and further, the people started to work here, Macumbani, around the community. 24, 25, 26, 27, takes more than 27 years for a pine tree to be cut down. At the age of 15 to 20 years, they just come and select the beautiful ones and cut down the bad ones. At 27 years, they take them away to the factories.

I used to live here in the bush with my father and my family but we were chased away so that they could plant the pine trees. Pine trees aren’t indigenous to South Africa as well. Three times the evictions from my ancestral land were common under the apartheid regime. My father didn’t leave but all the people around us did. My father used to take the thorn trees and put the branches around the house to protect us so the White people couldn’t enter the yard.

They chased people in June, July, and August but my father never left. Each day we saw three white people coming to our yard. One day I was playing around the house, they said, where’s your father, you go call him. They said to my father, why didn’t you leave when others were leaving? His father replied, I wanted to plow the maize here. They told him that he has to go to Bapedi area where one of the other sacred sites are, which is a waterfall.

It was between 1949 and ’50, my father was angry. I was hurting inside. This used to be a beautiful place he looked out over the plantation,” the term we use in South Africa, which I know has different connotations here but I also think that there’s some similarities while we spoke.

“The cows even used to roam here eating, [INAUDIBLE] clean water, most rivers have dried up or have been contaminated by chemicals used on the plantations. We tried to remove the pines but we couldn’t. It was the South African government, the apartheid regime. When they first came, they started removing all the trees and plants. People were chased away and left their dogs and cats. People’s homes were destroyed. We tried to feed them but there were too many of them they were walking around scavenging, lost. They had to be culled.

The animals that were here also didn’t have homes. They were killed and hunted by the people who came. They, the White man, killed up to seven impalas a day, deers. During this ecocide, over 4,300 hectares of Indigenous forests were destroyed.” Many social ecologies around the world are at the frontline of this extractive worldview.

This colonizing way of being in the world is essentially a White Supremacist ideology as it seeks to disconnect people from land, dispiriting connections with the more than human world for accumulating wealth. The extractive ideology is by nature an anti-Black and anti-Indigenous epistemology. Because the Black Indigenous subject dispossessed from land is in constant struggle to retain centrality of spirituality, knowledge, power, and being as modern auditors writes.

“Thus, epistemic violence names the swarm of harm to the epistemic territory, the place of different ways of knowing it, and in turn being that is produced through coloniality,” writes also Reynaldo Vasquez.

Critical community psychologist Gorse Stephens and Christopher Son assert assert that such epistemic violence is central to the experience of psychological distress in the world today. This is not an abstract matter. Social orders driven by the logic of coloniality have historically relied on land grabs predicated upon the erasure of these historical bonds to land to ensure domination and economic exploitation.

As under colonialism, extractive proponents today still largely make the rules. They help develop weak environmental regulatory frameworks. For instance, at other times, they spearhead deals for extractive projects in the name of development and progress but that often neglects the right to participation and self-determination for affected communities.

Today, capitalism is reproduced in the same colonist racist logic that deemed much of the world’s population living on the margins expendable. This particular [INAUDIBLE] points of extraction where United Nations Special Rapporteur David Boyd says, “communities are transformed into sacrifice zones where environmental degradation, pollution, and unjust social arrangements pose extreme threats to well-being.”

Psychology has played a perverse role in the broader process of conceptualizing such distress. For instance, in using terms such as climate anxiety or eco-anxiety to describe ecological distress, mainstream psychology risks pathologizing and individualizing distress resulting from the violence of capitalism and its underpinning colonial logic.

Historically, in placing the responsibility for distress on an individual’s intrapsychic reality or at most, on the family, psychology conceals how capitalism operates and the society’s societal suffering at large. It also disconnects the consumer from sites of struggle or the fact that we consume suffering to draw on an idea from Reynaldo Vasquez. Yet suffering does not circulate through our lives and relationships as some passive response to anxieties about these crises.

Rather, these anxieties arise from my experience with alienation, marginalization, and exclusion in society that stems from ways of privileging capitalism, including extractivism, that destroys ways of life and societal bonds.

Today, although most colonial administrations have been dismantled, extractivism remains pervasive. Whether enacted through states or corporations they support, life within this logic, as Vandana Shiva explains, is treated like an open access system to be exploited without consent where local ways of being in the world, such as the sense of community, as well as, sovereignty and public participation are not only undermined but seen as critical points to exert power.

As a consequence, civic space is critically endangered. Civic space is defined as the ability to organize, communicate, and participate meaningfully without hindrance or threat of harm. Capitalism presents a similar choice in the establishment and expansion of mining in communities through the guise of public participatory processes.

Whereof late, communities have the right to say no to mining, yet do they really? Some people are placed in impossible choice, your money or your life. For instance, in one of the areas where I’ve worked, land defenders who receive death threats because of resisting mining take on these risks as they still have deep spiritual connections to their ancestors and grave sites. Traditional beliefs come up against the desire to extract at all costs.

In this situation, one of the herders that I spoke with described, high was making a terrible choice in taking what the mine had financially offered him to mine his ancestral land. “I would rather deal with the pain of exhuming my family members’ bodies, even though I would not want to, rather than placing the rest of the family at risk of being killed,” he said.

We know in these sites, so in one of the places where I’ve also collected testimony, environmental defenders have been killed or had their homes shot up in these areas. Such terrible choices are common. They are also reflected in public participatory processes that are similarly structured by coloniality, a language that stifles open communication and closes down speech or let me say, promotes empty speech.

Lacan differentiates between empty and full speech. “To simplify, empty speech is devoid of the subject’s knowledge, such as when they are being talked to rather than being heard. In contrast, full speech recognizes the subject’s knowledge concerning the symbolic order providing people with a set of sociosymbolic coordinates which tie them to the roles and other social contracts.

Therefore, closing down public participatory spaces is a form of empty speech as it consolidates the egoic nature of capitalism while disregarding other ways of being in the world, as well as, life-affirming social ties and meaningful roles in public participatory processes.”

Communities who cannot speak freely, remain unheard are not presented with hard life or death choices, your money or your life. The freedom to speak is constrained to a point that are artificial discourses and defended subjectivity is created where there is no movement to speak openly about the internal contradictions, the anxieties about choices being made as well.

Such a process does not support rhythms of change that are normal in relationships where there are true social bonds and high stakes for the future. I would go so far as saying that the public participatory processes are in support of a consensus for business as usual. The ability to say yes or no to large-scale development projects is dispossessed through insidious acts of closing down speech.

For instance, the discussions that I’ve witnessed often focus on the measurable impacts of mining, such as the relocation of communities to avoid exposure rather than what Skosana refers to as the intangible losses, such as the loss of ancestral connections to place and the meanings inscribed in homesteads, as well as, the relocation of graves.

As I’ve said, those who speak of Indigenous ways of knowing and being in the world often labeled as anti-development and backward, and consequently silenced as a threat. Participation is closed down through labeling as well as excluding specific topics, misrecognizing discussed issues, the exclusion in report writing, and coercion such as targeting and killings. To emphasize again, people are killed on a frequent basis.

It’s important to emphasize that these processes of coming into being through the others language, here the language of extractivism, can be traumatizing. By entering into the other’s language, something is always left behind that cannot be entirely spoken and doesn’t quite fit within the other’s language or desires.

I would argue that this loss can be insurmountable depending on what language is taken up, what is privileged, and what is not. The desire of the other can be brutal as fenceline communities resisting mining around the world know well. Taking on the language presented in public participatory processes guarantees irreparable alienation from one’s knowing and being in the world.

Coming to the other’s language leads to the clearing of Indigenous vegetation, displacing peoples from their ancestral land, and severing the psychological relationship to place, a traumatic process in itself. In summary, the closing down of civic spaces allows extractivism to create conditions where residents who might organize, communicate, and seek meaningful participation to oppose extractivism are deemed a threat being labeled a threat into an sanctioned silence, exclusion, and physical violence.

This contributes to the one ton approval of deleterious mining and logging projects and the murder of land and environmental defenders and other human rights violations. These subjugating acts, the closed down civic space may in turn create significant anguish among those who resist not by choice but because of their very locality.

For many around the world, it’s not climate change as some abstract weather occurrence that is distressing, but rather the grating up against colonial capitalism in one’s daily life. Our pain indicates to us that there’s something wrong with capitalism and the colonial world order that seeks to repress difference in being and world views.

Land and environmental defenders resisting mining often engage in these struggles. These struggles are rooted in communities’ intangible cultural and social fabric, including the connection to land, their traditions, and identity as people, as well as, desired futures and ancestral connections.

For instance, in Limpopo, “Dzomo la Mupo” meaning The Voice of Creation is a woman-led struggle focusing on restoring Indigenous plants and Indigenous seed sovereignty, while re-membering communities to place in cultural resurgence.

So for instance, these are traditional seeds that are used to create Indigenous or different types of beers that are used in rituals at the sacred sites. These are Indigenous tree nurseries that are used to re-establish buffer zones around sacred sites that still remain despite the logging and forestry in the region.

At the same, it’s another photo of a different family. So there’s different families in the area and members will have these tree nurseries basically to do restoration projects. And I can speak more to this afterwards. And then so there’s the restoration efforts and the re-membering efforts that create– well, I’ll speak about it later. But re-member communities to place in these sacred sites after the experience of severing.

And then there’s also considerable efforts placed on gaining recognition of these sacred sites. So in challenging the colonial limits that still largely guide the protection of cultural sites, one of these challenges is to make sacred sites no-go areas to retain their sanctity. Because in turn, also the protection of these sites often also through the language of coloniality or capitalism where sacred sites, if they’re protected or deemed tourist sites and seen then as a way to make money rather than restoring the sanctity in itself where some of these places should be no-go areas. Additionally, much efforts are being placed to recollect the mutual relationship with places through self-organized processes called ecomapping where Dzomo la Mupo members walk through areas following rivers, Indigenous forests, and recount what was there. Their names, meanings and value, as well as, how they structured their symbolic order. This is thanks to the work of Mphatheleni Makaulule, a social healer who has spearheaded the cultural resurgence in mutual accompaniment with elders, women, youth, and other Dzomo la Mupo members from different villages in Limpopo.

The process is a kind of recollective process that breaks from the illusion of a progressiveness myth of coloniality. Consequently, this process separates people from their ensnarement into this myth of extractive desires. This process brings on the fall of the other through encounter with its lack, or its been alienated when coming into being through the others language that ignites new possibilities.

Part of this process helps reconstitute indigenous ways of knowing and being in the world and imagine what can be resisted and co-created in South Africa’s postcolonial society, or perhaps more accurately speaking of the work is the creation of a world within many worlds as the supertasters say.

Nevertheless, an extractive industries are unrelenting and much effort is also directed at resisting new traditions through lobbying local leaders and actively attending public participatory processes. For instance, alternative spaces are created to map out the impacts of proposed industrial projects and the broader community to ensure that there are spaces where speech is not closed down.

So for instance, this photograph here is not only of this process of ecological mapping where people will walk sites to re-member and re-member themselves into the communities where they live. But these are also meetings that are created and sites of dialogue alongside public participatory processes that the mines organize to have projects approved.

So for instance, this kind of alternative mapping would be used then by legal organizations to feed into the process to ensure that these voices that are very often on the margins of the public participatory processes have an opportunity to speak.

Other kind of forms of accompaniment that take place also in relationship to media. So for instance, not only with legal organizations or issues brought to the fore, but also these proposed mining projects communities would often work with local media to bring the issues to the fore.

So those who are effectively resisting often do so for their well-being in their community and find strength hope and meaning in these solidarities.

As a community psychology practitioner, I recognize the importance of strategically witnessing and accompanying such struggles and would like to share a few personal examples. In my life, I’m approached by communities and others accompanying such struggles, such as legal organizations to document the impacts of mining.

My practice in the process of documentation and participation is always consensual. For example, I’ve worked with communities in South Africa’s Limpopo province witnessing their psychological relationship to place. And this significance of indigenous knowledge systems and solid psychological connections to place and identity despite historical land dispossessions that have taken place.

So for instance, in this process, I was invited to witness this process and to also walk alongside as these histories were documented to also feed these reports into the actual public participatory processes so there’s some kind of witnessing alongside with also community reports that were created from the ground up.

These processes of witnessing were also used in some of the legal cases or the legal arguments that were put forward to bring light to also how voices were being closed down for instance in the reports. What I do is not only witness the attachment to place, but also how in the process of public participation people are kept out of the process.

So for instance, through the securitization of public participatory processes. So the stopping people from attending these meetings, or the threats against environmental defenders, and so forth. So for instance, I have documented the violent process and psychological consequences of the dislocation from these ancestral lands to allow for the development of open-cast coal mines in South Africa province in Kwazulu-Natal as well.

So for instance, so this was in Limpopo. Another area where I’ve done work has been in Kwazulu-Natal, this is before on the left of a village, and afterwards very tangible kind of splintering of not any a splintering of the village but a complete wiping out of the community. And legal organizations as well as these kind of documentation process often bring to light. Very real processes of annihilation.

Some of the things that I do afterwards is recollect people’s experiences of these processes, but also what’s happening at the current moment in communities. So the very real experiences of environmental contamination. For instance, these photographs on the left is someone’s house, the infiltration and insidious infiltration of coal dust in one’s life.

And on the right-hand side, that’s a JoJo tank. So for instance, there’s no running water in some of these communities since mining has taken place and people rely on rainwater, then that’s stored. But also this rainwater is contaminated by coal dust. And I can go into this more but there’s reports that of ongoing process to document these and they’re are being used to also advocate for better conditions.

My process varies, but what is essential is the act of witnessing. Whereby, I listen to people’s experiences, particularly those that have been often silenced in this kind of process of public participation where there has or hasn’t been any. I usually begin by walking the land with them, listening to their stories, and recognizing the significance of these indigenous knowledges so that it can be better understood in the struggles and the depth of the impacts of mining have on people’s lives.

Often take photographs like these to show the relationship with place. For example, this image is a picture that’s been drawn by the indigenous beekeeper that I shared the testimony of before, mapping his connection between his identity, the relationship that he has with bees, and the ancestral obligations that he has as a healer.

The process centers on the psychological connection to place and may to some extent counter the pain and trauma of being forced into the language of others, seeks to witness what is often being alienated in the process. In addition, we discussed the process of adopting the language used in public participatory processes. So mapping out also what are people’s experiences of not being able to speak about what does their relationship to place mean.

Also, inquire about any threats encountered during such processes, whether directly meetings or perceived to be associated with broader process. I’ve come to recognize through these testimonies of others that the language and procedures used in these processes often prevent voices of communities from being heard must recognizing and silencing them. Incidents often involved extreme acts of silencing, such as acts of aggression and killings outside of meetings.

These situations are again examples of empty speech. To counter them, I pay close attention and document the engagement of this lack of subjectivity in the processes and interactions with mines. I formulate what is spoken into a report, which is then utilized by community through legal organizations representing them all through their own emergent processes.

As accompanying witness, my role is to give community members space to speak and find ways in which they can be application of voice, if any, that’s also a choice. There’s sometimes no need for any witnessing. For example, my report to act as evidence to support people’s resistance and challenge power structures, such as through advocacy.

Finally, the witnessing processes may empower community members to speak openly about the potential impacts of mining on their lives and future by recognizing the potential benefits as well as the intangible losses and compromises that would be made that can express the desire choice grounded in values sense of identity or vision for the future without the extreme pressures placed on themselves in these public participatory processes.

The end goal may be saying yes to mining, the end goal may be saying no. But the point here is that often in these processes the choice is closed on allowing person to speak freely and voiding closing down speech by asserting bias of opinion or desired outcome is crucial. As the act of listening and documenting brings to light, what is not permitted or misrepresented through these processes.

To ensure the contextual validity of my writing before the reports are released, I may gather with those who participated in the process. For example, the image above shows just one of the groups where we work through the kind of writing and we go line by line to see what can be said and what is unsayable.

So for instance, sometimes I’ll remove certain things as indigenous knowledge that cannot be in the public. And that’s also important process in itself as a researcher that not all knowledge is to be shared contrary I think to what we think is researchers.

I see consent for any information to be included in reports, where reports are offer recommendations. I also ask members who participate in the process to formulate their own recommendations– what do they want from the reports, what do they want in their own expertise.

In feeding back, I’ve been told as well that through this process, people often felt seen instead of the silence or exclusion that they felt before. [INAUDIBLE] fixed on reports use, even though I’m often, for instance, with legal organizations often asked to report on a particular thing. So for instance, the traumatic aspects that don’t recognize other experiences, but where I’ve given more freedom in the process.

So, my own documentation often just allow the reports to be in hand them over. So for instance, I was contacted once by a chief who said he was using the report as a formal process of land restitution. I believe such witnessing can amount to an act of full speech, which explains which forms the truth, such as it becomes established in the recognition of one person by another.

I believe that such approach is rooted in decolonial and psychoanalytic and analytic knowledge are critical to resisting capitalism and preventing further estrangement from the more than human world. As social scientists, we must be more active in documenting the psychopolitical threats to civic space and in strategizing together ways of resisting them and promoting other ways of being in the world, instead of perpetuating extractive dynamics, such as the traumatic process of land dispossession.

So I’ve described, a practices could be connected to community struggles and feed into processes that contest power. In an age where people are fighting for a viable future on this planet, gone is the luxury of being a neutral observer. In our reorientation, we can also learn from indigenous studies, decolonial theory, and radical psychologies to find new languages and ideas to name and contest colonial capitalism tactics, including the misuse and abuse of intimate lives.

Most importantly, we should be led by those resisting and asserting other ways of knowing and being in the world.

And that’s it. So, thank you for that. And instead of sharing my own context, which can be people can reach the Social Science Matrix and gain access to them. I’d like to share the website of Dzomo la Mupo if you’d like to find out more about their work. It’s very interesting. And the dollar goes a long way as well.

So maybe also just as I close, want to say thank you very much. And something that has stood out to me in the discussions that we had before, I had some time to kill and it was quite a privilege because I went to the art department just to go and walk around in it. And I saw a beautiful image by a first year MFA student– Jasmine Nyende

And I see this kind of theme everywhere, and she had a very nice vinyl piece of art called the Seeds of Resistance. And in her work, she wrote, the grief brought on the rain, the soil took it and made it fresh again.

And another image that stands out to me that we were speaking about earlier is as I was parking– I actually parked off campus, I can go to Moe’s and I looked at People’s Park and the kind of militarization around People’s Park and I know it’s a very contested issue on Berkeley campus. And then I think a lot of what we’re speaking about today about public participation and civic space is really important.

So also the new anti-poor policies that are emerging in California. And also the experiences of psychosis in the city. And how very often this connection with place is so important and often overlooked and what does that mean for subjectivity in the city. So, thanks very much, and I appreciate the time.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Yeah, thank you.

I really like the point that you brought up about pathologizing like humans, just in general, looking at– for example, mental health and looking at people in terms of what’s wrong with them. And instead maybe being, well, what are the external factors that are leading to this? I don’t think it’s widely talked about, but I have seen different videos and different academics address that.

What are the effects of capitalism on– for example, Gen Z? For example, it’s this idea of I don’t dream of labor. I dream of a life. I want to live and I want to do different things beyond just working a 9:00 to 5:00 job. Just working until I retire and hopefully I get up for one– like, all these different things, these factors which are needed in order to survive in this capitalistic society.

And then I was thinking about some of the stuff that you were saying about community and disengaging it from– it’s almost original intent. I grew up in Mexico. And one thing that I’ve noticed in the US, not so much in the Bay Area necessarily, but for example, undergraduate I went to UCLA and spaces– common spaces. You go to Westwood which is like the college town of UCLA, there’s really no place to gather.

There’s no bar– I mean, there’s bars, but the places are like disengaged. It’s really weird. There’s no real sense of community. And I’ve noticed in the US in general, common spaces don’t really feel that used, it doesn’t feel like people are– I don’t know how to explain it– like they’re not living in that place so much.

You go to a park in Mexico, for example, in Mexico City, people are doing Zumba at 6:00 PM, or people are eating tacos, or people are talking, people are socializing. Like, there’s a need for that space. And here sometimes maybe I’m making a real broad generalization, but sometimes it feels like it’s so disconnected.

People just don’t really engage with that. Or even something as simple as going to a job and all this and having a lunch break, maybe it doesn’t happen so much in academia. But let’s say a minimum wage job. You say, OK, I’m going to go take my lunch break. It’s disconnected. You don’t go take your lunch break– maybe you might, but typically, you might not take it with your coworkers.

Whereas in Mexico, lunch break is a big thing. You take an hour, you go out to your favorite taco stand, everyone talks. I don’t know how to say it, like there’s more engagement with people. And I’ve noticed here in the US and maybe in general with capitalistic societies, it’s there’s a little bit of a distance between humans, like us in general. I know, sorry that was so long winded, but yeah.

[GARRET BARNWELL] No, I really appreciate that comment. And as an outsider, I’m not an American. You can probably hear with my accent. [LAUGHS] Yeah, and I experienced that in some way as well. And Lacon speaks about the social bond. Being this really important part that of who we are.

And I think that’s what’s quite nice about the case of Dzomo la Mupo is the reconstitution of that social bond. How do we reconstitute it in these different spaces despite the kind of places where we find ourselves in, as people who aren’t from necessarily the place where we are now. And yeah, and what are these other spaces that we able to create and dream of?

And yeah, so I appreciate that comment. Very much. I had a thought but I’m going to compliment. I’ll come back to it. Appreciate that.

Yeah. And also that there’s an active kind of severing of that social bond as well that is very often quite insidious. So in public participatory processes, for instance, is there really the option of that the creation of that social bond is as I understand the social spaces that would be really to create some sense of social contract. What does it mean for me in the establishment of a new project in my community?

And that’s often closed down. So, yeah, really, really interesting. Cool.

[AUDIENCE MEMBER] Thank you very much, Dr. Barnwell. I have two questions for you.

Sure.

So, I’m curious to know just around the question of, what it means to heal based on the understandings of your interlocutors? And how your interlocutors have defined their sense of indigenous healing? And what it looks like for them to enact their own personal understandings of healing outside of the necessity to require recognition by these hegemonic institutions?

And we talk a lot about the effects of the language of the other. But when people are trying to heal on their own terms, what does the language of the self or the language of the greater look like in these conversations that you’ve had? And then the second is with regards to just a more– I guess methodological question around the use of psychoanalytic theory.

So, I’m curious to know– I know, I mean, obviously we’ve engaged a lot on your work and that you have a keen interest in psychoanalysis. And I’m curious to know based on your training and also the different dynamics that are going on within this place religious, economic, political, historical, what psychoanalysis offers in trying to understand these dynamics of historical trauma and recognition?

And if there are limitations, especially when you engage with these worldviews that are grounded in indigenous epistemologies or especially understandings of ancestral cosmology as well. So, yeah. What does psychoanalysis afford? And if you’ve seen its limitations, especially when you engage with contexts that– presumably outside of psychoanalytic thought? If at all, thanks.

[GARRET BARNWELL] Yeah, really good questions. I’ll start with loss when– first, so just in terms of methodology, there’s so much that’s actually challenging. So, I would say there’s often a use– it depends on what space and who you’re speaking to. So for instance, in the legal process, what’s hard is that you often have to speak a very clinical language.

So the screeners and stuff– so quantifying things to a certain extent. So with the work, with legal organizations would be using a screener because there needs to be in some way measured. Thank goodness that the impacts of land dispossession are very measurable because the key feature of post-traumatic stress that I didn’t speak about in this presentation is. It can be experienced directly, witnessed, or heard of. So that’s the criteria for it.

And it would be a horror, a kind of physical violence or horror. So with the experience of land dispossession, what we’re speaking about just that testimony alone meets the criteria for it. But in that sense, I have to speak the clinical language and make it translatable. There’s this issue of translatability for the court or for that really speaks to a very biomedical language.

So, and that’s– I think in some ways strategic. And maybe this speaks to the other question where there is also the use of language. It’s not a completely a separate way of relating to language, but there is also a very strategic use of speaking the language of public participation.

So, a lot of what is done is there’ll be– so for instance with like both these case in Kwazulu-Natal, the resisting of coal mining versus the first recollective process that we’ll be using the language of human rights, for instance. There will be teachings as such. And thank goodness to South Africa.

And you know, what interesting with the work in California on the historical impacts of colonialism here? There’s very progressive language around human rights, the intergenerationality of it as well so. And then we’re talking about a postcolonial setting as well, where you can’t– it’s not– what’s the word– atavistic, where the gaze of the colonial others to in some way crystallize the image in the past.

What we’re talking about is really progressive struggles, which are very integrated. And maybe I’m speaking quite abstractly, but there is also the melding of different kind of ways of being in the world, that the escapes that gaze, yet there’s a use of it as well at times and there’s a tension there.

What was so surprising for me as well was– like working with Dzomo la Mupo, for instance, is the discussions that happen behind the scenes, with Mphatheleni, for instance, she was teaching me about psychology, and teaching me about what’s in the forefront of thoughts in psychology, and this kind of place attachment and stuff like that. So, I think that there’s not so much of a dichotomous kind of knowledge, there’s actually a very productive space where thing.

And then there’s very serious limitations in psychoanalysis and psychology as well to describe different experiences. And I need more time to think about that but I think what is productive is using what we have. And the nice thing is in psychoanalysis, this knowledge that comes from these different spaces.

So, thinking about Frantz Fanon, thinking about liberation psychology that comes from Latin America , where there is very interesting people that are doing really important things where they are looking– they’re not– like, I’m looking at Lacan that there’s people that are doing very interesting things coming at psychoanalysis. Reading Lacan through Fanon.

So not approaching decolonial theory through Lacan, which– I don’t know– I’m speaking about abstractly. But I think it matters where you also speak from that locus of enunciation. And yeah, so who you cite.

Yeah, thank you. Thank you very much for the opportunity.

[MUSIC PLAYING]